Category: System Sensor

LineWave Full-Range Line Array Loudspeaker Signaling & Notification Speaker Leading Voice Intelligibility for Spaces Max SPL @ 1 Meter Rated for Indoor or Outdoor Universal Mounting Interface 70V, & 100V or 4/8/16 Durable Environmental Resistant (90243A-801): Rating Response Angle Range UL1480, ULC Up to 200W continuous 250Hz 15kHz (nominal) 103.1dB @ 2.83V/1m 187 (Horiz.) x 10 (Vert.) @ -9dB 14.7lbs 46.5 x 4.9 W x 2.9 D – 60 with the latest technology in line array systems, the HyperSpike LineWave is to produce clear and authoritative voice and powerful tones never before possible reverberant environments. The beam forming of the LineWave speaker allows even across the listening plane while focusing the pattern away from surfaces that cause reflections. This technology is essential for optimum levels of speech intelligibility reverberant spaces. The result is clear and direct sound that ensures critical messages heard and understood. UL1480 20W LINEARRAY SPKR,BLACK UL1480 40W LINEARRAY SPKR BLACK UL1480 80W LINEARRAY SPKR BLACK UL1480 160W LINEARRAY SPKR BLACK UL1480 20W LINEARRAY SPKR,RED UL1480 40W LINEARRAY SPKR RED UL1480 80W LINEARRAY SPKR RED UL1480 160W LINEARRAY SPKR RED UL1480 20W LINEARRAY SPKR WHITE UL1480 40W LINEARRAY SPKR WHITE UL1480 80W LINEARRAY SPKR WHITE UL1480 160W LINEARRAY SPKR WHITE UL1480 20W LINEARRAY SPKR GREY UL1480 40W LINEARRAY SPKR GREY UL1480 80W LINEARRAY SPKR GREY UL1480 160W LINEARRAY SPKR GREY and Engineer Specifications: see Models and Technical Specifications to fill in the blanks for specific speaker selection. paging and tone signaling loudspeaker shall be Ultra Electronics Model _____. Unit shall be UL 1480 Listed, weather resistant constructed of powder coated aluminum and steel. The loudspeaker shall be able to operate within any ambient temperature ranging from -20 to 60 The speaker shall have a sensitivity of _____ when measured at 1m (AVG 250-15,000Hz), a horizontal beam width of 187 (AVG 1kHz to 4kHz). The transducer coils shall have a nominal 8 ohm impedance. When a minimum of four transformer power settings shall be selectable for each speaker, and it shall operate on 25V, 70V, or distributed audio systems. Transformers shall contain an in-line capacitor to allow DC supervision of wiring. Frequency shall be 250Hz-15kHz. Dimensions shall be _____ x 4.9 x 2.9 Rev D Electronics USSI 4868 East Park 30 Drive Columbia City, IN 46725-8861 1 of 6 260-248-3666 Full-Range Line Array Loudspeaker Specifications: Mode of Speakers in Array Power Draw: 8 and 4 Models SPL @ 1m, 18V Direct Drive SPL @ 1m Range @ 80dB, SPL @ 10 ft, 18V Direct Drive SPL @ 3m, 18V Direct Drive Sensitivity (2.83Vrms/1m) Impedance Coverage -9dB 1kHz-4kHz) Response (+/- 6dB) Input Signal Processing Coverage -9dB 1kHz-4kHz) Input Voltage: 8 and 4 Models Material Material Connection Protection Dimensions, HxWxD (in) Weight (lbs) Range, Column Loudspeaker Loudspeaker with Optional Line

and Maintenance Manual LineWave DATE: 12/16/2019 ISSUE DATE RELATED TO MOUNTING AND WIRING DIAGRAM ONLY. TO ISSUE DATE WILL AFFECT RELATED LABELS – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – WARNING – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – RE-EXPORT, AND TRANSFER OF THIS TECHNICAL DATA IS REGULATED BY US EXPORT ADMINISTRATION AND MAY BE SUBJECT TO LICENSING REQUIREMENTS FROM THE BUREAU OF INDUSTRY AND SECURITY. – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – LineWave Installation and Maintenance Manual Introduction ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….1 Part Number Breakdown: ………………………………………………………………………………………2 LineWave Specifications ……………………………………………………………………………………….3 Line Wave UL Directional Characteristics ………………………………………………………………..4 LineWave Transformer Specifications …………………………………………………………………….4 Installation ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..4 4 8 and 16 System Overview ………………………………………………………………………..5 Distributed Audio System Overview ………………………………………………………………………..5 25V/70V/100V Transformer Recommended Hole Locations and Alignment ……………….6 72542B-80X Circuit Breaker Reset …………………………………………………………………………7 Wall Mounting ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..8 72544B-802 Wall Mounting Kit Installation:……………………………………………………………9 72544B-801 Wall Mounting Kit Installation:…………………………………………………………. 10 Pole Mounting …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 15 25V/70V/100V Power and SPL Specifications ……………………………………………………………… 17 72575B-801 – Power Draw and Output SPL ………………………………………………………….. 17 72575B-801 Transformer Wiring Guide Used for 90243A-801 and 90243A-802 ………. 18 72542B-801 – Power Draw and Output SPL ………………………………………………………….. 19 72542B-801 Transformer Wiring Guide Used for 90243A-803 ………………………………. 19 72542B-802 – Power Draw and Output SPL ………………………………………………………….. 20 72542B-802 Transformer Wiring Guide Used for 90243A-804 ………………………………. 20 Warranty ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 21 Ultra Electronics USSI, Columbia City, IN 46725 USA Rev C LineWave Installation and Maintenance Manual EXCEEDING THE MAXIMUM RATINGS OF THE SPEAKER WILL CAUSE DISTORTION AND MAY CAUSE PERMANENT DAMAGE TO THE SPEAKER ITS INTERNAL COMPONENTS. MISE EN GARDE: TOUT D DES VALEURS NOMINALES MAXIMALES HAUT-PARLEUR ENTRA UNE DISTORSION EXCESSIVE ET PEUT DES DOMMAGES IRR SUR LE HAUT-PARLEUR ET SES INTERNES. EXPLOSION HAZARD. DO NOT DISCONNECT THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF OR UNLESS THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON- AVERTISSEMENT : RISQUE D NE D PAS L DE L MIS HORS TENSION OU SAUF SI LA ZONE EST CONNUE POUR NON DANGEREUSE.

TCPA-10 Loudspeaker I, Division 2 (C1D2) S541/CSA C22.2 No. 205 & 213 7320-2206:0501 Features Industry leading voice intelligibility PA = Excellent 139 dB Max SPL @ 1M Rated for Indoor or Outdoor Universal Mounting Interface Built-in 25/70/100V transformer or Ohm configurable Durable rugged construction Extremely efficient producing 129 SPL peak at 1M with 4W of power HyperSpike TCPA-10 is engineered to cut through high ambient indoor outdoor environments with clear and authoritative audio signals and voice The five power settings have been designed to interface with standard amplification, and 90 wide acoustic beam makes it an ideal tool for indoor and outdoor areas. optional dual mount system creates a 180 wide beam that is ideal for perimeter use. The TCPA-10 best-in-class acoustic coverage allows fewer units to be installed in large indoor and outdoor areas, lowering and long-term maintenance costs while improving intelligibility and voice quality and intelligibility, combined with sharp and high tone capability, make it the right choice for ensuring messages are heard understood. through the noise… Specifications I Division 2 (A, B, C and D) S541/CSA 22.2 No. 205 & 213 7320-2206:0501 RoHS Rating to 90W continuous (4 ohm Response – 15kHz (nominal) – 4kHz (general signaling) Numbers: HYPERSPIKE TCPA-10 UL 1480 C1D2 – RED HYPERSPIKE TCPA-10 UL 1480 C1D2 – GRAY HYPERSPIKE TCPA-10 UL 1480 C1D2 – BLACK HYPERSPIKE TCPA-10 UL 1480 C1D2 – WHITE HYPERSPIKE TCPA-10 UL1480 C1D2 4OHM-RED @1W/1m (Avg 400Hz-4kHz) HYPERSPIKE TCPA-10 UL1480 C1D2 4OHM-GRY Angle (-3dB), 90 (-6dB) HYPERSPIKE TCPA-10 UL1480 C1D2 4OHM-BLK x 10.1 x 11.3 D Protection to NEMA 3R standards Temp – 60 Range non-condensing (01) (04) (05) (06) HYPERSPIKE TCPA-10 UL1480 C1D2 4OHM-WHT HYPERSPIKE TCPA-10 UL1480 C1D2 8OHM-RED HYPERSPIKE TCPA-10 UL1480 C1D2 8OHM-GRY HYPERSPIKE TCPA-10 UL1480 C1D2 8OHM-BLK HYPERSPIKE TCPA-10 UL1480 C1D2 8OHM-WHT WALL/POLE MOUNT BRACKET DUAL UNIT MOUNTING ADAPTER & Engineering Specifications paging and tone signaling loudspeaker shall be Ultra Electronics Model _____ (see Model numbers above). Unit be UL1480-F Listed and Class I Division 2 certified, weather resistant and constructed of rugged 5VA rated, UV ABS plastic. The loudspeaker shall be able to operate within any ambient temperature environment ranging -40 to 60 The speaker shall have a sensitivity of 112dB when measured at 1m (AVG 400-4,000Hz) and a of 90 (-6dB at 1kHz). Model shall be a non-re-entrant compression loaded transducer with a 3 polymide and power handling of 45W continuous. The coil shall be a nominal 8 ohm impedance and ferro-fluid surround the coil to optimize heat dissipation. When applicable, transformer power settings shall be selectable include 100V: 45W, 32W, 24W, 16W, 8W; 70V: 24W, 16W, 12W, 8W, 4W; 25V: 3W, 2W, 1.5W, 1W, 0.5W. Speaker shall in-line capacitor to allow DC supervision of wiring and be supplied with three feet of conduit with flying leads. response shall be 375Hz 15kHz. Dimensions shall be 10.1 x 10.1 x 11.3 Output Ratings Voltage SPL @ 1m) SPL @1m) SPL @ 10 ft) Range @ 80dB) Ohm Ohm UL Standard SPL Measurement ( @ 25V @

AND MOUNTING MANUAL TCPA-10 NO.: xxxxxxxxx Ultra Electronics USSI Columbia City, IN 46725 USA REV A TCPA-10 Installation and Mounting Manual manual contains information that is proprietary to Ultra Electronics USSI. It is solely for the education and use of parties operating and maintaining the described herein. DATE: 10/16/2017 ISSUE DATE RELATED TO MOUNTING AND WIRING DIAGRAM ONLY. TO ISSUE DATE WILL AFFECT RELATED LABELS. – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – WARNING – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – RE-EXPORT, AND TRANSFER OF THIS TECHNICAL DATA IS REGULATED BY US EXPORT ADMINISTRATION AND MAY BE SUBJECT TO LICENSING REQUIREMENTS FROM THE BUREAU OF INDUSTRY AND SECURITY. – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – Rev C Ultra Electronics USSI, Columbia City, IN 46725 USA TCPA-10 Installation and Mounting Manual TCPA-10 family consists of the TCPA-10 4 Ohm, TCPA-10 8 Ohm, and the TCPA-10 Audio. The TCPA-10 4 Ohm and TCPA-10 8 Ohm are Direct Drive systems, useful for address applications. The TCPA-10 Distributed Audio system is meant for use with fire systems. TCPA-10 series speaker systems are designed for indoor or outdoor wet applications. The produces 90 degrees of acoustic energy and excels in high ambient noise environments. has an operating temperature range of -40 to 60 TCPA-10 Direct Drive Speaker TCPA-10 can be configured as an 8 ohm or 4 ohm nominal speaker. Uncertified versions UL 1480 and Class I Division 2, Group A, B, C and D certified Code: Black Gray Red White 8 Ohm 4 Ohm Direct Drive Specifications: Voltage SPL SPL dB SPL @ 1m) @ 1m) @ 10ft) Range @ 80dB) Ohm Ohm UL Standard SPL Measurement Response: 400 Hz 4000 Hz See Figure 1 9 lb 10.1 H X 10.1 W X 11.3 L for Outdoor Use (Adapt l’utilisation externe) Rev C 1 Ultra Electronics USSI, Columbia City, IN 46725 USA TCPA-10 Installation and Mounting Manual TCPA-10 Distributed Audio Speaker TCPA-10 Distributed Audio speaker has five field-selectable power taps that run off of V, 70 V, and 100 VRMS audio systems. The taps can easily be set by turning a slotted switch. The speaker has an integrated DC blocking capacitor that allows the fire control panel to conduct circuit supervision. Uncertified versions UL 1480 and Class I Division 2, Group A, B, C and D certified Code: Black Gray Red White Distributed Audio Specifications: Voltage SPL SPL dB SPL @ 1 m) @ 1 m) @ 10 ft) Range @ 80 dB) UL Standard SPL Measurement Response: 400 Hz

TCPA-10 Pole Mount Bands 72377B-801 The HyperSpike Wall Mount Bracket may be mounted to a pole using the two included bands. The bands are compatible with poles with diameters from 3.25 to 6.0 inches. Feed one end of one band through one upper slot and back through the other upper slot. the other band through the lower slots in the same way. Wrap the bands around the pole and tighten the worm gears until secured as shown in the below. Do not exceed 30 in-lbs. 1: Tightening the pole mount bands Electronics USSI East Park 30 Drive City, IN 46725 USA Ultra Electronics USSI, Columbia City, IN 46725 USA REV A TCPA-10 Ceiling Mount Kit 72377B-802 To hang a TCPA-10 system from the ceiling, use an optional Ceiling Mount Bracket. Attach bracket to the TCPA-10 or two TCPA-10s with the dual mount plate using three bolts. The Ceiling Mount Bracket accepts a male NPT male threaded conduit. Feed the TCPA-10 through the Hanging Mount Bracket and through the conduit. Thread the conduit into the top of the Ceiling Mount Bracket and tighten the upper Phillips head as shown in the Figure below. 1: Attaching Ceiling Mount Bracket to threaded conduit Electronics USSI East Park 30 Drive City, IN 46725 USA Ultra Electronics USSI, Columbia City, IN 46725 USA REV A

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and 1151A Low Profile Plug-in Smoke Detectors SENSOR Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Temperature Range: inches (43 mm) inches (102 mm) oz (102 g) to 60(cid:176) C (14(cid:176) to 140(cid:176) F) Do not install in locations where normal ambient temperature range extends 0(cid:176) to 49(cid:176) C (32(cid:176) to 120(cid:176) F) Humidity Range: Alarm: to 93% Relative Humidity, Noncondensing by momentary power interruption Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407, Manual for System Smoke Detectors, which detailed information on detector spacing, place- zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies of manual are available at no charge from System Sensor. installation in Canada refer to CAN/ULC-S524, Stan- for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems, and CEC 1, Sec. 32.) This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. The detector used with this base must be and maintained regularly following NFPA 72 require- The detector used with this base should be cleaned least once a year. Description 1151 and 1151A ionization detectors use state-of- sensing chambers. These detectors are designed to open area protection, and to be used with compat- UL-listed control panels only. The capability of plug- these detectors into a variety of special bases makes more versatile than equivalent direct-wired models. LEDs on each detector light to provide a local 360(cid:176) vis- alarm indication. Remote LED annunciator capability available as an optional accessory. These detectors also the latching alarm feature. The alarm can be reset by a momentary power interruption. For testing, these have an internal magnetically activated reed of 30 ft. on a smooth ceiling as per NFPA 72. conditions or response requirements vary, other may apply. Selection and Wiring Guide to the installation instructions for the plug-in detector for wiring instructions. System Sensor has available a of detector bases for this smoke detector, including applications with and without relays and/or current resistors, 4-wire and 120 VAC applications. (Note: 120 VAC detector base is not available in Canada.) bases are provided with screw terminals for power, remote annunciator connections, and relay contact if applicable. The electrical ratings for each combination are also included in the base in- instructions. Manuals Online! – I56-546-03 All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, and regulations. Verify that all detector bases are installed, that the circuits have been tested, and that wiring is correct. power from initiating device circuits before install- detectors. Install Detectors: Place the detector into the detector base. Rotate the detector clockwise until the detector drops place. Continue rotating the detector clockwise to lock it in Tamper-Resistance: The detector bases include a feature when activated, prevents removal of the detector the use of a tool. See the installation instruction of the detector base for details in using this fea- After all detectors have been installed, apply power to control unit. Test the detector as described under TESTING. Reset the detector at the system control panel. Notify the proper authorities that the system is in opera- covers are an effective way to limit the entry of dust smoke detector sensing chambers. However, they may completely prevent airborne dust particles from enter- the detector. Therefore, System Sensor recommends the of detectors before beginning construction or other producing activity. sure to remove dust covers from any sensors that were in place during construction as part of returning the to service. must be tested after installation and following pe- maintenance. However, before testing, notify the authorities that the smoke detector system is under-

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Direct Wire Ionization Detector SENSOR Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 inches (140 mm) (including adapter bracket): 1.7 inches (43 mm) Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Alarm: Ratings Voltage: oz. (150 g) to 120(cid:176) F (0(cid:176) to 50(cid:176) C) to 93% Relative Humidity, Noncondensing by momentary power interruption Ripple Voltage: Capacitance: Standby Current: Ratings: Voltage: Time: Time: or 24 VDC 8.5 VDC 35 VDC of nominal voltage (peak to peak) m F maximum m A maximum VDC minimum at 10 mA. VDC minimum at 100 mA. current must be limited to 100 mA maximum by the panel. The optional RA400Z Remote Annunciator within the specified detector alarm currents.) VDC minimum seconds maximum seconds maximum (after 60 second reset) Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407- Guide for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which detailed information on detector spacing, place- zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies of manual are available at no charge from System Sensor. This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. This sensor must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. This sensor be cleaned at least once a year. Description 1100 is a 2-wire ionization smoke detector that uses a sensing chamber. This detector is designed provide open area protection and to be used with com- UL-listed, 2-wire panels only. of these detectors is simplified by the use of an bracket and a plug-in screw terminal block that can prewired to the system, allowing the detector to be eas- installed or removed for cleaning. The detector sensi- can be tested in place using the MOD400R Test LED on the detector provides a local visual indication of detector status. If power is applied to the detector, and is functioning normally in standby, the status LED blinks five seconds. The LED also latches on in alarm. 1100 features a visual indication that maintenance is if the sensing chamber drifts out of its sensitivity the LED ceases to blink. detector also includes an output that allows an op- RA400Z Remote Annunciator to be connected. Manuals Online! – 1. Surface mounting of 1100 detector on and 4-inch octagonal box: 2. Model 1100 detector mounting bracket: RESISTANT TAB(cid:13) OFF SMALL TAB TO (cid:13) TAMPER-RESIST(cid:13) ARROWS 1100 detector is supplied with a mounting bracket that the detector to be mounted: To a single gang box, or Directly to a 3-1/2 inch or 4 inch octagonal box, or To a 4 inch square electrical box by using a plaster ring. Installation Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with the Na- Electrical Code, applicable local codes, and any spe- requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction. wire gauges should be used. The conductors used to smoke detectors to control panels and accessory should be color-coded to reduce the likelihood of errors. Improper connections can prevent a system responding properly in the event of a fire. screw terminal block accepts 14 22 gauge wire. For system performance, all wiring should be installed in grounded conduit. Do not mix fire system wiring the same conduit as any other electrical wiring. Twisted may be used to provide additional protection against interference. detectors and alarm system control panels have for allowable loop resistance. Consult the panel specifications for the total loop resistance al- for the control panel being used before wiring detec- loops. connections are made by stripping about 1/4 inch of from the end of the feed wire, inserting the wire the appropriate terminal, and tightening the screw to the wire in place. Sensor smoke detectors are marked with a compat- identifier located as the last digit of a five digit code on

1012B/2012B Smoke Detector Built-in Relay and Horn Division of Pittway Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, IL 60174 (736-7672), Fax 630-377-6495 Available Ionization Detector Photoelectronic Detector 12 VDC operation, 4-wire Built-in 85dB electronic horn Built-in relay can be connected to lights, bells, horns, annunciator, or control panel Interconnectable up to 12 units Visual alarm and power indicator Ceiling white color Built-in 8 second delay on relay output Built-in test switch Twist-on mounting bracket with tamper option for easy Improved chamber design for greater stability Same housing design for both ion and photo models 3-year warranty attractive, and easy to install, System Sensor and 2012B detectors are designed to respond to a range of fires while providing maximum stability. units in this series feature low-voltage wiring, you to choose the detector that best suits your h 5.5 dia. mm h 140 mm dia.) oz. (150 grams) to 93% RH, noncondensing Detector Spacing: smooth ceilings (as defined in NFPA 72), spacing of feet (900 sq. ft.) may be used as a guideline. Other may be used depending on ceiling height, high movements, and other conditions or response Range: Ratings Voltage: Contact Rating: Current: Current: Range: VDC (nominal) Form A, .5 A @ 30 VDC m A maximum average mA maximum average 12 VDC to 120(cid:176) F (0(cid:176) to 50(cid:176) C) System Sensor 8/96 document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. Description Sensor 1012B ionization and 2012B photoelectronic are designed primarily for applications where Class 2 wiring may be used. These detectors self-resetting and offer an 85dB alarm horn. An push button provides a test of the detectors function. Up to 12 units can be interconnected so if one detector alarms, all detectors alarm. A normally auxiliary alarm relay is available for controlling functions. A visible LED indicator flashes once 40 seconds in standby and rapidly in alarm when smoke. The detectors offer low-voltage operation a tamper-proof feature. Screw terminals and a bracket are provided for easy installation. RED (+) A77-727-O1(cid:13) BLACK POWER(cid:13) 12OVAC GRAY ( BLACK UP TO(cid:13) DETECTORS ( INPUT ( INPUT ( INPUT ( INPUT ( INPUT ( INPUT ALARM RELAY INTERCONNECT UP TO 12 DETECTORS UNITS(cid:13) UNITS(cid:13) POWER BUS LENGTH IN FEET. GIVEN NUMBER OF(cid:13) (MAXIMUM PER BUS) AND WIRE SIZE. UNIT(cid:13) UNITS(cid:13) UNITS(cid:13) INTERCONNECT BUS LENGTH:(cid:13) FT. NO. 18AWG OR LARGER DUAL CONDUCTOR CABLE.(cid:13) WIRING MUST CONFORM TO LOCAL ELECTRICAL CODES.(cid:13) CONTACTS RATING: 0.5A 30VDC; 0.5A 30VAC(cid:13) UNITS(cid:13) UNITS(cid:13) UNITS(cid:13) UNITS(cid:13) UNITS(cid:13) UNITS(cid:13) UNITS(cid:13) Wiring Diagram Information No. smoke detector with relay, 12 VDC, station

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Ionization and 2012 Photoelectronic Detectors Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Detector Description detectors are designed to provide early warning of developing fires a reasonable cost. They monitor the air and can sense smoke and can precious minutes for you and your family to escape before a fire Early warning fire detection is best achieved by the installation of detection equipment in all rooms and areas of the household. 1012 is a low-voltage ionization-type smoke detector. Model 2012 is low-voltage photoelectronic-type smoke detector. The detector is de- for open area protection in a residential building. Each detector has built-in relay which may be used to activate auxiliary devices such as horns, and door closers. The relay contacts automatically close eight seconds after the detector goes into alarm, and automatically resets five (5) seconds after the alarm stops. In addition, these can be interconnected, within one household, for a system of up twelve (12) smoke detectors per household. This way, when one smoke sounds its alarm horn, it will cause all of the other connected detectors within the household to sound their alarm horns as well. in Australia Only installation temperature range for Australia is 5(cid:176) to 45(cid:176) C and has tested per the Australian Standard. Ignore installation temperatures for all other applications when installing detectors in Australia. should be installed by qualified technicians. Installation of a connected power supply unit must be performed by qualified electri- only. Ignore the power requirements in “Smoke Detector Require- listed below, as these apply to installation in the USA. The primary should be provided by a power limited, supervised, panel type sys- A rechargeable battery is required as a backup to the external power in case of a mains failure. In standby operation, the power limited battery (fully charged) must be capable of providing uninter- power for at least 7 days to the system and all smoke alarms before panel gives the required low-battery signal. When the low-battery sig- is given, the battery should be capable of providing power for another days, after which the backup battery should have enough energy left to a 4-minute alarm signal to be given by all connected smoke alarms. Detector Power Requirements (USA) smoke detector will not work without power. This smoke detector is U.L. listed to be powered by System Sensor Part No. A77-727-01 (12- DC power supply). The A77-727-01 must be permanently connected the building 120-volt AC electrical supply per code. The A77-727-01 not power the smoke detector if the AC power is cut off for any rea- The 12-volt DC power supply will only power the detector when 120- AC power is present is not a power back-up source. input rating to the detector is 12VDC @ 0.02 amps. Input power to A77-727-01 power supply must be from a 24-hour 120V AC 60HZ cir- which cannot be turned off by a switch. Power supply and detector must conform to the electrical codes in your area and Ar- 760 of the National Electrical Code. It is recommended that wiring performed by a licensed electrician. Detector Limitations This smoke detector is designed for residential use only. System does not advise the use of this detector in multiple detector sys- monitored by a central control. This detector is self-restoring and not lock into an alarm condition. Smoke detectors will not sense a fire if the smoke does not reach sensor. In order for a smoke detector to sense smoke, it must be in the immediate vicinity of the fire. In addition, smoke from in chimneys, in walls, on roofs, in remote parts of the building, or another level from where the smoke detector is located, may not the smoke detector quickly enough for occupants to escape un- For this reason, installer shall install smoke detectors on level, in every sleeping area, and in every bedroom of the Smoke detectors may not be heard. The alarm horn in this smoke de- meets or exceeds current Underwriter Laboratories standards. if the smoke detector is not located in the same room as the or if it is blocked by a closed door or normal noise, the horn may not be heard. In addition, sound slee

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Low Profile Ionization Smoke Detectors 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 1.7 inches (43 mm) 4.0 inches (102 mm) 3.6 oz (102 g) Temperature Range: to 60 (14 to 140 NOTE: Do not install in locations where normal ambient temperature range extends beyond 0 to 49 (32 to 120 Humidity Range: 10% to 93% Relative Humidity, Noncondensing Alarm: Reset by momentary power interruption Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual A05- Applications Guide for System Smoke Detectors, provides detailed information on detector spacing, zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies this manual are available from System Sensor. Selection and Wiring Guide to the installation instructions for the plug-in detector for wiring instructions. System Sensor has available a of detector bases for this smoke detector, including applications with and without relays and/or current resistors, 4-wire and 120 VAC applications. This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. The detector used with this base must be and maintained regularly following NFPA 72 require- The detector used with this base should be cleaned least once a year. Description 1151 ionization detector uses state-of-the-art sens- chambers. This detector is designed to provide open protection, and to be used with compatible UL-listed panels only. The capability of plugging this detector a variety of special bases makes it more versatile than direct-wired models. LEDs on each detector light to provide a local 360 vis- alarm indication. Remote LED annunciator capability available as an optional accessory. This detector also has latching alarm feature. The alarm can be reset only by momentary power interruption. For testing, this detector an internal magnetically activated reed switch. of 30 ft. on a smooth ceiling as per NFPA 72. conditions or response requirements vary, other may apply. bases are provided with screw terminals for power, remote annunciator connections, and relay contact if applicable. The electrical ratings for each combination are also included in the base instructions. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, and regulations. Verify that all detector bases are installed, that the circuits have been tested, and that wiring is correct. power from initiating device circuits before install- detectors. Install Detectors: a. Place the detector into the detector base. b. Rotate the detector clockwise until the detector drops place. c. Continue rotating the detector clockwise to lock it in Tamper-Resistance: The detector bases include a feature when activated, prevents removal of the detector the use of a tool. See the installation instruc- manual of the detector base for details in using this 1 I56-546-08R After all detectors have been installed, apply power to control unit. Test the detector as described under TESTING. Reset the detector at the system control panel. Notify the proper authorities that the system is in opera- 2. Both LEDs should latch on within 30 seconds, indicating an alarm and annunciating the panel. Calibrated Sensitivity Test (MOD400R) Use the MOD400R Test Module with a digital or ana- voltmeter to test calibrated detector sensitivity as in the test module manual. covers are an effective way to limit the entry of dust smoke detector sensing chambers. However, they may completely prevent airborne dust particle

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Intelligent Ionization with Communications Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Voltage Range: Avg. Standby Current: Alarm Current (LED on): Humidity Range: Temperature Range: to 32 VDC @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 sec. with LED blink enabled) mA @ 24 VDC to 93% Relative Humidity, noncondensing to 49 (32 to 120 inches (43 mm) installed in B210LP Base inches (155 mm) installed in B210LP Base inches (104 mm) installed in B501 Base oz. (102 g) Installing read the system wiring and installation manual, I56- This manual includes detailed information on sensor placement, zoning, and special applications. Cop- of this manual are available from System Sensor. Description Model 1251 intelligent ionization sensor uses a state- sensing chamber. This sensor is designed to pro- open area protection and is intended for use with control panels only. Guide to the installation instructions for the plug-in base be- used. As indicated in Figure 1, terminals for power, and the optional RA400Z Remote Annunciator are in the base. Base Models B210LP (shown in Figure and B501 are electrically identical. All wiring must conform to all applicable codes, and regulations. Verify that all sensor bases are installed and that of the wiring is correct at each base. LEDs on each sensor light to provide a local, visible indication. The LEDs can be latched on by code from the control panel for an alarm indication. LEDs can also be unlatched to the normal condition by command. Remote LED annunciator capability is also as an optional accessory (RA400Z). loop power before installing sensors. Sensor Installation Set the sensor to the desired address and record that on the label attached to the base. Insert the sensor into the base and rotate it clockwise it drops into place. Continue to rotate the sensor until it locks into the covers are an effective way to limit the entry of dust smoke detector sensing chambers. However, they may completely prevent airborne dust particles from enter- the detector. Therefore, System Sensor recommends the of detectors before beginning construction or other producing activity. sure to remove dust covers from any sensors that were in place during construction as part of returning the to service. Manuals Online! – ANNUNCIATOR : Do not loop wire under terminal 1 or 2. wire run to provide supervision of connections . 1: _J mw a.. a.. oa: wz ________________ ~ Q_PJIQN_A!::_ __ shown in Figure 2. Both LEDs should latch on within 30 seconds, indicat- an alarm and annunciating the panel. Calibrated Sensitivity Test (MOD400R) Use the MOD400R Test Module with a digital or analog to test calibrated detector sensitivity as de- in the test module manual. Aerosol Generator in accordance with NFPA 72. Gemini Model 501 aerosol generator can be used to the sensor. Set the generator to represent 4%/ft to obscuration, following the instructions in the gen- manual. Use a bowl shaped applicator to apply to the sensor. It should alarm after 30 seconds. Tamper-Resistance Model 1251 includes a tamper-resistant capability that its removal from the bracket without the use of tool. Refer to the base manual for details on making of this capability. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the See Figure 2. Test the sensor by positioning a test mag- (M02-24) against the sensor plastic just to the left of The alarm level should be recognized at the panel the LED controlled by communication command the panel. Reset the sensor by communication command from the must be tested after installation and following maintenance. However, before testing, notify the

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Intelligent Ionization with Communications Division of Pittway Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Voltage Range: Avg. Standby Current: Alarm Current (LED on): Humidity Range: Temperature Range: to 32 VDC @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 sec. with LED blink enabled) mA @ 24 VDC to 93% Relative Humidity, noncondensing to 49 (32 to 120 inches (43 mm) installed in B210LP Base inches (155 mm) installed in B210LP Base inches (104 mm) installed in B501 Base oz. (102 g) loop power before installing sensors. Sensor Installation Set the sensor to the desired address and record that on the label attached to the base. Insert the sensor into the base and rotate it clockwise it drops into place. Continue to rotate the sensor until it locks into the covers are an effective way to limit the entry of dust smoke detector sensing chambers. However, they may completely prevent airborne dust particles from enter- the detector. Therefore, System Sensor recommends the of detectors before beginning construction or other producing activity. sure to remove dust covers from any sensors that were in place during construction as part of returning the to service. Installing read the system wiring and installation manual, I56- This manual includes detailed information on sensor placement, zoning, and special applications. of this manual are available from System Sensor. Description 1251 intelligent ionization sensor uses a state-of-the- sensing chamber. These sensors are designed to provide area protection and are intended for use with com- control panels only. LEDs on each sensor light to provide a local, visible indication. The LEDs can be latched on by code from the control panel for an alarm indication. LEDs can also be unlatched to the normal condition by command. Remote LED annunciator capability is also as an optional accessory (RA400Z). Guide to the installation instructions for the plug-in base used. As indicated in Figure 1, terminals for power, and the optional RA400Z Remote Annunciator are in the base. Base Models B210LP (shown in Figure and B501 are electrically identical. All wiring must conform to all applicable codes, and regulations. Verify that all sensor bases are installed and that of the wiring is correct at each base. 1: ANNUNCIATOR Do not loop wire under terminal 1 or 2. wire run to provide supervision of connections. A OPTIONAL WIRING Tamper-Resistance 1251 includes a tamper-resistant capability that their removal from the bracket without the use a tool. Refer to the base manual for details on making of this capability. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the See Figure 2. Test the sensor by positioning a test mag- against the sensor plastic just to the left of LED1. alarm level should be recognized at the panel and LED controlled by communication command from panel. Reset the sensor by communication command from the must be tested after installation and following maintenance. However, before testing, notify the authorities that the smoke detector system is under- maintenance and the system will be temporarily out service. Disable the zone or system undergoing mainte- to prevent unwanted alarms. addition, check to ensure that the LEDs blink. If they do power has been lost to the detector (check the wiring), it is defective (return it for repair). the sensors as follows: Test Magnet (p/n M02-04-01 or M02-09-00) Test the sensor by positioning the optional test mag- against the sensor plastic just to the left of LED1, shown in Figure 2. Both LEDs should latch on within 30 seconds, indi- an alarm and annunciating the panel. Aerosol Generator in accordance with NFPA 72. Gemini Model 501 aerosol generator can be used test the sens

Product Ionization Smoke Detector and Engineering Specifications ionization smoke detector shall be a System Sensor model number 1251B. Smoke shall be an addressable intelligent ionization smoke detector and shall connect with two to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit (SLC). The detectors shall incorporate a single source, dual chamber design to respond quickly and dependably to a broad range fires and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the level of smoke density. detectors shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using rotary switches. of the possibility of installation error, systems that use binary jumpers or DIP switches to the detector address are not acceptable. The detectors shall also store an internal identifying that the control panel shall use to identify the type of detector. Systems that require a programmer to set the detector address (including temporary connection at the panel) are intensive and not acceptable. Each detector occupies any one of at least 99 possible on the SLC loop. It responds to regular polls from the system and reports its type and detector can have its sensitivity tested (required per NFPA 72 2007 Edition, Chapter 7 on Testing and Maintenance) when installed/connected to a compatible addressable fire control panel. detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel. There are three test methods: magnet, smoke entry aerosol or panel. detectors shall provide two LEDs to provide 360 visibility. The LEDs are placed into steady illumination by the control panel indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. An connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED, base, and / or relay base (optional accessories). The external remote alarm can be to other sounder or relay bases for activating all devices in a space via a single unit. LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor status. Coded signals, from the panel, can cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, or latch off. Refer to the control technical documentation for sensor LED status operation and expected delay to alarm. detectors shall be low profile ceiling-mount/wall-mount and shall be plug-in mounted into a base. These detectors shall be constructed of off-white UV resistant polymer and shall detachable from the mounting base to simplify installation, service and maintenance. Wiring shall be made by means of SEMS screws. The detector shall allow pre-wiring of the and the head shall be a plug-in type. Mounting base shall be mounted on junction box is at least 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) deep. Mounting base shall be available to mount to junction boxes. Suitable boxes include: (10.16 cm) square box with and without plaster ring. (10.16 cm) octagonal box. (8.89 cm) octagonal box. box. Agency Standards 268 -Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Signaling Systems 2010 CAN/ULC-S529- Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems 3230-3250- Smoke Actuated Detectors for Automatic Fire Alarm Signaling 2010

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Intelligent Sensor with Communications 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Voltage Range: Average Standby Current: Alarm Current (LED on): Humidity Range: Temperature Range: to 32 VDC @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with LED blink enabled) mA @ 24 VDC to 93% Relative Humidity, Non-condensing to 120 (0 to 49 (51 mm) installed in B210LP Base (155 mm) installed in B210LP Base; 4.1 (104 mm) installed in B501 Base oz. (153 g) 1. WIRINg DIAgRAM: INSTALLINg sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system manual. The installation must meet the requirements of the Au- Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance when in compliance with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); NFPA 72. DESCRIPTION 1251B intelligent ionization sensor uses a state-of-the-art sensing cham- These sensors are designed to provide open area protection and are in- for use with compatible control panels only. LEDs on each sensor light to provide a local, visible sensor indication. LED annunciator capability is also available as an optional accessory 1251B requires compatible addressable communications to function Connect this sensor to listed-compatible control panels only. Sensor recommends spacing sensors in compliance with NFPA 72. In air flow applications with smooth ceilings, space sensors 30 feet apart. specific information regarding sensor spacing, placement, and special ap- refer to NFPA 72 or the System Smoke Detector Application Guide, from System Sensor. gUIDE wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, local codes, and any special requirements of the Authority Having Proper wire gauges should be used. The installation wires should color-coded to limit wiring mistakes and ease system troubleshooting. Im- connections will prevent a system from responding properly in the of a fire. power from the communication line before installing sensors. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) per the wiring diagram, see 1. the desired address on the sensor address switches, see Figure 2. Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor into the base turning it clockwise to secure it in place. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control unit and the communication line. Test the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section of this manual. covers provide limited protection against airborne dust particles during Dust covers must be removed before the sensors can sense smoke. sensors prior to heavy remodeling or construction. DO NOT LOOP WIRE TERMINAL 1 OR 2. WIRE RUN TO PROVIDE OF CONNECTIONS. A OPTIONAL WIRING 2. ROTARy DECADE ADDRESS SWITChES: 0 0 1251B includes a tamper-resistant capability that prevents their re- from the bracket without the use of a tool. Refer to the base manual for on making use of this capability. testing, notify the proper authorities that the system is undergoing and will temporarily be out of service. Disable the system to unwanted alarms. sensors must be tested after installation and periodically thereafter. Testing must satisfy the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer max- performance when tested and maintained in compliance with NFPA 72. the sensors as follows: Functional: Magnet Test (P/N M02-04-01 or M02-09-00) This sensor can be functionally tested with a test magnet. The test mag- electronically simulates smoke in the sensing chamber, testing the electronics and connections to the control panel. Hold the test magnet in the magnet test area as shown in Figure 3. The sensor should alarm t

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Direct Wire Ionization Detector 5.5 inches (140 mm) 3.12 inches (80 mm) 0.7 lb. (310 g) Temperature: 0 to +49 (32 to 120 Alarm: Reset by momentary power interruption. Humidity: 10% to 93% Relative Humidity, Noncondensing Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Ratings: Voltage: 12/24 VDC Ripple Voltage: 4 Volts peak to peak Capacitance: 0.02 Maximum Ratings: 8.5 VDC Minimum 35 VDC Maximum 100 Maximum Ratings: 4.2 VDC Minimum at 10 mA 6.6 VDC Minimum at 100 mA Alarm current must be limited to 100 mA maximum by the control panel. If used, the Remote Annunciator operates within the specified detector alarm currents. Voltage: 2.5 VDC Minimum Time: 0.3 S Maximum Time: 35 S Maximum Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual A05- Applications Guide for System Smoke Detectors. This provides detailed information on detector spacing, zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies this manual are available at no charge from System (For installation in Canada, refer to CAN/ULC- Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems CEC Part 1, Sec. 32.) Description Sensor 1400 dual-chamber ionization smoke detec- utilize state-of-the-art, unipolar sensing chambers. detectors are designed to provide open area protec- and to be used with compatible UL-listed, 2-wire con- panels only. The detector operation and sensitivity be tested in place. detector includes an LED that provides a local visual of the detector status. The LED blinks every seconds as an indication that power is applied to the and lights continuously in alarm. These detectors have the latching alarm feature. The alarm can be reset by a momentary power interruption. detector also has provision for the connection of an Model RA400Z Remote Annunciator. The RA400Z a visual indication of an alarm and mounts to a gang box. 72 defines the spacing requirements for smoke Typically, this is 30 feet when the detectors are on a smooth ceiling. However, ALL installations comply with NFPA 72 and/or special requirements of authority having jurisdiction. 1 I56-279-05R 1. Surface mounting of Model 1400 detector 3-1/2 and 4 inch octagonal box: 2. Model 1400 detector mounting bracket: detectors and alarm system control panels have for allowable loop resistance. Consult the panel manufacturer specifications for the total resistance allowed for the control panel being used wiring the detector loops. electrical connections by stripping about 3 insula- from the end of the wire. Then, slide the bare end of wire under the clamping plate and tighten the clamping screw. A wiring diagram for a typical 2-wire detector is shown in Figure 3. Break the wire at each terminal to ensure that the are supervised. Do NOT loop the wire the terminals. Sensor smoke detectors are marked with a compat- identifier located as the last digit of a five digit code on the back of the product. Connect detectors to compatible control units as indicated in System compatibility chart which contains a current list UL-listed control units and detectors. A copy of this list available from System Sensor upon request

C o n v e n t i o n a l e t e C t i o n Series Ionization Detector 2-Wire Ionization Smoke Detector Available 2-Wire 4-Wire 4-Wire VDC LED annunciator End of line relay module, Sensitivity test module cover removal tool screen Overview or 24 volt operation cover and insect screen for cleaning LED blinks in standby, latches on alarm mounting bracket with option unipolar chamber design 400 Series ionization smoke detectors include a unique dual source, dual unipolar detection design which will sense the presence of smoke particles produced by combustion as well as slow smoldering fires. This chamber exhibits increased stability, reduces nuisance alarms, and provides better performance at higher air 400 Series meets the performance criteria required by UL/ULC. Additional key include an LED which blinks in standby and latches on to indicate an alarm. feature convenient field testing and sensitivity metering. The model 1400 remote LED annunciator capabilities using the RA400Z. sensitivity metering of detector to NFPA 72 requirements Specifications screws for easy wiring warranty against dirt, insects, and pressure detector shall be an ionization type (model 1400, 1412B, or 1424) as manufactured System Sensor. Wiring connections shall be made by means of SEMS screws. Detector have a visible LED which will blink in standby and latch on in alarm. The detector have a sensitivity of 1.9 0.6%/ft. as measured in the UL smoke box. The detector and cover should be easily removable for cleaning. It shall be possible to perform a and functional test on the detector without the need of generating smoke. The shall have a mounting bracket that allows for mounting to a 31/2 or 4 octagon or 4 square electrical box. II (8.1 cm) (13.9 cm) Weight lbs. Temperature Range to 120 (0 to 49 Humidity Range to 93% Relative (non-condensing) Velocity Rating fpm maximum 0.6%/ft. nominal AWG, twisted pair recommended 1/2 or 4 octagon box, square box with plaster ring, 60, 75 mm boxes per NFPA 72 and local require- On smooth, flat ceilings, spac- of 30 feet may be used as a guide. Ratings Operating Voltage Current VDC (8.5-35 VDC) max. control panels be current limited mA or less VDC (11.3-17.3 VDC) max. mA VDC (20-29 VDC) max. mA Contact Ratings Form A Alarm: Form C Auxiliary Alarm: @ 30 VAC/DC @ 30 VAC/DC; .6A @ 110 VDC; 1A @ 125 VAC Information Number detector, 2-wire, 12/24 VDC, for control panels detector, 4-wire, 12 VDC, for control panels detector, 4-wire, 24 VDC, for control panels of line relay module, 12/24 VDC annunciator (LED) Test module (see below) cover removal tool screen MOD400R Field Sensitivity Test Module be used with any standard DC voltmeter multimeter to check the sensitivity range System Sensor detectors (satisfies NFPA requirement for sensitivity testing). Sensor Sales and Service Sensor Headquarters Ohio Avenue Charles, IL 60174 800-SENSOR2 630/377-6495 Sensor Canada 905.812.0767 905.812.0771 Sensor Europe 44.1403.276500 44.1403.276501 Sensor in China 86.29.8832.0119 86.29.8832.5110 Sensor in Singapore 65.273.2230 65.273.2610 Sensor in Far East 85.22.191.9003 85.22.736.6580 Sensor in Australia 613.54.281.142 613.54.281.172 Sensor India

~SYsTEM SENSOR Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS inches (14 cm) inches (8.0 cm) lb (310 gm) to +49(cid:176) C (32(cid:176) to 120(cid:176) F) to 93% Relative Humidity Non-condensing by momentary power interruption. and 1424 Direct Wire Smoke Detectors Temperature: Humidity: Alarm: Contact Ratings or Inductive (60% power factor) load A: C:* @ 30VAC/DC @ 110VDC, 2.0A @ 30VDC @ 125VAC, 2.0A @ 30VAC Canadian installations, relay contact rating is 2.0A @ 30VAC/DC Ratings: Voltage: Voltages: Voltages: Current: Currents: (4V Maximum Ripple) Minimum Maximum Minimum A Maximum Minimum Maximum alarm and auxiliary relay operate within the specified voltage ratings. Time: Time: Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407- Guide for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which detailed information on detector spacing, place- zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies of manual are available at no charge from System Sensor. installation in Canada, refer to CAN/ULC-S524, Stan- for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems and CEC Part Sec. 32.) Description Sensor 1412 and 1424 dual-chamber ionization detectors utilize state-of-the-art, unipolar sensing These detectors are designed to provide open protection, and to be used with UL-listed 4-wire con- panels. The 1412 for 12 volt panels operates at 12VDC, the 1424 for 24 volt panels operates at 24VDC. The de- operation and sensitivity can be tested in place. detectors are listed to UL 268 and are latching type detectors. When latched in alarm, the detectors be reset by a momentary power interruption. LED on the detector provides a local indication of the status. If power is applied to the detector, and the is functioning properly in standby, the status LED blink every 10 seconds. In alarm, the LED will be on continuously until the detector is reset. detector contains one Form A (SPST-NO) contact for to the alarm-initiating circuit, and one Form C set of auxiliary contacts. Supervision of de- power is accomplished by installing a Power Supervi- End-of-Line Relay Module (A77-716) at the end of the power loop. When power is applied to and the detectors, the EOL Power Supervisory Module energized. Its relay contacts close and provide a closed circuit in the control panel alarm-initiating loop. A failure or a break in the detector power loop de-ener- the EOL Module. The relay contacts open and trigger trouble signal at the control panel. Manuals Online! – 1. Flush mounting of detector on 4 inch box: 2. Detector mounting bracket: MAKE DETECTOR TAMPER RESISTANT, OFF TAB EXTENSION SCRIBED LINE 1412 and 1424 detector is supplied with a mounting kit that permits the detector to be mounted: Directly to a 3-1/2 inch or 4 inch octagonal, 1-1/2 inch Refer to releasing device manufacturer installa- instruction for proper connections. Contacts are shown in stand-by mode and will in alarm condition. electrical box, or To a 4 inch square electrical box by using a plaster ring the supplied mounting bracket kit. of 30 ft. on a smooth ceiling as per NFPA 72E. conditions or response requirements vary, other may apply. Installation Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with the Na- Electrical Code and the applicable local codes, and special requirements of the local authority having juris- Proper wire gauges should be used. The conduc- used to connect smoke detectors to control panels and devices should be color-coded to prevent wiring Improper connections can prevent a system from properly in the event of a fire. system supervision: for terminals 1, 2, 7, and 8, do

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 and 1424 Direct Wire Smoke Detectors 5.5 inches (14 cm) 3.12 inches (8.0 cm) 0.7 lb (310 gm) Temperature: 0 to +49 (32 to 120 Humidity: 10% to 93% Relative Humidity Non-condensing Alarm: Reset by momentary power interruption. Contact Ratings or Inductive (60% power factor) load A: 2.0A @ 30VAC/DC C:* 0.6A @ 110VDC, 2.0A @ 30VDC 1.0A @ 125VAC, 2.0A @ 30VAC Canadian installations, relay contact rating is 2.0A @ 30VAC/DC Ratings: 1412 1424 Voltage: 12 24 DC (4V Maximum Ripple) Voltages: 11.3 20 VDC Minimum 17.3 29 VDC Maximum Voltages: .73 .8 VDC Minimum Current: 100 100 Maximum Currents: 35.2 21.3 mA Minimum 77.0 40.6 mA Maximum alarm and auxiliary relay operate within the specified voltage ratings. Time: 0.3 0.3 Seconds Time: 30 30 Seconds Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual A05- Applications Guide for System Smoke Detectors, provides detailed information on detector spacing, zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies this manual are available at no charge from System (For installation in Canada, refer to CAN/ULC- Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems CEC Part 1, Sec. 32.) Description Sensor 1412 and 1424 dual-chamber ionization detectors utilize state-of-the-art, unipolar sensing These detectors are designed to provide open protection, and to be used with UL-listed 4-wire con- panels. The 1412 for 12 volt panels operates at 12VDC, the 1424 for 24 volt panels operates at 24VDC. The operation and sensitivity can be tested in place. detectors are listed to UL 268 and are latching type detectors. When latched in alarm, the detectors be reset by a momentary power interruption. LED on the detector provides a local indication of the status. If power is applied to the detector, and detector is functioning properly in standby, the status will blink every 10 seconds. In alarm, the LED will be on continuously until the detector is reset. detector contains one Form A (SPST-NO) contact for to the alarm-initiating circuit, and one Form (SPDT-NO/NC) set of auxiliary contacts. Supervision detector power is accomplished by installing a Power End-of-Line Relay Module (A77-716) at the end the detector power loop. When power is applied to and the detectors, the EOL Power Supervisory Module energized. Its relay contacts close and provide a closed circuit in the control panel alarm-initiating loop. A failure or a break in the detector power loop de-ener- the EOL Module. The relay contacts open and trigger trouble signal at the control panel. 1 I56-280-05R 1. Flush mounting of detector on 4 inch box:

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Ionization Detector Height: Diameter: Weight: of 30 ft. on a smooth ceiling as per NFPA 72E. conditions or response requirements vary, other Selection And Wiring Guide resistors, 4-wire and 120VAC applications. (Note: bases are provided with screw terminals for power, if applicable. The electrical ratings for each installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual A05- Guide for System Smoke Detectors, detailed information on detector spacing, place- zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies of installation in Canada refer to CAN/ULC-S524, for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems, and CEC following NFPA 72 requirements. This sensor Description compatible UL-listed control panels only. The capa- of plugging these detectors into a variety of special makes them more versatile than equivalent direct- LEDs on each detector light to provide a local 360 is available as an optional accessory. These detectors have the latching alarm feature. The alarm can be only by a momentary power interruption. For test- testing the detector, look for the presence of the to the detector (check the wiring), or it is defective 1. 2. LEDs on the detector should latch on within 3. voltmeter to check the detector sensitivity as de-

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Intelligent Sensors with Communications Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Air Velocity: Range: Current: Current: mm) installed in B501B mm) installed in B501 mm) gm) inches inches inches ounces to 60 C (14 to 140 F) Do not install where normal ambient temperatures extend beyond 0 to 49 C to 120 F) to 93% Relative Humidity flanged base flangeless base with RMK400 recessed mounting kit Base with horn Ft./Min. (7.6 m/S) to 32 VDC maximum @ 24 VDC (with no communication) average maximum @ 24 VDC (with one communication every five seconds LED blink enabled) mA @ 24 VDC Installing thoroughly read Guide for Proper Use of System Detectors (I56-407-XX), which provides detailed in- on sensor spacing, placement, zoning, and spe- applications. Copies of this manual are available from Sensor. Description 1551B dual-chamber ionization intelligent sensors a state-of-the-art, unipolar sensing chamber. These are designed for use with duct housings DH500 DH500AC/DC only, and to be used with compatible panels only. Connect sensors only to compatible units. (For installation in Canada, refer to CAN/ Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm and CEC Part 1, Sec. 32.) LED on each sensor light to provide a local 360 vis- of the sensor indication. The LED can be latched by code command from the panel for an alarm indica- The LED can also be unlatched to the normal condi- by code command. Remote LED annunciator is available as an optional accessory (Part No. Guide 1551B can be used with any one of a variety of plug- bases. Therefore, connect all wiring following the instructions provided with the base that was for use with the 1551B. As Figure 1 indicates, are equipped with screw all connections. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, and regulations. Verify that all sensor bases are installed and that wiring polarity is correct at each base. power from the loop before installing sensors. Install sensors: Verify that the sensor type matches the type written Set the sensor to the desired address and record it on the label on the base. label on the base. Place the sensor into the sensor base. Rotate the sensor clockwise until it drops into place. Continue rotating the sensor clockwise until it locks place. 1. Wiring diagram: ANNUNCIATOR Do not loop wire under terminal 1 or 2. wire run to provide supervision of connections. A OPTIONAL WIRING must be tested after installation and periodic main- Test the sensor as follows: sensor cannot detect smoke if the dust cover is in- Tamper-Resist Feature sensor bases include a tamper-resist feature that, it is enabled, prevents removal of the sensor with- the use of a tool. See the sensor base installation in- manual for details on the use of this feature. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the unit. Test the sensor by positioning a test magnet against the plastic directly opposite the test meter socket 2). The alarm level should be recognized by the and the LED controlled by communication com- from the panel. The reset of the sensor LED is controlled by communica- command from the panel. testing, notify the proper authorities that the smoke system is undergoing maintenance, and therefore system will be temporarily out of service. Disable the or system undergoing maintenance to prevent un- alarms. Test Magnet (Model No. M02-04-00) Place the magnet against the cover opposite the test

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

No text preview available.

200 Series Intelligent Profile Plug-in Available Acclimate Multicriteria Smoke Detector with Thermal Detector Smoke Detector Temperature Detector Rate-of-Rise Thermal Detector Series Bases Mounting Base Mounting Base Standard Sounder Base Temporal Tone Sounder Base Relay Base Base Mounting Kit Surface Kit Surface Mounting Kit Series Accessories Retro Flange Remote LED Annunciator Detector Test Magnet Telescoping Test Magnet suffix denotes ULC listed product Removal Tool for XR-2 (5-15 ft.) Cover Overview low-pro design communications standby current address switches EMI protection with RMK400 with B501 with B210LP Sensor 200 Series intelligent plug-in smoke detectors with integral communication pro- features that surpass conventional detectors. Detector sensitivity can be programmed in control panel software. Sensitivity is continuously monitored and reported to the panel. ID capability allows each detector address to be set with decade address switches, exact detector locations for selective maintenance when chamber contamination an unacceptable level. 2251 photoelectric detector unique optical sensing chamber is designed with superior sig- to noise ratio. It engineered to sense smoke produced by a wide range of combustion sources. electronic thermistors add 135 temperature thermal sensing on the 2251T. 2251TM is a photoelectric smoke detector with supplementary 135 thermal. Also as Acclimate it uses advanced on-board software to combine the signals from the photo thermal elements, creating a true multicriteria detector capable of rejecting nuisance sources, still responding quickly to real Acclimate has the capability of adjusting its sensitivity to the type of environment that it is installed in. 1251 ionization detector incorporates a unique single source, dual chamber design to quickly and dependably to a broad range of 5251P and 5251RP offer 135 and rate-of-rise thermal detection in a low pro These thermal detectors provide cost effective, intelligent property protection in a variety applications. 1.66 (4.2 cm) 2.0 (5.1 cm) (10.2 cm) Weight oz. (104 g) Temperature Range 32 to 120 (0 to 49 with Thermal: 32 to 100 to 38 to 100 ( to 38 Remote LED Listed Velocity Range 0 500 fpm with Thermal: 4000 fpm for installation in ducts) Humidity 93% noncondensing Ratings Temperature Setpoint: (57 of Rise Detection: (9.4 Range 32 volts DC peak Current (max. avg.) 200 @ 24 VDC communication), @ 24 VDC (one communication 5 sec. with LED enabled) with Thermal: 250 @ VDC (without communication), @ 24 VDC (one communication 5 sec. with LED enabled) Current (max.) mA @ 24 VDC (on) Test Magnet with Telescoping Handle Sensor Sales and Service Sensor Headquarters Ohio Avenue Charles, IL 60174 800-SENSOR2 630/377-6495 On Demand x3 Sensor Canada 905.812.0767 905.812.0771 Sensor UK 44.1403.276500 44.1403.276501 Sensor in China 86.29.524.6253 86.29.524.6259 Sensor in Singapore 65.273.2230 65.273.2610 Sensor Far East 852.2191.9003 852.2736.6580 Sensor Australia 613.54.281.142 613.54.281.172 2001 System Sensor. The company reserves the right to change product speci without notice.

200 Series Low-Profile Detectors System Sensor 200 Series intelligent plug-in smoke with integral communication provide point for alarm communication and selective Listings exact certification listings for each model, please reference the respective agency Web site. System Sensor 2251B Acclimate 1251B 5251B and 5251RB Series Intelligent Detector Specifications Specifications Weight Temperature Range Velocity Range Humidity Range Ratings Specifications Range Current (max. avg.) Current (max.) Information No.

200 Series Base Sensor mounting bases and kits provide a variety installation options for detectors in any application. Bases SEMS Support Multiple Sounder meet local code and application requirements, Listings Electrical Ratings Supply Voltage 16 Current 200 Series Bases Specifications Gauge Range Range Electrical Ratings Voltage Current Time (B224RB only) Time (B224RB only) Characteristics only) Output Current Series Junction Box Selection Guide Information, 200 Series Bases Addressable Sounder Base Overview

200 Series Low-Profile Detectors System Sensor 200 Series intelligent plug-in detectors with integral communication provide location for alarm communication and selective Sleek, low-profile design Analog communications Low standby current Rotary address switches Superior EMI protection Dual LEDs for 360 visibility Listings exact certification listings for each model, please reference the agency Web site. Series smoke detectors are intelligent (addressable) detectors point ID capability that enable each detector address to be set decade address switches to provide exact detector locations. sensitivity of 200 Series detectors can be programmed using the panel software to suit the environment. In addition, detector is continually monitored and reported to the panel. System Sensor 2251B photoelectric detector unique sensing chamber is engineered to sense smoke produced by wide range of combustion sources. Dual electronic thermistors add fixed temperature thermal sensing on the 2251TB model. 2251BR is a remote test capable detector for use with DNR(W) smoke detectors. Acclimate 2251TMB photoelectric detector includes detection at 135 It uses advanced onboard software to the signals from the photo and thermal elements to create true multi-criteria detector capable of rejecting nuisance sources, still responding quickly to real fires. Separate photo and thermal also allow the Acclimate detector to provide different to smoke or heat. In addition, the Acclimate detector can its sensitivity according to its environment. 1251B ionization detector incorporates a unique single-source, design to respond quickly and dependably to a broad of fires. the 5251B and 5251RB detectors use an innovative sensing circuit to produce 135 fixed and rate-of-rise detection in low-profile packages. The 5251H model fixed high-temperature detection at 190 These thermal provide cost-effective, intelligent property protection in a of applications. inches (51 mm) inches (155 mm) installed in B210LP base; 4.1 inches (104 mm) installed in B501 base 4.8 oz (136 g); Photo/Photo with Heat: 5.2 oz (147 g); Ion: 5.4 oz (153 g) 32 to 120 (0 to 49 with Thermal: 32 to 100 (0 to 38 to 100 ( to 38 Temperature: to 150 ( to 66 0 to 1,200 fpm (0 to 6.1 m/sec) with Thermal: 0 to 4,000 fpm (0 to 20 m/sec) (suitable for installation in ducts) to 93% non-condensing Temperature Setpoint: 135 (57 Detection: 15 (8.3 Temperature Heat: 190 (88 to 32 VDC peak @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with LED enabled) with Thermal: 300 @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with LED enabled) mA @ 24 VDC (on) LED also sold separately no. T55-127-000) Series Intelligent Detector Specifications Specifications Weight Temperature Range Velocity Range Humidity Range Ratings Specifications Range Current (max. avg.) Current (max.) Information No. smoke detector smoke detector, remote test for use with DNR(W) duct smoke smoke detector with thermal multi-criteria smoke detector smoke detector temperature thermal detector thermal detector temperature thermal detector Flangeless mounting base Flangeless mounting base bulk pack Flanged mounting base Flanged mounting base bulk pack sounder base with B501BH series) addressable sounder base base base Mounting Kit (flanged) Flange Ring for 6 Base Flange Ring for 6 Base Bulk Pack New Smaller Flange Ring for 6 Base LED annunciator test magnet test magnet removal tool (T55

firealarmresources.com

System Sensor 2009 Product Awards Product Showcase the CO1224T Carbon Monoxide with RealTest was one of two winners in the Fire Life Safety Category in the New Product Showcase (NPS). annually at the ISC West trade show in Las Vegas, the Industry Association-sponsored NPS recognizes best security and life safety product innovations. RealTest Impact Award (Mia) the CO1224T Carbon Detector with RealTest was a winner in the Equipment: Fire/Smoke/Gas Detectors category at the Electronic Security Expo (ESX). The Maximum Impact recognize products for their impact on the business integration and monitoring companies. RealTest magazine Top 100 Products/Services the Multi-Criteria Fire Detector was selected by the staff at Buildings magazine. Thousands of products reviewed and an elite group of 100 was selected based aesthetics, ease of use, durability/life-cycle, efficiency or universal appeal, sustainable/green elements, more. The product is featured in the June 2009 issue. Engineer (CSE) 2009 Product of the the Advanced Multi-Criteria Fire Detector (Gold) and Duct Smoke Detector (Bronze) were winners the Fire Detection, Alarm, Notification equipment category. were selected by a panel of professional engineers winners were chosen by CSE subscribers. Winners were in the July 2009 issue. on any image below to find out more information. RealTest

2012B Smoke Detector Built-in Relay and Horn Division of Pittway Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, IL 60174 (736-7672), Fax 630-377-6495 Available Photoelectronic Detector 12 VDC operation Built-in 85dB electronic horn Built-in relay can be connected to lights, bells, horns, annunciator, or control panel Interconnectable up to 12 units Visual alarm and power indicator Ceiling white color Built-in 8 second delay on relay output Built-in test switch Twist-on mounting bracket with tamper option for easy Improved chamber design for greater stability 3-year warranty attractive, and easy to install, System Sensor detectors are designed to respond to a broad range fires while providing maximum stability. These are designed primarily for applications where wiring may be used. h 5.5 dia. mm h 140 mm dia.) oz. (150 grams) Range: to 93% RH, noncondensing upon local fire codes Australian Standards Ratings Voltage: Contact Rating: Current: Current: Range: by: VDC (nominal) Form A, .5 A @ 30 VDC maximum average mA maximum average 12 VDC to 120 F (0 to 50 C) 3786-1993 System Sensor 8/96 document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. Description Sensor 2012B photoelectronic detectors are self- and offer an 85dB alarm horn. An external push provides a test of the detectors alarm function. Up 12 units can be interconnected so that if one detector all detectors alarm. A normally open auxiliary relay is available for controlling external functions. visible LED indicator flashes once every 40 seconds in and rapidly in alarm when detecting smoke. The offer low-voltage operation and a tamper-proof Screw terminals and a mounting bracket are for easy installation. ( INPUT ( INPUT ( INPUT ( INPUT RELAY INTERCONNECT UP TO 12 DETECTORS Wiring Diagram Information No. smoke detector with relay, 12 VDC, multiple station, UL listed AS 3786-1993 Sensor Worldwide Distribution India: Canada: Sensor India Sensor Canada Maheshwari Nagar Kitimat Road, Unit #7 Mills Lane Ontario East, Mumbai 400093 L5N 3T5 91-022-8202564 905-812-0767 905-812-0771 the United Kingdom: Sensor Europe, Ltd. Gates III, North St. West Sussex 5PJ, United Kingdom 44-1403-276500 44-1403-276501 2 the Far East: Sensor Far East, Ltd. 706, New T&T Centre Canton Road Kowloon, Hong Kong 852-2730-9090 852-2736-6580

2012H Direct-Wire Detector with Relay and Horn Detector Accessory 12 VDC power supply for system to be listed) Detector Overview VDC operation, 4-wire 85dB electronic horn with (3) tone normally open relay can be to lights, bells, horns, remote annunciator up to 12 units alarm and power indicator white color 8 second delay on relay output test switch mounting bracket with option for easy installation chamber design for greater warranty attractive, and easy to install, the System Sensor 2012H detector is to respond to a broad range of while providing maximum stability. This also features low-voltage wiring making it ideal for applications such as apart- buildings and nursing homes. The System Sensor 2012H photoelectronic detector is designed prima- for applications where low-voltage Class 2 wiring may be used. This detec- is non-latching and offers an 85dB alarm horn. The 2012H features the required audible emergency evacuation signal referred to as temporal tone. An external push button provides a test of the detector’s alarm func- Up to 12 units can be interconnected so that if one detector alarms, all alarm. A normally open auxiliary alarm relay with an 8 second delay available for controlling external functions. A visible LED indicator every 30 seconds in standby and rapidly (every 0.5 seconds) in alarm detecting smoke. The detector offers low-voltage operation and a tamper- feature. Screw terminals and a mounting bracket are provided for easy H x 5.5 dia. mm h x 140 mm dia.) oz. (150 grams) Range to 93% RH, noncondensing Ratings Voltage VDC (nominal) Wiring Diagram power bus length (in feet), given number units (maximum per bus) and wire size. Gauge Unit Units Units Units Units Units Units Units Units Units Units Units AWG AWG AWG interconnect bus length: FT., No. 18AWG or larger dual cable. Information Number Sensor Sales and Service Sensor Headquarters Ohio Avenue Charles, IL 60174 800-SENSOR2 630/377-6495 On Demand x3 Specifications Smoke Detector Placement de in NFPA72 detectors shall be installed outside of each separate area in the immediate vicinity of the bedrooms and on each additional story the family living unit, including basements and excluding crawlspaces and un attics. In new construction, a smoke detector shall also be installed in each room Contact Rating Form A, .5 A @ 30 VDC Current mA maximum average @ 12 VDC Current maximum average Range to 120 (0 to 50 RED (+) A77-727-O1 BLACK POWER ( 12OVAC GRAY BLACK ( INPUT ( INPUT ( INPUT wiring must conform to local electrical codes. Relay ( INPUT ( INPUT ( INPUT Interconnect Up To 12 Detectors smoke detector with relay, 12 VDC, multiple station VDC power supply, mounts to a 4 square box, 2 1 deep Sensor Canada 905.812.0767 905.812.0771 Sensor UK 011.44.1403.276500 011.44.1403.276501 Sensor in China 011.86.29.524.6253 011.86.29.524.6259 Sensor in Singapore 011.65.273.2230 011.65.273.2610 Sensor Far East 011.852.2191.9003 011.852.2736.6580 Sensor Australia 011.613.54.281.142 011.613.54.2

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Photoelectronic Smoke Detector Integral Temp-3 Sounder 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Detector Description detectors are designed to provide early warning of developing fires a reasonable cost. They monitor the air and can sense smoke, providing minutes for you and your family to escape before a fire spreads. warning fire detection is best achieved by the installation of fire equipment in all rooms and areas of the household. area protection in a residential building. It has a built-in relay which be used to activate auxiliary devices such as bells, horns, and door The relay contacts automatically close 8 seconds after the detec- goes into alarm, and automatically resets approximately 5 seconds the alarm stops. A piezoelectric horn in each detector produces an 85 dBA temporal tone evacuation signal when a detector alarms an interconnected detector alarms. This temporal tone evacuation sig- spaced .5 seconds apart, followed by 1.5 seconds of silence. These can be interconnected for a system of up to 12 smoke detectors household so when one smoke detector sounds its evacuation signal causes the other connected detectors to sound as well. in Australia Only installation temperature range for Australia is 5 to 45 and has tested per the Australian Standard. Ignore installation temperatures for all other applications when installing detectors in Australia. should be installed by qualified technicians. Installation of main connected power supply unit must be performed by qualified only. Ignore the power requirements in Detector listed below, as these apply to installation in the USA. primary power should be provided by a power limited, supervised, type system. A rechargeable battery is required as a backup to the power supply in case of a mains failure. In standby operation, the limited backup battery (fully charged) must be capable of provid- uninterrupted power for at least 7 days to the system and all smoke before the panel gives the required low-battery signal. When the signal is given, the battery should be capable of providing for another 7 days, after which the backup battery should have energy left to allow a 4-minute alarm signal to be given by all smoke alarms. Detector Power Requirements (USA) smoke detector will not work without power. This smoke detector is DC power supply). The A77-727-01 must be permanently connected the building 120-volt AC electrical supply per code. The A77-727-01 not power the smoke detector if the AC power is cut off for any The 12-volt DC power supply will only power the detector when AC power is present is not a power back-up source. which cannot be turned off by a switch. power supply and detec- installation must conform to the electrical codes in your area and 760 of the National Electrical code. it is recommended that be performed by a licensed electrician. Detector Limitations This smoke detector is designed for residential use only. System does not advise the use of this detector in multiple detector monitored by a central control. This detector is self-restoring does not lock into an alarm condition. smoke detectors will not sense a fire if the smoke does not reach sensor. In order for a smoke detector to sense smoke, it must be in the immediate vicinity of the fire. In addition, smoke from in chimneys, in walls, on roofs, in remote parts of the building, on another level from where the smoke detector is located, may reach the smoke detector quickly enough for occupants to escape for this reason, the installer shall install smoke detectors every level, in every sleeping area, and in every bedroom of the

A Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and 2100T Photoelectronic Detectors (including mounting bracket): Temperature Range: inches (140 mm) inches (43 mm) oz. (150 g) Humidity Range: Alarm: Sensor (Model 2100T only): Ratings Voltage Ripple Voltage: Capacitance: Current: Ratings: to 120(cid:176) F (0(cid:176) to 50(cid:176) C) to 100(cid:176) F (0(cid:176) to 39(cid:176) C) 2100: 2100T: to 93% Relative Humidity, Noncondensing by momentary power interruption F Fixed Temperature Electronic Thermistor or 24 VDC VDC VDC of nom. Voltage (peak to peak) m F maximum m A maximum VDC minimum at 10 mA. VDC maximum at 100 mA. current must be limited to 100 mA maximum by the control panel. If used, the RA400Z Remote Annunciator oper- within the specified detector alarm currents.) Voltage: Time: Time: VDC minimum seconds maximum seconds maximum (after 60 second reset) Installing thoroughly read System Sensor manual I56-407, for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which pro- detailed information on detector spacing, placement, wiring, and special applications. Copies of this are available at no charge from System Sensor. This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. This detector must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector be cleaned at least once a year. Description 2100 is a 2-wire photoelectronic smoke detector that a state-of-the-art optical sensing chamber. This detec- is designed to provide open area protection and to be with compatible UL-listed panels only. Model 2100T a restorable, built-in, fixed-temperature (135(cid:176) F) detector. of these detectors is simplified by the use of a bracket and a plug-in screw terminal block that be prewired to the system, allowing the detector to be installed or removed for cleaning. The detector sen- can be tested in place using the MOD400R Test An LED on the detector provides a local visual in- of the detector status. If power is applied to the and it is functioning normally in standby, the sta- LED blinks every ten seconds. The LED also latches on alarm. 2100 and 2100T feature a visual indication that is required if the sensing chamber drifts out its sensitivity limits, the LED ceases to blink. detectors also include an output that allows an op- Model RA400Z Remote Annunciator to be connected. 1. Surface mounting of 2100 smoke detector 3-1/2-inch and 4-inch octagonal box: responding properly in the event of a fire. screw terminal block will accept 14 22 gauge wire. best system performance, all wiring should be installed separate grounded conduit; do not mix fire system wir- in the same conduit as any other electrical wiring. pair may be used to provide additional protection extraneous electrical interference. connections are made by stripping about 1/4 inch of from the end of the feed wire, inserting the wire the appropriate terminal, and tightening the screw to the wire in place. 2100 and 2100T detector is supplied with a mounting that permits the detector to be mounted: To a single gang box, or Directly to a 3-1/2 inch or 4 inch octagonal box, or To a 4 inch square electrical box by using a plaster ring. Feature detector includes a tamper-resistant feature that pre- its removal from the bracket without the use of a tool. make the detector tamper-resistant, remove the smaller by breaking it at the scribed line on the tamper-resistant on the detector mounting bracket (see Figure 2), then the detector. To remove the detector from the bracket it has been made tamper resistant, use a small screw- to depress the tamper-resistant tab, located in the on the mounting bracket, and turn the detector coun- Installation Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with the Na- Electrical Code, applicable local codes, and a

Standard Application Form C Relay Pattern Sounder Series Direct Wire Detectors Available Application Models Form C Relay Models Pattern Sounder Models Overview product line of photoelectric, smoke detectors diagnostics let you check sensitivity range thermal models two-wire compatibility cleaning on standard only units feature built-in tone Form C Relay units elevator recall, door closure Sensor 100 Series smoke detectors may come in a small package they pack some big bene A large, supervised terminal block pending) featuring captured SEMS screws simpli installation. self-diagnostics allow you to check the detector sensitivity by simply looking at the unit. Every ten seconds diagnostic circuitry chamber sensitivity, checking to see if the detector is within its UL range. If it is, the LED every ten seconds. If not, the LED a clear sign the detector needs cleaning or servicing. So, to if a 100 series is within speci range, just look at it. This meets 72 requirements for sensitivity testing. For sensitivity readout, use MOD accessory and voltmeter. Detection. Integrated thermal models provide restorable, 135-degree heat detection. Isolated thermal models feature a heat sensor that is isolated from the smoke sensor, providing a local audible smoke alarm. In these models only the isolated sensor will signal an alarm to the panel. The isolated thermal products designed for applications where local annunciation, not total facility is desired. Models. A built-in piezoelectric horn (patent pending) in the 100 sounder models produces the NFPA 72-required, 85dBA temporal pattern when the individual detector alarms or when the supply voltage is reversed. Application Specifications Voltage VDC (nominal), 8.5 min. to 35 max. Current maximum average Range to 93% RH, noncondensing Temperature Sensor F electronic thermistor in. (140mm) in. (48mm) with bracket oz. (150 grams) Wiring Range to 120oF (0o to 50oC) to 100oF (0o to 38oC) to 120oF (0o to 50oC) to 100oF (0o to 38oC) Current max. limited by panel max. limited by panel typical, 23mA max. at 12V; 19mA typical, 25mA max. at 24V typical, 23mA max. at 12V; 19mA typical, 25mA max. at 24V Form C Relay Specifications Contact C Relay Contact Ratings VDC Range to 93% RH, noncondensing inches (140mm) inches (43mm) with bracket Weight ounces (192 grams) Wiring Range to 100oF to 38oC) Voltage VDC (nominal) min. to 35 max. to 120oF to 50oC) VDC (nominal) min. to 35 max. Temperature Sensor thermistor Current average maximum average to 100oF to 38oC) VDC (nominal) min. to 35 max. thermistor 35mA max. at 12V typical average Pattern Sounder Specifications Current avg., 100 max. Temperature Heat Sensor electronic thermistor Range (0o Range RH, noncondensing in. (140mm) Wiring MSFM listed Voltage VDC min. to 35 max. Current Consumption min., 100mA max. VDC min. to 35 max. typical, 60mA max. at 12V typical, 65mA max. at 24V VDC min. to 35 max. typical, 60mA max. at 12V t

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Photoelectronic Detector with Fixed Heat Integral Temp-3 Sounder 1. Wiring diagram for the 2100AT detector: 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 must be observed on the power and remote annunciator connections. OBSERVE POLARITY LISTED CLASS A WIRING Only one detector per zone shall be used, unless when in alarm the panel switches zone to a reverse polarity, noncurrent-limited power supply. The 2100AT shall not be mixed with other 2-wire detector types on the same zone. (including mounting bracket): Temperature Range Humidity Range: Alarm: Signal: Sensor: Ratings Voltage (nominal): Ripple Voltage: Current: Ratings: Voltage: Time: Time: Relay: Considerations: inches (140 mm) inches (52 mm) oz. (210 g) to 100 F (0 to 38 to 93% Relative Humidity, Noncondensing by momentary power interruption dBA minimum when in alarm or with supply polarity reversed F Fixed Temperature Electronic Thermistor or 24 VDC VDC VDC of nom. Voltage (peak to peak) average, 100 maximum mA typical at 12 VDC, 63 mA typical at 24 VDC, 100 mA maximum used, the RA400Z Remote Annunciator operates within the specified detector currents.) VDC minimum seconds maximum seconds maximum (after 60 sec. reset) 12/24 VDC Only one detector per zone shall be used, unless when in alarm the panel the zone to a reverse polarity, non-current limited power supply. For that do not provide this feature, a reversing relay, such as System Sensor may be used. When utilized with the 2100AT, it allows for more than one de- to be utilized on a loop. Some panels may require the use of programmable Refer to System Sensor literature for further information on the RR-2. 2100AT detector shall not be mixed with other 2-wire detectors on the same to the built-in temporal pattern, use this detector only with a non-coded source. 2. Surface mounting of 2100AT smoke detec- on 31/2-inch and 4-inch octagonal box:

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and 2100TD Photoelectronic Detectors Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 5.5 inches (140 mm) (including mounting bracket): 1.7 inches (43 mm) 5.3 oz. (150 g) Temperature Range: Model 2100D: 32 to 120 (0 to 50 Model 2100TD: 32 to 100 (0 to 39 Humidity Range: 10% to 93% Relative Humidity, Noncondensing Alarm: Reset by momentary power interruption Sensor (Model 2100TD only): 135 Fixed Temperature Electronic Thermistor Ratings Voltage Nominal: Minimum: Maximum: Ripple Voltage: 30% of nom. Voltage (peak to peak) Capacitance: 0.02 maximum Current: 50 maximum Ratings: 4.2 VDC minimum at 10 mA. 6.6 VDC maximum at 100 mA. (Alarm current must be limited to 100 mA maximum by the control panel. If the RA400Z Remote Annunciator operates within the specified detector currents.) or 24 VDC VDC VDC Voltage: 2.5 VDC minimum Time: 0.3 seconds maximum Time: 30 seconds maximum (after 60 second reset) Installing thoroughly read System Sensor manual I56-407, for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which detailed information on detector spacing, place- zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies of manual are available at no charge from System Sensor. This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. This detector must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector be cleaned at least once a year. Description 2100D is a 2-wire photoelectronic smoke detector uses a state-of-the-art optical sensing chamber. This is designed to provide open area protection and be used with compatible UL-listed panels only. Model features a restorable, built-in, fixed-temperature thermal detector. of these detectors is simplified by the use of a bracket and a plug-in screw terminal block that be prewired to the system, allowing the detector to be installed or removed for cleaning. The detector can be tested in place using the MOD400R Test An LED on the detector provides a local visual of the detector status. If power is applied to detector, and it is functioning normally in standby, the LED blinks every ten seconds. The LED also latches in alarm. 2100D and 2100TD feature a visual indication that is required if the sensing chamber drifts out its sensitivity limits, the LED ceases to blink. detectors also include an output that allows an optional RA400Z Remote Annunciator to be connected. 1 I56-710-09 1. Surface mounting of 2100D smoke detector 3 1/2-inch and 4-inch octagonal box: screw terminal block will accept 14 22 gauge wire. best system performance, all wiring should be installed separate grounded conduit; do not mix fire system wiring the same conduit as any other electrical wiring. Twisted may be used to provide additional protection against electrical interference. connections are made by stripping about 1/4 inch of from the end of the feed wire, inserting the wire the appropriate terminal, and tightening the screw to the wire in place. 2100D and 2100TD detector is supplied with a mount- bracket tha

3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and 2100TS Photoelectronic Detectors (including mounting bracket): Temperature Range: Model 2100S: inches (140 mm) inches (48 mm) oz. (150 g) Humidity Range: Alarm: Sensor (Model 2100TS only): Ratings Voltage Ripple Voltage: Capacitance: Current: Ratings: Voltage: Time: Time: to 120 (0 to 50 2100TS: 32 to 100 (0 to 38 to 93% Relative Humidity, Noncondensing by momentary power interruption Fixed Temperature Electronic Thermistor or 24 VDC VDC VDC of nom. Voltage (peak to peak) maximum maximum VDC minimum at 10 mA. VDC maximum at 130 mA. current must be limited to 130 mA maximum by the control panel. If the RA400Z Remote Annunciator operates within the specified detector currents.) VDC minimum seconds maximum seconds maximum (after 60 second reset) Installing thoroughly read System Sensor manual I56-407, for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which pro- detailed information on detector spacing, placement, wiring, and special applications. Copies of this are available at no charge from System Sensor. This manual shall be left with the owner/user of equipment. This detector must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector be cleaned at least once a year. Description 2100S is a 2-wire photoelectronic smoke detector uses a state-of-the-art optical sensing chamber. This is designed to provide open area protection and to used with compatible UL-listed panels only. Model features a restorable, built-in, fixed-temperature thermal detector. of these detectors is simplified by the use of a bracket and a plug-in screw terminal block that be prewired to the system, allowing the detector to be installed or removed. The detector sensitivity can tested in place using the MOD400R Test Module. LED on the detector provides a local visual indication of detector status. If power is applied to the detector, and is functioning normally in standby mode within the listed ranges, the status LED blinks once every ten sec- The LED also provides a visual indication that main- is required. If the LED stops blinking, the detector either not powered, out of the listed sensitivity range, unable to function properly. The test switch will not if the detector is below the insensitive limit. The will also latch on when the detector is in alarm. 1. Surface mounting of 2100S smoke detec- on 3 1/2-inch and 4-inch octagonal box: devices should be color-coded to reduce the like- of wiring errors. Improper connections can prevent system from responding properly in the event of a fire. screw terminal block will accept 14 22 gauge wire. best system performance, all wiring should be installed separate grounded conduit; do not mix fire system in the same conduit as any other electrical wiring. pair may be used to provide additional protection extraneous electrical interference. connections are made by stripping about 1/4 inch of from the end of the feed wire, inserting the wire the appropriate terminal, and tightening the screw to the wire in place. Sensor smoke detectors are marked with a compat- identifier located as the last digit of a five digit code on the back of the product. Connect detectors only compatible control units as indicated in System Sensor chart which contains a current list of UL list- compatible control units and detectors. A copy of this is available from System Sensor upon request. power from the control unit or initiating-device before installing detectors. Wire the plug-in screw terminal block per Figure 3 and the terminal block into the detector. Align the arrows on the detector with the arrows on the Turn the detector clockwise in the mounting bracket bracket. it clicks into place. After all

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Photoelectronic Smoke with Fixed Heat 1. Wiring diagram for the 2100TR detector: 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 OBSERVE POLARITY must be observed on the remote annunciator connections. LISTED CLASS A WIRING ONLY ONE DETECTOR PER ZONE CAN BE USED. inches (140 mm) inches (43 mm) oz. (190 g) to 100 F (0 to 38 C) to 93% Relative Humidity, Noncondensing by momentary power interruption F Fixed Temperature Electronic Thermistor or 24 VDC VDC VDC of nom. Voltage (peak to peak) average, 100 maximum mA minimum, 100 mA maximum current must be limited to 100mA by the control panel. If used, the RA400Z Annunciator operates within the specified detector alarm currents.) VDC minimum seconds maximum seconds maximum (after 60 sec. reset) 12/24 VDC mA maximum @ 30 VAC @ 30 VDC one detector can be used per zone. (including mounting bracket): Temperature Range Humidity Range: Alarm: Sensor: Ratings Voltage (nominal): Ripple Voltage: Current: Ratings: Voltage: Time: Time: Relay: Annunciator Output: Relay Contact Ratings: Load: Considerations: 2. Surface mounting of 2100TR smoke detec- on 31/2-inch and 4-inch octagonal box: detectors also include an output that allows optional of the RA400Z Remote Annunciator. Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407, for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which pro- detailed information on detector spacing, placement, wiring, and special applications. Copies of this are available at no charge from System Sensor. This manual shall be left with the owner/user of equipment. This detector must be tes

C O N V E N T I O N A L D E T E C T I O N Series Specialty Wire Detectors Form C Relay Available Form C Relay Models Pattern Sounder Models Pattern Sounder Overview product line of specialty low-profile smoke diagnostics let you check sensitivity range thermal models two-wire compatibility units feature built-in tone Form C Relay units elevator recall, door closure Sensor 100 Series smoke detectors may come in a small package they pack some big bene A large, supervised terminal block pending) featuring captured SEMS screws simpli installation. self-diagnostics allow you to check the detector sensitivity by simply looking at the unit. Every ten seconds diagnostic circuitry chamber sensitivity, checking to see if the detector is within its UL range. If it is, the LED every ten seconds. If not, the LED a clear sign the detector needs cleaning or servicing. So, to if a 100 series is within speci range, just look at it. This meets 72 requirements for sensitivity testing. For sensitivity readout, use MOD accessory and voltmeter. Detection. Integrated thermal models provide restorable, 135-degree heat detection. Isolated thermal models feature a heat sensor that is isolated from the smoke sensor, providing a local audible smoke alarm. In these models only the isolated sensor will signal an alarm to the panel. The isolated thermal products designed for applications where local annunciation, not total facility is desired. Models. A built-in piezoelectric horn (patent pending) in the 100 sounder models produces the NFPA 72-required, 85dBA temporal pattern when the individual detector alarms or when the supply voltage is reversed. Form C Relay Specifications Contact C Relay Contact Ratings VDC Range to 93% RH, noncondensing inches (140mm) inches (43mm) with bracket Weight ounces (192 grams) Wiring Range to 100oF to 38oC) Voltage VDC (nominal) min. to 35 max. to 120oF to 50oC) VDC (nominal) min. to 35 max. Temperature Sensor thermistor Current average maximum average to 100oF to 38oC) VDC (nominal) min. to 35 max. thermistor 35mA max. at 12V typical average Current max. by panel typical max. at 12V typical max. at 24V typical max. at 24V Pattern Sounder Specifications Current avg., 100 max. Temperature Heat Sensor electronic thermistor Range (0o Range RH, noncondensing in. (140mm) in. (52mm) with bracket Weight oz. (210 grams) Wiring Voltage VDC min. to 35 max. Current Consumption typical at 12VDC, 63mA typical 24VDC, 100mA maximum VDC min. to 35 max. typical, 60mA max. at 12V typical, 65mA max. at 24V VDC min. to 35 max. typical, 60mA max. at 12V typical, 65mA max. at 24V typical, 60mA max. at 12V VDC min. to 35 max. 57mA typical, 65mA max. at 24V Ratings Temp 3 VDC VDC C C Sensor Sales and Service Sensor Headquarters Ohio Avenue Charles, IL 60174 800/SENSOR2 630/377-6495 x3 Sensor Canada 905.812.0767 905.812.0771 Sensor Europe 44.1403.276500 44.1403.276501 Sensor in China

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Smoke Detector with Heat and Integral Temp-3 Sounder 1. Wiring diagram for the 2112/24AITR detector: Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 with all sounder models, polarity must be observed on the power connections. OBSERVE POLARITY LISTED POWER (SHOWN 12/24V RESISTOR BY CLASS A WIRING (including mounting bracket): Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Alarm: Signal: Sensor: Ratings Voltage (nominal): Ripple Voltage: Current: Current: Voltage: Time: Time: Relay: Initiation and Auxiliary Relay: Ratings, Resistive Load: Considerations: inches (140 mm) inches (52 mm) oz. (210 g) to 100 (0 to 38 to 93% Relative Humidity, Noncondensing by momentary power interruption dBA minimum when in alarm or with supply polarity reversed Fixed Temperature Electronic Thermistor or 24 VDC VDC VDC of nom. Voltage (peak to peak) maximum mA typical, 60 mA max. at 12V mA typical, 65 mA max. at 24V VDC minimum second maximum seconds maximum (after 60 sec. reset) 12/24 VDC Relay changes only when the thermal alarm state is reached @ 30 VAC @ 30 VDC to the built-in temporal pattern, use these detectors only with a non-coded power supply. Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407, Guide for Use of System Smoke Detectors, which provides detailed informa- on detector spacing, placement, zoning, wiring, and special applica- Copies of this manual are available at no charge from System This manual shall be left with the owner/user of this equipment. This detector must be tested and maintained following 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at least once a Description 2112/24AITR is a 4-wire photoelectronic smoke detector that uses state-of-the-art optical sensing chamber. This detector also provides 135 fixed-temperature heat detection. The photoelectronic sensor is isolated from the fixed-temperature heat sensor, provid- a self-resetting, local audible smoke alarm that does not alarm at the Only the fixed-temperature heat sensor will cause the 2112/24AITR alarm at the panel and the relay to change its state. Installation Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical applicable local codes, and any special requirements of the local having jurisdiction. Proper wire gauges should be used. The used to connect smoke detectors to control panels and acces- devices should be color-coded to reduce the likelihood of wiring Improper connections can prevent a system from responding prop- in the event of a fire. addition, a piezoelectric horn in each detector produces an interrupted, dBA tone when the individual detector alarms or when the supply volt- polarity is reversed. In order for all detectors on a loop to sound when the panel the panel must reverse the supply voltage polarity to that upon alarm. For panels that do not reverse the polarity during a reversing relay, such as System Sensor RR-2, must be The RR-2 is designed to allow all the detectors in the same to sound when one of the detectors goes into alarm. Some pan- may require the use of programmable outputs. Refer to System literature for further information on the RR-2. of this detector is simplified by the use of a mounting bracket a plug-in screw terminal block that can be prewired to the system, the detector to be easily installed or removed for cleaning. The sensitivity can be tested in place using the MOD400R Test LED on the detector provides a local visual i

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Smoke Detector with Heat and Integral Temp-3 Sounder 1. Wiring diagram for the 2112/24AT detector: 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 with all sounder models, polarity must be observed on the power connections. OBSERVE POLARITY LISTED USED USED POWER (SHOWN 12/24V RESISTOR BY CLASS A WIRING inches (140 mm) inches (52 mm) oz. (210 g) to 100 F (0 to 38 C) to 93% Relative Humidity, Noncondensing by momentary power interruption dBA minimum when in alarm or with supply polarity reversed Fixed Temperature Electronic Thermistor or 24 VDC VDC VDC of nom. Voltage (peak to peak) maximum mA typical, 60 mA max. at 12V mA typical, 65 mA max. at 24V VDC minimum second maximum seconds maximum (after 60 sec. reset) 12/24 VDC (including mounting bracket): Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Alarm: Signal: Sensor: Ratings Voltage (nominal): Ripple Voltage: Current: Current: Voltage: Time: Time: Relay: Initiation Rating, Resistive Load: Considerations: @ 30 VDC to the built-in temporal pattern, use this detector only with a non-coded supply. Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407, for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which pro- detailed information on detector spacing, placement, wiring, and special applications. Copies of this are available at no charge from System Sensor. This manual shall be left with the owner/user of equipment. This detector must be tested and maintained NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be at least once a year. 2. Surface mounting of 2112/24AT smoke on 31/2-inch and 4-inch octagonal box: the LED stops blinking, the unit should be removed for and inspection. Description 2112/24AT is a 4-wire photoelectronic smoke detec- that uses a state-of-the-art optical sensing chamber. detector also provides restorable, 135 fixed-tempera- heat detection. The unit has a heat detection unit that integrated with the photoelectronic sensor. addition, a piezoelectric horn in each detector produces interrupted, 85 dBA tone when the individual detector or when the supply voltage polarity is reversed. In order for all detectors on a loop to sound when panel alarms, the panel must reverse the supply voltage to that loop upon alarm. For panels that do not re- the polarity during alarm, a reversing relay, such as Sensor RR-2, must be used. The RR-2 is designed allow all the detectors in the same loop to sound when of the detectors goes into alarm. Some panels may re- the use of programmable outputs. Refer to System literature for further information on the RR-2. of these detectors is simplified by the use of a bracket and a plug-in screw terminal block that be prewired to the system, allowing the detector to be installed or removed for cleaning. The detector can be tested in place using the MOD400R Test LED on the detector provides a local visual indication of detector status. If power is applied to the detector and is functioning normally in standby within the listed sensi- range, the status LED blinks every ten seconds. The also latches on in alarm. 3. 2112/24AT smoke detector mounting bracket: 2112/24AT detector is supplied with a mounting that permits the detector to be mounted: To a single gang box, or Directly to a 3-1/2 inch or 4 inch octagonal box, or To a 4 inch square electrical box by using a plaster ring. Directly to the ceiling using drywall anchors, if permit- by local codes and/or the authority having jurisdic- Feature detector includes a tamper-resistant feature that pre- its removal f

3. Remove screen assembly, pulling straight out (please 5. Removal of cover and screen for cleaning: Figure 5). 4. Remove the sensing chamber cover. 5. Clean the sensing chamber by vacuuming or blowing dust and particles. 6. Replace the sensing chamber cover, aligning the arrow the cover top with the arrow on the printed circuit 7. Replace the screen by placing the screen assembly over sensing chamber cover and twisting until it snaps place. 8. Replace the housing by aligning the three triangular on the base with their counterparts on the hous- Gently press the housing until it locks in place. to make sure that the thermistors are in the up- position. 9. Reinstall the detector. Notify the proper authorities that the system is back in refer to insert for the Limitations of Fire Alarm Systems Limited Warranty Sensor warrants its enclosed smoke detector to be free from de- in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a of three years from date of manufacture. System Sensor makes no express warranty for this smoke detector. No agent, representative, or employee of the Company has the authority to increase or alter obligations or limitations of this Warranty. The Company obligation this Warranty shall be limited to the repair or replacement of any part of smoke detector which is found to be defective in materials or work- under normal use and service during the three year period com- with the date of manufacture. After phoning System Sensor toll number 800-SENSOR2 (736-7672) for a Return Authorization number, defective units postage prepaid to: System Sensor, Repair Depart- RA #__________, 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, IL 60174. Please a note describing the malfunction and suspected cause of failure. Company shall not be obligated to repair or replace units which are to be defective because of damage, unreasonable use, modifica- or alterations occurring after the date of manufacture. In no case the Company be liable for any consequential or incidental damages breach of this or any other Warranty, expressed or implied whatsoever, if the loss or damage is caused by the Company negligence or fault. states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse- damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have rights which vary from state to state. System Sensor AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Smoke Detector with Heat and Integral Temp-3 Sounder 1. Wiring diagram for the 2112/24ATR detector: 3825 Ohio Avenue,

A Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and 2112/24TB Detectors 5.5 inches (140 mm) (including mounting bracket): 1.7 inches (43 mm) 5.3 oz. (150 g) Temperature Range Model 2112/24B: 32 to 120 (0 to 50 Model 2112/24TB: 32 to 100 (0 to 39 Humidity Range: 10% to 93% Relative Humidity, Noncondensing Alarm: Reset by momentary power interruption Sensor (2112/24TB only): 135 Fixed Temperature Electronic Thermistor Ratings Voltage (nominal): 12 or 24 VDC Minimum: 8.5 VDC Maximum: 35 VDC Ripple Voltage: 30% of nom. Voltage (peak to peak) Current: 50 maximum Current: 17 mA typical, 23 mA max. at 12V 19 mA typical, 25 mA max. at 24V Voltage: 0.8 VDC minimum Time: 0.3 seconds maximum Time: 30 seconds maximum (after 60 sec. reset) Relay: A77-716B, 12/24 Volt Initiation Contact Ratings or inductive load (60% power factor) A: 0.5A @ 30 VAC/DC Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407, for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which detailed information on detector spacing, place- zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies of manual are available at no charge from System Sensor. This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. This detector must be tested and maintained NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be at least once a year. Description 2112/24B is a 4-wire photoelectronic smoke detector uses a state-of-the-art optical sensing chamber. This is designed to provide open area protection. Model features a restoreable, built-in, fixed-tempera- (135 thermal detector. of these detectors is simplified by the use of a bracket and a plug-in screw terminal block that be prewired to the system, allowing the detector to be installed or removed for cleaning. The detector can be tested in place using the MOD400R Test LED on the detector provides a local visual indication of detector status. If power is applied to the detector, and is functioning normally in standby, the status LED blinks ten seconds. The LED also latches on in alarm. 2112/24B and 2112/24TB feature a visual indication maintenance is required if the sensing chamber drifts of its sensitivity limits, the LED ceases to blink. 1 I56-932-01 1. Surface mounting of 2112/24B smoke de- on 3 1/2 inch and 4 inch octagonal box: 2112/24B and 2112/24TB detector is supplied with a bracket that permits the detector to be mounted: To a single gang box, or Directly to a 3-1/2 inch or 4 inch octagonal box, or To a 4 inch square electrical box by using a plaster ring. Feature detector includes a tamper-resistant feature that pre- its removal from the bracket without the use of a To make the detector tamper-resistant, remove the tab by breaking it at the scribed line on the tamper tab on the detector mounting bracket (see Figure then install the detector. To remove the detector from bracket once it has been made tamper resistant, use small screwdriver to depress the tamper-resistant tab, in the slot on the mounting bracket, and turn the counterclockwise. Installation Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with the Na- Electri

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and 2112/24TD(A) Smoke Detectors Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 detector requires that you observe polarity when wiring. If wiring polarity is not observed on the loop, the unit will send an alarm signal to the control panel to signify incorrect wiring. OBSERVE POLARITY 1. Wiring diagram for the 2112/24D(A) and 2112/24TD(A) detectors: LISTED POWER (SHOWN 12/24V RESISTOR BY CLASS A WIRING Observe polarity in power and initiating loops when wiring. Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407, for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which detailed information on detector spacing, place- zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies of manual are available at no charge from System Sensor. installation in Canada, refer to CAN/ULC-S524-M91, for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems, and Part 1, sec. 32.) This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. This detector must be tested and maintained NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be at least once a year. Description 2112/24D(A) is a 4-wire photoelectronic smoke de- that uses a state-of-the-art optical sensing chamber. detector is designed to provide open area protection. 2112/24TD(A) features a restoreable, built-in, fixed- (135 thermal detector. of these detectors is simplified by the use of a bracket and a plug-in screw terminal block that be prewired to the system, allowing the detector to be installed or removed for cleaning. The detector can be tested in place using the MOD400R Test LED on the detector provides a local visual indication of detector status. If power is applied to the detector, and is functioning normally in standby, the status LED blinks ten seconds. The LED also latches on in alarm. 2112/24D(A) and 2112/24TD(A) feature a visual that maintenance is required if the sensing drifts out of its sensitivity limits, the LED ceases blink. 2112/24D(A) and 2112/24TD(A) detector is supplied a mounting bracket that permits the detector to be To a single gang box, or Directly to a 31/2-inch or 4-inch octagonal box, or To a 4 inch square electrical box by using a plaster ring. Feature detector includes a tamper-resistant feature that pre- its removal from the bracket without the use of a 1 I56-932-07 5.5 inches (140 mm) (including mounting bracket): 1.7 inches (43 mm) 5.3 oz. (150 g) Temperature Range Model 2112/24D(A): 32 to 120 (0 to 50 Model 2112/24TD(A): 32 to 100 (0 to 39 Humidity Range: 10% to 93% Relative Humidity, Noncondensing Alarm: Reset by momentary power interruption Sensor (2112/24TD(A) only): 135 Fixed Temperature Electronic Thermistor Ratings Voltage (nominal): 12 or 24 VDC Minimum: 8.5 VDC Maximum: 35 VDC Ripple Voltage: 30% of nom. Voltage (peak to peak) Current: 50 maximum Current: 17 mA typical, 23 mA max. at 12V 19 mA typical, 25 mA max. at 24V Voltage: 0.8 VDC minimum Time: 0.3 seconds maximum

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and 2112/24TR Photoelectronic Detectors Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 1. Wiring diagram for the 2112/24R and 2112/24TR detector: LISTED CLASS A WIRING POWER (SHOWN 12/24V RESISTOR BY inches (140 mm) (including mounting bracket): 1.7 inches (43 mm) Temperature Range Model 2112/24R: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 2112/24TR: 32 to 100 (0 to 39 to 93% Relative Humidity, Noncondensing by momentary power interruption Humidity Range: Alarm: Sensor (Model 2112/24TR only): 135 Fixed Temperature Electronic Thermistor Ratings Voltage (nominal): oz. (190 g) Ripple Voltage: Current: Current: Voltage: Time: Time: Relay: Initiation and Auxiliary Relay: Ratings, Resistive Load: or 24 VDC VDC VDC of nom. Voltage (peak to peak) maximum mA typical, 35 mA max. at 12V mA typical, 45 mA max. at 24V VDC minimum seconds maximum seconds maximum (after 60 sec. reset) 12/24 VDC @ 30 VAC @ 30 VDC 2. Surface mounting of 2112/24R and smoke detector on 31 and 4-inch box: Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407, for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which pro- detailed information on detector spacing, placement, wiring, and special applications. Copies of this are available at no charge from System Sensor. This manual shall be left with the owner/user of equipment. This detector must be tested and maintained NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be at

3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and 2112/24TS Smoke Detectors (including mounting bracket): Temperature Range inches (140 mm) inches (48 mm) oz. (150 g) 2112/24S: 2112/24TS: Humidity Range: Alarm: Sensor (2112/24TS only): Ratings Voltage (nominal): Ripple Voltage: Current: Current: Voltage: Time: Time: Relay: Initiation Contact Ratings to 120 F (0 to 50 C) to 100 F (0 to 38 to 93% Relative Humidity, Noncondensing by momentary power interruption F Fixed Temperature Electronic Thermistor or 24 VDC VDC VDC of nom. Voltage (peak to peak) maximum mA typical, 23 mA max. at 12V mA typical, 25 mA max. at 24V VDC minimum seconds maximum seconds maximum (after 60 sec. reset) 12/24 Volt or Inductive Load (60% power factor) A: @ 30 VAC/DC Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407, for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which pro- detailed information on detector spacing, placement, wiring, and special applications. Copies of this are available at no charge from System Sensor. of these detectors is simplified by the use of a bracket and a plug-in screw terminal block that be prewired to the system, allowing the detector to be installed or removed for cleaning. The detector sen- can be tested in place using the MOD400R Test This manual shall be left with the owner/user of equipment. This detector must be tested and maintained NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be at least once a year. Description 2112/24S is a 4-wire photoelectronic smoke detector uses a state-of-the-art optical sensing chamber. This is designed to provide open area protection. Model features a restorable, built-in, fixed-temperature F) thermal detector. LED on the detector provides a local visual indication of detector status. If power is applied to the detector, and is functioning normally in standby mode within the listed ranges, the status LED blinks once every ten sec- The LED also provides a visual indication that main- is required. If the LED stops blinking, the detector either not powered, out of the listed sensitivity range, unable to function properly. The test switch will not if the detector is below the insensitive limit. The will also latch on when the detector is in alarm. 1. Surface mounting of 2112/24S smoke on 31/2-inch and 4-inch octagonal box:

A Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Photoelectronic Detector 5.5 inches (140 mm) (including mounting bracket): 1.7 inches (43 mm) 5.3 oz. (150 g) Temperature Range: 32 to 100 (0 to 39 Humidity Range: 10% to 93% relative rumidity, noncondensing Alarm: Reset by momentary power interruption Sensor: 135 fixed temperature electronic thermistor Ratings Voltage nominal: Minimum: Maximum: Ripple Voltage: 30% of nom. voltage (peak to peak) Current: 15 mA maximum Current: at 12V: 38 mA maximum at 24V: Voltage: 0.8 VDC minimum Time: 0.3 seconds maximum Time: 30 seconds maximum (after 30 second reset) and Alarm Initiation Contact Ratings or inductive load (60% power factor) A: 0.5A @ 30 VAC/DC or 24 VDC VDC VDC mA maximum Installing thoroughly read System Sensor manual I56-407, for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which detailed information on detector spacing, place- zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies of manual are available at no charge from System Sensor. This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. This detector must be tested and maintained NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be at least once a year. Description Model 2112/24TSRB is a 4-wire photoelectronic smoke that uses a state-of-the-art optical sensing cham- This detector is designed to provide open area pro- It features a restorable, built-in, fixed-temperature thermal sensor. of this detector is simplified by the use of the bracket and plug-in screw terminal block that be prewired to the system, allowing the detector to easily installed or removed for cleaning. The detector can be tested in place using the MOD400R Test (available separately from System Sensor). 2112/24TSRB features a supervisory relay that super- the power and the sensitivity of the detector. When power to the detector is lost, the supervisory relay instantaneously. Where as, when the detector devi- from its sensitivity range indicating the need for main- the supervisory relay opens after a maintenance has continuously existed for 30 to 35 minutes. LED on the detector provides a local visual indication the detector status. If power is applied to the detector, it is functioning normally in standby, the status LED every ten seconds. The LED latches on in alarm and flashing when the detector deviates from its sensitiv- range. 1 I56-930-02 1. Surface mounting of 2112/24TSRB smoke on 31/2-inch and 4-inch octagonal box: 2112/24TSRB detector is supplied with a mounting that permits the detector to be mounted: To a single gang box, or Directly to a 31/2-inch or 4 inch octagonal box, or To a 4 inch square electrical box by using a plaster ring. Feature detector includes a tamper-resistant feature that pre- its removal from the bracket without the use of a To make the detector tamper-resistant, remove the tab by breaking it at the scribed line on the tamper tab on the detector mounting bracket (see Figure then install the detector. To remove the detector from bracket once it has been made tamper resistant, use

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Low Profile Plug-in Detectors Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Sensor (2151T only): Voltage: Current: Alarm: inches (51 mm) installed in B401 Base inches (104 mm) installed in B401 Base inches (155 mm) installed in B110LP Base oz. (88 g) to 49 (32 to 120 2151,0 to 38 (32 to 100 2151T to 93% Relative Humidity noncondensing Fixed Temperature Electronic Thermistor to 35VDC by momentary power interruption. 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 INSTALLING thoroughly read System Sensor Applications Guide for System Smoke (SPAG91), which provides detailed information on detector spacing, zoning, wiring, and special applications. This manual is available at www.systemsensor.com. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector must be tested and maintained regularly following 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at least once a year. DESCRIPTION 2151 low-profile photoelectronic detector uses a state-of-the-art optical chamber. This detector is designed to provide open area protection to be used with compatible UL listed control panels only. The capability plugging this detector into a variety of special bases makes it more versatile equivalent direct-wired models. LEDs on each detector provide local 360 visible alarm indication. They every five seconds indicating that power is applied and the detector working properly. The LEDs latch on in alarm. LEDs will be off when a condition exists indicating that the detector sensitivity is outside the limit. Remote LED annunciator capability is standard and may be imple- through an optional accessory RA400Z/RA100Z. The alarm can be only by a momentary power interruption. This detector may be tested by the internal reed switch with a magnet. SELECTION AND WIRING GUIDE to the installation instructions for the Plug-in Detector Bases for base se- and wiring instructions. System Sensor has a variety of detector bases for this smoke detector, including 2-wire applications with and with- relays and/or current limiting resistors, 4-wire and 120VAC applications. bases are provided with screw terminals for power, ground, remote an- connections and relay contact connections, if applicable. The elec- ratings for each detector-base combination are also included in the base instructions. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and Verify that all detector bases are installed, that the initiating-device have been tested, and that the wiring is correct. (Refer to detector base for testing procedure.) power from initiating-device circuits before installing detectors. detectors: Place the detector into the detector base. Turn the detector clockwise until the detector drops into place. Continue turning detector clockwise to lock it in place. Tamper Resistance: The detector bases can be made tamper resistant. capability is enabled, detectors cannot be removed from the base with- the use of a tool. See the detector base installation manual of the detector for details in using this capability. After all detectors have been installed, apply power to the control unit. Test the detector using the magnet as described under TESTING. Reset the detector at the system control panel. Notify the proper authorities that the system is back on line. testing, notify the proper authorities that the smoke detector system is maintenance and will temporarily be out of service. Disable the or system undergoing maintenance to prevent unwanted alarms. Detec- must be tested after installation and as part of periodic maintenance. Test and 2151T as follows: testing the detector, check to ensure the LEDs blink. If they not, the detector has lost power (check the wiring), it is defective (return for repair), or the detector sensitivity is outside the listed limits. Test Magnet (p/n M02-04-01 or M02-09-00) Place the magnet against the cover in the location designated by the

No text preview available.

2151 Duct Smoke for Applications System Sensor 2151 low-profile photoelectric smoke with a B114LP or B114LPBT base is listed to Laboratories 268A specifically for use in no- air-handling systems. for 2151/B114LP/B114LPBT Low-profile smoke detector design Low standby current Two LEDs blink in standby Detector head plugs easily into base Field sensitivity metering of detector to meet the requirements NFPA 72 with the use of SENS-RDR Designed for mounting on a standard electrical box Removable cover and insect screen for field cleaning Accepts 24 or 120V supply voltage 2151 can be used as a pendant mount detector in no-flow/ air-handling systems (0-3,000 FPM). The pendant /plenum 2151 is to be installed into a B114LP or B114LPBT This is the perfect combination for installation in ducts where air velocity is below 500fpm or for duct sizes as small as 8 in mounted in a standard electrical box within the duct, the head allows easy removal from the base for quick and maintenance. The 2151 heads can be combined with System Sensor B114LP 120VAC base or the B114LPBT 24VAC/ base. Listings Photoelectric Detector Specifications Specifications air duct smoke detector shall be a System Sensor model 2151 Series Smoke detector listed to UL 268A specifically for use in air handling when used in conjunction with the B114LP or B114LPBT base. The detector shall operate at air velocities up to 3,000 feet per minute. shall be capable of local testing using a magnet test on the 2151 sensor head. Specifications Temperature Range Humidity Range (4.22cm) H oz (104 g) to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% relative humidity non-condensing Plug-In Detector Base Specifications Temperature Range inches (155mm) (102 mm) square box with or without plaster ring; Minimum Depth – 1.5 inches (38 mm) Octagon Box; Minimum Depth – 1.5 inches (38 mm) to applicable sensor Operating Temperature Range using the Base/Sensor Cross Reference Chart systemsensor.com Typical Wiring Diagrams Annunciator (+) Used Used Annunciator ( used Supervisory Relay A Contacts Alarm Relay Base Terminals Function C. C. N.O. Alarm Relay N.C. C. C Contacts A LEADS VAC 10 PANEL INITIATION LOOP 10 PANEL VAC 10 LEADS VAC INITIATION LOOP ABOVE DIAGRAM SHOWS NFPA REQUIRED WIRING OF SUPERVISED SCHEMATIC SHOWN BELOW FOR REFERENCE. PANEL Typical Wiring Diagrams Annunciator (+) Coil (+) Used Annunciator ( ( Alarm Relay Base Terminals Function C. C. N.O. Alarm Relay N.C. C. A C Contacts Relay A Contacts 10 VACrms/DC VACrms/DC 10 10 VACrms/DC INITIATION LOOP ABOVE DIAGRAM SHOWS NFPA REQUIRED WIRING OF

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Low Profile Plug-in Detector SENSOR Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Alarm: inches (43 mm) inches (101 mm) oz. (102 g) to 49 C (32 to 120 F) to 93% Relative Humidity noncondensing by momentary power interruption. Selection And Wiring Guide to the installation instructions for the Plug-in Detec- Bases for base selection and wiring instructions. System has a variety of detector bases available for this detector, including 2-wire applications with and relays and/or current limiting resistors, 4-wire and applications. bases are provided with screw terminals for power, remote annunciator connections and relay contact if applicable. The electrical ratings for each combination are also included in the base in- instructions. Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407, for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which pro- detailed information on detector spacing, placement, wiring, and special applications. Copies of this are available from System Sensor. This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. The detector used with this base must be and maintained regularly following NFPA 72 require- The detector used with this base should be cleaned least once a year. Description 2151 low-profile photoelectronic detector uses a state- optical sensing chamber. This detector is de- to provide open area protection and to be used with UL listed control panels only. The capability of this detector into a variety of special bases makes more versatile than equivalent direct-wired models. LEDs on each detector provide local 360 visible alarm They flash every ten seconds indicating that is applied and the detector is working properly. The latch on in alarm. Remote LED annunciator capability standard and may be implemented through an optional RA400Z. The alarm can be reset only by a mo- power interruption. This detector may be tested by the internal reed switch with a magnet. Manuals Online! – All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, and regulations. Verify that all detector bases are installed, that the circuits have been tested, and that wiring is correct. (Refer to detector base for testing procedure.) power from initiating-device circuits before install- detectors. Install detectors: Place the detector into the detector base. Turn the detector clockwise until the detector drops place. Continue turning detector clockwise to lock it in Tamper Resistance: The detector bases can be made resistant. When capability is enabled, detectors be removed from the base without the use of a See the detector base installation manual of the de- base for details in using this capability. After all detectors have been installed, apply power to Test the detector using the magnet as described under Reset the detector at the system control panel. Notify the proper authorities that the system is back on control unit. covers are an effective way to limit the entry of dust smoke detector sensing chambers. However, they may completely prevent airborne dust particles from enter- the detector. Therefore, System Sensor recommends removal of detectors before beginning construction or dust producing activity. sure to remove the dust covers from any sensors that left in place during construction as part of returning system to service. testing, notify the proper authorities that the smoke system is undergoing maintenance and will tem- be out of service. Disable the zone or system un- maintenance to prevent unwanted alarms. must be tested after installation and as part of maintenance. Test the 2151 as follows: Before testing the detector, check to ensure the the blink. If they do not, the detector has lost (check the wiring) or it is defective (return for repair).

100 Series Plug-in Detectors Sensor 100 Series Plug-in Smoke Detectors offer performance and reliability in a profile which is just (5.1 cm) deep. Sleek, low-profile design Compatible with 400 Series product Two LEDs blink in standby, providing 360 visibility Broad range of adapter bases available with built-in shorting Hand-held sensitivity reader available Listings 2151 (photoelectric sensor) and model 2151T (photoelectric with thermal) can be used with a variety of adapter bases in wiring configurations and voltages. Other features include: current draw, stable performance in high air velocities, built-in resistant base design, remote LED option, removable cover built-in test switch. 100 series is designed to meet the performance criteria by UL. The sensing chamber is sealed against back air flow. The chamber top is covered by a one piece screen which minimizes the entry of dirt and insects. This can be removed for cleaning. Additional key features a variety of mounting bases and a full line of accessories. 100 Series photoelectric smoke detectors contain a unique optical chamber designed to sense smoke particles produced by wide range of combustion sources. A custom integrated circuit signal processing to reduce false alarms. 2151 photoelectric detector unique optical sensing chamber engineered to sense smoke by a wide range of combustion Dual electronic thermistors add 135 fixed temperature sensing on model 2151T. Series Plug-in Smoke Detector Specifications Voltage/Alarm Current Current Weight Listed Velocity Range Range Detector Spacing Adapter Base Selection Guide following Standby (when mounted in a B110LP base) 3.18%/ft. in B401 installed in B401; 6.2 installed in B110LP oz retardant thermoplastic 32 to 120 (0 to 49 Photo/thermal: 32 to 100 (0 to 38 0 3000 fpm (0 15.2 m/s) 93% RH non-condensing smooth ceilings (as defined in NFPA 72), spacing of 30 feet (900 sq. ft.) may be used as a guide. spacing may be used depending on ceiling height, high air movements, and other conditions or requirements. Base Selection Guide Model Number Type Limit contingent on panel compatibility be limited by control panel base Contact Ratings: A: C: or Inductive (60% power factor) load. at 30 VAC/DC at 110VDC, 2.0A at 30VDC at 125VAC, 2.0A at 30VAC Type Voltage A&C A&C + A C Draw on (mA) mA AC Max Gang Box Selection Guide* Model Number depth contingent on base and wire size. Refer to National Electrical Code or local applicable codes for appropriate recommendations. Information No. Octagon 4 Octagon Square mm mm photoelectric detector. Must be mounted to one of the B100 Series or B400 Series bases listed in the Adapter Base Guide. photoelectric detector with thermal. Must be mounted to one of the B100 Series or B400 Series bases listed in Adapter Base Selection Guide. mm Flange Ring for 6 Base annunciator for 2 or 4 wire systems, 3 Fits standard single gang electrical box. sensitivity reader. mounting kit (flanged)

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and 2251T Intelligent Smoke Sensors Division of Pittway Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Voltage Range: Current: Alarm Current (LED on:) Humidity Range: Temperature Range: Temperature Range: Sensor: Bases Available: to 32 VDC @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 sec. with LED blink enabled) mA @ 24 VDC to 93% Relative Humidity, noncondensing to 49 (32 to 120 2251 to 38 (32 to 100 2251T Fixed Temperature Electronic Thermistor inches (43 mm) installed in B210LP Base inches (155 mm) installed in B210LP Base inches (104 mm) installed in B501 Base oz. (102 g) 200/500 Series bases are compatible. Installing sensor must be installed in compliance with the con- panel system installation manual. The installation must the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction Sensors offer maximum performance when installed compliance with the National Fire Protection Association see NFPA 72. Description 2251 is a plug-in type smoke sensor that combines a sensing chamber with addressable-analog The sensor transmits an analog represen- of smoke density over a communication line to a panel. Rotary-decade switches are provided for set- the sensor address. Two LEDs on the sensor are con- by the panel to indicate sensor status. An output is for connection to an optional remote LED annun- (P/N RA400Z). Model 2251T features a fixed tem- (135 heat detector. 2251 and 2251T require compatible addressable to function properly. Connect these to listed-compatible control panels only. Sensor recommends spacing sensors in compliance NFPA 72. In low air flow applications with smooth space sensors 30 feet apart. For specific informa- regarding sensor spacing, placement, and special refer to NFPA 72 or the System Sensor Guide Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, available at no from System Sensor (P/N I56-407-XX). Applications: 2251 and 2251T are listed for use in See Duct Applications Guide A05-1004-XX for details pendant mount applications. Note: These products are listed for use inside duct smoke detectors. Instructions wiring must be installed in compliance with the Electrical Code, applicable local codes, and any requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. wire gauges should be used. The installation wires be color-coded to limit wiring mistakes and ease troubleshooting. Improper connections will prevent system from responding properly in the event of a fire. power from the communication line before sensors. wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordi- and regulations. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) per the diagram, see Figure 1. Set the desired address on the sensor address switches, Figure 2. Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor the base while turning it clockwise to secure it in After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the unit and activate the communication line. Test the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section this manual. 1. Wiring diagram: ANNUNCIATOR RETURN LOOP Smoke Entry: Aerosol Generator (Gemini 501) GEMINI model 501 aerosol generator can be used smoke entry testing. Set the generator to represent to 5%/ft obscuration as described in the GEMINI manual. Using the bowl shaped applicator, apply until the panel alarms. Direct Heat Method (Hair Dryer of 1000-1500 watts) only hair dryer of 1000-1500 watts should be used to test thermistors. Direct the heat toward either of the two holding the heat source approximately 12 from the detector in order to avoid damaging the housing. The detector will reset only after it has sufficient time to cool. Make su

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Intelligent Photoelectronic Sensor Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Voltage Range: Avg. Standby Current: Alarm Current (LED on:) Humidity Range: Temperature Range: to 32 VDC @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 sec. with LED blink enabled) mA @ 24 VDC to 93% Relative Humidity, noncondensing to 49 (32 to 120 inches (43 mm) installed in B210LP Base inches (155 mm) installed in B210LP Base inches (104 mm) installed in B501 Base oz. (102 g) Installing sensor must be installed in compliance with the con- panel system installation manual. The installation meet the requirements of the Authority Having Juris- (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance when in compliance with the National Fire Protection (NFPA); see NFPA 72. Description 2251 is a plug-in type smoke sensor that combines a sensing chamber with addressable-analog The sensor transmits an analog represen- of smoke density over a communication line to a panel. Rotary-decade switches are provided for set- the sensor address. Two LEDs on the sensor are con- by the panel to indicate sensor status. An output is for connection to an optional remote LED annun- (P/N RA400Z). 2251 requires compatible addressable communica- to function properly. Connect this sensor to listed- control panels only. Sensor recommends spacing sensors in compliance NFPA 72. In low air flow applications with smooth space sensors 30 feet apart. For specific informa- regarding sensor spacing, placement, and special ap- refer to NFPA 72 or the System Sensor Guide For Use of System Smoke Detectors, available at no from System Sensor (P/N I56-407-XX). Instructions wiring must be installed in compliance with the Na- Electrical Code, applicable local codes, and any spe- requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. wire gauges should be used. The installation wires be color-coded to limit wiring mistakes and ease troubleshooting. Improper connections will prevent system from responding properly in the event of a fire. power from the communication line before in- sensors. wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordi- and regulations. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) per the wir- diagram, see Figure 1. Set the desired address on the sensor address switches, Figure 2. Install the sensor in to the sensor base. Push the sensor the base while turning it clockwise to secure it in After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the unit and activate the communication line. Test the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section this manual. Manuals Online! – 1. Wiring diagram: ANNUNCIATOR RETURN LOOP I covers provide limited protection against airborne particles during shipping. Dust covers must be re- before the sensors can sense smoke. Remove sen- prior to heavy remodeling or construction. testing, notify the proper authorities that the system undergoing maintenance, and will temporarily be out of Disable the system to prevent unwanted alarms. sensors must be tested after installation and periodi- thereafter. Testing methods must satisfy the Authority Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum perfor- when tested and maintained in compliance with 72. sensor can be tested in the following ways: Functional: Magnet Test (P/N M02-04-01) sensor can be functionally tested with a test mag- The test magnet electronically simulates smoke in sensing chamber, testing the sensor electronics and to the control panel. Hold the test magnet in the magnet test area as shown Figure 3. The sensor should alarm the panel. LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to sensor status. Coded signals, transmitted the panel, can cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, latch off. Refer to the control panel technical docu- for sensor LED status operation and ex- delay to alarm. Sensitiv

Advanced Multi- Fire Detector four unique sensing elements latest addition to the System Sensor 200 Series four complementary technologies into one to convey accurate fire sensing information for where absolute certainty is required. Unique ability to detect all four major elements of a fire Highest nuisance alarm immunity Advanced algorithms interpret and respond to the multiple inputs Six levels of sensitivity CO sensing for fastest response to slow-developing, smoldering fires Fully integrated infrared sensing to support the fire alarm decision Automatic drift compensation of smoke sensor and CO cell Superior EMI protection Twin LED indicators providing 360 visibility LEDs can be panel controlled to blink, latch on, latch off Built-in test switch Listings plug-in fire detector combines four separate sensing elements one unit: 1. photoelectric chamber senses airborne particulate smoke detection, 2. electrochemical cell technology monitors monoxide (CO) produced by smoldering fires, 3. infrared (IR) measures ambient light levels and flame signatures, and 4. detection monitors temperature. integration of continual monitoring for all four major elements of fire has enabled System Sensor to create a detector that responds quickly to an actual fire with the highest immunity to nuisances. advanced multi-criteria detector normally operates at a high level and changes to become very sensitive to fires as as fire characteristics are sensed. In this way, nuisances are and ignored, reducing false alarms. detector onboard intelligence runs advanced algorithms that adjust detection parameters to respond to the inputs the sensors, enabling instant response as ambient conditions The program changes sensor thresholds, sensor gain, time, combinations, sampling rates and averaging rates. If any fails, the detector automatically adjusts the sensitivity of the sensors. It also recognizes a fault condition. CO sensing cell has an expected lifetime of approximately years. The CO cell is not a field-replaceable component. An timer signals the control panel to indicate the approach of CO cell end of life. Upon expiration, you should contact the supplier to arrange for replacement of the unit. However, is not compromised when the CO cell is expired. The automatically adjust to properly weight the inputs from the heat and IR sensors. IR light sensor recognizes specific situations, such as welding, makes adjustments rapidly to further reduce the potential for alarms. The thermal detection function fuses thermistor with a software-corrected, linear temperature response offer exceptional nuisance alarm immunity and excellent fire The CO cell is specifically deployed as a component of smoke in this device. This device is not listed for applications in standalone CO detection is required for life safety. Specifications Specifications inches inches installed in B210LP base or B501 base installed in B210LP base; 4.0 installed in B501 base oz FR110 to 93% relative humidity (non-condensing) to 100 (0 to 38 to 4000 ft/min (0 to 20 m/sec) Weight Humidity Range Temperature Range Velocity Specifications Voltage Range Standby Current Alarm Current (LED on) Settings and Suggested Applications 1 2 3 / ft of smoke / ft of smoke / ft of smoke to 32 VDC at 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with LED blink enabled) at 24 VDC clean environments laboratories environments offices clean environments rooms, dorm rooms rooms near a shower, boiler rooms 4 / ft of smoke with different algorithm and weighting of sensor elements / ft of smoke alarm at 135 (57 5 6 the CO cell has reached the end of life and enters Photo, Thermal, Infrared (PTIR) mode, the following sensitivities apply: clean environments laboratories 1

I AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Sensor 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Voltage Range: Current: Alarm Current (LED on:) Humidity Range: Temperature Range: to 32 VDC @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 sec. with LED blink enabled) mA @ 24 VDC to 93% Relative Humidity, Non-condensing to 38 (32 to 100 (69 mm) installed in B210LP Base (155 mm) installed in B210LP Base; 4.0 (102 mm) installed in B501 Base oz. (130 g) INSTALLINg sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system manual. The installation must meet the requirements of the Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance installed in compliance with the National Fire Protection Association see NFPA 72. DESCRIPTION 2251-COPTIR is a plug-in type smoke sensor that is a photoelectronic chamber combined with carbon monoxide (CO), thermal, infra-red sensors and addressable-analog communications. The sensors transmit analog representation of smoke density over a communication line to a panel. Rotary-decade switches are provided for setting the sensor LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor sta- An output is provided for connection to an optional remote LED an- (P/N RA100Z /RA400Z). 2251-COPTIR requires compatible addressable communications to properly. Connect these sensors to listed-compatible control pan- only. Sensor recommends spacing sensors in compliance with NFPA 72. low air flow applications with smooth ceilings, space sensors 30 feet For specific information regarding sensor spacing, placement, and applications, refer to NFPA 72 or the System Smoke Detector Applica- Guide, available from System Sensor. 2251-COPTIR includes a tamper-resistant capability that prevents from the bracket without the use of a tool. Refer to the base man- for details on making use of this capability. gUIDE wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical applicable local codes, and any special requirements of the Authority Jurisdiction. Proper wire gauges should be used. The installation should be color-coded to limit wiring mistakes and ease system trou- Improper connections will prevent a system from responding in the event of a fire. power from the communication line before installing sensors. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) per the wiring diagram, see 1. Set the desired address on the sensor address switches, see Figure 2. Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor into the base turning it clockwise to secure it in place. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control unit activate the communication line. Test the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section of this manual. covers provide limited protection against airborne dust particles dur- shipping. Dust covers must be removed before the sensors can sense Remove sensors prior to heavy remodeling or construction. 1. WIRINg DIAgRAM: ANNUNCIATOR DO NOT LOOP WIRE TERMINAL 1 OR 2. WIRE RUN TO PROVIDE OF CONNECTIONS. RETURN LOOP 2. ROTARy DECADE ADDRESS SWITChES: 0 0 testing, notify the proper authorities that the system is undergoing and will temporarily be out of service. Disable the system to unwanted alarms. sensors must be tested after installation and periodically thereafter. Testing must satisfy the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer performance when tested and maintained in compliance with NFPA sensor can be tested in the following ways: Functional: Magnet Test (P/N M02-04-01 or M02-09-00) This sensor can be functionally tested with a test magnet. The test electronically simulates smoke in the sensing chamber, testi

No text preview available.

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 2251TB and 2251TMB Photoelectric Smoke Sensors Voltage Range: Current: Alarm Current (LED on:) Humidity Range: Temperature Range: Sensor: refer to your isolator base/module manual for isolator calculation instructions. to 32 VDC @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with LED blink enabled) mA @ 24 VDC to 93% Relative Humidity, Non-condensing to 120 (0 to 49 2251B; 32 to 100 (0 to 38 2251TB and 2251TMB Fixed Temperature Electronic Thermistor (51 mm) installed in B210LP Base (155 mm) installed in B210LP Base; 4.1 (104 mm) installed in B501 Base oz. (147 g)Isolator Load Rating: Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 Fax: 630.377.6495 INSTALLING sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system manual. The installation must meet the requirements of the Au- Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance when in compliance with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); NFPA 72. DESCRIPTION 2251B, 2251TB and 2251TMB are plug-in type smoke sensors that com- a photoelectronic sensing chamber with addressable-analog communica- The sensors transmit an analog representation of smoke density over a line to a control panel. Rotary-decade switches are provided setting the sensor address. LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor status. output is provided for connection to an optional remote LED annunciator RA400Z/RA100Z). Models 2251TMB and 2251TB combine a photoelec- sensing chamber and 135 (57.2 fixed temperature heat detector. 2251TMB also transmits an alarm signal due to heat (135 fixed) per 521. 2251B, 2251TB and 2251TMB require compatible addressable communica- to function properly. Connect these sensors to listed-compatible control only. Sensor recommends spacing sensors in compliance with NFPA 72. In air flow applications with smooth ceilings, space sensors 30 feet apart. using the 2251TMB as a heat detector in FM3210 compliant applica- space sensors 20 feet apart. For specific information regarding sensor placement, and special applications, refer to NFPA 72 or the System Detector Application Guide, available from System Sensor. Applications: 2251B and 2251TB are listed for use in ducts. See Duct Guide A05-1004-XX for details on pendant mount applications. 2251B is listed for use inside DNR(W) duct smoke detectors. GUIDE wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, local codes, and any special requirements of the Authority Having Proper wire gauges should be used. The installation wires should color-coded to limit wiring mistakes and ease system troubleshooting. Im- connections will prevent a system from responding properly in the of a fire. power from the communication line before installing sensors. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) per the wiring diagram, Figure 1. Set the desired address on the sensor address switches, see Figure 2. Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor into the base turning it clockwise to secure it in place. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control unit and the communication line. Test the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section of this manual. covers provide limited protection against airborne dust particles during Dust covers must be removed before the sensors can sense smoke. sensors prior to heavy remodeling or construction. 1. WIRING DIAGRAM: DO NOT LOOP WIRE TERMINAL 1 OR 2. WIRE RUN TO PROVIDE OF CONNECTIONS. A OPTIONAL WIRING 2. ROTARY DECADE ADDRESS SWITCHES: 0 0 2251B, 2251TB and 2251TMB include a tamper-resistant capabil

I Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 Fax: 630.377.6495 to 32 VDC @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with LED blink enabled) mA @ 24 VDC to 93% Relative Humidity, Non-condensing to 120 (0 to 49 2251BR to 158 ( to 70 2251BR in duct applications (51 mm) installed in B210LP Base (155 mm) installed in B210LP Base; 4.1 (104 mm) installed in B501 Base oz. (147 g) AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Intelligent Photoelectric Sensor with Remote Test in Duct Applications Voltage Range: Current: Alarm Current (LED on:) Humidity Range: Temperature Range: Load Rating: refer to your isolator base/module manual for isolator calculation instructions. INSTALLING sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system manual. The installation must meet the requirements of the Au- Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance when in compliance with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); NFPA 72. DESCRIPTION 2251BR is a plug-in type smoke sensors that combines a photoelec- sensing chamber with addressable-analog communications. The sensor an analog representation of smoke density over a communication to a control panel. Rotary-decade switches are provided for setting the address. LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor status. output is provided for connection to an optional remote LED annunciator RA400Z/RA100Z). 2251BR is used in duct applications with a DNR/DNRW, testing can be remotely using approved System Sensor test accessories, eliminating the for a test coil. Only System Sensor approved accessories may be used with the 2251BR requires compatible addressable communications to function Connect the 2251BR sensor to listed-compatible control panels only. Sensor recommends spacing sensors in compliance with NFPA 72. In air flow applications with smooth ceilings, space sensors 30 feet apart. specific information regarding sensor spacing, placement, and special ap- refer to NFPA 72 or the System Smoke Detector Application Guide, from System Sensor. Applications: 2251BR is listed for use in ducts. See Duct Applications A05-1004-XX for details on pendant mount applications. GUIDE wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, local codes, and any special requirements of the Authority Having Proper wire gauges should be used. The installation wires should color-coded to limit wiring mistakes and ease system troubleshooting. Im- connections will prevent a system from responding properly in the of a fire. power from the communication line before installing sensors. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) per the wiring diagram, Figure 1. Set the desired address on the sensor address switches, see Figure 2. Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor into the base turning it clockwise to secure it in place. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control unit and the communication line. Test the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section of this manual. covers provide limited protection against airborne dust particles during Dust covers must be removed before the sensors can sense smoke. sensors prior to heavy remodeling or construction. 1. WIRING DIAGRAM: DO NOT LOOP WIRE TERMINAL 1 OR 2. WIRE RUN TO PROVIDE OF CONNECTIONS. A OPTIONAL WIRING Only System Sensor approved accessories may be used with the 2251BR. 2. ROTARY DECADE ADDRESS SWITCHES: 0 0 2251BR includes a tamper-resistant capability that prevents its removal the bracket without the use of a tool. Refer to the base manual for details making

No text preview available.

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Intelligent Smoke Sensor Division of Pittway Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Voltage Range: Current: Alarm Current (LED on:) Humidity Range: Temperature Range: Sensor: Bases Available: to 32 VDC @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 sec. with LED blink enabled) mA @ 24 VDC to 93% Relative Humidity, noncondensing to 38 (32 to 100 Fixed Temperature Electronic Thermistor inches (43 mm) installed in B210LP Base inches (155 mm) installed in B210LP Base inches (104 mm) installed in B501 Base oz. (142 g) 200/500 Series bases are compatible. Installing sensor must be installed in compliance with the con- panel system installation manual. The installation must the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction Sensors offer maximum performance when installed compliance with the National Fire Protection Association see NFPA 72. Description 2251TM is a plug-in type smoke sensor that com- a photoelectronic sensing chamber and 135 fixed temperature heat detection. The sensor uses communications to transmit smoke den- and other information to the control panel. Rotary- switches are provided for setting the sensor Two LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the to indicate sensor status. An output is provided for to an optional remote LED annunciator (P/N detector requires compatible addressable commu- to function properly. Connect this sensor to control panels only. Sensor recommends spacing sensors in compliance NFPA 72. In low air flow applications with smooth space sensors 30 feet apart. For specific informa- regarding sensor spacing, placement, and special refer to NFPA 72 or the System Sensor Guide Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, available from Sensor (P/N I56-407-XX). Instructions wiring must be installed in compliance with the Electrical Code, applicable local codes, and any requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. wire gauges should be used. The installation wires be color-coded to limit wiring mistakes and ease troubleshooting. Improper connections will prevent system from responding properly in the event of a fire. power from the communication line before sensors. wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordi- and regulations. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) per the diagram, see Figure 1. Set the desired address on the sensor address switches, Figure 2. Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor the base while turning it clockwise to secure it in After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the unit and activate the communication line. Test the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section this manual. 1. Wiring diagram: ANNUNCIATOR RETURN LOOP covers provide limited protection against airborne particles during shipping. Dust covers must be before the sensors can sense smoke. Remove sen- prior to heavy remodeling or construction. testing, notify the proper authorities that the system undergoing maintenance, and will temporarily be out of Disable the system to prevent unwanted alarms. sensors must be tested after installation and periodical- thereafter. Testing methods must satisfy the Authority Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum per- when tested and maintained in compliance with 72. sensor can be tested in the following ways: Functional: Magnet Test (P/N M02-04-01 or M02-09-00) sensor can be functionally tested with a test mag- The test magnet electronically simulates smoke in sensing chamber, testing the sensor electronics and to the control panel. Hold the test magnet in the magnet test area as shown Figure 3. Th

Product Multi-Criteria Acclimating Detectors and Engineering Specifications multi-criteria acclimating detector shall be a System Sensor model number 2251TMB. device shall be designed to monitor a space with a minimum of photoelectric and technologies in single sensing device. The detector shall include the ability to adapt to its and choose appropriate sensing settings. The detector shall allow a wide sensitivity with no less than 1 to 4 percent per foot obscuration. device shall be capable of selecting appropriate sensitivity levels based on environment type: as office, manufacturing, or kitchen, and then have ability to automatically change setting as changes, as when walls are moved or as occupancy changes. The detector shall be of automatically adjusting its sensitivity by means of drift compensation and smoothing The device shall provide unique signals to indicate when 20% of the drift range is when 100% of drift range is used, and when there is a chamber fault to indicate unit maintenance. The device shall be able to indicate distinct smoke and heat alarms. multi-criteria detection device shall include the ability to combine the signals of thermal with the signal of a photoelectric sensor to react quickly in event of fire situation. detectors shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using rotary switches. of the possibility of installation error, systems that use binary jumpers or DIP switches to the detector address are not acceptable. The detectors shall also store an internal identifying that the control panel shall use to identify the type of detector. Systems that require a programmer to set the detector address (including temporary connection at the panel) are intensive and not acceptable. Each detector occupies any one of at least 99 possible on the signaling line circuit (SLC) loop. It responds to regular polls from the system reports its type and status. detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel. There are three test methods: magnet, smoke entry aerosol, or direct heat method. detectors shall provide two LEDs to provide 360 visibility. The LEDs are placed into steady illumination by the control panel indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. An connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED, base, and / or relay base (optional accessories). The external remote alarm can be to other sounder or relay bases for activating all devices in a space via a single unit. LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor status. Coded signals, from the panel, can cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, or latch off. Refer to the control technical documentation for sensor LED status operation and expected delay to alarm. detectors shall be low profile ceiling-mount and shall be plug-in mounted into a twist-lock These detectors shall be constructed of off-white UV resistant polymer and shall be from the mounting base to simplify installation, service and maintenance. Mounting wiring connections shall be made by means of SEMS screws. The detector shall allow pre- of the base and the head shall be a plug-in type. Mounting base shall be mounted on box which is at least 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) deep. Mounting base shall be available to to standard junction boxes. Suitable boxes include: (10.16 cm) square box with and without plaster ring. (10.16 cm) octagonal box. 2009 (8.89 cm) octagonal box. box. 268 -Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Signaling Systems Agency Standards CAN/ULC-S529- Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems 3230-3250- Smoke Actuated Detectors for Automatic Fire Alarm Signaling 2009

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS MODEL 2300TB installing detectors, please thoroughly read System Sensor Manual I56-407-XX, Guide for Proper Use of System Smoke which provides detailed information on detector spacing, placement, zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies this manual are available at no charge from System Sensor. DESCRIPTION: 2300TB is a 2-wire combination smoke/heat detector. In addition to photoelectronic smoke detection, two supervised thermistors provide restorable 135 fixed temperature heat detection. The installation is simplified by the use of an bracket and a plug-in screw terminal block which can be pre-wired to the system allowing the detector to be easily or removed for cleaning. It is designed to provide open area protection, and to be used with UL listed compatible 2- control panels. The detector sensitivity can be tested in place using the MOD400R field sensitivity test module. 2300TB is listed to UL 268 and is a latching type system detector. When latched in alarm, the detector must be reset by momentary power interruption. LED on the detector provides a local indication of the detector status. If power is applied to the detector, and the detector functioning properly in standby, the status LED will blink every 10 seconds. The detector performs a self-test on its smoke chamber and internal electronics every 40 seconds. If this test fails, the detector stops blinking the status LED in and the LED will remain off. In alarm, the LED will be latched on continuously until the detector is reset. detector provides an output for connection to an optional Remote Annunciator (model RA400Z). The Remote Annunciator to a single gang box and provides an LED indication of an alarm condition. 5.5 inches (14 cm) 2.5 inches (64 mm) 0.7 lb (310 gm) Temperature Range: 0 to +38 C (32 to 100 F) Humidity Range: 10% to 90% Relative Humidity Non-condensing Alarm: Reset by momentary power interruption. Feature: Recessed test switch. Air Velocity: 3000 Ft./Min. (15 Meters/Sec.). Nominal 3%/Ft. Sensor: 135 Fixed Temperature Electronic Thermistor RATINGS: Voltage nominal: 12 or 24 VDC minimum: 8.5 VDC maximum: 35 VDC Ripple Voltage: 30% of nom. Voltage (peak to peak) Capacitance: 0.02 maximum Current: 120 maximum Ratings: 4.2 VDC minimum at 10 mA. 6.6 VDC maximum at 100 mA. Alarm current must be limited to 100 mA maximum by the control panel. If used, the RA400Z Remote Annunciator operates within the specified detector alarm currents. Voltage: 2.5 VDC minimum Time: .3 Sec. maximum Time: 34 Sec. maximum (After 60 Sec. Reset) I56-490-05 System Sensor, 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174, 1-800-SENSOR2, FAX 708-377-6495 1. 2300TB Smoke/Heat Detector 2300TB detector is supplied with a mounting bracket that permits the detector to be mounted: To a single gang box, or Directly to a 3-1/2 inch or 4 inch octagonal box, or To a 4 inch square electrical box by using a plaster ring.

firealarmresources.com

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS MODEL 2312/24TB installing detectors, please thoroughly read System Sensor Manual I56-407-XX, Guide for Proper Use of System Smoke which provides detailed information on detector spacing, placement, zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies of this are available at no charge from System Sensor. DESCRIPTION: 2312/24TB is a 4-wire combination smoke/heat detector. In addition to photoelectronic smoke detection, two supervised elec- thermistors provide restorable 135 fixed temperature heat detection. The installation is simplified by the use of an adaptor and a plug-in screw terminal block which can be pre-wired to the system allowing the detector to be easily installed or removed cleaning. It is designed to provide open area protection, and to be used with UL listed 4-wire control panels. The detector sen- can be tested in place using the MOD400R field sensitivity test module. 2312/24TB is listed to UL 268 and is a latching type system detector. When latched in alarm, the detector must be reset by a power interruption. LED on the detector provides a local indication of the detector status. If power is applied to the detector, and the detector is properly in standby, the status LED will blink every 10 seconds. The detector performs a self-test on its smoke sensing and internal electronics every 40 seconds. If this test fails, the detector stops blinking the status LED in standby, and the will remain off. In alarm, the LED will be latched on continuously until the detector is reset. 5.5 inches (14 cm) 2.5 inches (6.4 cm) 0.7 lb (310 gm) Temperature Range: 0 to +38 C (32 to 100 F) Humidity Range: 10% to 90% Relative Humidity Non-condensing Alarm: Reset by momentary power interruption. Feature: Recessed test switch. Air Velocity: 3000 Ft./Min. (15 Meters/Sec.). Nominal 3%/Ft. Sensor: 135 Fixed Temperature Electronic Thermistor RATINGS: Voltage nominal: 12 or 24 VDC minimum: 8.5 VDC maximum: 35 VDC Ripple Voltage: 30% of nom. Voltage (peak to peak) Current: 120 max. Current: 10mA minimum. 50mA maximum. Voltage: 0.8 VDC minimum Time: 6 Sec. maximum Time: 34 Sec. maximum (After 60 Sec. Reset) relay: A77-716B, 12/24 Volt INITIATION CONTACT RATINGS: or inductive load (60% power factor): A: 2.0A @ 30 VAC/DC 1. 2312/24TB Smoke/Heat Detector I56-431-06 Sensor, 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174, 1-800-SENSOR2, FAX: 708-377-6495 2312/24TB detector is supplied with a mounting bracket that permits the detector to be mounted: To a single gang box, or Directly to a 3-1/2 inch or 4 inch octagonal box, or To a 4 inch square electrical box by using a plaster ring.

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and 2351B-IV Photoelectric Smoke Sensors Voltage Range: Current @ 24 VDC: Alarm Current: Current: Humidity Range: Temperature Range: Velocity: Load Rating: refer to your isolator base/module manual for isolator calculation instructions. to 32 VDC uA (one communication every 5 seconds with green LED blink on communication) mA @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with red LED solid on) mA @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with amber LED solid on) to 93% Relative Humidity, Non-condensing to 122 (0 to 50 to 4000 ft./min. (0 to 1219.2 m/min.) (51 mm) installed in B300-6 Base (156 mm) installed in B300-6 Base; 4.1 (104 mm) installed in B501 Base oz. (95 g) Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630/377-6495 268 listed for Open Air Protection. listed for Duct Applications. sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system manual. The installation must meet the requirements of the Au- Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance when in compliance with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); NFPA 72. DESCRIPTION 2351B and 2351B-IV are plug-in type smoke sensors that combine a sensing chamber with addressable-analog communications. sensors transmit an analog representation of smoke density over a com- line to a control panel. Rotary dial switches are provided for set- the sensor address. (See Figure 1.) 1. ROTARY ADDRESS SWITCHES 0 0 LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor status. output is provided for connection to an optional remote LED annunciator RA100Z). Sensor panels offer different features sets across different models. As a certain features of the photoelectric sensors may be available on some panels, but not on others. 2351B and 2351B-IV support Advanced Pro- and CLIP (Classic Loop Interface Protocol) mode. The possible features if supported by the control panel are: The sensor LEDs can operate in three ways off, and blinking can be set to red, green, or amber. This is controlled by the panel. The remote output may be synchronized to the LED operation or con- independent of the LEDs. Devices are point addressable up to 159 addresses. refer to the operation manual for the UL listed control panel for specific The photoelectric sensors require compatible addressable com- to function properly. Connect these sensors to listed-compatible panels only. Sensor recommends spacing sensors in compliance with NFPA 72. In air flow applications with smooth ceilings, space sensors 30 feet apart m). For specific information regarding sensor spacing, placement, and applications, refer to NFPA 72 or the System Smoke Detector Applica- Guide, available from System Sensor. Applications: 2351B and 2351B-IV are listed for use in ducts. See Duct Detectors Applications Guide HVAG53 for details on pendant mount ap- NOTE: Intelligent photoelectric smoke sensors are also listed for use DNR(W) duct smoke detectors. GUIDE wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, local codes, and any special requirements of the Authority Having Proper wire gauges should be used. The installation wires should color-coded to limit wiring mistakes and ease system troubleshooting. Im- connections will prevent a system from responding properly in the of a fire. power from the communication line before installing sensors. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) as shown in the wiring (See Figure 2.) Set the desired address on the sensor address switches. (See Figure 1.) Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor into the base while it clockwise to secure it in place. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control panel and the communication line. Test the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section of this manual. covers provide limited

I Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630/377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and 2351BR-IV Photoelectric Smoke Sensor Remote Test Capability in Duct Applications Voltage Range: Current @ 24 VDC: Alarm Current: Current: Humidity Range: Temperature Range: Velocity: Load Rating: refer to your isolator base/module manual for isolator calculation instructions. to 32 VDC uA (one communication every 5 seconds with green LED blink on communication) mA @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with red LED solid on) mA @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with amber LED solid on) to 93% Relative Humidity, Non-condensing to 122 (0 to 50 -4 to 158 (-20 to 70 in duct applications to 4000 ft./min. (0 to 1219.2 m/min.) (51 mm) installed in B300-6 Base (155 mm) installed in B300-6 Base; 4.1 (104 mm) installed in B501 Base oz. (147 g) listed for Duct Applications sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system manual. The installation must meet the requirements of the Au- Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance when in compliance with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); NFPA 72. DESCRIPTION 2351BR and 2351BR-IV are plug-in type smoke sensors that combines photoelectronic sensing chamber with addressable-analog communications. used in duct applications with a DNR(W), testing can be done remotely approved System Sen sor test accessories, eliminating the need for a test The sensors transmit an analog representation of smoke density over a line to a control panel. Rotary dial switches are provided for the sensor address. 1. ROTARY ADDRESS SWITCHES 0 0 LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor status. output is provided for connection to an optional remote LED annunciator RA100Z). Only System Sensor approved accessories may be used with the 2351BR 2351BR-IV. Sensor panels offer different features sets across different models. As a certain features of the photoelectric sensors may be available on some panels, but not on others. 2351BR and 2351BR-IV support Advanced and CLIP (Classic Loop Interface Protocol) mode. The possible fea- available if supported by the control panel are: The sensor LEDs can operate in three ways off, and blinking can be set to red, green, or amber. This is controlled by the panel. The remote output may be synchronized to the LED operation or con- independent of the LEDs. Devices are point addressable up to 159 addresses. refer to the operation manual for the UL listed control panel for specific The 2351BR and 2351BR-IV require compatible addressable com- to function properly. Connect these sensors to listed-compatible panels only. Sensor recommends spacing sensors in compliance with NFPA 72. In air flow applications with smooth ceilings, space sensors 30 feet apart m). For specific information regarding sensor spacing, placement, and applications, refer to NFPA 72 or the System Smoke Detector Applica- Guide, available from System Sensor. Applications: 2351BR and 2351BR-IV are listed for use in ducts. See Duct Detectors Applications Guide HVAG53 for details on pendant mount NOTE: 2351BR and 2351BR-IV are also listed for use inside duct smoke detectors. GUIDE wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, local codes, and any special requirements of the Authority Having Proper wire gauges should be used. The installation wires should color-coded to limit wiring mistakes and ease system troubleshooting. Im- connections will prevent a system from responding properly in the of a fire. power from the communication line before installing sensors. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) per the wiring diagram, Figure 2. Set the desired address on the sensor address switches, see Figure 1. Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor into the b

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and 2351TB-IV Photoelectric and Temperature Sensors Voltage Range: Current @ 24 VDC: Alarm Current: Current: Humidity Range: Temperature Range: Velocity: Load Rating: refer to your isolator base/module manual for isolator calculation instructions. to 32 VDC uA (one communication every 5 seconds with green LED blink on communication) mA @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with red LED solid on) mA @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with amber LED solid on) to 93% Relative Humidity, Non-condensing to 115 (0 to 47 to 4000 ft./min. (0 to 1219.2 m/min.) (51 mm) installed in B300-6 Base (156 mm) installed in B300-6 Base; 4.1 (104 mm) installed in B501 Base oz. (95 g) Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630/377-6495 268 listed for Open Air Protection 521 listed for Heat Detectors sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system manual. The installation must meet the requirements of the Au- Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance when in compliance with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); NFPA 72. DESCRIPTION 2351TB and 2351TB-IV are plug-in type multi-sensor smoke sensors combine a photoelectronic sensing chamber and 135 (57.2 fixed heat detector across addressable-analog communications. The transmit an analog representation of smoke density over a communi- line to a control panel. Rotary dial switches are provided for setting the address. (See Figure 1.) The intelligent photoelectric and temperature also transmit an alarm signal due to heat at 135 (57.2 per UL 1. ROTARY ADDRESS SWITCHES 0 0 LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor status. output is provided for connection to an optional remote LED annunciator RA100Z). Sensor panels offer different features sets across different models. As result, certain features of the photoelectric and temperature sensors may be on some control panels, but not on others. 2351TB and 2351TB-IV Advanced Protocol and CLIP (Classic Loop Interface Protocol) mode. possible features available if supported by the control panel are: The sensor LEDs can operate in three ways off, and blinking can be set to red, green, or amber. This is controlled by the panel. The remote output may be synchronized to the LED operation or con- independent of the LEDs. Devices are point addressable up to 159 addresses. refer to the operation manual for the UL listed control panel for spe- operation. The photoelectric and temperature sensors require compatible communications to function properly. Connect these sensors to control panels only. Sensor recommends spacing sensors in compliance with NFPA 72. In air flow applications with smooth ceilings, space sensors 30 feet apart m). When using the photoelectric and temperature sensors as a heat de- in FM3210 compliant applications, space sensors 20 feet apart (6 m). For information regarding sensor spacing, placement, and special appli- refer to NFPA 72 or the System Smoke Detector Application Guide, from System Sensor. GUIDE wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, local codes, and any special requirements of the Authority Having Proper wire gauges should be used. The installation wires should color-coded to limit wiring mistakes and ease system troubleshooting. Im- connections will prevent a system from responding properly in the of a fire. power from the communication line before installing sensors. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) per the wiring diagram, Figure 2. Set the desired address on the sensor address switches, see Figure 1. Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor into the base while it clockwise to secure it in place. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control panel and the communication line. Test

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and 2400TH Direct Wire Smoke Detectors 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 5.5 inches (140 mm) 3.14 inches (80 mm) Add 0.5 inches (13 mm) for 2400TH 0.7 lb. (310 gm) Temperature Range: Model 2400 0 to +49 (32 to 120 Model 2400TH 0 to 38 (32 to 100 Humidity Range: 10% to 93% Relative Humidity Non-condensing Air Velocity: 3000 ft/min (15m/s) Alarm: Reset by momentary power interruption Ratings Voltage: 12/24 VDC Ripple Voltage: 4 Volts peak-to-peak Capacitance: 0.02 Maximum Ratings: 8.5 VDC Minimum; 35 VDC Maximum 120 Maximum Ratings: 4.2 VDC Minimum at 10 mA 6.6 VDC Maximum at 100 mA Alarm current must be limited to 100mA maximum by the control panel. If used, the Remote Annunciator operates within the specified detector alarm currents. Voltage: 2.5 VDC Minimum Time: 0.3 S Maximum Time: 34 S Maximum Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual A05- Applications Guide for System Smoke Detectors. This provides detailed information on detector spacing, zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies this manual are available at no charge from System (For installations in Canada refer to CAN4-S524, for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems and Part 1, Sec. 32). This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. This sensor must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. This sensor be cleaned at least once a year. 2400, but also features a restorable, built-in, fixed (135 thermal detection unit. detectors are listed to UL 268 and are latching type detectors. When latched in alarm, the detectors be reset by a momentary power interruption. LED on the detector provides a local indication of the status. This LED blinks every 10 seconds when detector is receiving power and ready in standby and latched on continuously in alarm until the detector is The detector provides an output for connection to optional Remote Annunciator (Model RA400Z). The Annunciator mounts to a single gang box and pro- a supplementary alarm indication. Description Sensor 2400 photoelectronic detectors use state- optical sensing chambers. These detectors are to provide open area protection, and are intended use with compatible UL-listed 2-wire control panels The detector operation and sensitivity can be tested place. Model 2400TH has the same specifications as 1 I56-285-05R 72E defines the spacing requirements for smoke typically 30 feet when detectors are installed on smooth ceiling. However, ALL installations must comply NFPA 72 and/or special requirements of the authority jurisdiction. 1. Flush mounting of 2400TH smoke detector 31 and 4-inch octagonal box: 2. 2400 Smoke detector mounting bracket: 2400 detector is supplied with a mounting bracket kit permits the detector to be mounted: Directly to a 31 or 4-inch octagonal, 11 deep box, (See Figure 1) or: To a 4-inch square electrical box by using the plaster with the supplied mounting bracket kit. Wiring Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with the National

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and 2400AIT Direct Wire with Fixed Heat Detectors Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Diameter: Velocity: Temperature: Humidity: Indicator: Alarm: Signal: Temperature Thermal: Ratings Voltage: Ripple Voltage: Capacitance: Time: Limits: Limits Current: Supply: Impedance: Signal: inches (140 mm) inches (81 mm); add 0.5 inches (13 mm) for thermal units lb. (310 g) ft/min (15 M/s) C to 38(cid:176) C (0(cid:176) to 100(cid:176) F) to 93% Relative Humidity, noncondensing State LED by Momentary Power Interruption minimum interrupted tone when in alarm or supply voltage polarity is reversed F (57(cid:176) C) VDC Volts peak-to-peak m F Maximum Sec. Maximum 32 VDC m A Maximum; 100 m A Nominal at 10V; 67mA at 32V; 48mA at 24V at 10V; 19mA at 32V; 15mA at 24V (Detector not in Alarm) ohms Maximum; 478 ohms Minimum Minimum in Alarm Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407- Guide for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors. This provides detailed information on detector spacing, zoning, wiring, and special applications. It is at no charge from System Sensor. (For installa- in Canada refer to CAN/ULC4-S524, Standard for the of Fire Alarm Systems and CEC Part 1, Sec. 32.) Description Sensor 2400AT and 2400AIT photoelectronic smoke listed to UL 268, provide open area protection are intended for use with UL-listed, compatible, 2-wire panels. The sensor in this detector operates on the scattering principle and features a unique photo-optic chamber that optimizes smoke entry while mini- the effects of ambient light. interrupted, 85 dBA tone when the individual detector or when the supply voltage polarity is reversed. LED on each detector lights to provide a local alarm in- and will remain on until the supply polarity is re- A screw terminal is provided for a remote LED optional accessory (RA400Z). These detectors have the latching feature. The alarm can be reset only momentary power interruption. 2400 Series detector is supplied with a mounting kit to permit mounting in either of two ways: Directly to a 3- or 4-inch octagonal, 11/2-inch deep elec- box (See Figures 1 and 2). To a 4-inch square electrical box by using a plaster ring the mounting bracket kit supplied. detectors also provide restorable, 135(cid:176) F fixed-tem- heat detection. The 2400AT heat detection unit is with the photoelectronic sensor while the heat detection unit is isolated from the photo- smoke sensor and can be monitored separately. addition, a piezoelectric horn in each detector produces 72E defines the spacing requirements for smoke de- Typically, this is 30 feet when the detectors are in- on a smooth ceiling. However, ALL installations comply with NFPA 72E and/or special requirements the authority having jurisdiction. 1. Flush mounting of detector on 4-inch box: 2. Detector mounting bracket: MAKE DETECTOR TAMPER RESISTANT, OFF TAB EXTENSION SCRIBED LINE control units and detector combinations and is avail- from System Sensor upon request. Wiring Guidelines wiring must comply with the National Electrical Code the applicable local codes, and any special require- of the authority having jurisdiction, using the proper gauges. The conductors used to connect smoke detec- to control panels and accessory devices should be to reduce the likelihood of wiring errors. Im- connections can prevent a system from responding in the event of a fire. signal wiring (wiring between interconnected detec- wiring no smaller than AWG 18 is recommended. The plates in the base can accept wire sizes up to 12. For best system performance, the power (+and wires should be twisted pair and installed in separate conduit or shielded cable to protect the loop from

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 2424AT, and 2424AIT Wire Photoelectronic with Heat Smoke Detectors Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 with Thermal: Temperature: Humidity: Indicator: Alarm: Signal: Ratings: Voltage: Supply: Time: Characteristics: inches (14 cm) inches (8.1 cm) lb. (310 g) to 38(cid:176) C (32(cid:176) to 100(cid:176) F) to 95% Relative Humidity Non-condensing State LED by momentary power interruption minimum interrupted tone when individual unit is in alarm or when the voltage is reversed. or 2424AIT Unfiltered Unfiltered 7mA Maximum with RA400Z Remote Annunciator LED) m A Max. m A Max. seconds maximum Form A (SPST-NO) for alarm initiation 1.25A at 30 VAC/DC Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407- Guide for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which detailed on detector spacing, zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies this manual are available at no charge from System (For installations in Canada refer to CAN Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems CEC Part 1, Sec. 32.) Description smoke detectors are designed to provide area protection and to be used with UL-listed 4-wire panels. The 2412AT operates at 12 VDC and the and 2424AIT operate at 24 VDC. The sensor in this operates on the light scattering principle and a unique photo-optic sensing chamber that good smoke entry while minimizing the effects of light. These detectors also provide restorable F fixed-temperature heat detection. The 2412AT and heat detection unit sensor while the 2424AIT heat detection is isolated from the photoelectronic smoke sensor and be monitored separately. In addition, a piezoelectric in each detector produces an interrupted, 85 dBA with tone when the individual detector alarms or the supply voltage polarity is reversed. LED on each detector lights to provide a local alarm and will remain on when the supply polarity is A screw terminal is provided for a remote LED optional accessory (RA400Z). These detectors listed to UL268 and are latching type system detectors. alarm can be reset only by momentary power For testing, these detectors have a test switch may be tested by inserting a calibrated test card in a test after removing the detector cover. detector contains one Form A (SPST-NO) contact for to an alarm-initiating circuit. Supervision of the power is accomplished by installing a Power End-of-Line Relay Module (A77-716) at the end the detector power loop. When power is applied to and the detectors, the EOL Power Supervisory Module energized. Its relay contacts close and provide a closed circuit in the control panel alarm-initiating loop. A failure or break in the detector power loop de- the EOL Module. The relay contacts open and a trouble signal at the control panel. 1. Flush mounting of detector on 4-inch box: 2. Detector mounting bracket: MAKE DETECTOR TAMPER RESISTANT, OFF TAB EXTENSION SCRIBED LINE Instructions 2400 Series detector unit is supplied with a mounting kit that permits several mounting techniques: Units may be mounted directly to a 3-inch or 4-inch octagonal, inch deep electrical box. (See Figures 1 and 2.) Units may be mounted to a 4-inch square electrical box by plaster ring with the supplied mounting bracket kit. Feature detector includes a tamper-proof feature that, when prevents removal of the detector without the use a tool. To activate this feature, cut off smaller tab at the line on tamper-proof tab located on the detector bracket (see Figure 2). Install the detector. To the d

3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 2412THB, 2424, and 2424TH Wire Photoelectronic Detectors 5.5 inches (14 cm) 3.19 inches (81 mm); Add 0.5 inches (1.3 cm) for thermal units 0.7 lb (310 g) Temperature Range: 2412 and 2424 0 to +49 (32 to 120 2412TH and 2424TH 0 to +38 (32 to 100 Humidity Range: 10% to 93% Relative Humidity Air Velocity: 3000 Ft./Min. (15 M/S) Alarm: Reset by momentary power interruption. Ratings 2412 2424 Voltage: 12 24 Voltage: 11.3 20 17 29 Voltage: .73 .8 Current: 120 120 Currents: 35 21.3 77 40.6 alarm and auxiliary relay operate within the specified voltage ratings. Time: 34 34 Relay: A77-716 A77-716 Time: 0.3 0.3 Contacts resistive or inductive (60% power factor) load: A: 2.0A @ 30VAC/DC C:* 0.6A @ 110VDC; 2.0A @ 30VDC 1.0A @ 125VAC; 2.0A @ 30VAC Canadian installations, relay contact rating is 2.0A @ 30VAC/DC) (4V Maximum Ripple) Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Maximum Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual A05- Applications Guide for System Smoke Detectors, provides detailed information on detector spacing, zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies this manual are available at no charge from System (For installation in Canada, refer to CAN/ULC- Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems CEC Part 1, Sec. 32.) LED on each detector lights to provide a local alarm indi- It flashes every ten seconds indicating that power applied to the detector. The LED lights continuously in These detectors also have the latching alarm feature resets only by a momentary power interruption. Description Sensor 2412 and 2424 photoelectronic smoke detec- utilize state-of-the-art, optical sensing chambers. These are designed to provide open area protection, and be used with compatible UL-listed 4-wire control panels The 2412 applies to 12 volt panels and operates at and the 2424 applies to 24 volt panels and operates 24VDC. Operation and sensitivity can be tested in place. 2412TH and 2424TH have the same specifications models 2412 and 2424, but in addition feature a built-in temperature (135 thermal detection unit. 1 I56-286-05R detector contains one set of Form A contacts for con- to the alarm-initiating circuit, and one set of Form C contacts. Supervision of detector power is accom- by installing a Power Supervisory End-of-Line Relay (A77-716 Series) at the end of the detector power When power is applied to and through the detectors, EOL Power Supervisory Module is energized. Its relay close and provide a closed series circuit in the con- panel alarm-initiating loop. A power failure or a break the detector power loop de-energizes the EOL Module. relay contacts open and trigger a trouble signal at the panel. 1. Flush mounting of 2412/2424 smo

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 2412TH, 2424, and 2424TH Wire Photoelectronic Detectors SENSOR Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Air Velocity: Alarm: Ratings Voltage: Voltage: Voltage: Current: Currents: inches (14 cm) inches (81 mm); Add 0.5 inches (1.3 cm) for thermal units lb (310 g) and 2424 0(cid:176) to +49(cid:176) C (32(cid:176) to 120(cid:176) F) and 2424TH 0(cid:176) to +38(cid:176) C (32(cid:176) to 100(cid:176) F) to 93% Relative Humidity Ft./Min. (15 M/S) by momentary power interruption. (4V Maximum Ripple) Minimum Maximum Minimum A Maximum Minimum Maximum alarm and auxiliary relay operate within the specified voltage ratings. Time: Relay: Time: Contacts resistive or inductive (60% power factor) load: A: C:* @ 30VAC/DC @ 110VDC; 2.0A @ 30VDC @ 125VAC; 2.0A @ 30VAC Canadian installations, relay contact rating is 2.0A @ 30VAC/DC) Maximum Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407- Guide for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which detailed information on detector spacing, place- zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies of manual are available at no charge from System Sensor. installation in Canada, refer to CAN/ULC-S524, Stan- for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems and CEC 1, Sec. 32.) Description Sensor 2412 and 2424 photoelectronic smoke detec- utilize state-of-the-art, optical sensing chambers. These are designed to provide open area protection, and to used with compatible UL-listed 4-wire control panels only. 2412 applies to 12 volt panels and operates at 12VDC, the 2424 applies to 24 volt panels and operates at Operation and sensitivity can be tested in place. 2412TH and 2424TH have the same specifications as 2412 and 2424, but in addition feature a built-in fixed (135(cid:176) F) thermal detection unit. LED on each detector lights to provide a local alarm indi- It flashes every ten seconds indicating that power is to the detector. The LED lights continuously in alarm. detectors also have the latching alarm feature that re- only by a momentary power interruption. Supervision of detector power detector contains one set of Form A contacts for connec- to the alarm-initiating circuit, and one set of Form C aux- by installing a Power Supervisory End-of-Line Module (A77-716 Series) at the end of the detector loop. When power is applied to and through the detec- the EOL Power Supervisory Module is energized. Its re- contacts close and provide a closed series circuit in the panel alarm-initiating loop. A power failure or a in the detector power loop de-energizes the EOL Mod- The relay contacts open and trigger a trouble signal at the panel. Manuals Online! – 1. Flush mounting of 2412/2424 smoke on 3-1/2 inch and 4-inch octagonal box: 2. 2412/2424 smoke detector mounting 2412 and 2424 detector is supplied with a mounting kit that permits the detector to be mounted: Directly to a 3-1/2 inch or 4 inch octagonal, 1-1/2 inch electrical box, (see Figure 1) or To a 4 inch square electrical box by using a plaster ring the supplied mounting bracket kit. Wiring Guidelines Refer to releasing device manufacturer installa- instruction for proper connections. wiring must be installed in compliance with the Na- Electrical Code and all applicable local codes and special requirements of the authority having jurisdic- using the proper wire size. The conductors used to smoke detectors to control panels and accessory should be color-coded to reduce the likelihood of errors. Improper connections can prevent a system responding properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected de- it is reco

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and 2451TH Photoelectronic Smoke Detectors 2.4 inches (61 cm) Add 0.5 inches (13 cm) for thermal model 2451TH 4.0 inches (101 cm) 0.5 lb. (277 g) Temperature Range: 0 to 49 (32 to 120 Humidity Range: 10% to 93% Relative Humidity Air Velocity: 3000 Ft./Min. (15 M/S) Alarm: Reset by momentary power interruption Temperature Thermal: 135 (57 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor publication, Applications Guide for System Smoke Detectors, provides detailed information on detector spacing, zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies this guide are available at no charge from System Sensor. installations in Canada, refer to CAN4-S524, Standard the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems and CEC Part 1, 32.) This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. This sensor must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. This sensor be cleaned at least once a year. Description 2451 photoelectronic detectors utilize state-of-the-art, sensing chambers. These detectors are designed to open area protection, and to be used with compat- UL-listed control panels only. Model 2451TH has the specifications as Model 2451, with the addition of built-in fixed temperature (135 thermal detec- unit. The capability of plugging these detectors into variety of special bases makes them more versatile than direct-wired models. LEDs on each detector light to provide a local 360 alarm indication. They flash every ten seconds indi- that power is applied and the detector is operating The LEDs light continuously in alarm. Remote annunciator capability is available as an optional These detectors also have the Latching Alarm The alarm can be reset only by a momentary power These detectors may be tested by activating internal reed switch with a magnet, or by inserting a test card in a test slot after removing the detec- cover. 2451 has been approved for marine use in dry locations Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. The detector is to be used dry interior locations only. Selection and Wiring Guide to the installation instructions for the Plug-in Bases for base selection and wiring instructions. Sensor has a variety of detector bases available for smoke detector. This includes 2-wire applications with without relays and/or current limiting resistors, 4-wire 120VAC applications. (Note: the 120VAC detector base not available in Canada.) bases are provided with screw terminals for power, remote annunciator connections and relay contact if applicable. The electrical ratings for each combination are also included in the base instructions. 1 I56-277-10R Wiring must conform to applicable local codes, control unit. After all detectors have been installed, apply power to and regulations. Verify that all detector bases are installed, that initiating-device circuits have been tested, and the wiring is correct. (Refer to detector base for testing procedure.) Test the detector using the magnet or the test card as under TESTING. Reset the detector at the system control panel. Notify the proper authorities that the system is back on power from initiating-device circuits before detectors. Install detectors: a. Place the detector into the detector base b. Turn the detector clockwise until the detector drops covers can be used to help limit dust en

H V A C S Y S T E M S M O N I T O R I N G Smoke for Special with B404B/B404BT RTC Remote Test Kit 268A RTC Overview standby current LEDs in standby head plugs easily into base adjustable sensitivity test switch with B404BT and RTC the RTS451) sensitivity metering of detector to meet requirements of NFPA 72 and 24VAC/DC bases with built-in spring tamper-resistant feature for mounting on standard electrical box screws for easy wiring and positive wire cover and insect screen for field System Sensor 2451 photoelectronic smoke detector is UL listed UL 268A specifically for use in no-flow/low-flow air-handling sys- It designed for installations where a standard Venturi principle smoke detector is unsuitable. This is the perfect combination for in ducts where the air velocity is below 500 fpm or for duct as small as 8 inches in diameter. Pendant mounted in a standard box within the duct, the twist-in/twist-out head allows easy from the base for quick cleaning and maintenance. The detec- can be combined with the System Sensor B404B 120VAC base or B404BT 24VAC/DC base. Remote testing is accomplished using our Test Coil accessory that includes the RTS451. The APA451, Annunciator with Piezo Alarm, can also be connected to pro- an audible and visible indication of smoke detector status. Voltage/ Alarm current base dependent (see chart) current mA maximum .7% / ft. ib. (277 g) cm height cm diameter retardant Noryl plastic Temperature to 120 (0 to 49 Range to 93% RH non-condensing Velocity Rating to 3000 fpm maximum Specifications air duct detector shall be a System Sensor model 2451 Series Smoke detector UL listed to UL 268A specifically for use in handling systems when used in conjunction with the B404B (120VAC) or the B404BT (24VAC/DC) base. The detector shall at air velocities up to 3000 feet per minute. It shall be capable of local testing via magnetic switch or remote testing the UL listed RTC Remote Test Coil accessory with the RTS451 Remote Test Station. It shall be capable of providing smoke detector status via the UL listed model APA451 Piezo Annunciator. Chart Box Selection Type Contact Type Voltage Limit A&C + A supy. A&C + A supy. rms Current Model Gang Oct. Oct. Sq. 60mm 75mm Guide Typical Wiring Diagrams: VAC LEADS VAC INITIATION LOOP PANEL Base Terminals Annunciator (+) Used Used Used Annunciator (-) Relay A Contacts Relay A Contacts Relay C Contacts LEADS VAC PANEL INITIATION LOOP Typical Wiring Diagrams: VACrms/DC INITIATION LOOP VACrms/DC

A Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and 2551T Plug-in Intelligent Sensors with Temperature Range Humidity Range: Air Velocity: Range: Current: Current: inches (15.5 cm) installed in B501B inches (10.2 cm) installed in B501 inches (8.1 cm) 0.5 inches (1.3 cm) for thermal models ounces (272 g) 32 to 120 F (0 to 49 C) 32 to 100 F (0 to 38 C) to 93% Relative Humidity flanged base flangeless base with RMK400 recessed mounting kit Ft./Min. (15 m/S) to 32 Volts DC Peak @ 24 VDC mA @ 24 VDC Installing thoroughly read the system wiring and installation which provides detailed information on sensor placement, zoning, and special applications. Cop- of these manuals are available from System Sensor. This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. These detectors must be tested and main- regularly following NFPA 72 requirements. These should be cleaned at least once a year. Description model 2551/2551T photoelectronic sensors utilize a optical sensing chamber. These sensors are to provide open area protection, and to be used compatible control panels only. Connect detectors to compatible control units. (For installation in refer to CAN/ULC-S524-M86, Standard for the In- of Fire Alarm Systems and CEC Part 1, Sec. 32.) LEDs on each sensor light to provide a local 360 vis- of the sensor indication. The LEDs can be latched by code command from the panel for an alarm indica- The LEDs can also be unlatched to the normal condi- by code command. Remote LED annunciator is available as an optional accessory (part no. 2551T adds a thermal heat collector that will alarm at a temperature of 135 F. Guide to the installation instructions for the particular plug- base being used: 1) for the B501B base (D550-01-01); 2) the B501 base (D550-02-00); 3) for the RMK400 used the B501 base (D450-07-00). Bases are provided with terminals for power, ground, and remote annunciator (see Figure 1). All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, and regulations. Verify that all sensor bases are installed and that wiring polarity is correct at each base. power from the loop before installing sensors. Install sensors: Verify that the sensor type matches the type written the label on the base. Set the sensor to a desired address and then write the on the label on the base. Place the sensor into the sensor base. 1. Wiring Diagram: ANNUNCIATOR Do not loop wire under terminal 1 or 2. wire run to provide supervision of connections. A OPTIONAL WIRING Turn the sensor clockwise until it drops into place. Continue turning the sensor clockwise until it locks place. will not detect smoke if dust cover is installed. Tamper-proof feature: sensor bases include a tamper-proof feature that, activated, prevents removal of the sensor without use of a tool. See the installation instruction manual the sensor base for details in using this feature. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the unit. Test all sensors per the TESTING section of this manual. testing, notify the proper authorities that the smoke system is undergoing maintenance, and therefore system will temporarily be out of service. Disable the or system undergoing maintenance to prevent un- alarms. must be tested after installation and periodic main- The sensor may be tested in the following ways: Test Magnet (Model No. M02-04-00) Place the magnet against the cover opposite the test socket to activate the test feature (see Figure 2). The LEDs should latch on within 10 seconds indicat- alarm and annunciating the panel.

A Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Intelligent Sensors Communications Temperature Range Humidity Range: Air Velocity: Range: Current: Current: inches (15.5 cm) installed in B501B inches (10.2 cm) installed in B501 inches (8.1 cm) 0.5 inches (1.3 cm) for thermal models ounces (272 g) 32 to 120 F (0 to 49 C) 32 to 100 F (0 to 38 C) to 93% Relative Humidity flanged base flangeless base with RMK400 recessed mounting kit Ft./Min. (15 m/S) to 32 Volts DC Peak @ 24 VDC mA @ 24 VDC Installing thoroughly read the system wiring and installation which provides detailed information on sensor placement, zoning, and special applications. Cop- of these manuals are available from System Sensor. This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. These detectors must be tested and main- regularly following NFPA 72 requirements. These should be cleaned at least once a year. Description model 2551HR photoelectronic sensors utilize a state- optical sensing chamber. These sensors are de- for use with duct housings DH500 and DH500AC/ only, and to be used with compatible control panels Connect detectors only to compatible control units. installation in Canada, refer to CAN/ULC-S524-M86, for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems and CEC 1, Sec. 32.) LEDs on each sensor light to provide a local 360 vis- of the sensor indication. The LEDs can be latched by code command from the panel for an alarm indica- The LEDs can also be unlatched to the normal condi- by code command. Remote LED annunciator is available as an optional accessory (part no. Guide to the installation instructions for the particular plug- base being used: 1) for the B501B base (D550-01-01); 2) the B501 base (D550-02-00); 3) for the RMK400 used the B501 base (D450-07-00). Bases are provided with terminals for power, ground, and remote annunciator (see Figure 1). All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, and regulations. Verify that all sensor bases are installed and that wiring polarity is correct at each base. power from the loop before installing sensors. Install sensors: Verify that the sensor type matches the type written the label on the base. Set the sensor to a desired address and then write the on the label on the base. Place the sensor into the sensor base. 1. Wiring Diagram: ANNUNCIATOR Do not loop wire under terminal 1 or 2. wire run to provide supervision of connections. A OPTIONAL WIRING Turn the sensor clockwise until it drops into place. Continue turning the sensor clockwise until it locks place. will not detect smoke if dust cover is installed. Tamper-proof feature: sensor bases include a tamper-proof feature that, activated, prevents removal of the sensor without use of a tool. See the installation instruction manual the sensor base for details in using this feature. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the unit. Test all sensors per the TESTING section of this manual. testing, notify the proper authorities that the smoke system is undergoing maintenance, and therefore system will temporarily be out of service. Disable the or system undergoing maintenance to prevent un- alarms. must be tested after installation and periodic main- The sensor may be tested in the following ways: Test Magnet (Model No. M02-04-00) Place the magnet against the cover opposite the test socket to activate the test feature (see Figure 2). The LEDs should latch on within 10 seconds indicat- alarm and annunciating the panel. Test Module (Model No. MOD400R) MOD400R is used with your DMM or voltmeter to

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

2D51 Duct Smoke for Applications System Sensor 2D51 low-profile photoelectric smoke with a B210LP base tied to the D4P120 is listed Underwriters Laboratories 268A specifically for use in air-handling systems. for 2D51/B210LP/D4P120 Low-profile smoke detector design Low standby current Two LEDs blink in standby Detector head plugs easily into base Built-in test switch Field sensitivity metering of detector to meet the requirements NFPA 72 with the use of RTS2/RTS2-AOS and SENS-RDR Designed for mounting on a standard electrical box SEMS screws for easy wiring and positive wire retention Removable cover and insect screen for field cleaning Remote push button Test/Reset, LEDs provide visual indications Onboard supervisory and alarm relays Accepts 24 or 120V supply voltage Interconnect up to 100 units for common functions Compatible for interconnection with System Sensor InnoviarFlex or D4120W duct smoke detectors and remote accessories 2D51 can be used as a pendant mount detector in no-flow/ air-handling systems (0-4,000 FPM). The pendant /plenum 2D51 is to be installed into a B210LP base and wired to a power board-only control unit. The D4P120 power board is of controlling up to two 2D51 sensors. mounted in a standard electrical box within the duct, the head allows easy removal from the base for quick and maintenance. The 2D51 heads can be locally tested a magnet or by using the test/reset push button on the D4P120 board. testing is accomplished using the RTS151, RTS151KEY, or RTS-AOS accessories connected to the D4P120 power APA151, RTS2 and RTS2-AOS Remote Annunciators with Piezo can also be connected to the D4P120 power board to provide audible and visible indication of smoke detector status. Listings Photoelectric Detector Specifications Specifications air duct smoke detector shall be a System Sensor model 2D51 Series Smoke detector listed to UL 268A specifically for use in air handling when used in conjunction with the B210LP base. The detector shall operate at air velocities up to 4,000 feet per minute. It shall be of local testing using a magnet test on the 2D51 or using a test/reset button on the D4P120 power board. It can also be remotely using the RTS151, RTS151KEY, RTS2 or RTS2-AOS connected to the D4P120 power board. It shall be capable of providing duct detector status via the UL-listed APA151, RTS2 and RTS2-AOS Piezo Annunciators. Specifications Temperature Range Humidity Range Plug-In Detector Base Specifications inches H, 4.1 inches D oz (88 g) to 158 (-20 to 70 to 95% relative humidity non-condensing inches (155mm) (102 mm) square box with or without plaster ring; Minimum Depth – 1.5 inches (38 mm) Octagon Box; Minimum Depth – 1.5 inches (38 mm) Octagon Box; Minimum Depth – 1.5 inches (38 mm) Gang Box; Minimum Depth – 1.5 inches (38 mm) to applicable sensor Operating Temperature Range using the Base/Sensor Cross Reference Chart systemsensor.com Temperature Range Power Board Specifications Temperature Range: Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings supply voltage: capacitance: voltage: time: (with RTS451) time: (by power down) up time: response time: test: Requirements: (Using No Accessories) standby current: VDC max. VDC min. to 0.3 sec. sec. max. sec. max. sec. detector label mA @ 24 VDC alarm current: mA @ 24 VDC inches (19.45 cm) Length; 4.98 inches (12.64 cm) Width; 2.29 inches (5.81 cm) Depth to 158 ( to 70 to 158 ( to 70 to 95% relative humidity non-condensing lb 3 oz VAC 50 Hz max. VAC min. to 0.3 sec. sec. max. sec. max. sec. detector label VAC 50 Hz VAC min. to 0.3 sec. sec. max. sec. max. sec. detector label mA RMS @ 24 VAC 60 Hz 20

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Photoelectric Smoke Detector USE WITH INNOVAIRFLEX 4-WIRE DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR OR PENDANT MOUNT APPLICATIONS Temperature Range: Humidity Range: in in; 6.1 in oz. (88 g) to 70 ( to 158 to 95% Relative Humidity Non-condensing 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 INSTALLING thoroughly read System Sensor Applications Guide for System Smoke (SPAG91), which provides detailed information on detector spacing, zoning, wiring, and special applications. This manual is available at www.systemsensor.com. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector must be tested and maintained regularly following 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at least once a year. DESCRIPTION 2D51 photoelectronic detector uses a state-of-the-art optical sensing This detector is designed to provide protection in duct applications installed with an Innovair Flex 4-wire duct smoke detector housing and be used with compatible UL listed control panels only. 2D51 can also be used in pendant mount applications when installed with B210LP or B501 base and D4P120 power board components. LEDs on each detector provide local visible alarm indication. They flash five seconds indicating that power is applied and the detector is working The LEDs latch on in alarm. LEDs will be off when a trouble condi- exists indicating that the detector sensitivity is outside the listed limit. applicable Innovair Flex duct smoke detector installation manual for more The alarm can be reset by a momentary power interruption, button, or remote test accessory with reset function. This detector be tested by activating the internal reed switch with a magnet, test/reset or remote test accessory. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and power from initiating-device circuits before installing detectors. detectors: Place the detector into the detector base. Turn the detector clockwise until the detector drops into place. Continue turning detector clockwise to lock it in place. After all detectors have been installed, apply power to the control unit. Test the detector using the test/reset button or magnet as described TESTING Reset the detector at the system control panel or on power board. Notify the proper authorities that the system is back on line. covers are an effective way to limit the entry of dust into smoke detector sens- chambers. However, they may not completely prevent airborne dust particles entering the detector. Therefore, System Sensor recommends the removal detectors before beginning construction or other dust producing activity. sure to remove the dust covers from any sensors that were left in place dur- construction as part of returning the system to service. testing, notify the proper authorities that the smoke detector system undergoing maintenance and will temporarily be out of service. Detectors be tested after installation and as part of periodic maintenance. Test the as follows: Before testing the detector, check to ensure the the power board LEDs If they do not, the detector may not have power or may not be installed (check the wiring), if it is defective, or the detector sensitivity is out- the listed limits return it for repair. TESTS OR Test/Reset Button – Press and hold the test button located on the power cover for at least 2 seconds. M02-04-00 Magnet Test – Place the painted surface of the magnet onto MAGNET TEST location on the sensor cover or the duct smoke (Figure 1). The red alarm LED on the sensor and the power board should latch on, should any accessories (i.e. RA100Z, RTS151). Verify system control alarm status and control panel execution of all intended auxiliary (i.e fan shutdown, damper control, etc.). The detector must be reset by the system control panel, front cover Test/ button, or remote accessory. To reset using the Test/Reset button on the power board cover simply and release. RESPONSE TESTS determine if smoke is capable of entering the sensing chamber, visu

Smoke Detector and Engineering Specifications detector shall be a System Sensor i3 Series model number 2W-B, listed to Underwriters UL 268 for Fire Protection Signaling Systems. The detector shall be a photoelectric detector. The detector shall include a mounting base for mounting to 3 and 4-inch single gang, and 4-inch square back boxes with a plaster ring, or direct mount to the using drywall anchors. Wiring connections shall be made by means of SEMS screws. The shall allow pre-wiring of the base and the head shall be a plug-in type. The detector shall a nominal sensitivity of 2.5 percent-per-foot nominal as measured in the UL smoke box. The shall be capable of automatically adjusting its sensitivity by means of drift compensation smoothing algorithms. The detector shall provide dual color LED indication which blinks to power up, normal standby, out of sensitivity and alarm conditions. When used in with the 2W-MOD2 module, the 2W-B detector shall include a maintenance signal to the need for maintenance at the alarm control panel, and shall provide a loop testing to verify the circuit without testing each detector individually. Specifications 2W-B Operating Voltage shall be; Nominal: 12/24V non-polarized, Minimum: 8.5V, 35V. The Maximum Ripple Voltage shall be 30% peak to peak of applied voltage. The Current shall be 50 maximum average. The Maximum Alarm Current shall be 130 limited by control panel. The Peak Standby Current shall be 100 Specifications 2W-B dimensions (including base) shall be 5.3 inches (134 mm) diameter; 2.0 inches (51 height. The 2W-B detector weight shall be 6.3 oz. (178 grams). The 2W-B detector Temperature Range shall be 32 (0 The 2W-B Operating Humidity shall be 0 to 95% RH non-condensing. The 2W-B Sensitivity shall be 2.5%/ft. nominal. 2W-B Input Terminals shall be 14 AWG. options for the 2W-B detector include; 3 octagonal back box, 4-inch octagonal box, Single gang back box, 4-inch square back box with a plaster ring, or direct mount to Modes Power up, the Green LED shall blink every 10 seconds; the Red LED shall blink every 10 In Normal (standby) mode, the Green LED shall blink every 5 seconds; the Red LED be off. In Out of sensitivity mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall blink every seconds. In Alarm mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall be solid. 2009

2W-MOD2 Loop Test/ Module 2W-MOD2 2-wire loop test/maintenance module the benefits of i3 Series smoke detectors by detector remote maintenance signaling and Walk loop testing capabilities. Listings ease. inspection. Specifications Specifications Specifications Temperature Range Humidity Range Terminals Specifications Voltage Ripple Voltage Standby Current Alarm Current Maintenance Current Contact Ratings Contact Ratings Modes Color Sequence for LED Indication Information No.

RRS-MOD + & RRS-MOD WIRING signal is sent to separate zone and RRS-MOD triggered from Bell/Alarm Output. POW. + POW. POW. W FIRE + 1 + & RRS-MOD WIRING signal is sent to separate zone and RRS-MOD triggered from Alarm Relay Contact. POW. + POW. POW. W FIRE + 2 + & RRS-MOD WIRING signal is indicated at the panel as a fire trouble RRS-MOD is triggered from Bell/Alarm Output. POW. + POW. POW. W FIRE + 3 + & RRS-MOD WIRING signal is not sent to the panel and RRS-MOD triggered from Bell/Alarm Output. POW. + POW. POW. W FIRE + 4 + & RRS-MOD WIRING signal is not sent to the panel and RRS-MOD triggered from Alarm Relay Contact. POW. + POW. POW. W FIRE CONTACT) + 5 + & RRS-MOD WIRING signal is indicated at the panel as a fire trouble and is triggered from Alarm Relay Contact. POW. + POW. POW. W FIRE CONTACT) + 6

I AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Test/Maintenance Module 2W-MOD2 Installing information is included as a quick reference installa- guide. Refer to the control panel installation manual detailed system information. If the modules will be in- in an existing operational system, inform the opera- and local authority that the system will be temporarily of service. Disconnect power to the control panel before the modules. This manual shall be left with the owner/user of equipment. Description 2W-MOD2 allows a control panel to receive a for signal from two i3 series smoke detec- model numbers 2W 2WT 2WTA and 2WTR module uses a form C zone relay to initiate of sen- and trouble a form A zone alarm relay and second form A zone relay to indicate loop fault (see Figure An EZ Walk Test puts all detectors on the loop into a Walk mode for easy verification of detector loop wiring. 1: relay (form C) relay (form A) trouble relay (form A) trouble trouble trouble and trouble and loop trouble and Maintenance/Freeze OFF Location 7 N.O. 8 Common 9 N.C. connected terminals and 11 connected between 10 and 12 2. Module front view: LED LED LED Walk-Test LED on the module provide a local visual indica- of the module status(es). maintenance module allows two-wire smoke detectors to used on any electrically compatible four-wire control panel. 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 If two i3 detectors are used in conjunction a style D initiating circuit, the 2W must be to provide that capability. Ground fault on a mod- two-wire loop can be indicated at a control panel if control panel is capable of ground fault detection on power supply to the module and meets NFPA 72 ground indication requirements for initiating device circuits. installer must verify that capability. 3. Module LED modes: COLOR LED 1 sec. ON 1 sec. OFF LED 1 sec. ON 1 sec. OFF on. Detectors loop do not have capability. on. One or more on loop have capability. not applied or not operating on loop in alarm. or more detectors of sensitivity or in Trouble. on loop not alarm, maintenance Freeze Trouble. LED 0.5 sec. ON 0.5 sec. OFF wiring fault. Walk Test mode. wiring normal. module has loop trouble restoration detection. If the trouble (open loop) doesn exist any more, the mod- will restore to standby condition with a maximum delay 1 minute. There is no delay in loop trouble detection. an alarm occurs while the module is indicating mainte- the alarm will supercede maintenance. the green LED remains ON (no blinking) three minutes af- applying power, it means that the module has determined no detector on its loop has communication capability. this condition, the detectors are still capable of initiating and loop trouble at the module. However, maintenance freeze trouble, will not be indicated at the module, and walk test will not be available. If i3 detectors are installed the loop, verify wiring and system operation. NFPA loop Style D wiring the EOL resistor is provided to the module. An external EOL resistor must be connected at the last detector on the loop (see Fig- 5 7). Requirements 2W-MOD2 is marked with a compatibility/zone identi- as the last digit of a 5 digit code on the back of the unit. ensure proper operation, this module shall be connected compatible two-wire smoke detectors or the alarm con-

Product Specifications test/maintenance module shall be System Sensor i3 Series model number 2W-MOD2, to Underwriters Laboratories UL 864 for Control Units for Fire Protection Signaling The module shall include provisions for mounting to 4-inch square back boxes. Wiring shall be made by means of SEMS screws. The module shall provide three LED which will blink or illuminate to indicate communication status, maintenance alert, alarm freeze trouble conditions, and EZ Walk loop test mode. The module shall allow communication 2-wire i3 detectors with any UL listed fire alarm control panel. The 2W-MOD2 module shall provisions for Style D wiring on IDC loops, and shall provide a loop testing capability to the initiating loop wiring. Specifications 2W-MOD2 dimensions shall be 4.5 in H 4.0 in W 1.25 in D (114 mm 101 mm 32 The 2W-MOD2 weight shall be 8 oz. (225 grams). The Operating Temperature Range shall 14 to 122 ( to 50 The Operating Humidity Range shall be 0% to 95% RH non- The Input Terminals shall be 14 to 22 AWG. 2W-MOD2 shall be mounted to a 4-inch square back box. Specifications 2W-MOD2 Operating Voltage shall be Nominal: 12/24 V, Min: 8.5 V power limited, Max: 30 V limited. The Maximum Ripple Voltage shall be 30% of applied voltage (peak to peak). The Standby Current shall be 30 mA. The Maximum Alarm Current shall be 90 mA. The Maintenance Current shall be 53 mA. The Alarm Contact Ratings shall be 0.5 A @ 36 Resistive. The Maintenance Contact Ratings shall be 2 A @ 30 VDC, Resistive. 2009

Product Smoke Detector and Engineering Specifications detector shall be a System Sensor i3 Series model number 2WT-B, listed to Underwriters UL 268 for Fire Protection Signaling Systems. The detector shall be a combination type detector with thermal sensor rated at 135 (57.2 The detector include a mounting base for mounting to 3 and 4-inch octagonal, single gang, and 4- square back boxes with a plaster ring, or direct mount to the ceiling using drywall anchors. connections shall be made by means of SEMS screws. The detector shall allow pre-wiring the base and the head shall be a plug-in type. The detector shall have a nominal sensitivity of percent-per-foot nominal as measured in the UL smoke box. The detector shall be capable of adjusting its sensitivity by means of drift compensation and smoothing algorithms. detector shall provide dual color LED indication which blinks to indicate power up, normal out of sensitivity, alarm and freeze trouble conditions. When used in conjunction with the module, the 2WT-B detector shall include a maintenance signal to indicate the need maintenance at the alarm control panel, and shall provide a loop testing capability to verify the without testing each detector individually. Specifications 2WT-B Operating Voltage shall be; Nominal: 12/24V non-polarized, Minimum: 8.5V, 35V. The Maximum Ripple Voltage shall be 30% peak to peak of applied voltage. The Current shall be 50 maximum average. The Maximum Alarm Current shall be 130 limited by control panel. The Peak Standby Current shall be 100 Specifications 2WT-B dimensions (including base) shall be 5.3 inches (134 mm) diameter; 2.0 inches (51 height. The 2WT-B detector weight shall be 6.3 oz. (178 grams). The 2WT-B detector Temperature Range shall be 32 (0 The 2WT-B Operating Range shall be 0 to 95% RH non-condensing. The 2WT-B Thermal Sensor shall be (57.2 fixed. The 2WT-B Freeze Trouble shall be 41 (5 The 2WT-B Sensitivity be 2.5%/ft. nominal. The 2WT-B Input Terminals shall be 14 AWG. options for the 2WT-B detector include; 3 octagonal back box, 4-inch octagonal box, Single gang back box, 4-inch square back box with a plaster ring, or direct mount to Modes Power up, the Green LED shall blink every 10 seconds; the Red LED shall blink every 10 In Normal (standby) mode, the Green LED shall blink every 5 seconds; the Red LED be off. In Out of sensitivity mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall blink every seconds. In Freeze trouble mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall blink every 10 In Alarm mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall be solid. 2009

Product Smoke Detector Specifications detector shall be a System Sensor i3 Series model number 2WTA-B, listed to Laboratories UL 268 for Fire Protection Signaling Systems. The detector shall be a photoelectric/thermal equipped with a sounder. The detector shall include a base for mounting to 3 and 4-inch octagonal, single gang, and 4-inch square boxes with a plaster ring, or direct mount to the ceiling using drywall anchors. Wiring shall be made by means of SEMS screws. The detector shall allow pre-wiring of the and the head shall be a plug-in type. The detector shall have a nominal sensitivity of 2.5% foot nominal as measured in the UL smoke box. The detector shall be capable of adjusting its sensitivity by means of drift compensation and smoothing algorithms. detector shall provide dual color LED indication which blinks to indicate power-up, normal out of sensitivity, alarm, and freeze trouble conditions. When used in conjunction with 2W-MOD2 module, the 2WTA-B shall include a maintenance signal to indicate the need for at the alarm control panel, and shall provide a loop testing capability to verify the without testing each detector individually. When used in conjunction with the RRS-MOD all i3 sounder models on a loop shall sound when one alarms, all shall be synchronized, all sounders may be silenced from the panel. Specifications Operating Voltage shall be; Nominal: 12/24V non-polarized, Minimum: 8.5V, Maximum: 35V. Maximum Ripple Voltage shall be 30% peak to peak of applied voltage. The Standby Current be 50 maximum average. The Peak Standby Current shall be 100 The Maximum Current shall be 130 mA Direct Power (Non-reverse Polarity): 130 mA limited by panel. Polarity Power: 30 mA for the 2WTA-B in alarm; 12 mA for all other 2WTA-B units on the Add 25 mA for the RRS-MOD reversing relay alarm current. Specifications 2WTA-B dimensions (including base) shall be 5.3 inches (134 mm) diameter; 2.0 inches (51 height. The approximate detector weight shall be 7.1 oz. (200 grams). The Operating Range shall be 32 (0 The Operating Humidity Range shall be to 95% RH non-condensing. The Thermal Sensor shall be 135 (57.2 fixed. The Freeze shall be 41 (5 The Sensitivity shall be 2.5%/ft. nominal. The Input Terminals shall 14 AWG. options for the 2WTA-B detector include; 3 octagonal back box, 4-inch octagonal box, Single gang back box, 4-inch square back box with a plaster ring, or direct mount to Modes Power up, the Green LED shall blink every 10 seconds; the Red LED shall blink every 10 In Normal (standby) mode, the Green LED shall blink every 5 seconds; the Red LED be off. In Out of sensitivity mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall blink every seconds. In Freeze trouble mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall blink every 10 In Alarm mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall be solid. 2009

Product Smoke Detector Specifications detector shall be a System Sensor i3 Series model number 2WTR-B, listed to Laboratories UL 268 for Fire Protection Signaling Systems. The detector shall be a photoelectric/thermal equipped with a Form C relay. The detector shall include a base for mounting to 3 and 4-inch octagonal, single gang, and 4-inch square boxes with a plaster ring, or direct mount to the ceiling using drywall anchors. Wiring shall be made by means of SEMS screws. The detector shall allow pre-wiring of the and the head shall be a plug-in type. The detector shall have a nominal sensitivity of 2.5% foot nominal as measured in the UL smoke box. The detector shall be capable of adjusting its sensitivity by means of drift compensation and smoothing algorithms. detector shall provide dual color LED indication which blinks to indicate power-up, normal out of sensitivity, alarm, and freeze trouble conditions. When used in conjunction with 2W-MOD2 module, the 2WTR-B shall include a maintenance signal to indicate the need for at the alarm control panel, and shall provide a loop testing capability to verify the without testing each detector individually. When used in conjunction with the RRS-MOD all i3 sounder models on a loop shall sound when one alarms, all shall be synchronized, all sounders may be silenced from the panel. Specifications Operating Voltage shall be; Nominal: 12/24V non-polarized, Minimum: 8.5V, Maximum: 35V. Maximum Ripple Voltage shall be 30% peak to peak of applied voltage. The Standby Current be 50 maximum average. The Peak Standby Current shall be 100 The Maximum Current shall be 130 mA limited by control panel. Specifications 2WTR-B dimensions (including base) shall be 5.3 inches (134 mm) diameter; 2.0 inches (51 height. The approximate detector weight shall be 7.1 oz. (200 grams). The Operating Range shall be 32 (0 The Operating Humidity Range shall be to 95% RH non-condensing. The Thermal Sensor shall be 135 (57.2 fixed. The Freeze shall be 41 (5 The Sensitivity shall be 2.5%/ft. nominal. The Input Terminals shall 14 AWG. options for the 2WTR-B detector include; 3 octagonal back box, 4-inch octagonal box, Single gang back box, 4-inch square back box with a plaster ring, or direct mount to Modes Power up, the Green LED shall blink every 10 seconds; the Red LED shall blink every 10 In Normal (standby) mode, the Green LED shall blink every 5 seconds; the Red LED be off. In Out of sensitivity mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall blink every seconds. In Freeze trouble mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall blink every 10 In Alarm mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall be solid. 2009

200 Series Intelligent Smoke Detector Division of Pittway Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, IL 60174 (736-7672), Fax 630-377-6495 Available Low-profile combination photoelectronic, and thermal detector Microprocessor based technology Advanced fire detection and discrimination algorithms Rotary decade address switches Mechanically integrated shared volume smoke chamber Digital pulsewidth encoded communications with noise Omni Sensor, model 3251, is a microprocessor-based detector which uses a combination of ionization, and thermal sensing technologies. Its signal processing allows each sensor to be set at an optimal set point to reduce nuisance while integration of the sensor input permits warning of fire. Five sensitivity settings are to cover a broad range of applications. Dual LEDs, visible from 360 flash green in standby glow steady red for alarm. Omni Sensor continuously monitors its sensitivity smoke and compensates for any change or drift due to temperature, and humidity. It incorporates rotary address switches, recognized as the industry addressing method. The exact address of each can facilitate swift response to a specific fire or allow for selective maintenance when Range: Current: Sensor: Current: Resistance: Volts DC Peak @ 24 VDC (no fixed temperature thermistor mA @ 24 VDC ( maximum Weight: Humidity: inches (10.4 cm) inches (4.22 cm) oz. (104 g) to 38 C (32 to 100 F) – 93% non-condensing System Sensor 5/97 document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. Specifications intelligent combination detector shall be a System Model 3251. The detector shall include ionization, and thermal sensing The detector shall have a mechanically photoelectronic and ionization shared volume chamber. The detector shall be equipped with dual light emitting diodes that are visible from the floor. LEDs will flash green to indicate power and glow red indicate alarm. The detector shall be capable of an output voltage to an optional remote LED as an indication of alarm status. It shall be cleanable and shall have a magnetic test switch. addressing shall be accomplished by means of decade switches, capable of being selected and reset the field without external programming equipment. The shall use a plug-in, low-profile, aesthetically design no taller than 1.7 (base included). connections shall be by means of a clamping plate screw in the base. Omni Sensor design features a integrated photoelectronic and shared volume smoke chamber Test magnet replacement flange for B501B base LED annunciator 3 32 VDC; fits U.S. single electrical box Information No. intelligent plug-in combination ionization, and thermal detector; be mounted to the B501 or B210LP base adapter base adapter base base, includes B501 adapter base adapter base (6.1 diameter) provides Form C for control of auxiliary functions adapter base (6.1 diameter) provides of short circuits Sensor Sales and Service Sensor Headquarters Ohio Ave. Charles, IL, USA 60174 800-SENSOR2 630-377-6495 On Demand x3 Sensor in Europe 011-44-1403-276500 011-44-1403-276501 Sensor in Canada 905-812-0767 905-812-0771 2 Sensor in China 011-86-29-524-6253 011-86-29-524-6259 Sensor in the Far East 011-852-2191-9003 011-852-2736-6580 Sensor in Singapore 011-65-273-2230 011-65-273-2610 Sensor in Australia 011-613-54-281-142 011-613-54-281-172

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Intelligent Ionization, Photoelectronic, Fixed Temperature (135 Thermal Sensor Voltage Range: Standby Current: Sensor: Humidity Range: Temperature Range: to 28 VDC @ 24 VDC (no communication) F Fixed Temperature Electronic Thermistor to 93% Relative Humidity, noncondensing to 38 C (32 to 100 F) inches (43mm) installed in B210LP base inches (155mm) installed in B210LP base inches (104mm) installed in B501 base oz. (102 g) 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Installing sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system manual. The installation must meet the requirements of the Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance installed in compliance with the National Fire Protection Associa- (NFPA); see NFPA 72. Please read System Sensor Guide for Proper of System Smoke Detectors (I56-407), available at no charge from Sys- Sensor. This manual includes detailed information on sensor spacing, zoning, and special applications. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equip- This detector must be tested and maintained regularly fol- NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at least a year. Description Model 3251 intelligent smoke detector is a microprocessor-based sen- which uses a combination of ionization, photoelectric, and fixed tem- (135 F) thermal sensors to detect a wider range of fires than the single sensor smoke detector. Rotary decade switches are pro- for setting the sensor address (see figure 2). This sensor is designed provide open area protection and is intended for use with compatible panels only. sensor is provided with two bicolor LED which indicate sensor sta- Flashing green indicates normal operation and steady red indicates Remote LED annunciator capability is also available as an optional (Model RA400Z). Sensor recommends spacing sensors in compliance with NFPA 72. low air flow applications with smooth ceilings, space sensors 30 feet For specific information regarding sensor spacing, placement, and applications, refer to NFPA 72 or System Sensor Guide For Proper of System Smoke Detectors. Instructions wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electric Code applicable local codes, and any special requirements of the Au- Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Proper wire gauges should be used. installation wires should be color-coded to limit wiring mistakes and system troubleshooting. connections will prevent a system from responding properly in event of a fire. power from the communcation line before installing sensors. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) per the wiring diagram (see 1). Set the desired address on the sensor address switches (see figure 2). Install the sensor in the sensor base. Push the sensor into the base turning it clockwise to secure it in place. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control unit activate the communication line. Test the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section of this manual. covers provide limited protection against airborne dust particles dur- shipment. Dust covers must be removed before the sensors can sense Remove sensors prior to heavy remodeling or construction. testing, notify the proper authorities that the system is undergoing and will be temporarily out of service. Also, disable the sys- to prevent unwanted alarms. All sensors must be tested after installa- and periodically thereafter. Testing methods must satisfy the Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance tested and maintained in compliance with NFPA 72. sensor can be tested in the following ways: Functional Magnet Test (Model M02-04-01) sensor can be functionally tested using a test magnet. The test electronically simulates smoke in the sensing chamber, testing sensor electronics and connections to the control panel. Hold the test magnet in the magnet test area as shown (see figure 3). The sensor should alarm the panel. LED on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate status. Refer to the control p

400 Series Photoelectronic Detector 12 or 24 volt operation Unique optical sensing chamber Removable cover and insect screen for easy Visible LED blinks in standby, latches on in Sealed against dirt, insects, and back pressure Weight: Temperature Range: Models: Other Models: Range: Velocity Rating: Gauge: (8.1 cm) h, 5.5 (13.9 cm) with mounting bracket; .5 (1.27 cm) to height for lb. (227 g) F to 100 F (0 C to 38 C) F to 120 F (0 C to 49 C) 93% RH noncondensing fpm 18 AWG, twisted pair or 4 octagon box, square box with plaster ring, 60, 75 mm boxes Detector Spacing: smooth ceilings (as defined in NFPA 72), spacing 30 feet (900 sq. ft.) may be used as a guide. Other may be used depending on ceiling height, air movements, and other conditions or response Division of Pittway Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, IL 60174 (736-7672), Fax 630-377-6495 Available Photoelectronic Photoelectronic with Thermal Photoelectronic Photoelectronic with Thermal Photoelectronic Photoelectronic with Thermal Field sensitivity metering of detector to meet NFPA 72 Twist-on mounting bracket with tamper option SEMS screws for easy wiring 3-year warranty Optional built-in 135 F (57 C) heat sensor Features: .7 ft. nominal Test port Insert 0.1 inch maximum diameter allen or screwdriver into test port on detector Test card After removing detector cover, insert test card into test slot on screen. Test module Using a standard voltmeter interface, MOD400R plug into detector module port. calibrated sensitivity test per NFPA 72. Sensor Rating models only): 135 F fixed temperature System Sensor 2/97 document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. Description Sensor 400 Series photoelectronic detectors are designed to meet the stringent performance of industrial and commercial fire detection/ systems. The design of these detectors emphasizes of installation and field maintenance. Specifications Detector Detector w/Fixed Heat Sensor Detector Detector w/Fixed Heat Sensor Detector Detector w/Fixed Heat Sensor Must be limited by control panel Contact Ratings: Contacts A: C: Time: Time: or inductive power factor) load @ 30 VAC/DC @ 30 VAC/DC @ 110 VDC, 1.0A @ 125 VAC sec. (max.) sec. (max.) Specifications Detector shall be a photoelectronic type (model 2412, 2424) or a combination photoelectronic/ (model 2400TH, 2412TH, 2424TH) with thermal rated at 135 F as manufactured by System Sensor. connections shall be made by means of SEMS The detector will have a visible LED which will in standby and latch on in alarm. The detector shall a nominal sensitivity of 3% per foot as measured in UL smoke box. The detector screen and cover should 400 Series offer 6 different photoelectronic detectors a variety of voltages, wiring configurations, and options. VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC Remote LED Consumption (max.) (max.) easily removable for cleaning. It shall be possible to a sensitivity and functional test without the need generating smoke. Detector circuitry shall perform a self on the sensing chamber and internal electronics every seconds. If circuitry fails, the detector LED shall stop The detector shall have a mounting bracket that for

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Direct Wire Ionization Detector SENSOR Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Temperature: Alarm: Humidity: Ratings: Voltage: Ripple Voltage: Capacitance: Ratings: Ratings: Voltage: Time: Time: inches (140 mm) inches (80 mm) lb. (310 g) to +49oC (32oF to 120oF) by momentary power interruption. to 93% Relative Humidity, Noncondensing VDC Volts peak to peak uA Maximum VDC Minimum VDC Maximum uA Maximum VDC Minimum at 10 mA VDC Minimum at 100 mA current must be limited to 100 mA maximum by the control panel. If used, the Remote Annunciator operates within the specified detector alarm currents. VDC Minimum S Maximum S Maximum Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407- Guide for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors. This provides detailed information on detector spacing, zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies this manual are available at no charge from System Sen- (For installation in Canada, refer to CAN/ULC-S524, for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems and CEC 1, Sec. 32.) Description Sensor 1400 dual-chamber ionization smoke detec- utilize state-of-the-art, unipolar sensing chambers. detectors are designed to provide open area protec- and to be used with compatible UL-listed, 2-wire con- panels only. The detector operation and sensitivity be tested in place. detector includes an LED that provides a local visual of the detector status. The LED blinks every ten as an indication that power is applied to the detec- and lights continuously in alarm. These detectors also the latching alarm feature. The alarm can be reset by a momentary power interruption. detector also has provision for the connection of an Model RA400Z Remote Annunciator. The RA400Z a visual indication of an alarm and mounts to a gang box. 72 defines the spacing requirements for smoke detec- Typically, this is 30 feet when the detectors are in- on a smooth ceiling. However, ALL installations comply with NFPA 72 and/or special requirements of authority having jurisdiction. Manuals Online! – 1. Surface mounting of Model 1400 detector 3-1/2 and 4 inch octagonal box: 2. Model 1400 detector mounting bracket: MAKE DETECTOR TAMPER RESISTANT, OFF TAB EXTENSION SCRIBED LINE 1400 detector is supplied with a mounting bracket kit permits the detector to be mounted: Directly to a 3-1/2 inch or 4 inch octagonal, 1-1/2 inch electrical box, or To a 4 inch square electrical box by using a plaster ring the supplied mounting bracket kit. Wiring Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with the Na- Electrical Code and all applicable local codes and special requirements of the authority having jurisdic- using the proper wire size. The conductors used to smoke detectors to control panels and accessory should be color-coded to reduce the likelihood of errors. Improper connections can prevent a system responding properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected de- it is recommended that the wire be no smaller AWG 18. However, the screws and clamping plate can wire sizes up to AWG 12. The use of twisted wiring for the power (+ and -) loop is recommended minimize the effects of electrical interference. Manuals Online! – detectors and alarm system control panels have for allowable loop resistance. Consult the panel manufacturer specifications for the total resistance allowed for the control panel being used be- wiring the detector loops. electrical connections by stripping about 3/8″ insula- from the end of the wire. Then, slide the bare end of wire under the clamping plate and tighten the clamping screw. A wiring diagram for a typical 2-wire detector is shown in Figure 3. Break the wire at each termi

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Ionization Detector Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Alarm: inches (6.1 cm) inches (10.1 cm) lb. (277 g) to +49(cid:176) C (32(cid:176) to 120(cid:176) F) to 93% Relative Humidity Non-condensing by momentary power interruption. SENSOR Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 1451 has been approved for marine use in dry loca- by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. The detector is to be in dry interior locations only. of 30 ft. on a smooth ceiling as per NFPA 72E. conditions or response requirements vary, other may apply. Selection And Wiring Guide to the installation instructions for the plug-in detector for wiring instructions. System Sensor has available a of detector bases for this smoke detector, including 2- applications with and without relays and/or current lim- resistors, 4-wire and 120VAC applications. (Note: the detector base is not available in Canada.) bases are provided with screw terminals for power, remote annunciator connections, and relay contact if applicable. The electrical ratings for each combination are also included in the base in- instructions. installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407, Manual for System Smoke Detectors, which detailed information on detector spacing, place- zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies of manual are available at no charge from System Sensor. installation in Canada refer to CAN/ULC-S524, Stan- for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems, and CEC 1, Sec. 32.) This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. This sensor must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. This sensor be cleaned at least once a year. Description 1451 dual chamber ionization detectors utilize state-of- unipolar sensing chambers. These detectors are de- to provide open area protection, and to be used with UL-listed control panels only. The capability of these detectors into a variety of special bases makes more versatile than equivalent direct-wired models. LEDs on each detector light to provide a local 360(cid:176) vis- alarm indication. Remote LED annunciator capability available as an optional accessory. These detectors also the latching alarm feature. The alarm can be reset by a momentary power interruption. For testing, these have an internal magnetically activated reed Manuals Online! – All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, and regulations. Verify that all detector bases are installed, that the circuits have been tested, and that wiring is correct. power from initiating-device circuits before install- detectors. Install Detectors: Place the detector into the detector base. Turn the detector clockwise until the detector drops Continue turning detector clockwise to lock it in place. Tamper-proof Feature detector bases include a feature that, when acti- prevents removal of the detector without the use a tool. See the installation instruction manual of the base for details in using this feature. covers can be used to help limit dust entry to the de- but they are not a substitute for removing the detec- during building construction. Remove any dust covers placing system in service. testing, notify the proper authorities that the smoke system is undergoing maintenance and will tem- be out of service. Disable the zone or system un- maintenance to prevent unwanted alarms. must be tested after installation and periodic The 1451 may be tested as follows: testing the detector, look for the presence of the LEDs. If they do not flash, either power has been to the detector (check the wiring), or it is defective (re- for repair). Test Magnet (System Sensor Model No. M02-04-00) After all detectors have been installed, apply power to control unit. Place the magnet against

400 Series Plug-In Detectors Sensor 400 Series plug-in thermal detectors the performance criteria designated by Laboratories. Low standby current Two visible LEDs in standby and provide a 360 field angle Wide variety of mounting bases with built-in shorting spring Detector head plugs easily into base Built-in test switch Field sensitivity metering of detector to meet the requirements NFPA 72 Built-in tamper-resistant feature SEMS screws for easy wiring Optional recessed mounting 5451 thermal detector meets the needs for applications rapid response is vital and rapid temperature increases would be caused by a fire emergency. detector contains a unique dual thermistor heat sensing circuit provides maximum performance and solid-state reliability. It an alarm in response to both rapid rate-of-rise conditions in excess of 15 per minute) and fixed heat (135 This the heat detector to communicate an alarm to the central panel prior to reaching its fixed set point for high rates of providing a timely response to both rapid and slow temperature key features include a recessed mounting option, a variety mounting bases, and a full line of optional accessories. Listings Series Plug-In Smoke Detector Specifications Specifications Temperature Range Range Point Detector Spacing (8.1 cm) H; 4.0 (10.2 cm) Dia., unflanged base; 6.2 (15.7 cm) Dia., flanged base lb (136 g) to 100 (0 to 38 to 93% RH non-condensing retardant Noryl plastic (57.2 or 15 rate-of-rise smooth ceilings (as defined in NFPA 72), spacing of 50 feet (2500 sq ft) may be used. Other spacing may be used on ceiling height, high air movements, and other conditions or response requirements. maximum Current Voltage/Alarm Current Mounting base dependent (see Mounting Base Selection Guide below) Base Selection Guide Model Number Resistor Type contingent on panel compatibility. be limited by control panel. Draw Alarm (mA) to 100** VDC Flangeless base Although B401 bases are capable operating at 12 and 24 VDC, they be used with the 5451 in 12 applications. Box Selection Guide* Gang Octagon Octagon Square mm mm mm depth contingent on base and wire size. Refer to National Electrical Code of local applicable codes for appropriate recommendations. FAULT TOLERANT WIRING MOD400R Field Sensitivity Module can be used with standard DC voltmeter or to check the sensitivity of System Sensor detectors NFPA 72 requirement for testing). Information No. heat detector with rate-of-rise. Alarm point at 57.2 (135 Must be mounted to one of the 400 Series Bases listed in Mounting Base annunciator for 2- or 4-wire systems, 3 to 32 V. Use with ion and photo plug-in detectors. Fits standard U.S. single-gang electrical box. sensitivity test tool. (See above.) Use with most analog or digital multimeters. Satisfies requirement of NFPA 72 for sensitivity testing. above.) of line relay for power supervision, 12/24 VDC, 4-wire only. protective dust cover for plug-in 400 Series. magnet. magnet with 32-inch telescoping handle. removal tool. Allows installation and/or removal of detector heads from base in high-ceiling installations. pole for XR5. Comes in three 5 ft. sections. Ohio Avenue St. Charles, IL 60174 800-SENSOR2 Fax: 630-377-6495 System Sensor. specifications subject to change with

C o n v e n t i o n a l e t e C t i o n 190 Detector Overview solid-state thermistor sensing (88 fixed temperature against back pressure standby current tamper-resistant feature retardant Noryl plastic field viewing angle of the alarm LEDs plug-in of the head to base screws for easy wiring listed for 50 ft. spacing warranty 4451HT fixed intermediate temperature thermal detector is designed to meet stringent performance requirements of industrial and municipal fire detection/ systems. 4451HT thermal detector contains a unique dual thermistor sensing circuit provide both maximum performance and solid state reliability. An RA400Z LED annunciator is available as an optional accessory. Voltage base dependent chart below) Current microamps ounces (150 g) Base Selection Guide 4.1 inches (104 mm) inches (53 mm) retardant noryl plastic Temperature to 150 (0 to 66 Range to 93% RH noncondensing Point (88 C) to 18 gauge, twisted pair recommended Detector Spacing detectors on smooth ceilings (as defined in 72), spacing of 50 feet (2500 sq. ft.) may used. Other spacing may be used depending on height, high air movements, and other condi- or response requirements. A & C A & C Supy. C Voltage VDC VDC VDC VAC VDC VDC VDC mA AC Max. Model No. Type Limit Resistor Contact Type Draw on Alarm (mA) contingent on panel compatibility. **Must be limited by control panel. base B401B and B401 bases are capable of 12/24 VDC operation, they cannot be used with the 4451HT in 12V applications. Contact Ratings: A: C: or Inductive (60% power factor) load. at 30VAC/DC at 110VDC, 2.0A at 30VDC at 125VAC, 2.0A at 30VAC Guide FAULT TOLERANT WIRING Wiring Diagram VAC VAC C CIRCUIT C CIRCUIT Wiring Diagram Information No. temperature thermal detector with alarm at 190 (88 Must be mounted to of the B40X Series bases listed above separately). (+) ( BLK CIRCUIT Wiring Diagram NFPA CLASS WI

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and 4451HTA Fixed Intermediate Thermal Detectors 4.1 2.1 5 32 10% Reset 190 15-35 100 Installing detector must be installed in compliance with the con- panel installation manual and meet the requirements of authority having jurisdiction. In addition, the National Protection Association has published codes, standards, must be familiar with these requirements, with local This This detector must be tested and maintained Description 4451HT and 4451HTA detectors are fixed intermediate 1 Selection And Wiring Guide to the installation instructions for the plug-in detector current limiting resistors for use with control panels the System Sensor plug-in base to be used with the All wiring must conform to applicable installation 1. Heat detector spacing reduction based on ceiling height: To And Including Of Listed Spacing Height Above Insert the detector clockwise until the detector drops Continue Feature Reset

Product Smoke Detector Specifications detector shall be a System Sensor i3 Series model number 4W-B, listed to Underwriters UL 268 for Fire Protection Signaling Systems. The detector shall be a photoelectric detector. The detector shall include a mounting base for mounting to 3 and 4-inch single gang, and 4-inch square back boxes with a plaster ring, or direct mount to the using drywall anchors. Wiring connections shall be made by means of SEMS screws. The shall allow pre-wiring of the base and the head shall be a plug-in type. The detector shall a nominal sensitivity of 2.5 percent-per-foot nominal as measured in the UL smoke box. The shall be capable of automatically adjusting its sensitivity by means of drift compensation smoothing algorithms. The detector shall provide dual color LED indication which blinks to power up, normal standby, out of sensitivity, alarm and freeze trouble conditions. Specifications 4W-B Operating Voltage shall be; Nominal: 12/24V non-polarized, Minimum: 8.5V, 35V. The Maximum Ripple Voltage shall be 30% peak to peak of applied voltage. The Current shall be 50 maximum average. The Maximum Alarm Current shall be 20 mA 12V, 23mA @ 24V. The Alarm Contact Ratings shall be 0.5 A @ 30V AC/DC. Specifications 4W-B dimensions (including base) shall be 5.3 inches (134 mm) diameter; 2.0 inches (51 height. The 4W-B detector weight shall be 6.3 oz. (178 grams). The 4W-B detector Temperature Range shall be 32 (0 The 4W-B Operating Humidity shall be 0 to 95% RH non-condensing. The 4W-B Sensitivity shall be 2.5%/ft. nominal. 4W-B Input Terminals shall be 14 AWG. options for the 4W-B detector include; 3 octagonal back box, 4-inch octagonal box, Single gang back box, 4-inch square back box with a plaster ring, or direct mount to Modes Power up, the Green LED shall blink every 10 seconds; the Red LED shall blink every 10 In Normal (standby) mode, the Green LED shall blink every 5 seconds; the Red LED be off. In Out of sensitivity mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall blink every seconds. In Alarm mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall be solid. 2009

Product Smoke Detector Specifications detector shall be a System Sensor i3 Series model number 4WITAR-B, listed to Laboratories UL 268 for Fire Protection Signaling Systems. The detector shall be a photoelectric/thermal equipped with an isolated thermal/sounder/relay. The detector include a mounting base for mounting to 3 and 4-inch octagonal, single gang, and 4- square back boxes with a plaster ring, or direct mount to the ceiling using drywall anchors. connections shall be made by means of SEMS screws. The detector shall allow pre-wiring the base and the head shall be a plug-in type. The detector shall have a nominal sensitivity of per foot nominal as measured in the UL smoke box. The detector shall be capable of adjusting its sensitivity by means of drift compensation and smoothing algorithms. detector shall provide dual color LED indication which blinks to indicate power-up, normal out of sensitivity, alarm, and freeze trouble conditions. Specifications Operating Voltage shall be; Nominal: 12/24V non-polarized, Minimum: 8.5V, Maximum: 35V. Maximum Ripple Voltage shall be 30% peak to peak of applied voltage. The Standby Current be 50 maximum average. The Maximum Alarm Current shall 50 mA. The Alarm Contact shall be 0.5 A @ 30V AC/DC. Specifications 4WITAR-B dimensions (including base) shall be 5.3 inches (134 mm) diameter; 2.0 inches mm) height. The approximate detector weight shall be 7.1 oz. (200 grams). The Operating Range shall be 32 (0 The Operating Humidity Range shall be to 95% RH non-condensing. The Thermal Sensor shall be 135 (57.2 fixed. The Freeze shall be 41 (5 The Sensitivity shall be 2.5%/ft. nominal. The Input Terminals shall 14 AWG. options for the 4WITAR-B detector include; 3 octagonal back box, 4-inch back box, Single gang back box, 4-inch square back box with a plaster ring, or direct to ceiling. Modes Power up, the Green LED shall blink every 10 seconds; the Red LED shall blink every 10 In Normal (standby) mode, the Green LED shall blink every 5 seconds; the Red LED be off. In Out of sensitivity mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall blink every seconds. In Freeze trouble mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall blink every 10 In Alarm mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall be solid. 2009

Product Smoke Detector Specifications detector shall be a System Sensor i3 Series model number 4WT-B, listed to Underwriters UL 268 for Fire Protection Signaling Systems. The detector shall be a combination type detector with thermal sensor rated at 135 (57.2 The detector include a mounting base for mounting to 3 and 4-inch octagonal, single gang, and 4- square back boxes with a plaster ring, or direct mount to the ceiling using drywall anchors. connections shall be made by means of SEMS screws. The detector shall allow pre-wiring the base and the head shall be a plug-in type. The detector shall have a nominal sensitivity of percent-per-foot nominal as measured in the UL smoke box. The detector shall be capable of adjusting its sensitivity by means of drift compensation and smoothing algorithms. detector shall provide dual color LED indication which blinks to indicate power up, normal out of sensitivity, alarm and freeze trouble conditions. Specifications 4WT-B Operating Voltage shall be; Nominal: 12/24V non-polarized, Minimum: 8.5V, 35V. The Maximum Ripple Voltage shall be 30% peak to peak of applied voltage. The Current shall be 50 maximum average. The Maximum Alarm Current shall be 20 mA 12V, 23mA @ 24V. The Alarm Contact Ratings shall be 0.5 A @ 30V AC/DC. Specifications 4WT-B dimensions (including base) shall be 5.3 inches (134 mm) diameter; 2.0 inches (51 height. The 4WT-B detector weight shall be 6.3 oz. (178 grams). The 4WT-B detector Temperature Range shall be 32 (0 The 4WT-B Operating Range shall be 0 to 95% RH non-condensing. The 4WT-B Thermal Sensor shall be (57.2 fixed. The 4WT-B Freeze Trouble shall be 41 (5 The 4WT-B Sensitivity be 2.5%/ft. nominal. The 4WT-B Input Terminals shall be 14 AWG. options for the 4WT-B detector include; 3 octagonal back box, 4-inch octagonal box, Single gang back box, 4-inch square back box with a plaster ring, or direct mount to Modes Power up, the Green LED shall blink every 10 seconds; the Red LED shall blink every 10 In Normal (standby) mode, the Green LED shall blink every 5 seconds; the Red LED be off. In Out of sensitivity mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall blink every seconds. In Freeze trouble mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall blink every 10 In Alarm mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall be solid. 2009

Product Smoke Detector Specifications detector shall be a System Sensor i3 Series model number 4WTA-B, listed to Laboratories UL 268 for Fire Protection Signaling Systems. The detector shall be a photoelectric/thermal equipped with a sounder. The detector shall include a base for mounting to 3 and 4-inch octagonal, single gang, and 4-inch square boxes with a plaster ring, or direct mount to the ceiling using drywall anchors. Wiring shall be made by means of SEMS screws. The detector shall allow pre-wiring of the and the head shall be a plug-in type. The detector shall have a nominal sensitivity of 2.5% foot nominal as measured in the UL smoke box. The detector shall be capable of adjusting its sensitivity by means of drift compensation and smoothing algorithms. detector shall provide dual color LED indication which blinks to indicate power-up, normal out of sensitivity, alarm, and freeze trouble conditions. Specifications Operating Voltage shall be; Nominal: 12/24V non-polarized, Minimum: 8.5V, Maximum: 35V. Maximum Ripple Voltage shall be 30% peak to peak of applied voltage. The Standby Current be 50 maximum average. The Maximum Alarm Current shall be 35. The Alarm Contact shall be 0.5 A @ 30V AC/DC. Specifications 4WTA-B dimensions (including base) shall be 5.3 inches (134 mm) diameter; 2.0 inches (51 height. The approximate detector weight shall be 7.1 oz. (200 grams). The 4WTA-B Operating Temperature Range shall be 32 (0 The 4WTA-B Humidity Range shall be 0 to 95% RH non-condensing. The 4WTA-B Thermal Sensor be 135 (57.2 fixed. The 4WTA-B Freeze Trouble shall be 41 (5 The 4WTA-B shall be 2.5%/ft. nominal. The 4WTA-B Input Terminals shall be 14 AWG. options for the 4WTA-B detector include; 3 octagonal back box, 4-inch octagonal box, Single gang back box, 4-inch square back box with a plaster ring, or direct mount to Modes Power up, the Green LED shall blink every 10 seconds; the Red LED shall blink every 10 In Normal (standby) mode, the Green LED shall blink every 5 seconds; the Red LED be off. In Out of sensitivity mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall blink every seconds. In Freeze trouble mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall blink every 10 In Alarm mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall be solid. 2009

Product Smoke Detector Specifications detector shall be a System Sensor i3 Series model number 4WTAR-B, listed to Laboratories UL 268 for Fire Protection Signaling Systems. The detector shall be a photoelectric/thermal equipped with a combination sounder/relay. The detector shall a mounting base for mounting to 3 and 4-inch octagonal, single gang, and 4-inch back boxes with a plaster ring, or direct mount to the ceiling using drywall anchors. Wiring shall be made by means of SEMS screws. The detector shall allow pre-wiring of the and the head shall be a plug-in type. The detector shall have a nominal sensitivity of 2.5% foot nominal as measured in the UL smoke box. The detector shall be capable of adjusting its sensitivity by means of drift compensation and smoothing algorithms. detector shall provide dual color LED indication which blinks to indicate power-up, normal out of sensitivity, alarm, and freeze trouble conditions. Specifications Operating Voltage shall be; Nominal: 12/24V non-polarized, Minimum: 8.5V, Maximum: 35V. Maximum Ripple Voltage shall be 30% peak to peak of applied voltage. The Standby Current be 50 maximum average. The Maximum Alarm Current shall be 50 mA. The Alarm Ratings shall be 0.5 A @ 30V AC/DC. Specifications 4WTAR-B dimensions (including base) shall be 5.3 inches (134 mm) diameter; 2.0 inches mm) height. The approximate detector weight shall be 7.1 oz. (200 grams). The Operating Range shall be 32 (0 The Operating Humidity Range shall be to 95% RH non-condensing. The Thermal Sensor shall be 135 (57.2 fixed. The Freeze shall be 41 (5 The 4WT-B Sensitivity shall be 2.5%/ft. nominal. The Input shall be 14 AWG. options for the 4WTAR-B detector include; 3 octagonal back box, 4-inch back box, Single gang back box, 4-inch square back box with a plaster ring, or direct to ceiling. Modes Power up, the Green LED shall blink every 10 seconds; the Red LED shall blink every 10 In Normal (standby) mode, the Green LED shall blink every 5 seconds; the Red LED be off. In Out of sensitivity mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall blink every seconds. In Freeze trouble mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall blink every 10 In Alarm mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall be solid. 2009

Product Smoke Detector Specifications detector shall be a System Sensor i3 Series model number 4WTR-B, listed to Laboratories UL 268 for Fire Protection Signaling Systems. The detector shall be a photoelectric/thermal detector. The detector shall include a mounting base for to 3 and 4-inch octagonal, single gang, and 4-inch square back boxes with a ring, or direct mount to the ceiling using drywall anchors. Wiring connections shall be by means of SEMS screws. The detector shall allow pre-wiring of the base and the head be a plug-in type. The detector shall have a nominal sensitivity of 2.5% per foot nominal as in the UL smoke box. The detector shall be capable of automatically adjusting its by means of drift compensation and smoothing algorithms. The detector shall provide color LED indication which blinks to indicate power-up, normal standby, out of sensitivity, and freeze trouble conditions. Specifications Operating Voltage shall be; Nominal: 12/24V non-polarized, Minimum: 8.5V, Maximum: 35V. Maximum Ripple Voltage shall be 30% peak to peak of applied voltage. The Standby Current be 50 maximum average. The Maximum Alarm Current shall be 35 mA. The Alarm Ratings shall be 0.5 A @ 30V AC/DC. Specifications 4WTR-B dimensions (including base) shall be 5.3 inches (134 mm) diameter; 2.0 inches (51 height. The approximate detector weight shall be 7.1 oz. (200 grams). The 4WTR-B Operating Temperature Range shall be 32 (0 The 4WTR-B Humidity Range shall be 0 to 95% RH non-condensing. The 4WTR-B Thermal Sensor be 135 (57.2 fixed. The 4WTR-B Freeze Trouble shall be 41 (5 The 4WT-B shall be 2.5%/ft. nominal. The 4WTR-B Input Terminals shall be 14 AWG. options for the 4WTR-B detector include; 3 octagonal back box, 4-inch octagonal box, Single gang back box, 4-inch square back box with a plaster ring, or direct mount to Modes Power up, the Green LED shall blink every 10 seconds; the Red LED shall blink every 10 In Normal (standby) mode, the Green LED shall blink every 5 seconds; the Red LED be off. In Out of sensitivity mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall blink every seconds. In Freeze trouble mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall blink every 10 In Alarm mode, the Green LED shall be off; the Red LED shall be solid. 2009

500 Series Sensors with Communications Division of Pittway Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, IL 60174 (736-7672), Fax 630-377-6495 Available Ionization Sensor Photoelectronic Sensor Fixed Temperature Thermal Sensor High Resolution Photo Sensor with Thermal Rate-of-Rise/Fixed Temperature Thermal Sensor Low standby current Shielded electronics Noise immunity provides stable communications Compact, stylish design Sensor plugs easily into base Sensor Intelligent Sensors offer features and that surpass conventional sensors. The of models 1551B, 2551HR, and 2551THR can be individually in the panel software. The sensors may continuously monitored for changes in sensitivity and 2551HR, 2551THR Weight: Range Range: Velocity Rating: Voltage: Current: (8.1 cm), detector in base .5 [1.27 cm] for thermal) (10.2 cm) installed in base (15.5 cm) installed in base ounces (272 g) to 120 F (0 to 49 C) to 100 F (0 to 38 C) to 93% RH noncondensing fpm VDC peak, 6.5 mA for visible LEDs on Built-in tamper-resist feature Sealed against dirt, insects, and back pressure SEMS screws for easy wiring Easy to use decade address switches Built-in type ID for dirt, temperature, or humidity to maintain set sensitivity. Model 5551R offers a rate-of-rise response while the 5551B offers a fixed response. (2551HR): principle) Sensor Detector Spacing: F fixed temperature alarm smooth ceilings (as defined in NFPA 72) spacing of feet (900 sq. ft.) may be used as a guide. See NFPA for more details on spacing requirements. System Sensor 4/97 document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. Description 500 Series sensors are simple to install, service, and Using a specially designed tool (XR5), personnel can easily remove and replace the detectors without using a ladder. 500 Series incorporate built-in identification allowing the to identify the type of sensor. They also have a magnetic reed switch for local testing, and the 2551HR, and 2551THR can be sensitivity tested the MOD400R Field Sensitivity Test Tool. 2551HR Intelligent Photoelectronic Sensor represents state of the art in smoke sensor technology. It features coated circuit boards, special insect and dirt and superior RF/transient protection. The will transmit an analog value representative of the that can be used by the system to determine maintenance is required. Signal processing for alarm can be built into the system to provide to false alarms. 2551THR Intelligent Photoelectronic Sensor adds a heat collector that will alarm at a fixed of 135 F. 1551B Intelligent Ionization Smoke Sensor unique chamber responds quickly and uniformly to the range of fires and can withstand wind gusts up to feet-per-minute without outputting an alarm level Because of the unipolar chamber, the 1551B is responsive than most ionization sensors. This makes a more stable detector. 1551B Weight: Range: Range: Velocity Rating: Voltage: (5.8 cm), detector in base (10.2 cm) in B501 base (15.5 cm) in B501B base ounces (269 g) to 120 F (0 to 49 C) to 93% RH noncondensing fpm VDC peak, 6.5 mA for visible LEDs on with base with base Current: Detector Spacing: dual chamber smooth ceilings (as defined in NFPA 72) spacing of feet (900 sq. ft.) may be used as a guide. See NFPA for more details on spacing requirements. 2

500 Series Sensors with Communications Division of Pittway Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, IL 60174 (736-7672), Fax 630-377-6495 Available Ionization Sensor Photoelectronic Sensor Fixed Temperature Thermal Sensor High Resolution Photo Sensor with Thermal Rate-of-Rise/Fixed Temperature Thermal Sensor Low standby current Shielded electronics Noise immunity provides stable communications Compact, stylish design Sensor plugs easily into base Sensor Intelligent Sensors offer features and that surpass conventional sensors. The of models 1551B, 2551HR, and 2551THR can be individually in the panel software. The sensors may continuously monitored for changes in sensitivity and 2551HR, 2551THR Weight: Range Range: Velocity Rating: Voltage: Current: (8.1 cm), detector in base .5 [1.27 cm] for thermal) (10.2 cm) installed in base (15.5 cm) installed in base ounces (272 g) to 120 F (0 to 49 C) to 100 F (0 to 38 C) to 93% RH noncondensing fpm VDC peak, 6.5 mA for visible LEDs on Built-in tamper-resist feature Sealed against dirt, insects, and back pressure SEMS screws for easy wiring Easy to use decade address switches Built-in type ID for dirt, temperature, or humidity to maintain set sensitivity. Model 5551R offers a rate-of-rise response while the 5551B offers a fixed response. (2551HR): principle) Sensor Detector Spacing: F fixed temperature alarm smooth ceilings (as defined in NFPA 72) spacing of feet (900 sq. ft.) may be used as a guide. See NFPA for more details on spacing requirements. System Sensor 4/97 document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. Description 500 Series sensors are simple to install, service, and Using a specially designed tool (XR5), personnel can easily remove and replace the detectors without using a ladder. 500 Series incorporate built-in identification allowing the to identify the type of sensor. They also have a magnetic reed switch for local testing, and the 2551HR, and 2551THR can be sensitivity tested the MOD400R Field Sensitivity Test Tool. 2551HR Intelligent Photoelectronic Sensor represents state of the art in smoke sensor technology. It features coated circuit boards, special insect and dirt and superior RF/transient protection. The will transmit an analog value representative of the that can be used by the system to determine maintenance is required. Signal processing for alarm can be built into the system to provide to false alarms. 2551THR Intelligent Photoelectronic Sensor adds a heat collector that will alarm at a fixed of 135 F. 1551B Intelligent Ionization Smoke Sensor unique chamber responds quickly and uniformly to the range of fires and can withstand wind gusts up to feet-per-minute without outputting an alarm level Because of the unipolar chamber, the 1551B is responsive than most ionization sensors. This makes a more stable detector. 1551B Weight: Range: Range: Velocity Rating: Voltage: (5.8 cm), detector in base (10.2 cm) in B501 base (15.5 cm) in B501B base ounces (269 g) to 120 F (0 to 49 C) to 93% RH noncondensing fpm VDC peak, 6.5 mA for visible LEDs on with base with base Current: Detector Spacing: dual chamber smooth ceilings (as defined in NFPA 72) spacing of feet (900 sq. ft.) may be used as a guide. See NFPA for more details on spacing requirements. 2

500 Series Modules System Sensor intelligent module products are to meet a wide range of applications. SEMS screws for easing wiring Panel controlled status LED (except M501M) Analog communications Rotary address switches (except M500X) Low standby current Mounts in standard 4 junction box Listings and control modules can be used to supervise and sounders, strobes, door closers, pull stations, waterflow conventional smoke detectors, and more. Each module rigorously designed and tested for electromagnetic compatibility environmental reliability, in many cases exceeding industry Modules are addressed with easy-to-use rotary switches. Full size modules mount in standard 4 in 4 in 21 in junction box. Wiring terminals are easily accessible for Monitor Module, M501M Mini Monitor Module, M500DM Dual Input Monitor Module Sensor monitor modules provide an interface to contact such as security contacts, waterflow switches, or pull M501M and M500DM are capable of Class B supervised to the monitored device. M500M is capable of Class A Conventional 4-wire smoke detectors can be monitored their alarm and trouble contacts, wired as an initiating loop the module. In addition to transmitting the supervised state of the device (normal, open, or short), the full analog supervision is sent back to the panel. This allows detection of changes in the supervised loop to the monitored device. M500DM module is capable of monitoring two separate Class B simultaneously, making it ideal for waterflow tamper switch flow switch monitoring. The compact size of the M501M module it to fit inside devices or junction boxes behind devices. Isolator Module M500X Isolator Module is an automatic switch that opens when line voltage drops below four volts. Isolator modules should be between groups of sensors or modules in a loop to protect rest of the loop. If a short occurs between any two isolators, then isolators immediately switch to an open circuit state and isolate devices between them. The remaining units on the loop continue fully operate. The number of devices that can be installed between modules varies depending on the device type. Please see module’s manual for more information. Zone Interface Module M502M Zone Interface Module allows intelligent panels to and monitor 2-wire conventional smoke detectors. All detectors being monitored must be UL or ULC compatible the module. The M502M module is addressed through the line of an intelligent system. It transmits the status of zone of 2-wire detectors to the fire alarm control panel. Status are reported as normal, open, or alarm. The interface supervises the zone of detectors and the connection of the power supply. Control Module M500S Control Module provides supervised monitoring of wiring load devices that require an external power supply to operate, as horns, strobes, or bells. It is capable of Class A and Class supervision. Upon command from the control panel, the M500S will disconnect the supervision and connect the external supply across the load device. The disconnection of the provides a verification to the panel that the control actually turned on. The external power supply is always relay from the communication loop, so that a trouble condition on power supply will never interfere with the rest of the system. Full measurement of the supervised wiring is transmitted back to panel and can be used to detect impedance changes or other test functions. Relay Module M500R Relay Module contains two isolated sets of Form C which operate as a DPDT switch. The module allows the panel to switch these contacts on command. No supervision provided for the notification appliance circuit. Firefighter Phone Module M500FP module is intended to monitor and control a loop of phones. It has the ability to differentiate between normal, and trouble conditions. When taken off-hook, a phone will receive a ringing tone, and the panel will receive an off- indication. The panel can then connect that off-hook phone to main riser for the system. Series Intelligent Module Specifications Specifications Voltage Line

500 Series Input and Modules Sensor multiple input and output modules designed to meet a range of applications in which single modules are used. Removable 12 to 18 AWG plug-in terminal blocks Individual LED indicators Unused addresses may be disabled Rotary address switches Class A or B operation Mount up to two modules in BB-2 enclosure (optional) Mount up to six modules in BB-6 enclosure with CH-6 chassis Mounting hardware included Listings design of the System Sensor 500 Series multiple input and modules allows for installation ease and time savings The and control modules can be used to supervise and activate strobes, door closers, pull stations, waterflow switches, smoke detectors and more. The conventional zone module is ideal for retrofit applications to monitor zones of two-wire detectors. Each module has its own address. are addressed with easy-to-use rotary code switches. are included for disabling unused addresses. Up to two mount in a BB-2 enclosure with built-in chassis and up to modules mount in a BB-6 enclosure with the CH-6 chassis. Wiring are easily accessible for trouble-shooting purposes. SIX RELAY CONTROL MODULE CR-6 Six Relay Control module consists of six Form-C relays. first address is set from 01 to 94, while the remaining modules automatically assigned to the next five higher addresses. are included for disabling a maximum of three unused A single isolated set of dry relay contacts is provided for module address which is capable of being wired for either a open or normally closed operation. The module allows the panel to switch these contacts on command. No supervision provided for the controlled circuit. SIX SUPERVISED CONTROL MODULE SC-6 Six Supervised Control module provides supervised of wiring to load devices that require an external power or amplifier to operate, such as horns, strobes, speakers bells. Upon command from the control panel, the SC-6 will the supervision and connect the external power supply the load device. The first module is addressed from 01 to 94, the remaining modules are assigned to the next five higher Provisions are included for disabling a maximum of unused modules. Each module has terminals for connection an external supply circuit for powering devices on its notification circuit. One or multiple power supplies or amplifiers may used. TEN INPUT MONITOR MODULE IM-10 Ten Input Monitor module provides an interface between control panel and normally open contact devices such as pull security contacts, or flow switches. The first address is from 01 to 90 and the remaining modules are automatically to the next nine higher addresses. Provisions are included disabling a maximum of two unused addresses. The supervised (normal, open or short) of the monitored device is sent back to panel. SIX ISOLATOR MODULE ISO-6 Six Isolator Module is an automatic switch that opens the line voltage drops below four volts. Isolator modules be spaced between groups of sensors or modules in a loop protect the rest of the loop. If a short occurs between any two then both isolators immediately switch to an open circuit and isolate the devices between them. The remaining units on loop continue to fully operate. INPUT / TWO OUTPUT MODULE multiple module combines two relay outputs and two monitor into one device. The module is capable of Class B supervised to the monitored devices. It also contains Form C relay allowing the panel to switch the contacts on command. is a dedicated LED on the module for each input and output. control panel can use these bi-color LEDs to indicate normal, and alarm conditions. is a short circuit protection monitor for each module. This provided to protect the external power supply against short conditions on the NAC. When an alarm condition occurs, relay which connects the external supply to the NAC will not be to close if a short circuit condition currently exists on the In addition, an algorithm is incorporated to find a short when module is active. The module will close all circuits that are not to find the NAC with the problem. ACCESSORY CARD S

No text preview available.

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-In Heat Detector Temperature Range: Humidity Range: voltage: Current: Current: Alarm: inches (42 mm) inches (102 mm) oz. (80g) to 100 (0 to 38 to 93% Relative Humidity noncondensing to 35VDC @24VDC Min. 130mA Max. (Must be limited by control panel) by momentary power interruption (57 Fixed or 15 rate-of-rise Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 INSTALLING detector must be installed in compliance with the control panel installa- manual and meet the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. the National Fire Protection Association has published codes, stan- and recommended practices for the installation and use of detectors, 72. the installer must be familiar with these requirements, with local and any special requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector must be tested and maintained regularly following 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at least once a year. DESCRIPTION 5151 is a rate-of-rise with fixed temperature alarm, conventional 2-wire detector. This detector is designed to provide open area protection 50-foot spacing capability as approved by UL 521, RTI rating is classified FAST in accordance with FM 3210. LEDs on each detector provide local 360 visible alarm indication. They every five seconds indicating that power is applied and the detector working properly. The LEDs latch on in alarm. LEDs will be off when a condition exists indicating that the detector sensitivity is outside the limit. Remote LED annunciator capability is standard and may be imple- through an optional accessory RA100Z. The alarm can be reset only a momentary power interruption. This detector may be tested by activating internal reed switch with a magnet. WIRING GUIDE to the installation instructions for the plug-in detector base for electrical and wiring instructions. The base provides screw terminals for and remote annunciator connections. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and Verify that all detector bases are installed, that the initiating-device have been tested, and that the wiring is correct. (Refer to detector base for testing procedure.) power from initiating-device circuits before installing detectors. detectors: Tamper Resistance: Place the detector into the detector base. Turn the detector clockwise until the detector drops into place. Continue turning detector clockwise to lock it in place. The detector bases can be made tamper resistant. When capability enabled, detectors cannot be removed from the base without the of a tool. See the detector base installation manual of the detector for details in using this capability. After all detectors have been installed, apply power to the control unit. Test the detector using the magnet as described under TESTING. Reset the detector at the system control panel. Notify the proper authorities that the system is back on line. RESISTANCE detector bases include a feature that, when activated, prevents removal the detector without the use of a tool. Refer to the installation instruction of the detector base to make use of this capability. testing, notify the proper authorities that the smoke detector system is maintenance and will temporarily be out of service. Disable the or system undergoing maintenance to prevent unwanted alarms. Detec- must be tested after installation and as part of periodic maintenance. Test as follows: Before testing the detector, check to ensure the LEDs blink. If they do the detector has lost power (check the wiring), it is defective (return it for or the detector sensitivity is outside the listed limits. Test Magnet (p/n M02-04-01 or M02-09-00) Place the magnet against the cover in the location designated by the mark to activate the test feature (see Figure 1). The LEDs should latch ON within 5 seconds indicating alarm and annun- the panel. Direct Heat Met

Product: Fixed/Rate-of-Rise Thermal Detector and Engineering Specifications: thermal detector shall be a System Sensor model number 5151. Detector shall a conventional fixed/rate-of-rise thermal detector and shall connect with two wires to the fire control panel initiating device circuit (IDC). The detectors shall alarm at a fixed of 135 (57.2 and have a rate-of-rise element rated at 15 (8.3 per minute. detectors shall have RTI rating for installation of V2-FAST or better. detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel. There are two test methods: magnet or direct heat method. detectors shall provide two LEDs to provide 360 visibility. The LEDs are placed into steady illumination indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. An output connection shall be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED or relay base (optional detectors shall be low profile ceiling-mount/wall-mount and shall be plug-in mounted into a base. These detectors shall be constructed of off-white UV resistant polymer and shall detachable from the mounting base to simplify installation, service and maintenance. Mounting wiring connections shall be made by means of SEMS screws. The detector shall allow pre- of the base and the head shall be a plug-in type. Mounting base shall be mounted on box which is at least 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) deep. Mounting base shall be available to to standard junction boxes. Suitable boxes include: (10.16 cm) square box with and without plaster ring. (10.16 cm) octagonal box. (8.89 cm) octagonal box. box. Agency Standards: CSFM 7270 Heat Detector 521- Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 3210- Heat Detectors for Automatic Fire Alarm Signaling 2011

No text preview available.

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 5251RB and 5251H Plug-In Temperature Sensors Temperatures: Humidity Range: Range: Current: Current: Temperature Rating: of Rise Detection: inches (155 mm) installed in B210LP; 4.1 inches (104 mm) installed in B501 inches (51 mm) ounces (137 gm) to 100 ( to 38 5251B and 5251RB; to 150 ( to 66 5251H to 93% Relative Humidity Non-condensing flanged base; B501 flangeless base; B501 with RMK400 recessed mounting kit to 32 Volts DC Peak @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with LED blink enabled) mA @ 24 VDC (57 5251B and 5251RB; 190 (88 5251H to greater than 15 5251RB 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 INSTALLING sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system manual. The installation must meet the requirements of the Au- Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance when in compliance with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); NFPA 72. read the system wiring and installation manual thoroughly. This man- provides detailed information on sensor spacing, placement, zoning, and applications. Copies of these manuals are available from System Sen- DESCRIPTION 5251B, 5251RB and 5251H are intelligent sensors that utilize a state-of- thermistor sensing circuit for fast response. These sensors are designed provide open area protection with 50 foot spacing capability as approved by 521. Model 5251B is a fixed temperature sensor with 135 fixed tempera- alarm. Model 5251RB is a rate-of-rise temperature sensor with 135 fixed alarm. Model 5251H is a high temperature sensor with 190 temperature alarm. LEDs on each sensor light to provide 360 visibility of the sensor indica- The LEDs can be latched ON by code command from the panel for an indication. The LEDs can also be unlatched to the normal condition code command. Remote LED annunciator capability is available as an op- accessory (Part No. RA400Z/RA100Z). 5251B, 5251RB and 5251H require compatible addressable commu- to function properly. Connect these sensors to listed-compatible panels only. 5251RB Heat detectors are sold in the European Community for use in applications in conjunction with sprinkler systems. They must not be in Europe as part of an EN54 fire detection and alarm system GUIDE wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, local codes and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Proper wire should be used. The installation wires should be color coded to limit mistakes and ease system troubleshooting. Improper connections will a system from responding properly in the event of a fire. power from the communication line before installing sensors. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) per the wiring diagram, see 1. Set the desired address on the sensor address switches, see Figure 2. Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor into the base turning it clockwise to secure it in place. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control unit and the communication line. Test the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section of this manual. RESISTANCE sensor bases have a tamper-resistant capability. When this capability is sensors cannot be removed from the base without the use of a small or other similar tool. Refer to the sensor base installation instruc- manual for details in using this capability. testing, notify the proper authorities that the system is undergoing and will temporarily be out of service. Disable the system to unwanted alarms. sensors must be tested after installation and periodically thereafter. Test- methods must satisfy the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors maximum performance when tested and maintained in compliance with 72. The sensor may be tested in the following ways: TEST MAGNET (MODEL NO. M02-04) Place the magnet against the cover in the magnet test

Product Fixed Temperature Thermal Detector and Engineering Specifications fixed temperature thermal detector shall be a System Sensor model number 5251B. shall be an addressable intelligent fixed temperature thermal detector and shall connect two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit (SLC). The detectors with fixed sensors shall alarm at a fixed temperature of 135 (58 The detectors shall have RTI for installation of FAST or better. detectors shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using rotary switches. of the possibility of installation error, systems that use binary jumpers or DIP switches to the detector address are not acceptable. The detectors shall also store an internal identifying that the control panel shall use to identify the type of detector. Systems that require a programmer to set the detector address (including temporary connection at the panel) are intensive and not acceptable. Each detector occupies any one of at least 99 possible on the SLC loop. It responds to regular polls from the system and reports its type and detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel. There are two test methods: magnet or direct heat method. detectors shall provide two LEDs to provide 360 visibility. The LEDs are placed into steady illumination by the control panel indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. An connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED, base, and / or relay base (optional accessories). The external remote alarm can be to other sounder or relay bases for activating all devices in a space via a single unit. LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor status. Coded signals, from the panel, can cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, or latch off. Refer to the control technical documentation for sensor LED status operation and expected delay to alarm. detectors shall be low profile ceiling-mount/wall-mount and shall be plug-in mounted into a base. These detectors shall be constructed of off-white UV resistant polymer and shall detachable from the mounting base to simplify installation, service and maintenance. Mounting wiring connections shall be made by means of SEMS screws. The detector shall allow pre- of the base and the head shall be a plug-in type. Mounting base shall be mounted on box which is at least 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) deep. Mounting base shall be available to to standard junction boxes. Suitable boxes include: (10.16 cm) square box with and without plaster ring. (10.16 cm) octagonal box. (8.89 cm) octagonal box. box. 521- Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems Agency Standards CAN/ULC S530- Heat Actuated Fire Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems 3210- Heat Detectors for Automatic Fire Alarm Signaling 2009

Product High Temperature Thermal Detector and Engineering Specifications high temperature thermal detector shall be a System Sensor model number 5251H. shall be an addressable intelligent high temperature thermal detector and shall connect two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit (SLC). The detectors shall at a fixed high temperature of 190 (88 The detectors shall have RTI rating for of QUICK or better. detectors shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using rotary switches. of the possibility of installation error, systems that use binary jumpers or DIP switches to the detector address are not acceptable. The detectors shall also store an internal identifying that the control panel shall use to identify the type of detector. Systems that require a programmer to set the detector address (including temporary connection at the panel) are intensive and not acceptable. Each detector occupies any one of at least 99 possible on the SLC loop. It responds to regular polls from the system and reports its type and detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel. There are two test methods: magnet or direct heat method. detectors shall provide two LEDs to provide 360 visibility. The LEDs are placed into steady illumination by the control panel indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. An connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED, base, and / or relay base (optional accessories). The external remote alarm can be to other sounder or relay bases for activating all devices in a space via a single unit. LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor status. Coded signals, from the panel, can cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, or latch off. Refer to the control technical documentation for sensor LED status operation and expected delay to alarm. detectors shall be low profile ceiling-mount/wall-mount and shall be plug-in mounted into a base. These detectors shall be constructed of off-white UV resistant polymer and shall detachable from the mounting base to simplify installation, service and maintenance. Mounting wiring connections shall be made by means of SEMS screws. The detector shall allow pre- of the base and the head shall be a plug-in type. Mounting base shall be mounted on box which is at least 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) deep. Mounting base shall be available to to standard junction boxes. Suitable boxes include: (10.16 cm) square box with and without plaster ring. (10.16 cm) octagonal box. (8.89 cm) octagonal box. box. 521- Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems Agency Standards CAN/ULC S530- Heat Actuated Fire Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems 3210- Heat Detectors for Automatic Fire Alarm Signaling 2009

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-In Model 5251P Temperature Sensor Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 installing sensors, refer to NFPA 72, and 101 (Life Safety Code) for information on sensor spacing, placement, zon- and special applications. DESCRIPTION 5251P is an intelligent sensor that utilizes a state-of-the-art thermistor sensing circuit for fast response. This sensor designed to provide open area protection with 50 foot spacing capability and is intended for use with compatible con- panels only. LEDs on each sensor light to provide 360 visibility of the sensor indication. The LEDs can be latched ON by code from the panel for an alarm indication. The LEDs can also be unlatched to the normal condition by code com- Remote LED annunciator capability is available as an optional accessory (Part No. RA400Z). Temperatures: Humidity Range: Range: Current: Current: Temperature Rating: inches (155 mm) installed in B210LP inches (104 mm) installed in B501 inches (51 mm) ounces (150 gm) to 100 F (-20 C to 38 C) to 93% Relative Humidity Non-condensing flanged base flangeless base with RMK400 recessed mounting kit to 32 Volts DC Peak @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with LED blink enabled) mA @ 24 VDC (57 C) GUIDE to the installation instructions for the particular plug-in base being used: 1) for the B210LP base (D250-01-00); 2) for B501 base (D550-02-00); 3) for the RMK400 used with the B501 base (D450-07-00). Bases are provided with screw ter- for power, ground, and remote annunciator connections. See Figure 1. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and regulations. Verify that all sensor bases are installed and that the wiring polarity is correct at each base. Disconnect the power from the loop before installing sensors. Install Sensors: Verify that the sensor type matches the type written on the label in the base. Set the sensor to a desired address and then write the address on the label on the base. Place the sensor into the sensor base. Turn the sensor clockwise until it drops into place. Continue turning the sensor clockwise to lock it in place. ANNUNCIATOR Do not loop wire under terminal 1 or 2. wire run to provide supervision of connections. A OPTIONAL WIRING 1 Tamper Resistance: sensor bases have a tamper-resistant capability. When this capability is enabled, sensors cannot be removed from base without the use of a small screwdriver or other similar tool. Refer to the sensor base installation instruction for details in using this capability. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control unit. Test the sensor by placing a small magnet against the sensor plastic, as shown in Figure 2. The alarm level should be in the panel and the LED controlled by communication command from the panel. The reset of the sensor LED is controlled by communication command from the panel. must be tested after installation and periodic maintenance. The sensor may be tested in the following ways. Test Magnet (Model No. M02-04) Place the magnet against the cover in the magnet test area as shown in Figure 2 to activate the test feature. The LEDs should latch ON within 10 seconds, indicating alarm and annunciating the panel. Reset the detector at the system control panel. Test sensitivity from the control panel. Direct Heat Method (Hair dryer of 1000 1500 watts) From the side of the detector, direct the heat toward the sensor. Hold the heat source about 6 inches (15cm) away to damage to the cover during testing. The LEDs on the detector should light when the temperature at the detector reaches 135 F (57 C). If the LEDs fail light, check the power to the detector and the wiring in the detector base. Reset the detector at the system control panel. that fail these tests should be cleaned as described under MAINTENANCE and retested. If the detectors still fail tests they should be returned for r

Product: Rate-of-Rise Thermal Detector and Engineering Specifications: rate-of-rise thermal detector shall be a System Sensor model number 5251RB. shall be an addressable intelligent rate-of-rise thermal detector and shall connect with wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit (SLC). The detectors shall alarm at fixed temperature of 135 (57.2 and have a rate-of-rise element rated at 15 (9.4 per The detectors shall have RTI rating for installation of V2-FAST or better. detectors shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using rotary switches. of the possibility of installation error, systems that use binary jumpers or DIP switches to the detector address are not acceptable. The detectors shall also store an internal identifying that the control panel shall use to identify the type of detector. Systems that require a programmer to set the detector address (including temporary connection at the panel) are intensive and not acceptable. Each detector occupies any one of at least 99 possible on the SLC loop. It responds to regular polls from the system and reports its type and detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel. There are two test methods: magnet or direct heat method. detectors shall provide two LEDs to provide 360 visibility. The LEDs are placed into steady illumination by the control panel indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. An connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED, base, and / or relay base (optional accessories). The external remote alarm can be to other sounder or relay bases for activating all devices in a space via a single unit. LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor status. Coded signals, from the panel, can cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, or latch off. Refer to the control technical documentation for sensor LED status operation and expected delay to alarm. detectors shall be low profile ceiling-mount/wall-mount and shall be plug-in mounted into a base. These detectors shall be constructed of off-white UV resistant polymer and shall detachable from the mounting base to simplify installation, service and maintenance. Mounting wiring connections shall be made by means of SEMS screws. The detector shall allow pre- of the base and the head shall be a plug-in type. Mounting base shall be mounted on box which is at least 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) deep. Mounting base shall be available to to standard junction boxes. Suitable boxes include: (10.16 cm) square box with and without plaster ring. (10.16 cm) octagonal box. (8.89 cm) octagonal box. box. 521- Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems Agency Standards: CAN/ULC S530- Heat Actuated Fire Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems 3210- Heat Detectors for Automatic Fire Alarm Signaling 2009

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-In Model 5251RP Temperature Sensor Fixed Temperature Alarm Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 installing sensors, refer to NFPA 72, and 101 (Life Safety Code) for information on sensor spacing, placement, zon- and special applications. DESCRIPTION 5251RP is an intelligent sensor that utilizes a state-of-the-art thermistor sensing circuit for fast response. This sen- is designed to provide open area protection with 50 foot spacing capability and is intended for use with compatible panels only. LEDs on each sensor light to provide 360 visibility of the sensor indication. The LEDs can be latched ON by code from the panel for an alarm indication. The LEDs can also be unlatched to the normal condition by code com- Remote LED annunciator capability is available as an optional accessory (Part No. RA400Z). Temperatures: Humidity Range: Range: Current: Current: Temperature Rating: Detection: inches (155 mm) installed in B210LP inches (104 mm) installed in B501 inches (51 mm) ounces (150 gm) to 100 F (-20 C to 38 C) to 93% Relative Humidity Non-condensing flanged base flangeless base with RMK400 recessed mounting kit to 32 Volts DC Peak @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with LED blink enabled) mA @ 24 VDC (57 C) to greater than 15 F/min. GUIDE to the installation instructions for the particular plug-in base being used: 1) for the B210LP base (D250-01-00); 2) for B501 base (D550-02-00); 3) for the RMK400 used with the B501 base (D450-07-00). Bases are provided with screw ter- for power, ground, and remote annunciator connections. See Figure 1. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and regulations. Verify that all sensor bases are installed and that the wiring polarity is correct at each base. Disconnect the power from the loop before installing sensors. Install Sensors: Verify that the sensor type matches the type written on the label in the base. Set the sensor to a desired address and then write the address on the label on the base. Place the sensor into the sensor base. Turn the sensor clockwise until it drops into place. Continue turning the sensor clockwise to lock it in place. ANNUNCIATOR Do not loop wire under terminal 1 or 2. wire run to provide supervision of connections. A OPTIONAL WIRING 1 Tamper Resistance: sensor bases have a tamper-resistant capability. When this capability is enabled, sensors cannot be removed from base without the use of a small screwdriver or other similar tool. Refer to the sensor base installation instruction for details in using this capability. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control unit. Test the sensor by placing a small magnet against the sensor plastic, as shown in Figure 2. The alarm level should be in the panel and the LED controlled by communication command from the panel. The reset of the sensor LED is controlled by communication command from the panel. must be tested after installation and periodic maintenance. The sensor may be tested in the following ways. Test Magnet (Model No. M02-04) Place the magnet against the cover in the magnet test area as shown in Figure 2 to activate the test feature. The LEDs should latch ON within 10 seconds, indicating alarm and annunciating the panel. Reset the detector at the system control panel. Test sensitivity from the control panel. Direct Heat Method (Hair dryer of 1000 1500 watts) From the side of the detector, direct the heat toward the sensor. Hold the heat source about 6 inches (15cm) away to damage to the cover during testing. The LEDs on the detector should light when the temperature at the detector reaches 135 F (57 C). If the LEDs fail light, check the power to the detector and the wiring in the detector base. Reset the detector at the system control panel. that fail these tests should be cleaned as desc

I Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630/377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 5351B-IV, 5351RB, 5351H, and 5351H-IV Programmable Temperature Sensors Voltage Range: Current @ 24 VDC: Alarm Current: Current: Humidity Range: Temperature: Temperature Rating: Heat Temperature Rating: Rise Detection: to 32 Volts DC Peak uA (one communication every 5 seconds with green LED blink on communication) mA @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with red LED solid on) mA @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with amber LED solid on) to 93% Relative Humidity, Non-condensing for fixed-temperature or rate-of-rise (ROR): to 115 ( to 47 for high-heat: to 150 ( to 66 (57 (88 to greater than 15 or 135 (8.3 or 57 (51 mm) installed in B300-6 Base (156 mm) installed in B300-6 Base oz. (95 g) 521 listed for Heat Detectors sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system manual. The installation must meet the requirements of the Au- Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance when in compliance with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); NFPA 72. installing sensors, please read the system wiring and installation man- thoroughly. This manual provides detailed information on sensor spac- placement, zoning, and special applications. Copies of these manuals are from System Sensor. DESCRIPTION 5351B, 5351B-IV, 5351RB, 5351RB-IV, 5351H, and 5351H-IV are field intelligent sensors that use a state-of-the-art thermistor sensing for fast response. These sensors are designed to provide open area pro- with 50-foot spacing capability as approved by UL 521. The intelligent sensor can be programmed as either a 135 fixed temperature a rate of rise and 135 fixed temperature sensor or a 190 high tem- sensor through the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). LEDs on each sensor light to provide a local, visible sensor indication. LED annunciator capability is available as an optional accessory No. RA100Z). Rotary dial switches are provided for setting the sensor’s (See Figure 1.) 1. ROTARY ADDRESS SWITCHES 0 0 The heat sensor operates as a programmable heat detector. NOTE: In panels where this feature is not available, the 5351B and will default to a 135 fixed heat detector. 5351RB and will default to a 135 fixed heat detector and rate-of-rise. and 5351H-IV will default to a 190 high temperature heat programmable temperature sensors require compatible addressable to function properly. Connect these sensors to listed-compat- control panels only. GUIDE wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, local codes and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Proper wire should be used. The installation wires should be color coded to limit mistakes and ease system troubleshooting. Improper connections will a system from responding properly in the event of a fire. power from the communication line before installing sensors. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) as shown in the wiring (See Figure 2.) Set the desired address on the rotary dial switches. (See Figure 1.) Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor into the base turning it clockwise to secure it in place. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control unit and the communication line. Test the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section of this manual. 2. WIRING DIAGRAM Do not loop wire under 1 or 2. Break wire run to connections. Sensor panels offer different feature sets across different models. As a certain features of the Intelligent Programmable Temperature Sensors be av

400 Series Plug-In Detectors Sensor 400 Series plug-in thermal detectors the performance criteria designated by Laboratories. 5451 thermal detector Listings Series Plug-In Smoke Detector Specifications Specifications Temperature Range Range Point Detector Spacing Current Voltage/Alarm Current Mounting Base Selection Guide Model Number Resistor Type Draw Alarm (mA) Box Selection Guide* Gang Octagon Octagon Square mm mm mm FAULT TOLERANT WIRING Information No.

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Rate-of-Rise Detector with Temperature Alarm SENSOR Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Temperatures: Humidity Range: Alarm: Voltage: Current: inches (104 mm) inches (53 mm) ounces (150 g) to 100(cid:176) F (0(cid:176) to 38(cid:176) C) to 93% Relative Humidity by momentary power interruption F (57(cid:176) C) Fixed or 15(cid:176) F/min rate-of-rise VDC m A Installing detector must be installed in compliance with the panel installation manual and meet the require- of the authority having jurisdiction. In addition, the Fire Protection Association has published codes, and recommended practices for the installation use of detectors, NFPA 72. installation in Canada, refer to CAN/ULC-S524, Stan- for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems and CEC 1, Sec. 32.) the installer must be familiar with these re- with local codes, and any special require- of the authority having jurisdiction. This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. This detector must be tested and main- regularly following NFPA 72 requirements. The de- should be cleaned at least once a year. Description 5451 is a rate-of-rise with fixed temperature alarm detector utilizing a state-of-the-art dual thermistor circuit. These detectors are designed to provide area protection with 50-foot spacing capability, and to be used with compatible control panels only. LEDs on each detector light to provide 360(cid:176) visibility the detector indication. Remote LED annunciator capa- is provided as standard, and the RA400Z remote LED is available as an optional accessory. Selection and Wiring Guide to the installation instructions for the plug-in detector for base selection and wiring instructions. System has available a variety of detector bases for these detectors, including 2-wire applications with and relays and/or current limiting resistors for use with panels that require one. This detector is only to be with 400 and 400B series bases. the System Sensor plug-in base to be used with the following the instructions in the base manual. Manuals Online! – All wiring must conform to applicable installation and regulations. Verify that all detector bases are installed, that the circuits have been tested, and that wiring is correct. (Refer to detector base for testing procedure.) the power from initiating-device circuits before detectors. Install Detectors: place. control unit. After all detectors have been installed, apply power to Test the detector using the magnet as described under Reset the detector at the system control panel. Notify the proper authorities that the system is in opera- Resistance detector bases include a feature that, when activated, removal of the detector without the use of a tool. to the installation instruction manual of the detector to make use of this capability. testing, notify the proper authorities that the heat system is undergoing maintenance, and therefore system will temporarily be out of service. Disable the or system undergoing maintenance to prevent un- alarms. must be tested after installation and periodic The 5451 may be tested as follows: module socket. (See Figure 1.) The LEDs on the detector should light within 10 sec- If the LEDs fail to light, check the power to the and the wiring in the detector base. Reset the detector at the system control panel. Insert the detector into the detector base. Turn the detector clockwise until the detector drops Test Magnet (System Sensor Model No. M02-04) Continue turning detector clockwise to lock it in Position the magnet against the cover opposite the 1. Bottom and Side Views Showing Position of Test Magnet: MODULE Manuals Online! –

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Rate-of-Rise Detector with Temperature Alarm Temperatures: Humidity Range: Alarm: Voltage: Current: 4.1 inches (104 mm) 2.1 inches (53 mm) 5 ounces (150 g) 32 to 100 (0 to 38 10% to 93% Relative Humidity Reset by momentary power interruption 135 (57 Fixed or 15 rate-of-rise 15-35 VDC 100 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 INSTALLINg detector must be installed in compliance with the control panel installa- manual and meet the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. In the National Fire Protection Association has published codes, stan- and recommended practices for the installation and use of detectors, 72. the installer must be familiar with these requirements, with local and any special requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. This detector must be tested and maintained regularly following 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at least once a year. DESCRIPTION 5451 is a rate-of-rise with fixed temperature alarm thermal detector a state-of-the-art dual thermistor sensing circuit. These detectors are to provide open area protection with 50-foot spacing capability, and to be used with compatible control panels only. LEDs on each detector light to provide 360 visibility of the detector in- Remote LED annunciator capability is provided as standard, and the remote LED annunciator is available as an optional accessory. SELECTION AND WIRINg gUIDE to the installation instructions for the plug-in detector bases for base selec- and wiring instructions. System Sensor has available a variety of detector for these heat detectors, including 2-wire applications with and without and/or current limiting resistors for use with control panels that require This detector is only to be used with 400 and 400B series bases. the System Sensor plug-in base to be used with the detector following instructions in the base manual. All wiring must conform to applicable installation codes and regulations. Verify that all detector bases are installed, that the initiating-device have been tested, and that the wiring is correct. (Refer to detector base for testing procedure.) the power from initiating-device circuits before installing detectors. Detectors: Insert the detector into the detector base. Turn the detector clockwise until the detector drops into place. Continue turning detector clockwise to lock it in place. After all detectors have been installed, apply power to the control unit. Test the detector using the magnet as described under TESTING. Reset the detector at the system control panel. Notify the proper authorities that the system is in operation. RESISTANCE detector bases include a feature that, when activated, prevents removal the detector without the use of a tool. Refer to the installation instruction of the detector base to make use of this capability. testing, notify the proper authorities that the heat detector system is maintenance, and therefore the system will temporarily be out service. Disable the zone or system undergoing maintenance to prevent alarms. must be tested after installation and periodic maintenance. The 5451 be tested as follows: Test Magnet (System Sensor Model No. M02-04) Position the magnet against the cover opposite the test module (See Figure 1.) The LEDs on the detector should light within 10 seconds. If the LEDs to light, check the power to the detector and the wiring in the base. Reset the detector at the system control panel. Test Module (System Sensor Model No. MOD400 or MOD400R) The MOD400 or MOD400R is used with a DMM or volt meter to the detector sensitivity as described in the module manual. Direct Heat Method (Hair dryer of 1000 – 1500 watts) From the side of the detector, direct the heat toward the sensor. Hold heat source about 15 cm away to prevent damage to the cover testing.

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Tamper Switch Ratings: Dimensions: Temperature Range: Weight: @ 125/250 VAC @ 24 VDC x 2 x 3/4 to 120(cid:176) F (0(cid:176) to 49(cid:176) C) lb. Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. 72: 13: 25: Fire Alarm Code of Sprinkler Systems, specifically 3.17. Testing and Maintenance of Sprin- Systems, specifically chapters 4 and 5. not leave unused wires exposed. Do not use in poten- explosive atmospheres. applicable NFPA standards, local codes and the re- of the authority having jurisdiction. Information cover tamper switch mounts to all System Sensor WFDT, OSY2 and PIBV2 terminal block units. Cover produces a switch output. The unit will reset when product cover is reinstalled. Guidelines installing any cover tamper switch, be thoroughly with: to follow these directions may result in failure of the to report an alarm or trouble condition. System Sen- is not responsible for devices that have been improperly tested or maintained. Instructions Install switch mounting bracket onto terminal block us- the 2 screws provided, shown in Figure 1. Snap the switch onto the switch mounting bracket in po- shown in Figure 1. 1. Assembly Diagram: voltage. Electrocution hazard. Do not handle live AC or work on a device to which AC power is applied. so may result in severe injury of death. Wiring Wire as required per wiring diagram (Figure 2), placing stripped wire lead under the correct terminal plate. wire lead should be clipped and terminated with a nut to avoid shorting to housing. 2. Field Wiring: nonsilenceable(cid:13) zone(cid:13) listed FACP Fire Alarm Control Panel Connection power(cid:13) bell Local Bell Connection bell will activate(cid:13) cover is removed. Where one wire already exists under the terminal connect the cover tamper wire under the op- side of the terminal plate. When connected to a listed sprinkler/fire alarm control the initiating circuit must be non-silenceable. Code:(cid:13) or Supervisory Switch: to B = Open Circuit(cid:13) to A = Closed Circuit Alarm(cid:13) Tamper Switch: / Blue: Open(cid:13) / Red: Closed Off) wire as shown for(cid:13) of connection.(cid:13) NOT allow stripped wire(cid:13) to extend beyond(cid:13) housing. DO NOT(cid:13) wires. Testing notify a central station monitoring waterflow or su- switch alarms before repairing, maintaining, or cover tamper switch devices. Replace the cover and tighten the security screws with security wrench. Store the wrench in a secure place. Verify that circuit has reset by checking FACP. Limited Warranty Sensor warrants its enclosed cover tamper switch to be free from in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a of three years from date of manufacture. System Sensor makes no express warranty for this cover tamper switch. No agent, representa- dealer, or employee of the Company has the authority to increase or the obligations or limitations of this Warranty. The Company obli- of this Warranty shall be limited to the repair or replacement of any of the cover tamper switch which is found to be defective in materials workmanship under normal use and service during the three year pe- commencing with the date of manufacture. After phoning System toll free number 800-SENSOR2 (736-7672) for a Return Authori- number, send defective units postage prepaid

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Cover Tamper Switch use with System Sensor Pressure Switches: EPS10-2, EPS40-1, EPS40-2, EPS120-1, EPS120-2 Ratings: Temperature Range: Weight: @ 125/250 VAC @ 6/12/24 VAC to +160(cid:176) F (-40(cid:176) to +71(cid:176) C) lbs. Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. Figure 1). Attach the cover switch with the two screws provided Information System Sensor 546-8000 cover tamper switch mounts EPS series pressure switches to monitor removal of the Cover removal produces a switch output. The unit reset when the product cover is reinstalled. Instructions Remove the pressure switch cover using the security provided with the pressure switch. Route wires away from the pressure switch mechanism. Wire the circuit as shown in Figures 2, 3, or 4, or as re- by the installation requirements and as approved the authority having jurisdiction. Clip the unused from the tamper switch and use the wire nut to pro- from shorting. Perform the required system tests and include the cover switch in the test by alternately replacing and re- the cover to produce the desired circuit effects. After testing, secure the cover with the security wrench. 1. Wire routing inside EPS Series pressure switch: 2. Class B initiating circuit with single device: OF LINE 3. Class B initiating circuit with multiple devices: OF LINE 4. Class A 4-wire initiating circuit with multiple devices: ZONE OF LINE Limited Warranty Sensor warrants its enclosed cover tamper switch to be free from in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a of three years from date of manufacture. System Sensor makes no express warranty for this cover tamper switch. No agent, representa- dealer, or employee of the Company has the authority to increase or the obligations or limitations of this Warranty. The Company obli- of this Warranty shall be limited to the repair or replacement of any of the cover tamper switch which is found to be defective in materials workmanship under normal use and service during the three year pe- commencing with the date of manufacture. After phoning System toll free number 800-SENSOR2 (736-7672) for a Return Authori- number, send defective units postage prepaid to: System Sensor, Department, RA #__________, 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, IL Please include a note describing the malfunction and suspected of failure. The Company shall not be obligated to repair or replace which are found to be defective because of damage, unreasonable modifications, or alterations occurring after the date of manufacture. no case shall the Company be liable for any consequential or incidental for breach of this or any other Warranty, expressed or implied even if the loss or damage is caused by the Company negli- or fault. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of inci- or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may apply to you. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also have other rights which vary from state to state. System Sensor 1996

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Cover Tamper Switch use with System Sensor Models: and LFD Series waterflow detectors Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Ratings: Temperature Range: Weight: @ 125/250 VAC @ 30 VDC to 120 F (0 to 49 C) lbs. This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. Information System Sensor 546-9000 cover tamper switch mounts AFD and LFD Series waterflow devices to monitor re- of the cover. Cover removal produces a switch out- The unit will reset when the product cover is Instructions Remove the waterflow detector cover using the security provided. Attach the cover tamper switch to upper PCB by snap- The cover tamper switch assembly snaps into the mounting holes on the upper PCB in the orienta- shown in Figure 1. 1. avoid possible damage, support upper PCB installing cover tamper switch bracket as- Secure the three wires from cover tamper switch to lower using supplied tie wrap. See Figure 1. Route wires away from mechanisms. Wire the circuit as shown in Figures 2, 3, or 4, or as re- by the installation requirements and as approved the authority having jurisdiction. Clip the unused from the tamper switch and use the wire nut to pro- from shorting. Perform the required system tests and include the cover switch in the test by alternately replacing and re- the cover to produce the desired circuit effects. After testing, secure the cover with the security wrench. TAMPER SWITCH ASSEMBLY 546-9000 PCB PCB COVER TAMPER SWITCH OPEN CLOSED OFF WRAP (COM) (NORMALLY OPEN) (NORMALLY CLOSED) MOUNTING HOLES 2. Class B initiating circuit with single device: OF LINE 3. Class B initiating circuit with multiple devices: OF LINE 4. Class A 4-wire initiating circuit with multiple devices: ZONE OF LINE Limited Warranty Sensor warrants its enclosed cover tamper switch to be free from in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a of three years from date of manufacture. System Sensor makes no express warranty for this cover tamper switch. No agent, representa- dealer, or employee of the Company has the authority to increase or the obligations or limitations of this Warranty. The Company obli- of this Warranty shall be limited to the repair or replacement of any of the cover tamper switch which is found to be defective in materials workmanship under normal use and service during the three year pe- commencing with the date of manufacture. After phoning System toll free number 800-SENSOR2 (736-7672) for a Return Authori- number, send defective units postage prepaid to: System Sensor, Department, RA #__________, 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, IL Please include a note describing the malfunction and suspected of failure. The Company shall not be obligated to repair or replace which are found to be defective because of damage, unreasonable modifications, or alterations occurring after the date of manufacture. no case shall the Company be liable for any consequential or incidental for breach of this or any other Warranty, expressed or implied even if the loss or damage is caused by the Company negli- or fault. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of inci- or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may apply to you. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also have other rights which vary from state to state. System Sensor

5600 Series Heat Sensor 5600 series mechanical heat detectors a low-cost means for property protection against fire, for non-life-safety installations where smoke detectors inappropriate. Multiple Plain Easy-to-use A Reversible Listings configurations. flexibility. identification. Specifications Specifications Installation Temperature Humidity Range with mounting bracket Diameter: Temperature Threshold

I 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Series Heat Detector Circuit: 5601P, 5602, 5603, 5604 Circuit: 5621, 5622, 5623, 5624 Voltage/Contact Ratings (Resistive): Installation Temperature: Temperature: Threshold: Humidity Range: Terminals: Box Mounting: with mounting bracket: 125 VAC / 3A 28 VDC / 1A VDC / 0.3A VDC / 0.1A 5601P, 5603, 5621, and 5623: 100 (38 5602, 5604, 5622, and 5624: 150 (65.6 5601P, 5603, 5621, and 5623: 135 (57 5602, 5604, 5622, and 5624: 194 (90 (8.3 per minute 5601P, 5602, 5621, and 5622 only) to 95% RH non-condensing 22 AWG octagonal octagonal gang square with a square to round plaster ring 4.57 inches (11.6cm) 1.69 inches (4.3cm) oz. (170 grams) prevent the activation of the fixed temperature element, the shipping and storage temperature must not 122 (50 Installing detector must be installed in compliance with control panel installation manual and meet the of NFPA 72, and/or the local authority jurisdiction. this manual carefully before using the detec- This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. Description 5600 series mechanical heat detector is in- for use in property protection applications, for non-life-safety installations where smoke de- is not practical or appropriate. life-safety installations, smoke detectors must used, in lieu of, or in addition to mechanical heat 5600 series consists of both single- and dual- heat detectors featuring fixed temperature sensors or combination fixed temperature/ sensors, with temperature ratings of 135 or 194 (90 on the exterior of the detector indicate the activation method and temperature rating. All are identified as either 135 or 194 Models equipped with combination fixed tem- sensors are marked FX/ROR. temperature only models are marked FX. Fixed Temperature Sensor fixed temperature element reacts to heat by re- to a specific temperature setting (135 194 The detection method is based on the action of a metal contact, held to the metal by a fusible alloy. When the temperature the alloy melting point, the metal contact depress the diaphragm, causing the electrical to close the circuit. The circular external collector is released from the detector to visu- indicate that the detector has been activated. 5600 series Fixed Temperature models (5603, 5623, and 5624) are non-resettable, and can- be tested. 1. 5600 Series Mechanical Heat Detectors Temperature Sensor Maximum Spacing (57 (90 (57 (90 (57 (90 (57 (90 Temperature/Rate of Rise Temperature/Rate of Rise Temperature Temperature Temperature/Rate of Rise Temperature/Rate of Rise Temperature Temperature ceiling) x 50-feet x 50-feet x 25-feet x 25-feet x 50-feet x 50-feet x 25-feet x 25-feet Refer to NFPA72 guidelines for spacing reductions when ceiling heights exceed 10 feet. Classification ratings are for installations which must comply with FM 3210. Detector Type 135 RTI: Classification and Fixed 135 RTI: FAST and SPECIAL (Respectively) 194 RTI: and Fixed 194 RTI: FAST and SPECIAL (Respectively) Rate-of-Rise (ROR) Sensor rate-of-rise element responds to a rapi

Product Detector Specifications heat detector shall be a System Sensor 5600 series model number 5601P, 5603, 5623, 5602, 5604, 5622, and 5624, listed to Underwriters Laboratories UL 521 for Heat for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. The detector shall be either a single-circuit or a type, normally open. The detector shall be rated for activation at either 135 (57 194 (90 and shall activate by means of a fixed temperature thermal sensor, or a fixed temperature/rate-of-rise thermal sensor. The rate-of-rise element shall be by a rapid rise in temperature, approximately 15 (8.3 per minute. The detector include a reversible mounting bracket for mounting to 3 and 4-inch octagonal, single and 4-inch square back boxes with a square to round plaster ring. Wiring connections shall made by means of SEMS screws that shall accommodate 14 wire. The detector shall alphanumeric markings on the exterior of the housing to identify its temperature rating activation method. The rate-of-rise element of combination fixed temperature/rate-of-rise shall be restorable, to allow for field-testing. The detectors shall include an external that shall drop upon activation to identify the unit in alarm. Specifications Maximum Installation Temperature for models 5601P, 5603, 5621, and 5623 shall be 100 The Maximum Installation Temperature for models 5602, 5604, 5622, and 5624 shall be (65.6 The Operating Humidity Range shall be 5 to 95% RH non-condensing. detector weight shall be 6 oz. (170 grams). heat detector dimensions with mounting bracket shall be; Diameter: 4.57 inches (11.6cm) Height: 1.69 inches (4.3cm). The Alarm Temperature for models 5601P, 5603, 5621, and shall be 135 (57 The Alarm Temperature for models 5602, 5604, 5622, and 5624 be 194 (90 The Rate-of-Rise Threshold shall be 15 (8.3 rise per minute (models 5602, 5621, and 5622 only). options for the 5601P, 5603, 5621, 5623, 5602, 5604, 5622, and 5624 heat detectors 3 octagonal back box, 4-inch octagonal back box, Single gang back box, 4-inch back box with a square to round plaster ring. Specifications Operating Voltage / Contact Ratings shall be 6 / 3A, 6 / 1A, 125VDC / 250VDC / 0.1A. The Input Terminals shall be 14 AWG. 2009

C O N V E N T I O N A L D E T E C T I O N 6424 Beam Detector Available Projected Beam Smoke Detector, Transmitter and Receiver Projected Beam Smoke ULC listed Overview to 330 protection range operating temperature range to 131 24 VDC operation and transmitter may be pow- separately or together EOL power relay supervises both and transmitter test included and wall mount brackets included LEDs No special tools automatic gain control compen- for signal deterioration from dust test station option warranty Sensor Model 6424 Projected Beam Smoke Detector is uniquely suited protecting open areas with high ceilings where conventional spot type smoke are difficult to install and maintain. Listed for operation at the broad- temperature range in the industry ( to 131 the 6424 can be used in or warehouse applications to provide early warning in environments temperature extremes exceed the capability of spot-type smoke detectors. 6424 consists of a transmitter and receiver with separate alarm and trouble which distinguish between a percentage of signal blockage and a total block. Four alignment LEDs on the front of each unit indicate signal to ease alignment. The Remote Test Station with alarm LED indicator, RTS451, is an accessory that mounts to a standard single gang box and test and reset the Beam Detector from a remote location. Specifications Specifications (Receiver) Specifications projected beam type smoke detector be a 4-wire 24 VDC device to be with U.L. listed separately supplied control panels only. Unit shall be to U.L. 268 and shall consist of a transmitter and receiver capa- of being powered separately or The detector shall operate in a short range (30 ft.) or long (100 ft.) mode. The tempera- range of the beam shall be to The detector shall feature a bank four alignment LEDs on both the and transmitter that are used to proper alignment of the unit with- special tools. The beam detector feature automatic gain control will compensate for gradual signal from dirt accumulation on The unit shall include both ceil- and wall mounting brackets. Testing be carried out using calibrated test or a magnet activated remote test to 330 (length) to 100.9m total obscuration, or total obscuration Condition (Trouble) or more obscuration, gain control limit, initial alignment Aid signal strength indication red LEDs) Indicator red LED Indicator amber LED to 32 VDC Maximum Ripple Voltage (peak to peak) Current (24 VDC) maximum Current (24 VDC) maximum Current (24 VDC) maximum Surge Current (24 VDC) maximum Contacts Current (24 VDC) at 30VAC/DC Time seconds maximum Indicator flashing green LED Time (after 5 min. reset) minute maximum Features filter reset switch test and reset switch (compatible with and RTS451KEY test station) Detector Spacing smooth ceilings, 60 feet between beams and not more one-half that spacing between projected beam and a sidewall. spacing may be used depending ceiling height, air flow characteris- and response requirements. See 72 trouble relay is required to supervise power Specifications to 131 ( to 55 RH noncondensing Loss memory for 5 minutes minimum (Transmitter) Specifications to 32 VDC Ripple Voltage: (peak to peak) (24VDC) maximum Specifications w/no bracket x 8.5″W x 7″D w/ceiling mount bracket x 8.5″W x 7″D w/wall mount bracket x 8.5″W x 10″D 1.5 lb (663 g) 1.3 lb (598 g) ceiling and wall brackets

3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Seconds Max. Seconds Max. to 330 Feet (9.1 to 100.6 m) Total Obscuration, or Total Obscuration to 60 Feet (9.1 to 18.3 m) or More Obscuration Initial Alignment limit reached (service needed) Filters (ALARM/NO ALARM) Alarm Reset Switch Test and Reset Switch Capability with RTS451 Test Station with Magnet) Operation: Aid: Trouble Output, Local LED (red) Output, Local LED (yellow) LED (flashing green) Bar Graph (4 red LEDs) to 131 ( to 55 to 93% RH Noncondensing lbs (680 g) 1.3 lbs (590 g) or Wall, Separate Mounting Brackets Provided with Attached Cable Horizontal/60 Vertical Horizontal/60 Vertical Projected Beam Type Detector Time: Condition: Features: Angle: (Receiver) Ripple Voltage: (24 VDC): Contacts: Time: Time (after 5 min. reset): 1 Minute Maximum Loss: (Transmitter) Ripple Voltage: Current (24 VDC): to 32 VDC volts (Peak-to-peak) Standby: Alarm: Trouble: 27.1mA Max. Surge: at 30 VAC/DC Seconds Max. Max. Max. Max. Memory for 5 Minute Minimum to 32 VDC volts (Peak-to-Peak) Max. IN MEXICO Installing thoroughly read this manual and applicable sections System Sensor Projected Beam Detector Application Copies of this manual are available from System Description Sensor Model 6424 is a long range projected beam detector designed to provide open area protection. is to be used with UL-listed, separately supplied power control panels only. The detector consists of a transmitter and receiver. Smoke entering the area the transmitter and receiver causes a reduction in at the receiver. When the obscuration reaches one of predetermined thresholds (chosen with a switch in the the detector generates an alarm signal. Complete of the beam causes a trouble signal to avoid false Slow changes in obscuration due to a build up of or dust on the lens of the detector are compensated for a microcontroller which continuously monitors the sig- strength and periodically updates the alarm and trouble When the self-compensation circuit reaches its the detector generates a trouble signal, indicating the for service. LEDs at the receiver indicate the status of the detec- a red LED for alarm, a yellow LED for trouble, and a green LED for standby operation. The alarm signal and can be reset by a momentary power interrup- by using the remote reset input to the receiver if the remote test/reset station model RTS451, or with local reset button located behind the rear door in the A trouble signal automatically resets upon remov- the cause of trouble. In addition to these indicators, are four LEDs on both the receiver and the transmit- which are used as a beam alignment aid. No additional is needed for alignment of the beam. detector contains one Form A (normally open) con- for alarm signals and one Form B (normally closed) for trouble signals. Supervision of power is accom- by installing a Power Supervisory End-of-Line Relay (model A77-716) at the end of the detector power When power is applied to and through the detectors, EOL Power Supervisory Module is energized. The relay along with the detector trouble relay contacts, provide a closed series circuit in the control panel loop. A loss in power or a trouble condition the detector causes the respective EOL or trouble relay to resulting in a trouble signal at the control panel. List Unit Unit Wiring Cabl

6500-MMK/SMK KIT FOR USE WITH THE RANGE OF BEAM SMOKE DETECTORS instructions have been approved by UL) multi-mount kit allows any of the 6500 range of beam detectors to be mounted to a wall or the ceiling. It is designed to create an additional alignment range in where the detector and reflector cannot be mounted within 10 alignment of each The kit includes the hardware necessary to mount either a single transmitter/ unit or a single reflector. (To mount the transmitter/receiver, the surface mount 6500-SMK is also required). If both the transmitter/receiver and the reflector require alignment range, two kits will be needed. The kit is not compatible with the reflector kit. kit comes partly pre-assembled into the following components (the parts can be by matching the reference numbers to the numbers in Figs 1-3): fixed bracket x 15mm hex allen head bolts split lock washers x 16mm pan head screws hex nuts washers split lock washers Num THE BRACKETS installing to a wall or ceiling, use an appropriate anchor method to ensure the weight of the assembly can be securely supported. Install the fixed bracket to a or ceiling so that when mounted, the transmitter/receiver and the reflector will have clear line of sight between them. Mount the bracket only on solid structures of the To avoid unwanted alarms due to wall movement, do not mount to flexible walls, as sheet metal walls (see the Detector Mounting section of the beam detector for more details). the T-Bracket to the fixed bracket using the allen head bolts as shown in Fig. 1 – forget to use the split lock washers too. Do not fully tighten the bolts until and testing are complete. AND WIRING INSTRUCTIONS: TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER surface mount kit 6500-SMK must be used with the transmitter/receiver to provide entry. Read the installation instructions of the beam detector to determine the appropriate of wires to be used. Drill the appropriate holes for the conduit using the drill centres provided on all four of the surface mount box (see Fig. SMK1-A). Conduit sizes of up to 20mm are Mount the surface mount box on to the T-bracket of the multi-mount kit using the pre- holes (see Fig. SMK1-B and Fig. 2) and the M4 screws and washers. proper operation of the beam detector, the surface mount box must be: Securely mounted to ensure no subsequent movement of the beam detector will after the installation is completed. Mounted to ensure there is line of sight between the transmitter/receiver unit the reflector. See the beam detector manual for further details. Attach the transmitter/receiver unit (with cover and faceplate removed) securely to surface mount box using the four supplied screws. Pull wiring and conduit through the drilled hole(s). Secure conduit fitting as required supplied). Be sure to leave enough wire to reach the connectors. Complete the installation and testing of the transmitter/receiver unit using the included with the beam detector. Only when installation is complete, tighten the bolts connecting the T-bracket to the fixed bracket. NOTE: Ensure bolts are fully tightened to maintain mounting integrity! INSTRUCTIONS: REFLECTOR Mount the reflector on to the T-bracket of the multi-mount kit using the three M4 (see Fig. 3). proper operation of the beam detector, the reflector must be: Securely mounted to ensure no subsequent movement of the reflector will after the installation is completed. Mounted to ensure there is line of sight between the transmitter/receiver unit the reflector. See the beam detector manual for further details. Mounted so that the reflector is perpendicular to the line of sight of the unit. Complete the installation and testing of the beam detector as per its manual. Only installation is complete, fully tighten the bolts connecting the T-bracket to the bracket (see Fig. 3). If not installed correctly, the BEAM detector may not function properly. The 6500-MMK is also compatible with the following models: BEAM200S, BEAM1224, BEAM1224s, FSB-200, BEAM355, BEAM355S 1 2 3 SMK1

Low-Profile Plug-in Laser Detector model 7251 is an intelligent, laser-based smoke detector featuring extensive signal processing capabilities designed to smoke response. Listings features Specifications Range Current (max. avg.) Current (max.) Specifications Weight Temperature Range Range Humidity Range Diagnostics Sensitivity Compensation Information No. Series Bases Series Accessories

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 USA FAX: 630-377-6495 Safety Distribution GmbH Sensor Europe 2, 8604 Hegnau, Switzerland Intelligent Laser Smoke Sensor Voltage Range: Current: Alarm Current (LED on:) Humidity Range: Temperature Range: Bases Available: to EN 54-7 at alarm levels 7 and 8. to 32 VDC @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 sec. with LED blink enabled) mA @ 24 VDC to 93% Relative Humidity, noncondensing to 38 (32 to 100 U.S. to 50 (14 to 122 Europe (this range not evaluated by UL) inches (43 mm) installed in B210LP Base inches (155 mm) installed in B210LP Base inches (104 mm) installed in B501 Base oz. (142 g) 200/500 Series bases are compatible. INSTALLING sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system installation The installation must meet the requirements of the Authority Having Juris- (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance when installed in compliance the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); see NFPA 72. DESCRIPTION 7251 is a plug-in type smoke sensor that uses a laser based sensing chamber. sensor uses analog-addressable communications to transmit smoke density and information to the control panel. Rotary-decade switches are provided for set- the sensor address. Two LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to sensor status. An output is provided for connection to an optional remote annunciator (P/N RA400Z/RA100Z). detector requires compatible addressable communications to function properly. this sensor to listed-compatible control panels only. Sensor recommends spacing sensors in compliance with NFPA 72. In low flow applications with smooth ceilings, space sensors 30 feet apart. For specific regarding sensor spacing, placement, and special applications, refer to 72 or the System Smoke Detector Application Guide, available from System INSTRUCTIONS wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, appli- local codes, and any special requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. wire gauges should be used. The installation wires should be color-coded to wiring mistakes and ease system troubleshooting. Improper connections will a system from responding properly in the event of a fire. power from the communication line before installing sensors. wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and regulations. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) per the wiring diagram, see Figure 1. the desired address on the sensor address switches, see Figure 2. Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor into the base while turning it to secure it in place. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control unit and acti- the communication line. the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section of this manual. covers provide limited protection against airborne dust particles during ship- Dust covers must be removed before the sensors can sense smoke. Remove prior to heavy remodeling or construction. testing, notify the proper authorities that the system is undergoing mainte- and will temporarily be out of service. Disable the system to prevent unwanted sensors must be tested after installation and periodically thereafter. Testing meth- must satisfy the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum when tested and maintained in compliance with NFPA 72. sensor can be tested in the following ways: Functional: Magnet Test (P/N M02-04-01 or M02-09-00) This sensor can be functionally tested with a test magnet. The test magnet simulates smoke in the sensing chamber, testing the sensor and connections to the control panel. Hold the test magnet in the magnet test area as shown in Figure 3. The sensor should alarm the panel. Two LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor Coded signals, transmitted from the panel, can cause the LEDs to latch on, or latch off. Refer to the control panel technical documen- for sensor LED status operation and expected delay to alarm. Smoke Entry: Aerosol Generator (Ge

7251DH Sensitivity Smoke Detector System Sensor 7251DH detector is designed for duct applications where high velocity, high air changes are required for very early warning protection. range 32 to 100 (0 to 38 velocity rating from 300 to 4,000 FPM VDC operation and quick mounting to round or rectangular ducts from ft to 12 ft (0.3 m to 3.7 m) wide year warranty Listings 7251DH high sensitivity duct smoke detector provides performance for management of fans, blowers, and conditioning systems by using an intelligent laser smoke sensor in an efficient housing design that samples air currents through a duct. The twist-in, twist-out 7251 high sensitivity smoke detector head allows easy removal for quick cleaning, and replacement without removing the duct housing. laser detector achieves sensitivities as low as 0.02 percent-per- by using a laser diode instead of a standard LED light source the sensing chamber. Many sensitive areas cannot tolerate even amounts of smoke. This 7251DH detector is designed to valuable assets and operations where systems must remain at all times. Telecommunications switching facilities ideal applications for the 7251DH high sensitivity duct smoke include: Cellular telephone infrastructure Integrated circuit fabrication facilities Computer rooms Clean rooms 76, Section 8.5.3.1.2.3 Very Early Warning Fire Protection, calls for to be mounted at the return air location for a space in the instances. shall be installed where return air is brought back to the unit. than 0.4 m2 (4 ft2) of the return air opening. or ports shall be installed such that each covers no stand-alone packed HVAC units are installed, sensors or System Sensor 7251DH high sensitivity duct smoke detector is to satisfy NFPA 76 for Very Early Warning Fire Protection. and audible system annunciation. As with our duct detectors, all duct smoke detector accessories are UL listed. Test Station Key (UL S2522) Sounder S3593) Test Station S2522) Annunciator S2522) Duct Smoke Detector Specifications Specifications high sensitivity air duct smoke detector shall be a System Sensor Model 7251DH high sensitivity duct smoke detector. The detector shall be UL listed per UL Standard for Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications, specifically for use in air handling systems. The detector shall operate at air velocities from 300 feet minute to 4000 feet per minute. The detector shall have an operating temperature range of 32 to 100 The detector housing shall be equipped with an mounting base capable of accommodating laser smoke detector heads. It shall be capable of local testing via magnetic switch or remote testing using RTS451KEY or RTS451 Remote Test Station. The duct detector housing shall incorporate an airtight smoke chamber in compliance with UL S911. The housing be capable of mounting to rectangular or round ducts up to 12 ft wide without adapter brackets. An integral filter system shall be included to reduce dust residue effects on detector and housing, thereby reducing maintenance and servicing. Sampling tubes shall be installed after the housing is mounted to duct by passing through the duct housing. Terminal connections shall be of the strip and clamp method suitable for 14 to 18 AWG wiring. Specifications Weight Temperature Range Temperature Range Humidity Range Duct Velocity in L 5 in W 4 in D (36.8 cm L 12.7 cm W 10.2 cm D) lbs (1.1 kg) to 100 (0 to 38 to 100 ( to 38 to 93% relative humidity @ 24 VDC (without communication); 330 @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 sec with LED enabled) mA (LED on) Specifications supply voltage Requirements (Using No Accessories)

I Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Intelligent Duct Smoke Detector Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Air Velocity: Range: Current (nominal): current (nominal): inches (36.7 cm) inches (12.7 cm) inches (8.9 cm) lbs. (1.1 kg) to 100 (0 to 38 to 93% Relative Humidity 4000 ft./min. 32 VDC Peak at 24 VDC (no communication) at 24 VDC (one communication every 5 sec. with LED enabled) at 24 VDC Installing thoroughly read System Sensor Guide for Proper Use of Detectors in Duct Applications (I56-473-XX), which pro- detailed information on detector spacing, placement, zon- wiring, and special applications. Copies of this manual are from System Sensor. NFPA Standards 72, 76, and 90A also be referenced for detailed information. This manual should be left with the owner/user of equipment. sensors must be tested after installation and periodically there- Testing methods must satisfy the Authority Having Jurisdic- (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance when tested and in compliance with NFPA 72. Description HVAC system supplies conditioned air to virtually every area a building. Smoke introduced into this air duct system will be to the entire building. Smoke detectors designed for in air duct systems are used to sense the presence of smoke the duct. In facilities with large air changes per hour, airflow carry smoke particles directly to the HVAC system. Per NFPA Very Early Warning Fire Detection (VEWFD) sensors shall be to monitor return air from the space. The 7251DH can be to monitor the return air from the space in order to meet 76 requirements. 7251DH Air Duct Smoke Detector uses a 7251 laser smoke This smoke detection method combined with an efficient design that samples air passing through a duct provides detection of a developing hazardous condition. When suf- smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the fire panel monitoring the detector, and appropriate action can taken to shut off fans and blowers, change over air handling etc. This can prevent the distribution or isolation of smoke and fire gases throughout the areas served by the system as well as provide an alert of a developing hazardous in a facility. LEDs on each detector latch ON to provide a local alarm There is also a remote alarm output for use with aux- devices. The 7251DH has remote test capability with the Remote Test Station. of the Duct Detector Housing Kit 7251DH consists of the following items: (See Figure 1). Table 1 on Page 2 for inlet sampling tube and detector sup- information. Complete laser duct assembly. Two #10 sheet metal mounting screws. Two sampling tube filters. One test magnet. Drilling template. Two 5/16 O-rings. Two rubber tube bushings seals. Four #6 self-tapping mounting screws for the sampling tube. One filter adapter. One inlet tube end plug. Four #6×7/10 cover mounting screws. Two #10 speed nuts. One test coil and parts bag. The inlet sampling tube must be ordered separately. It be the correct length for the width of the duct where it will installed. See Table 1 to determine the inlet tube required for duct widths. Sequence 1. Determine duct mounting application . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2. Verify duct air flow direction and velocity . . . . . . . . . 2 3. Drill the mounting holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 4. Secure the housing base to the duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 5. the inlet sampling tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 6. Field wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 7. the filters and check pressure differential . . . . 4 8. Perform detector check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 9. the cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 10. Perform the final system check (Testing) . . . . . . . . . . 7 1. Verify Duct Air Flow Direction and Velocity Early Warning Fire Protection

No text preview available.

Product Pinnacle Laser Smoke Detector and Engineering Specifications pinnacle laser smoke detector shall be a System Sensor model number 7251. Smoke shall be an addressable intelligent laser smoke detector and shall connect with two wires the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit (SLC). The detectors shall use a laser diode patented smoke sensing chamber, designed to amplify signals from smoke but diminish stray reflections and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel the analog level of smoke density. shall be able to achieve sensitivities from 0.02 percent-per-foot to 2 percent-per-foot Laser smoke detector shall provide point identification of the fire location through shall experience no delay in response time due to smoke dilution or smoke time, and shall offer complete supervision of wiring and detector. detectors shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using rotary switches. of the possibility of installation error, systems that use binary jumpers or DIP switches to the detector address are not acceptable. The detectors shall also store an internal identifying that the control panel shall use to identify the type of detector. Systems that require a programmer to set the detector address (including temporary connection at the panel) are intensive and not acceptable. Each detector occupies any one of at least 99 possible on the SLC loop. It responds to regular polls from the system and reports its type and detector can have its sensitivity tested (required per NFPA 72 2007 Edition, Chapter 7 on Testing and Maintenance) when installed/connected to a compatible addressable fire control panel. detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel. There are three test methods: magnet, smoke entry aerosol or panel. detectors shall provide two LEDs to provide 360 visibility. The LEDs are placed into steady illumination by the control panel indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. An connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED, base, and / or relay base (optional accessories). The external remote alarm can be to other sounder or relay bases for activating all devices in a space via a single unit. LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor status. Coded signals, from the panel, can cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, or latch off. Refer to the control technical documentation for sensor LED status operation and expected delay to alarm. detectors shall be low profile ceiling-mount/wall-mount and shall be plug-in mounted into a base. These detectors shall be constructed of off-white UV resistant polymer and shall detachable from the mounting base to simplify installation, service and maintenance. Wiring shall be made by means of SEMS screws. The detector shall allow pre-wiring of the and the head shall be a plug-in type. Mounting base shall be mounted on junction box is at least 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) deep. Mounting base shall be available to mount to junction boxes. Suitable boxes include: (10.16 cm) square box with and without plaster ring. (10.16 cm) octagonal box. 2010 (8.89 cm) octagonal box. box. 268 -Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Signaling Systems Agency Standards CAN/ULC-S529- Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems 3230-3250- Smoke Actuated Detectors for Automatic Fire Alarm Signaling 2010

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS High-sensitivity Smoke Sensors Voltage Range: Current @ 24 VDC: Alarm Current: Current: Humidity Range: Temperature Range: Velocity: Load Rating: refer to your isolator base/module manual for isolator calculation instructions. to 32 VDC uA (one communication every 5 seconds with green LED blink on communication) mA @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with red LED solid on) mA @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with amber LED solid on) to 93% Relative Humidity, Non-condensing to 140 (-10 to 60 to 4000 ft./min. (0 to 1219.2 m/min.) (51 mm) installed in B300-6 Base (156 mm) installed in B300-6 Base; 4.1 (104 mm) installed in B501 Base oz. (95 g) Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630/377-6495 0 0 268 listed for Open Air Protection (0.5%/ft. to 2.0%/ft. obscuration). 268 listed for Special Application (0.02%/ft. to 0.5%/ft. obscuration). 268A listed for Duct Applications (0.5%/ft. to 2.0%/ft. obscuration). sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system manual. The installation must meet the requirements of the Au- Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance installed in compliance with the National Fire Protection Associa- (NFPA); see NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code and/or 76 Standard for the Fire Protection of Telecommunications Facilities. DESCRIPTION 7351 is a plug-in type smoke sensor that combines a photoelectronic chamber with addressable-analog communications providing sensi- from 0.02% per foot to 2% per foot obscuration for Early Warning Fire (EWFD) or Very Early Warning Fire Detection (VEWFD). sensors transmit an analog representation of smoke density over a com- line to a control panel. Rotary dial switches are provided for set- the sensor address. (See Figure 1.) 1. ROTARY ADDRESS SWITCHES: Applications: 7351 is listed for use in ducts. See Duct Smoke Detectors Guide HVAG53 for details on pendant mount applications. NOTE: High-sensitivity Photoelectric smoke sensors are also listed for use DNR(W) duct smoke detectors. GUIDE wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, local codes, and any special requirements of the Authority Having Proper wire gauges should be used. The installation wires should color-coded to limit wiring mistakes and ease system troubleshooting. Im- connections will prevent a system from responding properly in the of a fire. power from the communication line before installing sensors. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) as shown in the wiring (See Figure 2.) Set the desired address on the sensor address switches. (See Figure 1.) Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor into the base while it clockwise to secure it in place. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control panel and the communication line. Test the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section of this manual. covers provide limited protection against airborne dust particles during Dust covers must be removed before the sensors can sense smoke. sensors prior to heavy remodeling or construction. LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor status. output is provided for connection to an optional remote LED annunciator RA100Z). Sensor panels offer different features sets across different models. As a certain features of the photoelectric sensors may be available on some panels, but not on others. 7351 supports CLIP (Classic Loop Interface protocol mode. The possible features available in the photoelectric if supported by the control panel are: The sensor LEDs can operate in three ways off, and blinking can be set to red, green, or amber. This is controlled by the panel. The remote output may be synchronized to the LED operation or con- independent of the LEDs. Devices are point addressable up to 159 add

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS High-sensitivity Smoke Sensors Voltage Range: Current @ 24 VDC: Alarm Current: Current: Humidity Range: Temperature Range: Velocity: Load Rating: refer to your isolator base/module manual for isolator calculation instructions. to 32 VDC uA (one communication every 5 seconds with green LED blink on communication) mA @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with red LED solid on) mA @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with amber LED solid on) to 93% Relative Humidity, Non-condensing to 140 (-10 to 60 to 4000 ft./min. (0 to 1219.2 m/min.) (51 mm) installed in B300-6 Base (156 mm) installed in B300-6 Base; 4.1 (104 mm) installed in B501 Base oz. (95 g) Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630/377-6495 0 0 268 listed for Open Air Protection (0.5%/ft. to 2.0%/ft. obscuration). 268 listed for Special Application (0.02%/ft. to 0.5%/ft. obscuration). 268A listed for Duct Applications (0.5%/ft. to 2.0%/ft. obscuration). sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system manual. The installation must meet the requirements of the Au- Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance installed in compliance with the National Fire Protection Associa- (NFPA); see NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code and/or 76 Standard for the Fire Protection of Telecommunications Facilities. DESCRIPTION 7351 is a plug-in type smoke sensor that combines a photoelectronic chamber with addressable-analog communications providing sensi- from 0.02% per foot to 2% per foot obscuration for Early Warning Fire (EWFD) or Very Early Warning Fire Detection (VEWFD). sensors transmit an analog representation of smoke density over a com- line to a control panel. Rotary dial switches are provided for set- the sensor address. (See Figure 1.) 1. ROTARY ADDRESS SWITCHES: Applications: 7351 is listed for use in ducts. See Duct Smoke Detectors Guide HVAG53 for details on pendant mount applications. NOTE: High-sensitivity Photoelectric smoke sensors are also listed for use DNR(W) duct smoke detectors. GUIDE wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, local codes, and any special requirements of the Authority Having Proper wire gauges should be used. The installation wires should color-coded to limit wiring mistakes and ease system troubleshooting. Im- connections will prevent a system from responding properly in the of a fire. power from the communication line before installing sensors. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) as shown in the wiring (See Figure 2.) Set the desired address on the sensor address switches. (See Figure 1.) Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor into the base while it clockwise to secure it in place. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control panel and the communication line. Test the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section of this manual. covers provide limited protection against airborne dust particles during Dust covers must be removed before the sensors can sense smoke. sensors prior to heavy remodeling or construction. LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor status. output is provided for connection to an optional remote LED annunciator RA100Z). Sensor panels offer different features sets across different models. As a certain features of the photoelectric sensors may be available on some panels, but not on others. 7351 supports CLIP (Classic Loop Interface protocol mode. The possible features available in the photoelectric if supported by the control panel are: The sensor LEDs can operate in three ways off, and blinking can be set to red, green, or amber. This is controlled by the panel. The remote output may be synchronized to the LED operation or con- independent of the LEDs. Devices are point addressable up to 159 add

Select Series Sensitivity Pinnacle Select Series 7351 is a high sensitivity, spot detector designed for Very Early Warning Detection. Very Early Warning Fire Detection capability New modern profile Analog communications Low standby current Rotary address switches Dual LEDs for 360 visibility Expanded color options On-board drift compensation Transient rejection algorithms Microprocessor design Superior EMI protection Listings is a high sensitivity photoelectric smoke detector for Very Early Warning Fire Detection and used to protect assets and operations where systems must remain at all times. high-sensitvity detector features a smoke-sensing chamber and optic block designed to amplify signals from smoke but stray internal reflections that can cause false alarms. New technology allows Pinnacle to achieve sensitivity levels from percent-per-foot to 2 percent-per-foot obscuration up to 25 greater than a standard photoelectric detector. The extensive processing includes multi-alert drift compensation, internal and superior transient signal rejection algorithms to unprecedented stability at ultra-high sensitivities across the temperature range. Pinnacle provides point identification of the location through addressability and offers complete supervision both the wiring and detector. detector is UL listed for: UL 268 Open Air Protection (0.5%/ft. to 2.0%/ft. obscuration). UL 268 Special Applications (0.02%/ft. to 0.5%/ft. obscuration). UL 268A Duct Applications allowing both in duct and within Sensor models DNR and DNRW duct smoke detectors. addition, the new modern profile blends seamlessly with other Series detectors including expanded color options that contemporary aesthetic demands. is the ideal detection solution for sensitive environments that tolerate even small amounts of smoke: Telecommunications switching facilities Cellular telephone infrastructure Integrated circuit fabrication facilities Computer rooms Traffic control centers Clean rooms Data Centers 08/29/2018 Page 1 Specifications Temperature Range Humidity Range Velocity Load Rating Diagnostics Sensitivity Compensation inches (51 mm) installed in B300-6 base inches (156 mm) installed in B300-6 base; inches (104 mm) installed in B501-WHITE/-IV/-BL base oz (95 g) to 140 (-10 to 60 to 93% relative humidity, non-condensing to 4,000 fpm (0 to 1219 m/minute) by control panel by test magnet levels: 0.02, 0.03, 0.05, 0.10, 0.20, 0.50, 1.00, 1.50, 2.00%/ft. obscuration 0.10, 0.16, 0.33, 0.66, 1.65, 3.24, 4.85, 6.41%/m obscuration) sensitivity maintenance alert signal sensitivity maintenance alert signal urgent signal Specifications Voltage Range Current @ 24 VDC Current Alarm Current to 32 VDC uA (one communication every 5 seconds with green LED blink on communication) mA @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with amber LED solid on) mA @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with red LED solid on) Information No. LED Kit sensitivity photoelectric smoke detector replacement) Mounting base Mounting base, bulk pack Flanged mounting base Flanged mounting base, bulk pack addressable sounder base addressable sounder base, low- sounder base sounder base, low frequency base base Mounting Kit (flanged) ring Color Kit (includes cover and trim ring) Remote LED annunciator test magnet test magnet Ring

No text preview available.

firealarmresources.com

8251F CLIP Aspirating Smoke Detector and Engineering Specifications Aspirating Smoke Detector (ASD) shall offer Very Early Warning Smoke Detection, Early Smoke Detection and Standard Smoke Detection settings. The sensitivity range shall be 0.00046%/ft 4.0%/ft. Operating temperatures shall be from 32 (0 to 100 (38 air temperatures shall range from ( to 140 (60 Operating humidity range from 10-95% non-condensing. The ASD shall have dual source (blue LED and infra- laser) optical smoke detection for a wide range of fire detection with enhanced immunity to particulates. The ASD shall operate in air flows from 0-4000 ft/min (0-1,219 m/min). software shall provide pipe design, FAAST system configuration, and FAAST system in a single software program. ASD shall be tested, approved and/or listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory (FM), and California State Fire Marshal (CSFM). Parameters ASD shall allow 5 programmable alarm levels with time delays, including Alert, Action 1, 2, Fire 1, and Fire 2. The ASD shall allow for an Acclimate or Day/Night/Weekend setting accommodate environmental changes. The Acclimate mode shall automatically adjusts alarm within user specified parameters to reduce nuisance alarms. It shall continually adapt to environmental conditions when activated. Day/Night/Weekend settings shall allow the to create different thresholds and delays during the day, night or weekend. ASD shall provide 8 form C, programmable, latching or non-latching relays. It shall include a replaceable filter and an internal particle separator to reduce the amount of non-combustible reaching the detection chamber. It shall be tested and approved for coverage up to sq. ft. It shall use ultrasonic sensors to confirm proper air flow through the pipe network. It store up to 18,000 events. Events shall include smoke levels, alarm conditions, operator and faults. The dates and time of each event shall be recorded. ASD shall provide Urgent, Minor, and Isolate fault types to indicate the priority of faults in the system. Fault indication shall be provided for the following: flow If a device has decreased air flow, a Minor fault shall be generated at 20% in air flow. An Urgent fault shall be generated at 50% decrease in air flow. Configuration Device configuration failure. A minor fault shall be generated if a update did not transfer. An Urgent fault shall be generated if no exists in the system or the configuration is corrupt and the device cannot Sensor If the particulate sensor is not operating properly and needs immediate an Urgent fault shall be generated. External Monitor If the external monitor detects an open a Minor fault shall be Time If the internal time base needs to be updated a Minor fault shall be generated. Communication If the device fails to communicate to one of its peripherals and cannot properly, an Urgent fault shall be generated. Aspiration If the aspirator is not working and requires immediate attention an Urgent shall be generated. Filter As the filter approaches a pre-set threshold an initial warning shall be given to the filter and a Minor fault shall be generated. If the filter is not changed within 72 an Urgent fault shall be generated. If the device is put into the Isolate mode, an Isolation fault shall be generated. High Flow If a device has increased air flow, a Minor fault shall be generated at 20% in air flow. An Urgent fault shall be generated at 50% increase in air flow. Interface system shall provide a user interface with: Air Flow/Fault Display The air flow/fault display shall consist of 10 bicolor LEDs and in one of two modes: air flow or fault indication. Green segments shall indicate close the current air flow is to the high or low air flow threshold. During normal two adjacent indicators shall be green and correspond to the current airflow the detector. When airflow is at a balanced level, the two green segments shall centered on the graph. As airflow rises and falls, the green se

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Timer Delay Assembly and Switch Assembly for WFD and WFDT 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. Information manual includes instructions for replacing either of assemblies listed above. Either of these may be replaced replacing the other. waterflow device need not be removed from the sprin- system while the timing delay and/or switch assembly being replaced. Do not tamper with the main plate attach- screws since water leakage will occur. (See Figure 1.) not replace any other component of the waterflow indi- in the field. If any other functional part of the detector faulty, remove and replace the entire detector. Not so may result in the failure of the detector to indicate waterflow condition. Mechanism Removal Turn the dial to zero (0) and remove the three screws the delay mechanism in place. Gently lift the front of the delay mechanism approxi- 30 degrees to clear the paddle lever arm (see 1). Pull forward and rock the delay mechanism back and slightly to disengage the switch buttons from the stop. Mechanism Replacement Turn the replacement delay mechanism to zero (0). Orient the timer stop as depicted in Figure 2. Note the off- in the two vertical faces of the stop and their position. Placing the mechanism on a slight angle to the water- device as shown in Figure 1, slide the rear of the shaft between the switch buttons until the timer is encountered. Rock the delay mechanism back forth to retract the switch buttons and continue to the delay mechanism into position on the plate. Check the following before replacing the retaining (refer to Figures 1 and 2). Insert the end of the shaft into the rear slot of the enclosure (see Figure 1). Rest the paddle lever arm on the front face of the stop (see Figure 2). Center the delay mechanism on the plate, making the slots in the plastic are aligned with the holes the metal mounting plate. Make sure the leading edge of the mounting plate is in contact with the stops on the delay mecha- (see Figure 1). Firmly seat the delay mechanism on the three sup- Seat the spring hook in the groove in the paddle le- posts. arm. 1. Delay Assembly (WFDT shown, WFDXX lower unit configuration is different): NO. 30 TO AND STOP NO. STOP) ENCLOSURE SLOT LEVER ARM NOT REMOVE! PLATE – 3 – 4 BOSS Enclosure Replacement Remove the three screws holding the switch enclosure. Pull gently on the switch enclosure and rock slightly to the switch buttons from the timer stop. Install the replacement switch enclosure using a similar action to depress the switch buttons. Do not the timer stop or shaft more than 15 degrees while the switch enclosure. Check the position of timer stop per Figure 2. Slide the switch enclosure toward the delay mechanism the vertical alignment boss on the plate seats into alignment groove one corner of the switch enclo- (Only one will engage.) Exert pressure on the enclosure holding it seated flat and pushed to- the delay mechanism while replacing the three screws. Seat firmly using approximately 6 in- of torque. Check With the dial set on zero, actuate the lever arm forward back checking for smooth operation of the switch The lever arm should operate freely with no The switches should activate when the arm moved forward and reset when the arm is released. With a continuity meter installed between the (COM) (B) terminals on one of the switches, the following should occur: Condition Normal or non-flow Lever actuated or water- flow in pipe (10 gpm) Turn the dial to the desired delay setting and

A77-AB Bracket System Sensor A77-AB Adapter Bracket allows to retrofit applications where a larger smoke detector was previously installed. Adapter Bracket covers unsightly footprints allowing a new Sensor direct-wire detector to blend into the acoustical tile the need for costly ceiling repainting. This simple solution installed costs on fire alarm system retrofits. diameter to cover retrofit applications using System Sensor 100, 400 series direct-wire detectors color blends with 100 and 400 series detectors of high UV-resistant plastic additional hardware needed of Adapter Bracket 1. Install adapter bracket ceiling and mounting 2. Install detector. Specifications Specifications Diameter Diameter UV-resistant plastic 3. Adapter bracket covers detector footprints and installations. 4. Detector without adapter Information No. Bracket (order smoke detectors separately) Ohio Avenue St. Charles, IL 60174 800-SENSOR2 Fax: 630-377-6495 System Sensor. specifications subject to change without notice. Visit systemsensor.com for product information, including the latest version of this data sheet. 9/06 #1676

Accuflow T-Tap State Detectors Available (cover removed) Flow Detector Flow Detector Flow Detector Flow Detector Parts wrench tamper kit kit Kit PCB kit Overview state retard assures precise accuracy for use with 1 NPT selections simplify settings two-wire design connection to a local bell and or addressable systems accommodate up to AWG wire switches activate the alarm panel and local simultaneously retard assembly Sensor Accuflow T-Tap series is a new line of solid state waterflow designed for primary signaling in residential systems and branch line These models fit 1 NPT tees including: 1 1-1/4 and 1-1/2 NPT ferrous and brass tees; 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 and 2 copper sweat tees; CPVC tees; and 1-1/2 polybutylene tees. For 2 cast and malleable threaded use 2 paddle (P02-0023-000) provided. Construction. The Accuflow AFDT model consists of a rugged enclosure for and outdoor use. Like all System Sensor waterflow detectors, Accuflow mod- operate across a wide temperature range, from 32 to 120 (0 to 49 Performance. Accuflow detectors incorporate a solid state retard to ensure accurate timing. Designed for use within conventional and addressable alarm systems, Accuflow detectors include connections for both the panel or module, as well as a local bell or notification device. Alarm Immunity. The solid state circuitry of the Accuflow series provides timing accuracy over traditional mechanical retard designs. This accuracy the risk of false alarms created by pressure surges or air trapped within sprinkler system. Operation. Accuflow detectors are designed to simplify installation. Wired traditional waterflow detectors, the Accuflow series does not require the installer run an additional third wire. Two conduit openings permit easy attachment to the alarm system. Specification style water flow detector with a solid state retard shall be an Accuflow Series model number __________ manufac- by System Sensor. Water flow detector shall be installed on a tee that has a 1 NPT branch including: 1 1-1/4 or threaded ferrous or brass tee; 1-2 copper sweat tee; 1 CPVC tee; or 1-1/2 polybutylene tee as designated on drawings and/or specified herein. For 2 cast and malleablle threaded tees use 2 paddle (P02-0023-000) provided. shall mount on any clear pipe span of the appropriate size, either in a vertical or horizontal run at least 6 from fittings or valves which may change water direction, flow rate, or pipe diameter, or no closer that 24 from a valve or For 2 cast and malleablle threaded tees use 2 paddle (P02-0023-000) provided. Detectors shall have a sensitivity the range of 4 to 10 gallons per minute and a static pressure rating of 250 psi. The detector shall respond to water in the specified direction after a preset time delay. The delay mechanism shall be a solid state unit which is field- via a dipswitch. The actuation mechanism shall include a polyethylene vane inserted through the tee fitting and by a mechanical linkage to the delay mechanism. Outputs shall consist of one SPDT switch (Form C contact) one SPST switch (normally open) for wiring to an alarm panel or addressable control module and/or bell or notification Two conduit entrances (one of which is a knockout type) for standard fittings of commonly used electrical conduit be provided on the detectors. A grounding provision shall be provided. AFDT housing shall be NEMA 4 rated by Laboratories for indoor/outdoor use. All other models shall be rated for indoor use. Specifications Draw microamps @ 12/24 VDC or FWR microamps @ 120 VAC Accuflow and Accuflow Low Flow detectors receive power and operate on a two-wire initi- zone of a fire alarm control panel. When compatibility of these devices, the operating voltage of the control pane

Figure 8. Assembly diagram: 9A. Ground screw location: AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Accuflow Waterflow Detector Solid State Time Retard SENSOR Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Switch 9B. Knockout plug removal: 10. Electronic Retard Timing Chart: (sec) 1 sec) 2 sec) 3 sec) 1 Table 1 for hole size Only use the above timer settings. must not exceed 90 seconds. refer to insert for the Limitations of Fire Alarm Systems Limitations of Waterflow Alarm Devices Waterflow detectors may not work or operate properly if sprinkler pip- being monitored is plugged with pipe scale, mud, stones or other material. Sprinkler systems should be checked regularly for blocking material, following the instructions in Chapter 5 of Standard 13A. Alarms generated by the activation of waterflow detectors may not be by a central station if telephone or other communication lines the detector are out of service, disabled, or open. Vane-type waterflow detectors have a normal service life of 10-15 Hard water systems, however, may reduce waterflow detector life to 4 or 5 years. Waterflow detectors are not a substitute for insurance. Building owners always insure property and lives being protected by sprinkler valves controlling the water supply to a sprinkler system are closed, waterflow detectors will not work. All valves controlling a water supply should be sealed or locked in the normally open The normally open position should be monitored by a sprin- supervisory switch. Limited Warranty Sensor warrants its enclosed waterflow detector to be free from de- in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a of three years from date of manufacture. System Sensor makes no express warranty for this waterflow detector. No agent, representa- dealer, or employee of the Company has the authority to increase or the obligations or limitations of this Warranty. The Company obli- of this Warranty shall be limited to the repair or replacement of any of the waterflow detector which is found to be defective in materials workmanship under normal use and service during the three year pe- commencing with the date of manufacture. After phoning System toll free number 800-SENSOR2 (736-7672) for a Return Authori- number, send defective units postage prepaid to: System Sensor, Department, RA #__________, 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, IL Please include a note describing the malfunction and suspected of failure. The Company shall not be obligated to repair or replace which are found to be defective because of damage, unreasonable modifications, or alterations occurring after the date of manufacture. no case shall the Company be liable for any consequential or incidental for breach of this or any other Warranty, expressed or implied even if the loss or damage is caused by the Company negli- or fault. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of inci- or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may apply to you. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also have other rights which vary from state to state. Ratings: Threshold Bandwidth (Flow Rate): Pressure Rating: Installed: Temperature Range: Pipe: Weight: Rating: Range: Requirements: A @ 125 VAC; 2 A @ 30VDC to 10 gpm PSI (Max) 2 8 x 3.0″W x 6.7″D to 120 F (0 to 49 C) Accuflow models listed below to 7 lb., according to size. Type 4 – 33 VDC or FWR; 108-132 VAC at 12 and 24 VDC or FWR or 400 at 120 VAC Read Carefully And Save instruction manual contains important information about the instal- and operation of waterflow detectors. Purchasers who install detectors for use by others must leave this manual or a copy of with the user.

I56-1621-000R Manuals Online! – 1 for mounting dimensions. and removal and a clear view of it for inspection. See the detector where there is adequate clearance for in- tested, or maintained. for devices that have been improperly in- is activated by a fire. System Sensor is not re- flow of water in the event the associated sprinkler manual may prevent the device from reporting methods other than those listed in this in- of the authority having jurisdiction. follow other applicable NFPA standards, local codes and the 25: Fire Protection Systems Testing, and Maintenance of Water- Four Sories in Height for Residential Occupancies up to and Homes for 1 and 2 Family Dwellings and of Sprinkler Systems Fire Alarm Code 13D: 13: 72: with: installing any waterflow alarm device, be thoroughly Guidelines 13R: Vane and Bottom of Flange Fit Between Top of (End of Paddle Tree) Fitting Depth to Depth Adapter 1. Mounting dimensions: at 12 or 24 VDC or FWR; 400 at 120 VAC – 33 VDC or FWR; 108 – 132 VAC use only, as tested by U.L. Type 4, as tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) lbs. – 120 (0 – 49 39/16 63/4 33/4 63/4 PSI (Max.) – 10 GPM A @ 125 VAC; 2 A @ 30 VDC 1 1 DepthThreadedSweatPoly B CPVC 11/2 1 11/4 1 2 1″ Figure 1) Tee Depth Requirements for recommended tee depths). tees having a 1 threaded NPT branch (see Figure 1 and 1 to 2 sweat brass, 11/2 polybutylene plastic and 1 cpvc AFDT and AFDTH fit 1 to 11/2 NPT threaded ferrous and Pipe Tees activate if the flow rate is less than 4 gpm. of water greater than 10 gallons per minute (gpm) but will delay has elapsed. All detectors will activate on a sustained they reset if the flow of water stops before the AFDTs have a controlled delay mechanism. Delays are delay. of the vane produces a switched output, usually after a systems. Water flow in the pipe deflects a vane. waterflow detectors mount to water filled pipes in Of Operation Do not leave unused wires exposed. the mechanism. Do not use in potentially explosive atmo- inrush of water in such systems may break the vane off or USE IN DRY-PIPE, DELUGE, OR PRE-ACTION SYSTEMS. The vane-type waterflow detectors in wet-pipe systems only. DO before beginning. or a copy of it with the user. Read all instructions waterflow detectors for use by others must leave this and operation of waterflow detectors. Purchasers who instruction manual contains important information about the Read Carefully And Save AFDTH can be installed between 2X4 stud wall construction. Requirements: Range: Rating: Weight: Temperature Range: Installed: Pressure Rating: Threshold Bandwidth (Flow Rate): Ratings: FAX: 630-377-6495 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 Division of Pittway ~~ Waterflow Detectors with Solid State Retard Accuflow AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 2. Assembly diagram: tlilSJIT Voltage. Electrocution Hazard. Do not handle live AC wiring or on a device to which AC power is applied. Doing so may result in or death. sure the direction-of-flow arro

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Accuflow Low Flow Waterflow Detector Solid State Time Retard Ratings: Threshold Bandwidth (Flow Rate): Pressure Rating: Installed: Temperature Range: Pipe: Weight: Rating: Range: Requirements: S. Patent Number: A @ 125VAC; 2 A @ 30VDC gpm maximum PSI (Max) x 3.0″W x 6.7″D F to 120 (0 C to 49 C) Low Flow models listed below to 7 lb., according to size. Type 4 V (DC 108 VAC at 12 and 24 V (DC or at 120 VAC 3,845,259 Read Carefully And Save instruction manual contains important information about the instal- and operation of waterflow detectors. Purchasers who install detectors for use by others must leave this manual or a copy of with the user. all instructions carefully before beginning. Follow only those instruc- that apply to the model you are installing. vane-type waterflow detectors in wet-pipe systems only. Do NOT use in dry pipe, deluge, or preaction systems. The sudden inrush of wa- in such systems may break the vane or damage the mechanism. not use in potentially explosive atmospheres. Do not allow unused to remain exposed. Of Operation waterflow detectors mount to water-filled pipes in sprinkler sys- Waterflow in the pipe deflects a vane, which produces a switched after a specified delay. All waterflow detectors have a con- delay mechanism. Delays do NOT accumulate; they reset if the of water stops before the entire delay has elapsed. All switches actu- when the water flow rate is 3 gallons per minute or greater. This Sys- Sensor installation manual covers the following waterflow detectors sprinkler/fire alarm applications. Flow Models Pipe O.D. Nominal Wall Thickness (60.3mm) (73.0mm) (76.0mm) (88.9mm) (114.3mm) to 4.5mm to 5.2mm to 4.7mm to 5.6mm to 6.4mm LFD models are approved for use on stainless steel and brass pipe NOT use any of the LFD models on any other pipe materials. NOT install steel or iron pipe sections in copper piping for mounting a detector. Incompatibility between the dissimilar metals causes corrosion. SENSOR Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Compatibility: LFD waterflow indicators may receive power and operate on a two- initiating zone of a fire alarm control panel. When determining com- of these devices, the standby operating voltage of the control must be between 8.5 and 35 volts. In the standby mode, the LFD a maximum current of 0.3mA. In alarm, the LFD acts as a short the initiating zone (similar to a manual fire box). For two wire con- fire alarm control panels, not more than 5 waterflow indica- may be connected to a single initiating zone. The maximum retard/ time of the waterflow indicator plus the initiating zone shall not ex- 90 seconds. two wire addressable control panels, the number of waterflow indi- connected to the panel signaling line circuit shall be limited by the circuit current capacity. Fire Alarm Code of Sprinkler Systems Testing and Maintenance of Sprinkler Systems Guidelines installing any waterflow alarm device, be thoroughly familiar with: 72: 13: 25: 750: Water Mist Fire Protection Systems applicable NFPA standards, local codes, and the requirements of the having jurisdiction methods other than those listed in this installation may prevent the device from reporting the flow of water the event the associated sprinkler system is activated by a System Sensor is not responsible for devices that have been installed, tested, or maintained. Mount the detector where there is adequate clearance for installation removal and a clear view of it for inspections. See Figure 1 for dimensions. Locate detector 6 to 7 ft. above the floor to protect from potential damage. On horizontal runs, posit

Advanced Multi-Criteria Fire/CO Detector (AMCF/CO) Asked Questions smoke sensing elements does the incorporate? detector combines four separate sensing elements in unit smoke, carbon monoxide (CO), light/flame, and to sense multiple components of a fire. This approach enhanced sensitivity to real fire with heightened to nuisance particulate. the AMCF/CO detector be used a CO detector? the detector electrochemical sensing cell creates a signal for life safety CO detection and is UL 2075 listed the standard for system-connected life safety carbon monoxide base does the AMCF/CO detector work with? AMCF/CO should be used in conjunction with the B200S sounder base, which can generate either a Temp 3 for fire or a Temp 4 pattern for CO alarm indication. The version requires the B200SCOA, which also includes markings required by code. long does the CO cell last? CO cell has an expected lifetime of approximately six years. detector sends a signal to the panel when the CO cell is its end-of-life and then again when the end-of-life been reached, leaving the CO cell fully expended. the CO cell replaceable? the CO cell is not a field-replaceable component. the AMCF/CO detector function after the cell stops working? the CO cell has reached its end-of-life, the CO sensor no provides carbon monoxide detection for CO life safety However, the smoke sensing component of the will enter Photo, Thermal, Infrared (PTIR) mode and to function as a very effective fire detector. the AMCF/CO be used as a device? the AMCF/CO can be wall-mounted in accordance with 72 guidelines for proper mounting of smoke detectors. 9/11 #2829

Product Multi-Criteria Fire Detector and Engineering Specifications multi-criteria fire detector shall be a System Sensor model number 2251-COPTIR. detector shall be an addressable intelligent multi-criteria smoke detector. The detector be comprised of four sensing elements, including a photoelectric (light-scattering) particulate an electrochemical carbon monoxide (CO) sensor, a daylight-filtered infrared sensor and state thermal sensor(s) rated at 135 (57.2 The device shall be able to indicate smoke and heat alarms. intelligent multi-criteria detection device shall include the ability to combine the signal of the signal with other sensing elements in an effort to react quickly in the event of a fire It shall also include the inherent ability to distinguish between a fire condition and a alarm condition. The product design shall be capable of selecting the appropriate levels based on the environment type chosen by user in which it is installed (office, kitchen etc.) and then have the ability to automatically change the setting as the changes. detector shall be capable of automatically adjusting its sensitivity by means of drift and smoothing algorithms. The detector shall be capable of automatically its sensitivity by means of drift compensation and smoothing algorithms. The device provide unique signals to indicate when 20% of the drift range is remaining, when 100% of range is used, and when there is a chamber fault to show unit requires maintenance. detector shall indicate CO trouble conditions including 6 months of sensor life remaining and life has expired. The detector shall indicate a combined signal for any of the following: chamber trouble, thermistor trouble, CO self test failure, IR self test failure, and freeze detectors shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using rotary switches. of the possibility of installation error, systems that use binary jumpers or DIP switches to the detector address are not acceptable. The detectors shall also store an internal identifying that the control panel shall use to identify the type of detector. Systems that require a programmer to set the detector address (including temporary connection at the panel) are intensive and not acceptable. Each detector occupies any one of at least 99 possible on the signaling line circuit (SLC) loop. It responds to regular polls from the system reports its type and status. detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel. There are three test methods: magnet, smoke entry aerosol, or direct heat method. detectors shall provide two LEDs to provide 360 visibility. The LEDs are placed into steady illumination by the control panel indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. An connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED, base, and / or relay base (optional accessories). The external remote alarm can be to other sounder or relay bases for activating all devices in a space via a single unit. LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor status. Coded signals, from the panel, can cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, or latch off. Refer to the control technical documentation for sensor LED status operation and expected delay to alarm. 2009 detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall be plug-in mounted into a twist-lock base. These shall be constructed of off-white UV resistant polymer and shall be detachable from the base to simplify installation, service and maintenance. Mounting base wiring shall be made by means of SEMS screws. The detector shall allow pre-wiring of the and the head shall be a plug-in type. Mounting base shall be mounted on junction box is at least 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) deep. Mounting base shall be available to mount to junction boxes. Suitable boxes include: (10.16 cm) square box with and without plaster ring. (10.16 cm) octagonal box. (8.89 cm) octagonal box. box. 268 -Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Signaling Systems Agency Standards CAN/ULC-S529- Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Accuflow Waterflow Detector Solid State Time Retard Ratings: Threshold Bandwidth Rate): Pressure Rating: Installed: Temperature Range: Pipe: Weight: Rating: Range: Requirements: Patent Number: A @ 125 VAC; 2 A @ 30VDC to 10 gpm PSI (Max) 2 8 x 3.0″W x 6.7″D to 120 (0 to 49 Accuflow models listed below to 7 lb., according to size. Type 4 V (DC 108 VAC at 12 and 24 V (DC or at 120 VAC 3,845,259 Read Carefully And Save instruction manual contains important information about the instal- and operation of waterflow detectors. Purchasers who install water- detectors for use by others must leave this manual or a copy of it with user. all instructions carefully before beginning. Follow only those instruc- that apply to the model you are installing. vane-type waterflow detectors in wet-pipe systems only. Do NOT use in dry pipe, deluge, or preaction systems. The sudden inrush of in such systems may break the vane or damage the mechanism. not use in potentially explosive atmospheres. Do not allow unused to remain exposed. Of Operation waterflow detectors mount to water-filled pipes in sprinkler sys- Waterflow in the pipe deflects a vane, which produces a switched after a specified delay. All waterflow detectors have a con- delay mechanism. Delays do NOT accumulate; they reset if the of water stops before the entire delay has elapsed. All switches actu- when the water flow rate is 10 gallons per minute or greater, but will actuate if the flow rate is less than 4 gallons per minute. This System installation manual covers the following waterflow detectors for alarm applications. Models Schedules through 40 through 40 through 40 through 40 through 40 through 40 through 40 through 40 Diameter Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Compatibility: AFD waterflow indicators may receive power and operate on a two- initiating zone of a fire alarm control panel. When determining com- of these devices, the standby operating voltage of the control must be between 8.5 and 35 volts. In the standby mode, the AFD a maximum current of 0.3 mA. In alarm, the AFD acts as a short the initiating zone (similar to a manual fire box). For two wire fire alarm control panels, not more than 5 waterflow may be connected to a single initiating zone. The maximum time of the waterflow indicator plus the initiating zone shall exceed 90 seconds. two wire addressable control panels, the number of waterflow connected to the panel signaling line circuit shall be lim- only by the circuit current capacity. Guidelines installing any waterflow alarm device, be thoroughly familiar with: 72: 13: 25: applicable NFPA standards, local codes, and the requirements of the having jurisdiction Fire Alarm Code of Sprinkler Systems Testing and Maintenance of Sprinkler Systems methods other than those listed in this installation may prevent the device from reporting the flow of water the event the associated sprinkler system is activated by a System Sensor is not responsible for devices that have been installed, tested, or maintained. Mount the detector where there is adequate clearance for installation removal and a clear view of it for inspections. See Figure 1 for dimensions. Locate detector 6 to 7 ft. above the floor to protect from potential damage. On horizontal runs, position the detector on the top or side of the pipe. not mount it upside down because condensation may collect in the and impair the operation of the detector. For vertical flow mount the detector on pipe through which water flows Otherwise, the unit may not operate properly. Mount the detector at least 6 inches fro

S P R I N K L E R S Y S T E M S M O N I T O R I N G Series State Detectors Available Parts Cover wrench Cover tamper switch kit Gasket kit Retard PCB kit Overview state retard assures precise accuracy Switch selections simplify settings two-wire design connection to a local bell and or addressable systems with a wide range of pipe including 5 through 40 are equipped with a 4 gasket switches activate the alarm panel and local simultaneously retard assembly (cover removed) Sensor Accuflow series is a new line of solid state waterflow compatible with a wide range of pipe schedules, including 2 schedule 5. detectors can be mounted in a vertical or horizontal position. Construction. The Accuflow series consists of a rugged enclosure for indoor outdoor use. Like all System Sensor waterflow detectors, Accuflow models oper- across a wide temperature range, from 32 to 120 (0 to 49 Performance. Accuflow detectors incorporate a solid state retard to ensure accurate timing. Designed for use within conventional and addressable alarm systems, Accuflow detectors include connections for both the panel or module, as well as a local bell or notification device. Alarm Immunity. The solid state circuitry of the Accuflow series provides great- timing accuracy over traditional mechanical retard designs. This accuracy mini- the risk of false alarms created by pressure surges or air trapped within sprinkler system. Operation. Accuflow detectors are designed to simplify installation. Wired traditional waterflow detectors, the Accuflow series does not require the installer run an additional third wire. Two conduit openings permit easy attachment to the alarm system. Specification waterflow detector with a solid state retard shall be an Accuflow Series model number __________ manufactured by System and shall be installed on system piping as designated on the drawing and/or as specified herein. Detectors shall mount on any pipe span of the appropriate nominal size, either on a vertical upflow or horizontal run, at least 6 from any fittings which may water direction, flow rate, or pipe diameter, or no closer than 24 from a valve or drain. Detectors shall be compatible with sched- 5 through 40 for 2 diameter pipe, schedule 7 through 40 for 21/2 6 diameter pipe and schedule 10 through 40 for 8 diameter pipe. shall have a sensitivity in the range of 4 to 10 gallons per minute and a static pressure rating of 450 psi for 2 8 diameter The detector shall respond to water flow in the specified direction after a preset time delay. The delay mechanism shall be a solid unit which is field-adjustable via a dipswitch. The detector actuation mechanism shall include a polyethylene vane inserted through hole in the pipe and connected by a mechanical linkage to the delay mechanism. Outputs shall consist of one SPDT switch (Form C con- and one SPST switch (normally open contact) for wiring to an alarm panel or addressable control module and local bell and/or noti- device. Two conduit entrances (one knockout type) for standard fittings of commonly used electrical conduit shall be provided on detectors. A grounding provision shall be provided. Unless noted, enclosures shall be NEMA 4 listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. indoor or outdoor use. Specifications Pressure Rating PSI Threshold Bandwidth (Flow Rate) 10 GPM Surge Feet Per Second (FPS) Pipe water pipe, schedule 5 through 40 6 schedule 7 through 40 schedule 10 through 40 Dimensions Installed bolt nut saddle bolt vane Model

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Accuflow Waterflow Detectors Solid State Retard Ratings: Threshold Bandwidth Rate): Pressure Rating: Installed: Temperature Range: 32 – 120 (0 – 49 Weight: Rating: lbs. A @ 125 VAC; 2 A @ 30 VDC GPM PSI (Max.) 33 63 39 63 Type 4, as tested by Laboratories, Inc. use only, as tested by U.L. V (DC 108 VAC at 12 or 24 V (DC at 120 VAC 6,084,521; 6,275,160 Range: Requirements: Patent Number: Read Carefully And Save instruction manual contains important information about the and operation of waterflow detectors. Purchasers who waterflow detectors for use by others must leave this man- or a copy of it with the user. Read all instructions carefully beginning. vane-type waterflow detectors in wet-pipe systems only. DO USE IN DRY-PIPE, DELUGE, OR PRE-ACTION SYSTEMS. The inrush of water in such systems may break the vane off or the mechanism. Do not use in potentially explosive Do not leave unused wires exposed. Of Operation waterflow detectors mount to water filled pipes in systems. Water flow in the pipe deflects a vane. of the vane produces a switched output, usually after specified delay. AFDTs have a controlled delay mechanism. Delays are noncu- they reset if the flow of water stops before the entire has elapsed. All detectors will activate on a sustained flow water greater than 10 gallons per minute (gpm) but will not if the flow rate is less than 4 gpm. Pipe Tees/Risers AFDT and AFDTH fit 1 to 11 NPT threaded ferrous and 1 to 2 sweat brass, 11 polybutylene plastic and 1 cpvc tees having a 1 threaded NPT branch (see Figure 1 and for recommended tee depths). For 2 cast and malleable tees use 2 paddle ( P02-0023-000) provided. Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AFDTH can be installed between 2X4 stud wall construction. Compatibility: AFD waterflow indicators may receive power and operate on two-wire initiating zone of a fire alarm control panel. When compatibility of these devices, the standby operating of the control panel must be between 8.5 and 35 volts. In standby mode, the AFD draws a maximum current of 0.3 mA. alarm, the AFD acts as a short across the initiating zone (sim- to a manual fire box). For two wire conventional fire alarm panels, not more than 5 waterflow indicators may be to a single initiating zone. The maximum retard/reset of the waterflow indicator plus the initiating zone shall not 90 seconds. two wire addressable control panels, the number of water- indicators connected to the panel signaling line circuit be limited only by the circuit current capacity. Tee Depth Requirements Figure 1) Depth Threaded Sweat Poly B CPVC 1 1 11/4 1 11/2 1 2 1″ 1. Mounting dimensions: Adapter Depth to Depth (End of Paddle Tree) Fit Between Top of and Bottom of Flange Fitting Vane Guidelines installing any waterflow alarm device, be thoroughly with: 72: 13: 13D: Fire Alarm Code of Sprinkler Systems for 1

No text preview available.

Advanced Multi-Criteria Fire/CO Detector (AMCF/CO) is the Value of AMCF/CO? primary application is commercial sleeping spaces, hotels/motels, managed-care facilities, college and military housing. applications are rooms with or near fossil-fuel-burning such as laundry rooms, rooms with a gas and mechanical rooms. Message AMCF/CO uses the System Sensor Advanced Multi-Criteria Detector as its base and adds a separate carbon monoxide signal for life safety CO detection. The AMCF/CO detector with the System Sensor B200S sounder base. The was designed with this type of detection in mind and both Temporal 3 and Temporal 4 patterns for fire or notification. Together these devices create an attractive, and cost-effective system. only visible device is the AMCF/CO installed in the sounder Previously, to meet the same requirement, a CO detector, detector with base, and mini horn would be visible. With one device, the appearance of any room is improved. Advanced Multi-Criteria Fire Detector component uses sensing elements to provide the best smoke detection and rejection available. The CO detection is the same used in our CO1224T, which includes RealTest the field functional CO test fully compliant with NFPA 720-2009 The B200S sounder base ties the system together providing the appropriate temporal signals, and because it can with System Sensor A/V devices, it can act as part of evacuation signal vs. using a separate device. cost-effective system.F multi-functional device eliminates the need for a separate detector, smoke detector, mini horn, monitor modules, and of the associated wiring and junction boxes. It also eliminates addresses consuming points on the loop. There only device to wire, one junction box, and one address a much 7/11

Advanced Detector fire and carbon monoxide (CO) detection in a single addressable device provides a and cost-effective solution for today market. Unique ability to detect all four major elements of a fire Automatic drift compensation of smoke sensor and CO cell Separate CO detection signal Highest nuisance alarm immunity Uses only one address on the SLC RealTest CO testing capability UL 268 and UL 2075 listed Separates audible signal for fire or CO alarm when used with B200S base (B200SCOA in Canada) CO cell end-of-life warning and fault Listings Multi-Criteria Fire/CO Detector in B200S sounder base Advanced Multi-Criteria Fire/CO Detector (AMCF/CO) is a addressable device that provides both fire and carbon (CO) detection. For fire, the detector combines four sensing elements in one unit (smoke, CO, light/flame, and to sense multiple components of a fire. This approach enables sensitivity to real fire with heightened immunity to nuisance For CO, the detector electrochemical sensing cell a separate signal for life safety CO detection. through the incomplete burning of various fuels, CO is colorless, odorless and deadly gas that is virtually impossible detect with the human senses. Because the potential exists dangerous levels of CO to accumulate in almost any building, mandating the use of CO detection in commercial spaces to increase across the U.S. and Canada. The AMCF/CO listed to the UL 2075 standard for system-connected life safety monoxide monitoring. AMCF/CO should be used in conjunction with the B200S sounder base, which can generate either a Temp 3 pattern fire or a Temp 4 pattern for CO alarm indication. B200S recognizes the System Sensor synchronization protocol. enables it to be used as a component of the general evacuation along with other System Sensor horns, horn strobes, and when connected to a power supply or Fire Alarm Control (FACP) output capable of generating the System Sensor pulses. With each sounder base carrying a unique the FACP can then command an indvidual sounder or group of sounders to activate. The command set from the can be tailored to the specific event, allowing selection of tone, and group. For more information on the B200S visit installed in B200S base installed in B200S base oz FR110 to 90% relative humidity (non-condensing) to 100 (0 to 38 to 4000 ft/min (0 to 20 m/sec) Multi-Criteria Fire/CO Detector Specifications Specifications Weight Humidity Range Temperature Range Velocity Specifications Voltage Range Standby Current Alarm Current (LED on) Settings and Suggested Applications 1 2 3 / ft of smoke / ft of smoke / ft of smoke to 32 VDC at 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with LED blink enabled) mA at 24 VDC clean environments laboratories environments offices clean environments rooms, dorm rooms rooms near a shower, boiler rooms 4 / ft of smoke with different algorithm and weighting of sensor elements / ft of smoke alarm at 135 (57 5 6 Once the CO cell has reached end-of-life, the CO sensor no longer provides life safety protection; however, when the fire detector enters Thermal, Infrared (PTIR) mode, the following sensitivities apply: 1 2 5 / ft of smoke / ft of smoke / ft of smoke rooms, kitchens, paint shops clean environments laboratories environments offices clean environments rooms, dorm rooms 6 alarm at 135 (57 Monitoring UL Standard Reference Alarm Thresholds are as Follows: Per Million Response Time 5ppm 5ppm 10ppm 240 min. 50 min. 15 min. UL standard 2075, the AMCF/CO has been te

Advanced Multi-Criteria Fire/CO Detector (AMCF/CO) Value Form Price AMCF/CO Price Thermal Device Cost Per Room Device Cost Per Room Box Cost Per Room Required Per Device Set) Box Cost Per Room Required Per Device Set) Cost to Wire One Room Cost to Wire One Room Installed Cost Per Room Installed Cost Per Room Cost Per Room(s) Cost Per Room(s) 2 addresses terminals to wire More devices = poor aesthetics / installation cost address 4 terminals to wire 1 device = improved aesthetics Greater flexibility in programming or general for CO) nuisance immunity Savings on Jobs Per Year Using AMCF/CO over Current configuration: installed junction box cost: time per device (min.): rate ($/hr.): device sets per room: of rooms: of jobs per year: this form will provide an estimate of potential savings you can using the Advanced Multi-Criteria Fire/CO Detector over other configurations. Your actual project savings and costs may vary. System Sensor. CMFL00400 Multi-Criteria Fire/CO Detector (AMCF/CO) Value Form Price AMCF/CO Price Thermal Device Cost Per Room Device Cost Per Room Box Cost Per Room Required Per Device Set) Box Cost Per Room Required Per Device Set) Cost to Wire One Room Cost to Wire One Room Installed Cost Per Room Installed Cost Per Room Cost Per Room(s) Cost Per Room(s) 2 addresses terminals to wire More devices = poor aesthetics / installation cost address 4 terminals to wire 1 device = improved aesthetics Greater flexibility in programming or general for CO) nuisance immunity Savings on Jobs Per Year Using AMCF/CO over Current configuration: installed junction box cost: time per device (min.): rate ($/hr.): device sets per room: of rooms: of jobs per year: this form will provide an estimate of potential savings you can using the Advanced Multi-Criteria Fire/CO Detector over other configurations. Your actual project savings and costs may vary. System Sensor. CMFL00400 Enter the price you pay for the devices used in each configuration. Total the price of all devices required for each configuration. # # Total Number of Rooms x Total Installed Cost Per Room (Total Enter your cost for installing a junction box. Estimate the average time in minutes it takes to install a device. Enter the rate you pay for labor in $ per hour. Total number of device sets divided by the number of rooms on the project. A typical room usually requires 1 device set. Large rooms may require more. Enter the number of rooms in an average project. Enter the number of jobs requiring fire and CO detection performed in a year.

No text preview available.

Product Multi-Criteria Fire/CO Detector and Engineering Specifications multi-criteria fire/CO detector shall be an addressable advanced multi-criteria smoke with a separate signal for carbon monoxide (CO) detection per UL 2075 standards. detector shall be comprised of four sensing elements, including a photoelectric (light- particulate sensor, an electrochemical CO sensor, a daylight-filtered infrared (IR) and solid state thermal sensor(s) rated at 135 (57.2 The device shall be able to distinct smoke and heat alarms. advanced multi-criteria detection device shall include the ability to combine the signal of the signal with other sensing elements in order to react quickly in the event of a fire It shall also include the inherent ability to distinguish between a fire condition and a alarm condition. The detector shall be capable of selecting the appropriate sensitivity based on the environment type (office, manufacturing, kitchen, etc.) in which it is installed, then have the ability to automatically change the setting as the environment changes. CO detector component shall be capable of a functional gas test using a canned test agent test the functionality of the CO sensing cell. detector shall be capable of automatically adjusting its sensitivity by means of drift and smoothing algorithms. The device shall provide unique signals to indicate 20 percent of the drift range is remaining, when 100 percent of drift range is used, and there is a chamber fault to show the unit requires maintenance. detector shall indicate CO trouble conditions, including six months of sensor life remaining sensor life has expired. The detector shall indicate a combined signal for any of the following: chamber trouble, thermistor trouble, CO self test failure, IR self test failure, and freeze detector shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using rotary switches. of the possibility of installation error, systems that use binary jumpers or DIP switches to the detector address are not acceptable. The detector shall also store an internal identifying that the control panel shall use to identify the type of detector. Systems that require a programmer to set the detector address (including temporary connection at the panel) are intensive and not acceptable. Each detector occupies any one of at least 159 possible on the signaling line circuit (SLC) loop. It responds to regular polls from the system reports its type and status. detector shall provide a test means whereby it will simulate an alarm condition and report condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel. There shall be four test functional magnet, smoke entry aerosol, carbon monoxide aerosol or direct heat detector shall provide two LEDs to provide 360 visibility. The LEDs shall be placed into red illumination by the control panel indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm The detector must be capable of connecting to a sounder base that provides both temporal and temporal 4 patterns for fire and CO alarm. LEDs on the sensor shall be controlled by the panel to indicate sensor status. Coded transmitted from the panel, shall cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, or latch off. Refer to 2011 control panel technical documentation for sensor LED status operation and expected delay to detector shall be plug-in mounted into a twist-lock base. The detector shall be constructed of UV-resistant polymer and shall be detachable from the mounting base to simplify service and maintenance. Mounting base wiring connections shall be made by means SEMS screws. The detector shall allow pre-wiring of the base and the head shall be a plug-in The mounting base shall be mounted on a junction box that is at least 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) The mounting base shall be available to mount to standard junction boxes. boxes include (10.16 cm) square box with and without plaster ring (10.16 cm) octagonal box (8.89 cm) octagonal box box box agency standards 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Signaling Systems Smoke Detectors for Fi

Advanced Multi-Criteria Fire/CO Detector (AMCF/CO) Value Form Price AMCF/CO Price Thermal Device Cost Per Room Device Cost Per Room Box Cost Per Room Required Per Device Set) Box Cost Per Room Required Per Device Set) Cost to Wire One Room Cost to Wire One Room Installed Cost Per Room Installed Cost Per Room Cost Per Room(s) Cost Per Room(s) 2 addresses terminals to wire More devices = poor aesthetics / installation cost address 4 terminals to wire 1 device = improved aesthetics Greater flexibility in programming or general for CO) nuisance immunity Savings on Jobs Per Year Using AMCF/CO over Current configuration: installed junction box cost: time per device (min.): rate ($/hr.): device sets per room: of rooms: of jobs per year: this form will provide an estimate of potential savings you can using the Advanced Multi-Criteria Fire/CO Detector over other configurations. Your actual project savings and costs may vary. System Sensor. CMFL00400 Multi-Criteria Fire/CO Detector (AMCF/CO) Value Form Price AMCF/CO Price Thermal Device Cost Per Room Device Cost Per Room Box Cost Per Room Required Per Device Set) Box Cost Per Room Required Per Device Set) Cost to Wire One Room Cost to Wire One Room Installed Cost Per Room Installed Cost Per Room Cost Per Room(s) Cost Per Room(s) 2 addresses terminals to wire More devices = poor aesthetics / installation cost address 4 terminals to wire 1 device = improved aesthetics Greater flexibility in programming or general for CO) nuisance immunity Savings on Jobs Per Year Using AMCF/CO over Current configuration: installed junction box cost: time per device (min.): rate ($/hr.): device sets per room: of rooms: of jobs per year: this form will provide an estimate of potential savings you can using the Advanced Multi-Criteria Fire/CO Detector over other configurations. Your actual project savings and costs may vary. System Sensor. CMFL00400 Enter the price you pay for the devices used in each configuration. Total the price of all devices required for each configuration. # # Total Number of Rooms x Total Installed Cost Per Room (Total Enter your cost for installing a junction box. Estimate the average time in minutes it takes to install a device. Enter the rate you pay for labor in $ per hour. Total number of device sets divided by the number of rooms on the project. A typical room usually requires 1 device set. Large rooms may require more. Enter the number of rooms in an average project. Enter the number of jobs requiring fire and CO detection performed in a year.

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Annunciator Piezo Alert Requirements Voltage: Operating Current: Reverberant Room: Operating Temperature: Range: L 2.9 W .45 D lbs. 24VDC VDC binding head screws, 12 AWG to 18 AWG wire dBA min. @ 10 ft. to 49 (32 to 120 to 93% non-condensing 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 These models were only tested at the 16-33 Volt DC limits. This does include the 80% low-end or 110% high-end voltage limits. This manual be left with the owner/user of this equipment. INFORMATION National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) has published codes, stan- and recommended practices for the installation and use of this product. is recommended that the installer be familiar with these requirements, with codes, and any special requirements of the local authority having juris- For further information, consult NFPA 72 and 90A requirements. System Sensor APA151 annunciator with piezo alert is an audible signal for fire alarm service. It is intended for use in System Sensor 4-wire duct smoke detector applications without a system control panel comply with NFPA 90A. APA151 provides a red alarm LED, with an audible annunciation of an signal, and a green power LED. 1: the APA151 as shown in Figure 1 thru Figure 3 depending on what duct detector is being utilized. Limit wire runs to 25 ohms or less per inter- wire. the APA151 to the single gang box using the two screws provided, or to the wall or ceiling. TEST the wiring diagrams below to insure proper wiring to the APA151. power to the duct smoke detector. Visually check the supervisory LED to make sure it is operational. the detector into alarm state. The alarm LED (red) will light, and the piezo will sound. Reset the detector. 2: WIRING DIAGRAM FOR D4120 TO APA151: LED) ALARM TEST RESET + OUT + OUT NO C LED) POWER WIRING DIAGRAM SHOWN IS FOR D4120 4-WIRE DUCT SMOKE SYSTEM EQUIPPED WITHOUT A CONTROL PANEL. A TROUBLE CONDITION IS INDICATED LOSS OF GREEN LED 3: WIRING DIAGRAM FOR D4120/DH100ACDC TO APA151: Wiring to APA151 Signal Power + N. O. COM Power LED) LED) CONTENTS APA151 annunciator with piezo alert screw pack (containing two mounting screws) Wiring diagram shown is for DH100ACDC 4-wire duct detector system equipped without a control panel. LIMITATIONS OF SOUNDERS sounder will not operate if the power is cut off for any reason. sounder may not be heard. The loudness of the sounder meets or exceeds the current However, the sounder may not alert a sound sleeper or one who has recently drugs or has been drinking alcoholic beverages. This sounder may not be heard if is placed in an area that is separated by a closed door, or if it is located on a different from the person in a hazardous situation, or if it is placed too far away to be heard ambient noise, such as, traffic, air conditioners, machinery or musical appliances may prevent alert persons from hearing the alarm. sounder may not be heard by persons who are hearing-impaired. In this case, a indicator shall also be used. these reasons, Pittway recommends that sounders (85dBA minimum at 10 feet) in a residence shall be placed on every level and in every bedroom that does not a smoke detector with a built-in sounder. LIMITED WARRANTY Sensor warrants its enclosed product to be free from defects in materials and under normal use and service for a period of three years from date of System Sensor makes no other express warranty for the enclosed product. agent, representative, dealer, or employee of the Com

No text preview available.

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Annunciator with Alert 4.6 H 2.75 W 1.5 D .17 lbs. Requirements: Voltage: Regulated 24VDC Operational Voltage: 16 Maximum Operating Current: 30mA #6 binding head screws, 14 AWG to 18 AWG wire Reverberant Room: 81 dBA min. @ 10 ft. to 38 (14 to 100 5% to 95% Relative Humidity These models were only tested at the 16-33 Volt limits. This does not include the 80% low-end or 110% voltage limits. This manual shall be left with the of this equipment. 1: Information National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) has pub- codes, standards, and recommended practices for the and use of this product. It is recommended that installer be familiar with these requirements, with local and any special requirements of the local authority jurisdiction. For further information, consult NFPA and 90A requirements. System Sensor APA451 annunciator with piezo alert an audible signal appliance for fire alarm service. It is for use in System Sensor 4-wire conventional duct detector applications without a system control panel comply with NFPA 90A. APA451 provides a red alarm LED, with an audible of an alarm signal, and a green power LED. 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 1 I56-468-05 Contents APA451 annunciator with piezo alert screw pack (containing two mounting screws) Test the wiring diagrams below to insure proper wiring the APA451. the APA451 as shown in Figure 2. Limit wire runs to ohms or less per interconnecting wire. the APA451 to the single gang box using the two provided, or directly to the wall or ceiling. power to the duct smoke detector. Visually check the LED (green) to make sure it is operational. the detector into alarm state. The alarm LED (red) will and the piezo horn will sound. Reset the detector. 2: Wiring diagram for DH400ACDC to APA451: 3: Wiring diagram for DH100ACDC to APA451: Wiring to APA451

Guide For For Use Use SENSOR Manuals Online! – OF CONTENTS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 1 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2 I GLOSSARY OF TERMS ………………………………………………………………………………………. 3 II STANDARDS THAT APPLY ………………………………………………………………………………… 7 FIRE CODES …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 7 CODES…………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 7 LABORATORIES ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 8 PUBLICATIONS …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 8 PUBLICATIONS ……………………………………………………………………………….. 8 III HOW SMOKE DETECTORS WORK ……………………………………………………………………. 9 OF SMOKE DETECTORS …………………………………………………………………………………….. 9 SMOKE DETECTOR OPERATION …………………………………………………………………. 9 SMOKE DETECTOR OPERATION ………………………………………………………. 10 Light Obscuration Smoke Detector …………………………………………………………. 10 Light Scattering Smoke Detector ……………………………………………………………. 10 DETECTOR DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS …………………………………………………………… 11 IN SELECTING DETECTORS ……………………………………………………………. 11 WHERE OTHER TYPES OF DETECTORS MAY BE USED ……………………………. 11 DETECTORS HAVE LIMITATIONS ……………………………………………………………………… 12 IV TYPICAL SYSTEM LAYOUT ……………………………………………………………………………. 13 SUPERVISION …………………………………………………………………………………………. 13 B CIRCUITS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 13 A CIRCUITS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 14 CIRCUITS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 14 ZONING GUIDELINES …………………………………………………………………………………… 14 CONTROL FUNCTIONS …………………………………………………………………………………. 15 DETECTOR INSTALLATION ………………………………………………………………………………. 15 Installation Guidelines …………………………………………………………………………………… 15 Wiring Techniques ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 15 Systems ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 18 Manuals Online! – OF CONTENTS DO AND DON ………………………………………………………………………………… 18 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 18 NOT…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 19 AND SYSTEM CHECKOUT ……………………………………………………………………………….. 19 V PROPER DETECTOR PLACEMENT AND SPACING AND PROBLEM SITES …………………………………………………………………………………. 20 To Place Detectors ……………

Guide For Use SENSOR Manuals Online! – FOR PROPER USE OF DETECTORS IN DUCT APPLICATIONS EDITION PURPOSE Glossary of Terms Introduction Characteristics of Smoke in HVAC Systems Duct Smoke Detection Equipment Typical Air Handling Systems How Duct Detection Systems are Used to Smoke Procedure for Duct Detector Application Installation Maintenance and Service of Detectors for Use Ducts 3 6 9 Manuals Online! – purpose of this guide is to provide much needed information concern- the proper use of smoke detectors in duct applications. Duct mounted smoke are designed to provide a specific type of protection that cannot be by any other type of system. However, there has been a tendency to these devices in the past attempting to use them as a substitute for early warning smoke detection system. This fact, coupled with new methods of smoke in ducts, has prompted the writing of this industry guide. Protection Engineers, Mechanical and Electrical Engineers, Fire Alarm designers and installers should find the contents both educational and information is intended as a technical guide, as distinct from manda- requirements. Manuals Online! – 1 OF TERMS Air Sampling Detector: extremely sensitive smoke detection device that sample, test and evaluate the amount of particle within an air sample. Area Smoke Detector: device that will detect visible or invisible particles of Also called a spot type detector. Coil: cooling or heating element made of pipe or tubing. Coil, direct expansion: using the direct refrigeration method. CFM: volume of flow cubic feet per minute. Damper: valve or plate regulating the flow of air or other fluid. Damper, multiple louver: A damper having a number of adjustable blades, used Duct: Duct Smoke Detector: vary the volume of air passing through a confined by varying the cross sectional area. passageway made of sheet metal or other suitable not necessarily leak-tight, used for conveying or other gas at low pressures. device located within the duct, protruding into the or located outside the duct that detects visible or particles of combustion flowing within the duct. of the device may allow operation of certain functions. Exhaust Tube: a round tube that provides a path for sampled to return from the detection device to the duct. Fan: air moving device comprising a wheel or blade and housing or orifice plate. Humidifier: device to add moisture to the air. Inch of Water: unit of pressure equal to the pressure exerted by a of water at a temperature of 4.0 (39.2 Manuals Online! – Ionization Detector: smoke detector using the principle of ion flow within a to detect visible and invisible particles of com- (within a size range normally encountered as a of fire). Light Beam Detector: smoke detection device that operates on the smoke principle. Photoelectric Detector: smoke detector using the principle of optical detection of particles of combustion. Pitot Tube: device used to measure the total pressure of a fluid It is essentially a tube attached to a manometer at end and pointed upstream at the other. Pressure: normal force exerted by a homogenous liquid or gas unit of area on the wall of a container. Pressure Differential: pressure difference (usually specified in inches of water) two points in a duct. Return Exhaust: duct which is used to return the air to the HVAC center for conditioning. Sampling Tube: a round tube with holes that collects air from the and brings it to the detection device. Smoke Detectors: device used to automatically sense the presence of of combustion. Stratification: phenomenon where smoke or other gases travel in at different levels within the duct, rather than being distributed throughout the duct. Supply Duct: duct which distribute

Guide For Use SENSOR Manuals Online! – OF CONTENTS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 1 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2 OF OPERATION …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 4 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5 Detection Feature ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 5 Application …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 5 SMOKE DETECTORS VS. SPOT-TYPE SMOKE DETECTORS ………………………………………… 6 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6 Height …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 6 Air Velocity ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 7 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 7 Environments ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 8 REQUIREMENTS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 9 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9 and Spacing ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 9 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 13 Manuals Online! – purpose of this guide is to provide information on the proper utilization of beam smoke detectors in and property protection applications. This guide briefly summarizes the principles of of projected beam smoke detectors, their design requirements, and practical applications for use as a component of an automatic fire alarm system. smoke detectors can be important components of a well designed automatic fire alarm system. of their unique capabilities, beam smoke detectors can overcome many of the problems and of spot type smoke detectors in some applications. This guide was developed to help the fire designer gain an understanding of the beam smoke detector capabilities and limitations, and they differ from spot-type smoke detectors. equipment from different manufacturers has varying specifications and listings, the information in guide is general in nature and should not be used as a substitute for the manufacturer or code requirements. Manuals Online! – device which gives a visible or audible indication of the condition or status, such as normal, trouble, alarm, of a smoke detector or system. GAIN CONTROL (AGC) ability of a beam smoke detector to compensate for light signal degradation due to dust or dirt. of compensation is limited to insure that the detector is still sensitive to slow, smoldering fires. SMOKE DETECTOR (PROJECTED BEAM SMOKE DETECTOR) device which senses smoke or smoke and heat by projecting a light beam from a transmitter across protected area to a receiver that monitors the light signal. Smoke and/or heat entering the beam will decrease the light signal causing an alarm. RANGE distance between the transmitter and receiver. Where mirrors are used to direct the beam, the total range includes the distance between the mirrors and the transmitter and receiver. COVERAGE area in which a smoke detector or heat detector is considered to effectively sense smoke and/or This area is limited by applicable listings and codes. inclusion of a device in a list published by a recognized testing o

Update I Compliance Reference Guide Compliance Reference Guide Compliance Reference Guide Compliance Reference Guide Compliance Reference Guide Compliance Reference Guide Compliance Reference Guide Compliance Reference Guide Compliance Reference Guide Compliance Reference Guide Compliance Reference Guide Compliance Reference Guide Compliance Reference Guide Compliance Reference Guide Compliance Reference Guide Compliance Reference Guide Compliance Reference Guide Compliance Reference Guide Compliance Reference Guide Compliance Reference Guide Compliance Reference Guide Manuals Online! – Compliance Reference Guide Why We Need A Compliance Guide Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requires the of visual signaling devices – strobe lights – in public accommodation. The difference between laws, and standards have made compliance challenging best and overwhelming at worst. are underway to coordinate the ADA, NFPA 72, Standard 1971, ANSI Standard 117.1 and various and local codes. As a major manufacturer of fire devices, System Sensor is helping to resolve the issues, in particular those of light dispersion, flash rate, mounting and placement. We are in the effort by other National Electrical Association members, Laboratories (UL) staffers and representa- of the hearing impaired and epilepsy communities: National Association of the Deaf (NAD), the Self Help Hard of Hearing People (SHHH) and the Epilepsy of America (EFA). the interim, we have prepared this Strobe Compliance Guide to help promote understanding and of the issues that affect specifying engineers, and the enforcement authorities. We hope to the probability of proper installation and reduce possibility of misapplication of strobe lights in the marketplace. For A Guide …………………………………………………….1 Over Compliance …………………………………….2 Signaling Appliance Requirements …………………2 Toward Consensus…………………………………..3 Steps To Compliance……………………………………………..3 To Consider………………………………………………….4 Requirements To Comply………………………….4 Sensor Solution …………………………………………….4 To Locate Strobes…………………………………………..5 Many Strobes To Use ………………………………………..6 Light Output by Room/Corridor Size ………….6 Facilitation……………………………………………..7 Intensity …………………………………………………….7 1638 and ADA Compliance …………………………………8 Supplies ………………………………………………………..8 and Strobe Flash Rates…………………………………8 Mode vs. Mode Is ADA? ……………………………………………………….10 Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) ……………………11 and Enforcement of ADA …………………………12 To ADA Coverage ………………………………….12 Distribution…………………………………………………..13 of Terms…………………………………………………..13 Manuals Online! – of Regulation ……………………………………………..14 You Know… Standard 1971 is the performance standard for used in Public Mode? Signaling Requirements DISTRIBUTION 2 0 Compliance Is So Complicated you can see from the table below, the strobe specifi- of the ADA differ from those of UL Standard NFPA 72 and ANSI Standard 117.1 in that requires: No specific light distribution pattern A single minimum intensity of 75 candela (cd) all areas A minimum flash rate of 1 flash per second (1 Hz) Wall mounting only S

A P P L I C A T I O N S G U I D E Detection Detection Smoke Detection …………………………………………………………………….3 Best Practices ……………………………………………………………………………21 and Standards ……………………………………………………………………………4 on Hot Aisle/ Cold Aisle Configurations ………………………………………….22 ………………………………………………………………………………………………4 and Interface with other Systems ……………………………………….26 States Definitions and Requirements ……………………………………………..4 Issues / Application Troubleshooting ………………………………………26 of SFD systems according to NFPA 72 ……………………………….4 ……………………………………………………………………………28 of EWFD systems according to NFPA 76 ……………………………4 Overview……………………………………………………………………………..28 of VEWFD systems according to NFPA 76 ………………………….5 of Aspirating Smoke Detection ………………………………………………….29 EN 54-20 Requirements …………………………………………………………..5 Best Practices ……………………………………………………………………………30 of Aspirating Smoke Detection (Airflow Dynamics) ……………..7 Issues / Application Troubleshooting ………………………………………36 Pipe Network ……………………………………………………………………………7 and Return Air Monitoring …………………………………………………………..38 Smoke Detector ………………………………………………………………………8 ……………………………………………………………………………………………38 Exhaust Principles ……………………………………………………………………………9 of ASD ……………………………………………………………………………………..38 Sampling Methods …………………………………………………………………………..9 Design Practices …………………………………………………………………………..38 for ASD Systems Based on Their Operating Principles ………9 Issues …………………………………………………………………………………….41 Time ………………………………………………………………………………………..9 Rooms ……………………………………………………………………………………….42 for ASD Systems Based on Their Operating Principles ………………10 Overview……………………………………………………………………………..42 Smoke Detection Benefits for Applications ………………………………………………………………………………11 Commissioning and Maintenance ……………………………………12 ……………………………………………………………………………………………..12 and Sampling Holes ……………………………………………………………..12 Materials and Pipe Hangers ………………………………………………….13 Sampling Pipe Network ……………………………………………………………14 ……………………………………………………………………………………..15 and Maintenance ……………………………………………………………………….16 Guide ………………………………………………………………………..18 Centers / Equipment Installations ……………………………………………………..20 Overview……………………………………………………………………………..20 of Aspirating Smoke Detection …………

Aspirating Detection R O D U C T S and Detectors Sensitivity. Communications. Immunity. Fire Alarm Aspiration Sensing Technology from System Sensor the leader in smoke detection technology is an ultra sensitive, highly aspirating smoke detector which provides Very Early Warning type detection in diverse applications ranging from mission critical to harsh aspirating smoke detectors use a pipe network and a fan to draw air a protected space in to the detection chamber. This pipe network allows for detection in hard-to-reach or dif cult-to-access areas, including areas with extremes, and allows for ease of testing and maintenance. FAAST detectors provide simple access to communications. Each FAAST is equipped with an on board Ethernet port which enables access remote con guration and monitoring, as well as the option to send email cations to up to 6 recipients. All models also come with ready-to-use eliminating the need for additional hardware. FAAST is available in models and intelligent models for a variety of major re alarm panels. XT Aspirating Smoke Detector Networking Connectivity FAAST series of aspirating detectors are equipped an onboard Ethernet port for connectivity. This interface a number of remote possibilities, including ability to receive alarm and fault cations via email. The detector been designed to operate with network technologies, Modbus. more information on how FAAST connect to your network, visit Technology Sensitivity highly specialized chamber uses Dual Vision technology to extremely low concentrations of smoke while maintaining a high of immunity to non-smoke particulate enabling Very Early Warning smoke detection in harsh and dif cult environments. chamber, which utilizes a blue LED and an infrared laser to analyze air sample, has a con gurable range of 0.00029% – 6.25%/ft – 20.5%/m) obscuration and has been speci cally designed to high sensitivity and stability. This sensitivity range can meet and the requirements of Very Early Warning smoke detection, making highly customizable to meet site-speci c requirements. provides multiple levels of alarm, allowing for the implementation of response plans and ample time to address a smoke event before escalates into an actual re and causes damage and downtime. Communications provides easy access to its wealth of data in several ways, many of standard on all models: All FAAST models come equipped with an onboard Ethernet This connection allows the FAAST device to be added to an LAN or WAN, and allows the device to be viewed remotely via a Browser or viewed and con gured remotely via PipeIQ FAAST con guration, and monitoring software. Once connected to a LAN, integrated e-mail client can send event-triggered messages to as as 6 different e-mail addresses. – For a quick plug-and-play connectivity (uploading or downloading gurations, monitoring, etc) FAAST XS and XT have been equipped with USB interface. This provides an easy in-situ connection whenever required. All FAAST conventional and intelligent models come equipped a Modbus interface which can be used to connect FAAST to building systems. This Modbus interface does not require any hardware or software to connect. FAAST XM detectors utilize TCP via the Ethernet port. FAAST XT detectors offer Modbus via the connection as well as a serial interface. The FAAST Modbus User which includes all of the information a user needs to connect FAAST a Modbus system, is available at systemsensor.com/faast. FACP Connectivity Conventional FAAST can be to a Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) using the onboard relays monitor modules, and can also be monitored using the Ethernet and options. connection to the SLC can connect directly to the signaling line (SLC) of many major Fire Alarm Control using the same t

_…–..~- – – . – – – -.. -“. – -. ……- …. Fire Alarm Notification for High Risk Groups Project effectiveness alarms (auditory, visual and tactile) the alcohol impaired by: Bruck Thomas Ball University, Australia THE PROTECTION FOUNDATION r FIRE PROTECTION FOUNDATION BATTERYMARCH PARK MASSACHUSETTS, u.S.A. 02169 Foundatlon~NFPA.org www. nfpa.org/Foundation The Fire Protection Research Foundation 2007 April of 2006 , the Foundation was awarded a Fire Prevention and Grant by the US Fire Administration to study the effectiveness alarms for emergency notification of high risk groups. The study was to optimize the performance requirements for alarm and systems to meet the needs of these groups. Elements of study included: a risk assessment to estimate the potential impact lives saved of changes in notification effectiveness of smoke for these groups; quantifying the human behavior aspects of problem; developing benchmark performance criteria for alarm signaling systems; reviewing current and emerging technologies address the performance criteria; and assessing the information in the above tasks to develop recommendations on technology for each target group and the overall impact the general population. This report is one in a series of four that on the on the results of the study. Research Foundation expresses gratitude to the report authors Bruck, Ian Thomas and Michelle Ball of Victoria University, the Project Technical Panelists listed on the following page; to the United States Fire Administration , the project sponsor. content, opinions and conclusions contained in this report are those of the authors. Fire Alarm Notification for High Risk Groups Project Panel Coniglio , Illinois Department on Aging DiGiovanni , Clark County (NV) Fire Department Elvove , General Services Administration Fahy, NFPA Fraser, SimplexGrinnell Gifford , Invensys Controls/Firex Laroche, University of Ottawa Lee , U. S. Consumer Product Safety Commission Mulvany Proulx, National Research Council of Canada Reiswig, SimplexGrinnell Richardson , NFPA Schifiliti , RP. Schifiliti Associates, Inc. Woycheese , Worcester Polytechnic Institute Sponsor States Fire Administration No. EMW-2005-FP-O1258 effectiveness of alarms (auditory, visual and tactile) the alcohol impaired Bruck1, I. Thomas2 and M. Ball2 of Psychology for Environmental Safety and Risk Engineering (CESARE) University, Australia for the Fire Protection Research Foundation a 2006-2007 US Fire Administration Grant 2007 and alcohol impairment of Contents of Tables …………………………………………………………………………………………………….3 of Figures……………………………………………………………………………………………………4 ……………………………………………………………………………………………5 Executive summary ……………………………………………………………………………………..6 Review of the Literature………………………………………………………………………………..9 Alcohol and fire fatality……………………………………………………………………………….9 Alcohol, auditory alarms and sleep …………………………………………………………….12 Non-auditory emergency signals and sleep …………………………………………………16 Aims, Research Questions and Design Issues………………………………………………20 Method …………………………………………………………………………………………………….23 Participants …………………………………………………………………………………………….23 Apparatus……………………………………………………………………………………………….24 Procedure ….

firealarmresources.com effectiveness of alarms (auditory, visual and tactile) adults who are hard of hearing Bruck1 and I. Thomas2 of Psychology University, Australia for Environmental Safety and Risk Engineering (CESARE) for the Fire Protection Research Foundation the 2006-2007 US Fire Administration Grant 2007 and adults who are hard of hearing of Contents of Tables …………………………………………………………………………………………………….4 of Figures……………………………………………………………………………………………………5 ……………………………………………………………………………………………6 Executive summary ……………………………………………………………………………………..7 Review of the Literature………………………………………………………………………………13 Fire fatality, smoke alarms, and sleep…………………………………………………………13 Prevalence and age distribution of the hard of hearing………………………………….14 Auditory emergency signals, sleep and the hard of hearing……………………………17 Non-auditory emergency signals and sleep …………………………………………………18 Aims, Research Questions and Design Issues………………………………………………23 Method …………………………………………………………………………………………………….27 Participants …………………………………………………………………………………………….27 Apparatus……………………………………………………………………………………………….29 Procedure ………………………………………………………………………………………………33 Data analysis ………………………………………………………………………………………….36 Results …………………………………………………………………………………………………….40 Hearing thresholds to auditory signals ………………………………………………………..40 Waking Scores………………………………………………………………………………………..41 Comparison of AWAKE and ASLEEP thresholds …………………………………………45 Signal Onset and Offset……………………………………………………………………………46 Sex differences ……………………………………………………………………………………….47 Age differences ……………………………………………………………………………………….47 Behavioural Response Time ……………………………………………………………………..49 Signal combinations…………………………………………………………………………………50 Sleep stage data: …………………………………………………………………………………….51 Alerting Devices Questionnaire………………………………………………………………..52 Discussion ………………………………………………………………………………………………..56 Responsiveness to different signals……………………………………………………………56 Signal onset versus signal onset………………………………………………………………..62 Sex and age differences …………………………………………………………………………..62 Behavioural Response Time ……………………………………………………………………..63 Signal combinations…………………………………………………………………………………63 Comparisons to field settings …………………………………………………………………….64 and adults who are hard of hearing Alerting Devices Questionnaire………………………………………………………………….65 Conclusions and Recommendations…………………………………………………………..66 References ……………………………………………………..

A P P L I C A T I O N S G U I D E Visible Guide Visible Guide ……………………………………………………………………………………………..2 Requirements …………………………………………………………………………..6 Is Required To Comply? ………………………………………………………………….3 Visible Appliances for ECS/MNS Applications ………………………………6 Is The ADAAG? ………………………………………………………………………………3 Drop Calculations ………………………………………………………………………..7 is the Coverage and Enforcement of the ADA? ………………………………..3 Supply Considerations ………………………………………………………………….8 Is Mode vs. Mode Operation? ………………………………3 is Meant by Polar Light Distribution? ………………………………………………..8 Should Strobes Be Located? …………………………………………………………4 Material …………………………………………………………………………………10 Many Strobes Should Be Used? ………………………………………………………5 About Photosensitive Epilepsy and Strobe Flash Rates? …………………..5 The Need for an Audible/Visible Compliance Reference Guide installation and performance requirements for audible/visible appliances in general are addressed in three documents: 1. ADAAG, with Act Accessibility Guidelines the Federal Civil Rights Law prohibiting discrimination on the basis of disability, 2. ANSI 117.1 Usable Buildings and Facilities a standard on accessibility designed to be adopted as part of a building code, and 3. NFPA 72, the National Fire Code and Signaling Code 2010 or 2013 edition, an installation standard for fire alarm systems normally not adopted directly into law, but refer- in a building code as the standard to be followed. the past audible/visible requirements of NFPA 72 differed from the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) and other acces- standards such as ANSI 117.1 2003 Accessibility and Usable Buildings and Facilities. Section 702.1 of ANSI 117.1-2009 reads and visual alarms and notification appliances shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 72 listed in Section 105.2.2, be powered by a com- light and power source, be permanently connected to the wiring of the premises electric system, and be permanently installed. Therefore, the are consistent in regards to the type, visual intensity, and amount of visual alarm notification appliances, i.e. strobes, to use within a given as well as the mounting and placement of such appliances. On Friday, July 23, 2010, Attorney General Eric Holder signed final regulations revis- the Department ADA regulations, including its ADA Standards for Accessible Design. As such, the 2010 edition of the ADA Standards have been with the latest editions of NFPA 72. Sensor has prepared this Reference Guide in an effort to help promote understanding and awareness of the issues that affect specifying engi- installers, and the enforcement authorities. We hope to increase the probability of proper installation and reduce the possibility of misapplication audible/visible appliances in the commercial market place. 1 Is Required To Comply? entails adhering to the adopted model building code NFPA installation, and UL 1971, UL 1638, UL 464 product performance stan- It is always prudent to consult with your Authority Having Jurisdiction and/or local fire marshal to ensure that you are meeting all applica- codes and standards. The diagram below illustrates the five steps to NFPA 72 Chapter 18 ANSI 117.1 Model Building Code State Local Code Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) Installation Standard ADA Exclusions to ADA Coverage With Federal Law UL 1971 (Public Mode) UL 163

Metal Weatherproof and Back Box Compatibility Chart Weatherproof Back Box Models wall-mount P2RK-P, P2RK-R, SRK, SRK-P, SRK-R, P2RHK, P4RK, P4RHK, SRHK, HRK, P2RHK-R, P2RK-R, HRK-R, P4RHK-R, P4RK-R, SRHK-R wall-mount P2WHK, P2WHK-P, P2WK-P, SWK, SWK-P, P2WHK-R, P2WK-R, SWHK-R ceiling-mount SCRK ceiling-mount SCWK wall-mount SPRK wall-mount SPWK, SPSWK-R, SPSWK-P, SPSWK ceiling-mount SPSCWK,SPCWK-R, SPSCWK, SPSCWK-R, SPSCWHK, SPSCWHK-R Back Box Models wall-mount SR, HR, CHSR, CHR, P2RH, P4R, P4RH, SRH, P2R-P, P4R-P, SR-P, SRH-P, SR-SP, SRH-SP, P2R-SP wall-mount SW, HW, CHSW, CHW, P2WH, P4W, P4WH, SWH, P2W-P, P2WH-P, P4W-P, SW-ALERT, SWH-ALERT, SW-CLR-ALERT, SW-P, SWH-P wall-mount SPSR, SPRV, SPSRV, SPSRV-P, SPSR-P, SPSRH, SPSRH-P ceiling-mount SPSW, SPWV, SPSWH, SPSW-P, SPSW-CLR-ALERT, SPSW-ALERT, SPSWH, SPSWH-P, SPSWV, SPSWV-P ceiling-mount SCR, PC2RH, PC4R, PC4RH, SPCR, SPCRV, SPSCR, SPSCRH, SPSCRV, SPSCRVH, PC2RH-P, SCRH, PC2R-P ceiling-mount SCW, PC4W, SCWH, PC2W-SP, PC2W-P, PC2WH-P, SCW-P, SCWH, SPCW, SPSCW, SPSCWH, SPSCWV, SPSCWVH, SPSCW-P, SPSCWHK-P, SPSCWV-P, SPSCWVH-P, SPSCW-CLR-ALERT, SCW-CLR-ALERT w w. s y s t e m s e n s o r. c o m / a v 05/13

2018 System Sensor L-Series 4-Wire Indoor Notification Appliances Sensor is excited to announce the next phase of our product line with the availability of 4-wire indoor horn This new L-Series offering includes second generation like a new rigid mounting plate and metal screw horn strobe appliances enable independently controlled and strobes, if supported by the fire alarm control panel, designs with separate horn and strobe circuits. One common is providing temporal 3 with a synchronized strobe a fire alarm and temporal 4 for a CO alarm. Another is providing different coding options for pre- and final of a releasing agent. new 4-wire devices provide a consistent look with the previously released L-Series product line offering the following enhancements over the previous SpectrAlert Advance line: 38% lower current draw for ceiling appliances and 35% less for wall appliances which enables appliances per NAC to save money on power supplies Colored lenses and marking bezels for easy customization of emergency communication/mass Backwards compatibility with existing System Sensor SpectrAlert and SpectrAlert Advance appliances for retrofit applications part numbers for the L-Series 4-wire indoor line of notification appliances include: L-SERIES MODEL NO. MODEL NO. P4RH PC4RH Strobe, Wall, 4-Wire, Red Strobe, Wall, 4-Wire, White Strobe, Ceiling, 4-Wire, Red Strobe, Ceiling, 4-Wire, White visit systemsensor.com/AV for additional information. We appreciate your continued support of Sensor products. you, Holba Manager

2018 System Sensor L-Series 4-Wire Indoor Notification Appliances Sensor is excited to announce the next phase of our product line with the availability of 4-wire indoor horn This new L-Series offering includes second generation like a new rigid mounting plate and metal screw new 4-wire devices provide a consistent look with the released L-Series product line while offering the enhancements over the previous SpectrAlert line: 38% lower current draw for ceiling appliances and 35% less for wall appliances which enables appliances per NAC to save money on power supplies Colored lenses and marking bezels for easy customization of emergency communication/mass Backwards compatibility with existing System Sensor SpectrAlert and SpectrAlert Advance appliances for retrofit applications part numbers for the L-Series 4-wire indoor line of notification appliances include: L-SERIES MODEL NO. MODEL NO. P4RH PC4RH Strobe, Wall, 4-Wire, Red Strobe, Wall, 4-Wire, White Strobe, Ceiling, 4-Wire, Red Strobe, Ceiling, 4-Wire, White visit systemsensor.com/AV for additional information. We appreciate your continued support of Sensor products. you, Holba Manager

firealarmresources.com to install, yet enough to any requirement. emergency communications, mass notification, general signaling, and evacuation systems all provide opportunities for growth. But to grow your in this market, you need an audible visible (AV) line simple enough to quickly in large installations, yet powerful enough to meet any application Sensor L-Series does just that. Sensor new AV offering provides plug-in designs, updated aesthetics, consistency, and field-adjustable settings across the entire line. L-Series enables you to meet the widest range of notification requirements specifications in the industry. System Sensor L-Series, you can take on any project with confidence, you can meet requirements while maximizing the efficiencies of using a product line. Whether for massive emergency communications projects, notification systems, or anything in between, L-Series products, tools, and simplify the entire user experience from planning and selection training, installation and maintenance saving you time and money while the lives of your customers. inside why System Sensor L-Series is a market leader in AV notification. and Sounder Strobes and Speaker Strobes Horns, and Strobes Communications offer a complete line that meets your need. attractive devices are designed with the architect in mind. you specify System Sensor L-Series, you benefit from the simplicity comes with the widest and most consistent line of AV notification in the industry. L-Series includes a full range of indoor, wall, ceiling products for a wide variety of notification projects. Common across the line include field-selectable candela settings, plug- designs, rotary code switches, universal mounting plates, and small horns, strobes and horn strobes. L-Series devices have the same family look and can be interchanged within a building. Unique accessories, like the bezel kits, make customization easy. by features that increase versatility. For example, plain models be customized with field-applied bezels and color lens strobe for a variety of applications. Sensor also provides tools that simplify the specification code-compliant systems. You can learn more about these tools at breadth and consistency of the L-Series line are further Devices Any Application Market Sensor L-Series provides versatility that specifiers need meet requirements for a range notification applications from to mass notification to general using a single, uniform of products. Our field-applied bezels (AGENT, ALERT, FIRE, FUEGO, FOGO, customize any plain AV device unique applications. Used in with our color lenses red, blue, green), they can any strobe into an ECS, general weather warning, or agent notification appliance with light derating. That means the line makes it easy for you expand your business into markets fire. meet requirements cost-effective design. high-quality notification system design serves as the foundation for any helping to guide installation and ensure relevant codes are met. Sensor products and tools help make the design process cost- and efficient, so you can win bids and ultimately save time and on the entire project. System Sensor L-Series products and accessories provide the and versatility for you to meet virtually any requirement for indoor, or ceiling applications with a single, cohesive family of products. addition, a code-compliant AV system has many upfront or requirements that can be complicated and time- such as calculating voltage drop on a circuit or obtaining that needs to be included in a job file. System Sensor several online tools and software that can greatly simplify these Design Tools and Resources Sensor L-Series isn just a of notification appliances, it also a variety of free design tools learning resources to help you design notification systems me

firealarmresources.com to install. ease with an aesthetic design. only AV products with plug-in designs, aesthetic and functional and field-adjustable settings across the entire line, SpectrAlert enables you to meet the widest range of notification requirements specifications in the industry. SpectrAlert Advance, you can take on any project with confidence, you can meet requirements while maximizing the efficiencies of using single product line. Whether for emergency communications projects, small systems, or anything in between, SpectrAlert Advance products, and accessories simplify the entire user experience from planning and to training, installation and maintenance saving you time and money protecting the lives of your customers. Options. Reliable and Best Looking Installation Options. Advance Outdoor products can be mounted directly on wall using the side flanges provided, which maintains the seal integrity the product. In addition, the back boxes can be mounted on 2×4 and 4×4 junction boxes. Your Device Where You Need It. just outdoor! Our products are best for specialty applications such as garages, pool rooms, roof tops, and more! Anywhere where devices are to the elements, humidity, or extreme temperatures. and NEMA Locations Outdoor Sports Stadiums Water Treatment Plants Outdoor Sprinkler Riser Room Inside Processing Plant Indoor w/ Sprinkler System Apartment Complexes Breezeways Dept. of Defense Specs Service Stations Water Parks on a recent System Sensor survey Advance Strobes Advance strobes which are available in ceiling-mount or wall-mount varieties to meet a wide variety of applications ideal for warning hearing-impaired individuals during an emergency event. For convenient installation, the universal mounting with its snap-in feature holds the product in place for the screw attachment. Strobes feature 11 field-selectable candela and are compatible with 12- or 24-volt systems for a high level of customization. Please note that model numbers with a suffix are outdoor-rated products listed to UL 1638 and rated from -40 F to 151 F (-40 C to 66 C), with a NEMA 4X rating or rating. See page 7 for our line of plain strobes for ECS/MNS applications. Strobes Model No. Model No. lens lens Strobes Model No. Model No. lens lens, Device only lens lens, Device only Standard Candela settings: 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, and 115 High Candela settings: 135, 150, 177, and 185 -R represents replacement device only, ships minus plastic weatherproof back box. -R outdoor replacement models are meant for use with WTP series of weatherproof flush-mount plates or SA-WBB outdoor weatherproof back boxes. Features 4X or 3R Rating Broadest Line of Outdoor Notification Appliances Sensor offers the broadest line of outdoor notification appliances on the market with a true NEMA enclosure rating and a 3R rating when using the weatherproof plates. Designed to be watertight and operate in a wide temperature range, SpectrAlert Advance outdoor audible visible (AV) appliances are ideal solution for fire, general signaling, mass notification, or emergency communication system (ECS) that require exterior notification or notification in areas where ambient conditions may exceed the tolerances of typical indoor AV devices. learn more about our outdoor notification appliance line, visit us at: systemsensor.com/av-outdoor Advance Horns Advance horns increase application flexibility for indoor or outdoor installations. Intended for full building notification well as on the property ground, they produce a loud sound to notify occupants to evacuate the buildings. Installers can easily devices to suit a wide range of application requirements by using field-

firealarmresources.com to install, yet enough to any requirement. emergency communications, mass notification, general signaling, and evacuation systems all provide opportunities for growth. But to grow your in this market, you need an audible visible (AV) line simple enough to quickly in large installations, yet powerful enough to meet any application SpectrAlert Advance, you can take on any project with confidence, Advance does just that. only AV products with plug-in designs, aesthetic and functional and field-adjustable settings across the entire line, SpectrAlert enables you to meet the widest range of notification requirements and in the industry. you can meet requirements while maximizing the efficiencies of a single product line. Whether for massive emergency communications small notification systems, or anything in between, SpectrAlert Advance tools, and accessories simplify the entire user experience from and selection to training, installation and maintenance saving you and money while protecting the lives of your customers. inside why SpectrAlert Advance is a market leader in AV notification. Sound and Speaker Strobes Horns, and Strobes Communications offer a complete line that meets your need. attractive devices are designed with the architect in mind. you specify SpectrAlert Advance, you benefit from the simplicity comes with the widest and most consistent line of AV notification in the industry. SpectrAlert Advance includes a full range of outdoor, wall, and ceiling products for a wide variety of notification Common features across the line include field-selectable candela plug-in designs, rotary code switches, universal mounting plates, the same current draw on wall- and ceiling-mount devices. SpectrAlert Advance devices have the same family look and can interchanged seamlessly within a building. Unique accessories, like weatherproof mounting plate, make outdoor devices blend with any fa enhanced by features that increase versatility. For example, plain can be customized with field-applied decals and color lens strobe for a variety of applications. Sensor also provides tools that simplify the specification code-compliant systems. You can learn more about these tools at breadth and consistency of the SpectrAlert Advance line are Devices Any Application Market Advance provides the that specifiers need to requirements for a range of applications from to mass notification to general using a single, uniform of products. Our field-applied decals (AGENT, ALERT, FIRE) customize plain AV device for unique Used in conjunction our color lenses (amber, red, green), they can turn any strobe an ECS, general signaling, warning, or agent release appliance with no light That means the SpectrAlert line makes it easy for you to your business into markets fire. meet requirements cost-effective design. SpectrAlert Advance products and accessories provide the high-quality notification system design serves as the foundation for any helping to guide installation and ensure relevant codes are met. Advance products and tools help make the design process and efficient, so you can win bids and ultimately save time money on the entire project. and versatility for you to meet virtually any requirement for indoor, wall, or ceiling applications with a single, cohesive family of addition, a code-compliant AV system has many upfront or requirements that can be complicated and time- such as calculating voltage drop on a circuit or obtaining that needs to be included in a job file. System Sensor several online tools and software that can greatly simplify these Design Tools and Resources Advance isn just a line notification appliances, it also a variety of free design tools

Voltage Drop Guide Version 2 Drop Calculator Guide Version 2 OF CONTENTS DOWNLOAD AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 USING THE CALCULATOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 New Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Open a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Check for Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 DESIGN PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Create a Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Create a Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Add Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Add devices as step 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Add devices using favorites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Add devices in the device listing Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 FAVORITES MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 SAVING AND E-MAILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 IMPORTING/EXPORTING PANELS OR CIRCUITS. . . . . . . . . . . 26 Import. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Importing Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Importing Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Export Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Export Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Print Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Print Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Print All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 ISSUES ENCOUNTERED IN VDC AND RESOLUTION . . . . . . . 36 Drop Calculator Guide Version 2 DOWNLOAD AND INSTALLATION Downloading download the Voltage Drop Calculator, point your Internet to http://systemsensor.com/volt. After filling out required form you will be taken to the install page. Click Now to open the Application Installer dialogue. the Application Install dialogue box, you can choose to: to install now. Click to download and the file for later installation. Click to abort the process. application will begin to download after is An action bar will track your progress through the You can click at any time to abort the process. will be prompted to set your installation preferences. the default values or change them to fit your Click Drop Calculator Guide Version 2 Installation the Application Install dialogue will ask you to verify you want to install the Voltage Drop Calculator on your Click to continue or to abort. will then be prompted to accept or decline the Voltage Calculator usage terms. Click Agree to accept the and continue the installation. Now, the Voltage Drop will be installed on your computer. action bar will indicate progress. Once the installation is the Voltage Drop Calculator main page will open. Drop Calculator Guide Version 2 USING THE CALCULATOR the Voltage Drop Calculator main page, you can: Click Project at the bo

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Detector Base use with the following smoke detectors: US: CANADA: EUROPE: 2151 2151A 2151E 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Diameter: Height: Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings – includes base and detector Voltage: Ripple Voltage: Capacitance: Ratings: Ratings: Voltage: Time: Time: inches (157 mm) inches (24 mm) lb. (137 g) square box with or without plaster ring. Min. depth inches octagon box. Min. depth inches to 49 (32 to 120 to 93% Relative Humidity, Noncondensing VDC Volts peak-to-peak Maximum VDC Minimum VDC Maximum Maximum VDC Minimum at 10 mA VDC Maximum at 100 mA (Alarm current must be limited to 100 mA (130 mA for models 1151 and 2151) by the control panel. If it is used, the RA400Z Annunciator operates within the specified detector alarm currents.) VDC Minimum Seconds Minimum Seconds Maximum 1. MOUNTING BASE TO BOX: ON INSTALLING thoroughly read the System Smoke Detectors Application Guide, which detailed information on detector spacing, placement, zoning, wiring, and applications. Copies of this manual are available at no charge from System (For installation in Canada, please refer to CAN/ULC-S524, Standard for the of Fire Alarm Systems and CEC Part 1, Sec. 32.) This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested and maintained regu- following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector used with this base should be at least once a year. DESCRIPTION Model B110LP detector base is designed for use with System Sensor models photoelectronic and 1151 ionization detector heads. This two-wire base is with screw terminals for the connection of power, ground, and an optional annunciator. detector base mounts directly to 3- inch and 4-inch octagon boxes and 4-inch boxes, with or without plaster rings. To mount the base, remove the decorative by rotating it in either direction to unhook the snaps before separating the ring the base. Use the screws supplied with the junction box to attach the base to the through the appropriate slots in the base (see Figure 1). Position the decorative around the base and rotate it in either direction until the ring snaps into place. GUIDELINES loop resistance is an important specification for control panels as well as smoke detectors and their bases. The alarm system cannot be expected to oper- correctly if system components have incompatible allowable loop resistances. before beginning installation, refer to the control panel manufacturer resistance specification to ensure that it is listed as compatible with the System base and smoke detector being installed. Sensor smoke detectors and mounting bases are marked with a compatibility as the last digit of a five-digit code stamped on the back of the product. detectors only to compatible control units as indicated in System Sensor chart. This chart consists of a current list of UL-listed control unit/ combinations and is available from System Sensor upon request. wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code and all local codes and any special requirements of the authority having jurisdic- SUPPLIED) SUPPLIED) using the proper wire size. The conductors used to connect smoke detectors to panels and accessory devices should be color-coded to reduce the likelihood wiring errors. Improper connections can prevent a system from responding prop- in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected detectors), it is recommended the wire be no smaller than AWG 18. However, the screws and clamping plate in base can accommodate wire sizes up to AWG 12. The use of twisted pair wiring the power (+ and -) loop is recommended to minimize the effects of electrical

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Detector Base use with the following smoke detectors: US : Canada: Europe: 2151 2151A 2151E 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 inches (157 mm) inches (24 mm) lb. (130 g) square box with or without plaster ring. Min. Depth inches octagon box. Min. Depth inches inch octagon box. Min. Depth inches to +49 (32 to 120 to 93% Relative Humidity Diameter: Height: Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings includes base and detector VDC Voltage: Volts peak to peak Ripple Voltage: Maximum Capacitance: VDC Minimum; 32 VDC Maximum Ratings: Maximum mA Minimum at 10.5 VDC; 62 mA Maximum at 32 VDC Ratings: used, the RA400 remote lamp operates within specified detector alarm currents.) Alarm Impedance: Alarm Impedance: Voltage: VDC Minimum Seconds Maximum Time: Time: Seconds Maximum 1. MOUNTING BASE TO BOX: ON SUPPLIED) SUPPLIED) INSTALLING read thoroughly System Sensor Applications Guide for System Smoke (SPAG91), which provides detailed information on detector spacing, zoning, wiring, and special applications. This is available online System Sensor website: www.systemsensor.com. (For installations in please refer to CAN4-S524, Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm and CEC Part 1, Sec. 32.) This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector used with this base be cleaned at least once a year. DESCRIPTION B110RLP plug-in detector base is used with System Sensor model 1151 and ionization detector heads and model 2151 and 2151A photoelectronic heads. The capability of plugging these detectors into a variety of bases makes them more versatile than equivalent direct-wired models. to the System Sensor catalog for other available plug-in detector bases. base is intended for use in 2-wire systems, with screw terminals provided power, ground, and remote annunciator connections. The base also con- a resistor to provide current limiting in the alarm state. detector base mounts directly to 3- inch and 4-inch octagon boxes, and square boxes (with or without plaster rings). To mount, remove deco- ring by turning it in either direction to unhook the snaps, then separate ring from the base. Install the base to the box using the screws supplied the junction box and the appropriate mounting slots in the base. Place ring onto base, then turn in either direction until the ring snaps in (see Figure 1). GUIDELINES wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code the local codes having jurisdiction. Proper wire gauges should be used. conductors used to connect smoke detectors to control panels and acces- devices should be color-coded to reduce the likelihood of wiring errors. connections can prevent a system from responding properly in the of a fire. SMALL-BLADED SCREWDRIVER TO PUSH LEVER IN DIRECTION OF ARROW 2. WIRING DIAGRAM FOR 2-WIRE DETECTOR SYSTEMS: For system supervision – Do not loop wire under terminals 2, 3, and 5. Break wire run to ensure system supervision of connections. FAULT TOLERANT WIRING 3A. ACTIVATING THE TAMPER-RESISTANCE FEATURE: LEVER TAB AT DOTTED LINE BY TOWARD CENTER OF BASE 3B. REMOVING DETECTOR HEAD FROM BASE: SMALL-BLADED SCREWDRIVER TO PUSH LEVER IN DIRECTION OF ARROW signal wiring (the wiring between intercon

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Detector Base use with the following smoke detectors: US: CANADA: 1151A, 2151A EUROPE: 2151E 2151 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 inches (157 mm) inches (24 mm) lb. (137 g) square box with or without plaster ring. Min. depth inches octagon box. Min. depth inches to 49 (32 to 120 to 93% Relative Humidity, Noncondensing VDC Volts peak-to-peak Maximum VDC Minimum VDC Maximum Maximum mA Minimum mA Maximum VDC Minimum Seconds Maximum optional RA400Z operates within specified detector alarm currents.) Seconds Maximum Diameter: Height: Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings – includes base and detector Voltage: Ripple Voltage: Capacitance: Ratings: Ratings: Voltage: Time: Time: Contact Ratings: or Inductive (60% Power Factor) A: C: A @ 30 VAC/DC A @ 30 VAC/DC A @ 110 VDC A @ 125 VAC Installing read thoroughly System Sensor Applications Guide System Smoke Detectors (SPAG91), which provides information on detector spacing, placement, wiring, and special applications. This manual is online at www.systemsensor.com. (For installa- in Canada, refer to CAN/ULC-S524, Standard for the of Fire Alarm Systems and CEC Part 1, Sec. 32.) This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. The detector used with this base must be and maintained regularly following NFPA 72 require- The detector used with this base should be cleaned least once a year. Description Model B112LP detector base is designed for use with Sensor model 2151 photoelectronic and 1151 ioniza- detector heads. This four-wire base is equipped with terminals for the connection of power, ground, and optional remote annunciator. detector base mounts directly to 3-1/2 inch and 4-inch boxes and 4-inch square boxes, with or without rings. To mount the base, remove the decorative by rotating it in either direction to unhook the snaps separating the ring from the base. Use the screws with the junction box to attach the base to the through the appropriate slots in the base (see Figure Position the decorative ring around the base and rotate in either direction until the ring snaps into place. Guidelines Refer to the releasing device manufacturer for connection instructions. loop resistance is an important specification for panels as well as for smoke detectors and their The alarm system cannot be expected to operate if system components have incompatible allow- loop resistances. Therefore, before beginning installa- refer to the control panel manufacturer loop resis- specification to ensure that it is listed as compatible the System Sensor base and smoke detector being wiring must be installed in compliance with the Electrical Code, all applicable local codes and any requirements of the authority having jurisdiction, the proper wire size. The conductors used to connect detectors to control panels and accessory devices be color-coded to reduce the likelihood of wiring Improper connections can prevent a system from properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected it is recommended that the wire be no smaller AWG 18. However, the screws and clamping plate in base can accommodate wire sizes up to AWG 12. The of twisted pair wiring for the power (+ and -) loop is to minimize the effects of electrical interfer- make electrical connections, strip approximately 3/8 (1 insulation from the end of each wire. Slide the wires the clamp plate and tighten the terminal screw. the base is being installed in a zoned system, check the wiring before installing the smoke det

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Detector Base use with the following smoke detectors: US – 1151, 2151, 2151T; – 1151A, 2151A, 2151TA; EUROPE – 1151E, 2151E Diameter: Height: Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings (includes base and detector) Voltage: Contact Ratings Resistive Load: Time (after 60 second reset): in (157 mm) in (24 mm) lb (274 g) square box with or without plaster ring, minimum depth 1.5 4 octagon box, minimum depth 1.5 octagon box, minimum depth 1.5 31 octagon box, minimum depth 1.5 to 49 (32 to 120 to 93% Relative Humidity Non-condensing VAC, 60 Hz A 2.0A @ 30VAC/DC; Form C 2.0A @ 30VAC/DC, 1.0A @ 125VAC used, the RA400 Remote Annunciator and RTC operates within the specified detector system voltage) seconds maximum Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 INSTALLING thoroughly read System Sensor Applications Guide for System Smoke (SPAG91), which provides detailed information on detector spacing, zoning, wiring, and special applications. This is available online System Sensor. (For installation in Canada, refer to CAN/ULC-S524, for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems and CEC Part 1, Sec. 32.) This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector used with this base be cleaned at least once a year. DESCRIPTION model B114LP detector base is designed for use with System Sensor model photoelectronic and 1151 ionization detector heads. This four-wire base is with screw terminals for the connection of power, ground, relay connec- and an optional RA400Z/RA100Z remote annunciator. It also includes a re- that limits current when the associated smoke detector is in the alarm state. detector base mounts directly to 31/2-inch and 4-inch octagon boxes and square boxes, with or without plaster rings. To mount the base, remove decorative ring by rotating it in either direction to unhook the snaps before the ring from the base. Use the screws supplied with the junction to attach the base to the box through the appropriate slots in the base. the decorative ring around the base and rotate it in either direction the ring snaps into place (see Figure 2). TERMINALS Annunciator (+) Coil (+) Used Annunciator ( ( Relay A Contacts Relay A Relay C Contacts GUIDELINES loop resistance is an important specification for control panels as as for smoke detectors and their bases. The alarm system cannot be ex- to operate correctly if system components have incompatible allowable resistances. Therefore, before beginning installation, refer to the control manufacturer loop resistance specification to ensure that it is listed as with the System Sensor base and smoke detector being installed. wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code all applicable local codes and any special requirements of the authority jurisdiction, using the proper wire size. The conductors used to con- smoke detectors to control panels and accessory devices should be color- to reduce the likelihood of wiring errors. Improper connections can a system from responding properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected detectors), it is recom- that the wire be no smaller than AWG 18. However, the screws and plate in the base can accommodate wire sizes up to AWG 12. The of twisted pair wiring for the power (+ and loop is recommended to the effects of electrical interference. 1. TERMINAL LAYOUT: GAUGE 14 TAB 2. MOUNTING BASE TO BOX: SUPPLIED)

I AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Plug-in Detector Base use with the following smoke detectors: US – 1151, 2151, 2151T; – 1151A, 2151A, 2151TA; EUROPE – 1151E, 2151E Diameter: Height: Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings (includes base and detector) Voltage: Contact Ratings Resistive Load: Form A 2.0A @ 30VAC/DC; Form C 2.0A @ 30VAC/DC, 1.0A @ 125VAC Current: Current: Time (after 60 second reset): 36.0 Seconds maximum in (15.7 cm) in (2.9cm) lb (260 g) square box without plaster ring, minimum depth 1.5 4 octagon box, minimum depth 1.5 octagon box, minimum depth 1.5 to 49 (32 to 120 to 93% Relative Humidity used, the RA400 Remote Annunciator and RTC operates within the specified detector system voltage) mA typical @ 24V AC/DC; 35 mA maximum @ 35V AC/DC mA typical @ 24V AC/DC; 94 mA maximum @ 35V AC/DC VAC/DC, 60 Hz INSTALLING read thoroughly System Sensor Applications Guide for System Smoke (SPAG91), which provides detailed information on detector spacing, zoning, wiring, and special applications. This is available online System Sensor web site: www.systemsensor.com. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector used with this base be cleaned at least once a year. DESCRIPTION B114LPBT detector base is designed for use with System Sensor model photoelectronic and 1151 ionization detector heads. The capability of these detectors into a variety of special bases makes them more ver- than equivalent direct-wired models. Refer to the System Sensor catalog other available plug-in bases. The B114LPBT base is intended for use in systems with terminals provided for remote annunciator and relay con- detector base mounts directly to 31/2- and 4-inch octagon boxes and square boxes. To mount the base, remove the decorative ring by rotat- it in either direction to unhook the snaps before separating the ring from base. Use the screws supplied with the junction box to attach the base to box through the appropriate mounting slots in the base. the decorative ring around the base and rotate it in either direction the ring snaps into place (see Figure 2). TERMINALS Annunciator (+) Coil (+) Used Annunciator ( ( Relay A Contacts Relay A Relay C Contacts GUIDELINES wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, applicable local codes, and any special requirements of the authority hav- jurisdiction, using the proper wire size. The conductors used to connect detectors to control panels and accessory devices should be color- to reduce the likelihood of wiring errors. Improper connections can a system from responding properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected detectors), it is recom- that the wire be no smaller than 16 gauge (1.5 square mm), and that or three-conductor wire be no smaller than 18 gauge (1.0 square mm). best performance, alarm loop conductors should be installed in separate conduit or shielded cable to protect the alarm loop from extraneous interference. detectors and alarm systems control panels have specifications for al- loop resistance. Consult the control panel manufacturer specifica- for the total loop resistance allowed for the particular model control being used before wiring the detector loops. 1. BASE TERMINALS: GAUGE 14 2. MOUNTING BASE TO BOX: SUPPLIED) TAB ON SUPPLIED)

I Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Detector Base use with the following smoke detectors: US: Canada: Europe: 2151 2151A 2151E Diameter: Height: Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings includes base and detector Voltage: Ripple Voltage: Capacitance: Ratings: Ratings: Contact Ratings: or Inductive (60% power factor) Load C:* Voltage: Time: Time: Canadian installations relay contact ratings are 2.0A @ 30 VAC/DC. @ 30 VAC/DC @ 110 VDC @ 125 VAC VDC Minimum Seconds Maximum Seconds Maximum inches (157 mm) inches (24 mm) lb. (130 g) square box with or without plaster ring. Min. Depth inches octagon box. Min. Depth inches inch-octagon box. Min. Depth inches mm box mm box mm box to +49 (32 to 120 US and Canadian Installations to 60 (14 to 140 European Installations to 93% Relative Humidity VDC Volts peak to peak Maximum VDC Minimum VDC Maximum Maximum V Minimum at 16 mA V Maximum at 100 mA current MUST be limited to 100 mA maximum by the control panel.) Installing read thoroughly System Sensor Applications Guide System Smoke Detectors, which provides detailed infor- on detector spacing, placement, zoning, wiring, special applications. Copies are available on System web site: www.systemsensor.com. (For installa- in Canada, please refer to CAN4-S524, Standard for the of Fire Alarm Systems and CEC Part 1, Sec. 32.) This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. The detector used with this base must be and maintained regularly following NFPA 72 require- The detector used with this base should be cleaned least once a year. Description model B116LP plug-in detector base is used with Sensor model 1151, 1151A, and 1151E ionization heads and model 2151, 2151A, and 2151E photo- detector heads. The capability of plugging these into a variety of special bases makes them more than equivalent direct-wired models. Refer to the Sensor catalog for other available plug-in detector B116LP base is intended for use in 2-wire systems, screw terminals provided for power and relay contact These bases MUST be current limited by the control panel in the alarm state. detector base mounts directly to 3-1/2-inch and inch octagon boxes, and 4-inch square boxes (with or plaster rings). To mount, remove decorative ring turning it in either direction to unhook the snaps, then the ring from the base. Install the base to the box the screws supplied with the junction box and the mounting slots in the base. Place decorative onto base, then turn in either direction until the ring in place (see Figure 1). Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with the Electrical Code and the local codes having juris- Proper wire gauges should be used. The conduc- used to connect smoke detectors to control panels and devices should be color-coded to prevent wiring Improper connections can prevent a system from properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between inter-connected it is recommended that the wire be no smaller 18 gauge. Wire sizes up to 12 gauge may be used with base. For best system performance, the power (+) and loop wires should be twisted pair and installed in sepa- grounded conduit to protect the loop from extraneous interference. detectors and alarm system control panels have for allowable loop resistance. Consult the panel manufacturer specifications for the total resistance allowed for the particular model control being used before wiring the detector loops. installations where normal ambient temperat

B200S/B200S-LF Bases Sensor B200S series sounder bases set a standard for performance, installation ease, aesthetics. Series Features Addressability for maximum configuration flexibility Two volume levels (75 or 85 dBA) Multiple event-driven tone outputs Supports Continuous, ANSI Temporal 3, ANSI Temporal 4, March Time tones Custom tone capability with some FACP models Ability to synchronize with other System Sensor devices UL 268 and UL 464 compliant Pre-wire mounting plate fits various junction box sizes Mechanical locking feature prevents removal of attached head silence feature Additional terminal connections on Canadian model (B200SA) 520 Hz +/ 10% square wave tone (B200S-LF) Listings B200S sounder base series is designed for new and existing unit applications. It offers maximum flexibility in installation, and operation to meet or exceed UL 268 and UL 464 sounder base in to the communication between the sensor head and the fire alarm control panel (FACP) to the same address as the detector, but as a unique device on the loop. The FACP can then use that address to command individual sounder or a group of sounders to activate. The set from the panel can be tailored to the specific event, selection of volume, tone, and group. In addition, some will enable custom tone patterns. B200S series sounder bases recognize the System Sensor protocol. This enables it to be used as a component the general evacuation signal along with other System Sensor horn strobes, and chimes when connected to a power or FACP output capable of generating the System Sensor pulses. B200S series offers several key advantages. The sounder base a separate mounting plate that installs on various junction sizes to eliminate unsightly surface-mount boxes. The mounting enables pre-wiring of all connections to speed and simplify The housing also locks with the mounting plate using two screws, for added tamper resistance. B200S-LF low frequency sounder base is designed to meet NFPA 72 sleeping space requirement to produce a fundamental of 520 Hz +/- 10% with a square wave or its equivalent. show that a lower frequency, centered around 520 Hz, is the ideal to awaken sleeping occupants, even those with mild to hearing loss. 7135-1653:0213 7300-1653:0238 to the appropriate FACP manual for more information. Specifications Diameter Height Weight Temperature Range Humidity Range Specifications: B200S Supply Voltage Supply Standby Current Current Operating Voltage Standby Current Specifications: B200S-LF Supply Voltage Supply Standby Current Current (17.46 cm) (5.08 cm) less sensor 0.50 lb. (227 gm); B200S-LF: 0.60 lb. (272 gm) to applicable sensor Operating Temperature Range using the Base/Sensor Cross Reference at systemsensor.com to 93% relative humidity (non-condensing) to 33 VDC (VFWR) maximum mA maximum at high-volume setting; 15 mA maximum at low-volume setting to 32 VDC maximum (base only, refer to applicable sensor specification) to 33 VDC (VFWR) maximum volume setting: 70 mA maximum @ 33.0 VDC mA maximum @ 24.0 VDC mA maximum @16.0 VDC volume setting: 15 mA maximum @ 33.0 VDC mA maximum @ 24.0 VDC mA maximum @ 16.0 VDC Operating Voltage Standby Current Output Volume Volume to 32 VDC maximum (base only, refer to applicable sensor specification) than 85 dBA minimum measured in a UL reverberant room at 10 ft. 24 Volts continuous tone) than 75 dBA minimum measured in a UL reverberant room at 10 ft. 24 Volts continuous tone) Ohio Avenue St. Charles, IL 60174 800-SENSOR2 Fax: 630-377-6495 specifications subject to change without notice. Visit systemsensor.com current product information, including the latest version of this data sheet.

I Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Frequency Intelligent Sounder Base model is compatible with System Sensor Models MDL, MDL3R, MDLW, MDL3W and SYNC-1 Diameter: Height (less sensor): Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Supply Electrical Ratings Supply Voltage: Current: Current: Electrical Ratings Operating Voltage: Standby Current: Output Volume: Volume: to 33 VDC (VFWR) maximum VDC volume setting: 70 mA maximum @ 33.0 VDC 90 mA maximum @ 24.0 VDC 140 mA maximum @16.0 VDC to 32 VDC maximum (base only, refer to applicable sensor specification) inch (17.46 cm) inch (5.08 cm) lb. (272 gm) to applicable sensor Operating Temperature Range using the Base/Sensor Cross Reference Chart at systemsensor.com to 93% relative humidity (non-condensing) volume setting: 15 mA maximum @ 33.0 VDC mA maximum @ 24.0 VDC mA maximum @ 16.0 VDC than 85 dBA minimum measured in a UL reverberant room at 10 feet, 24 Volts (in continuous tone) than 75 dBA minimum measured in a UL reverberant room at 10 feet, 24 Volts (in continuous tone) INSTALLING System Sensor Applications Guide for System Smoke Detectors which provides detailed information on sensor spacing, placement, wiring, and special applications. This manual is available from System NFPA 72 and NEMA guidelines should be observed. The National Fire Code, NFPA 72, requires effective January 1, 2014, that audible appli- installed in sleeping areas produce a low frequency alarm signal that be a square wave or provide equivalent awakening ability with a funda- frequency of 520 Hz +/ 10%. 200 Series sounder bases are not compatible with remote test capable series detectors. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at once a year. DESCRIPTION B200S-LF low frequency sounder base is used with System Sensor 200-Se- sensor heads or equivalent. For a list of compatible sensors, refer to the Sensor website at www.systemsensor.com. Refer to the appropriate for more information on sensors. B200S-LF low frequency sounder base generates a low frequency tone 520 Hz. Studies have shown that low frequency audible devices that op- around 520 Hz are more effective in waking individuals in sleeping areas. sounder base is capable of producing a variety of tone patterns, including distinctive three-pulse temporal pattern (ANSI Temporal 3) fire alarm sig- now required by NFPA 72 for commercial and residential applications. The offers maximum flexibility in configuration and operation to meet or the requirements of UL268 and UL464 for Continuous, Temporal 3 and time patterns. The temporal 4 pattern meets all requirements of UL268 UL2075, as well as, private mode setting of UL 464. B200S-LF can be commanded by the Fire Alarm Control Panel to adopt address of the attached sensor head, but as a unique device type on the By using the address, the fire alarm control panel can command an sounder base to activate, or a group of sounders in a suite or other configuration. The command set from the panel can be tailored to specific event, allowing selection of volume, tone, and group. The device two volume levels: 75 dBA and 85 dBA. The available tones are Contin- ANSI Temporal 3, ANSI Temporal 4, and March Time. In addition, some alarm panels will offer the ability to command a custom tone pattern. to the appropriate fire alarm control panel manual for more information. as a component of the general evacuation signal producing an NFPA compliant Temporal 3 pattern in synchronization with other System notification devices. This requires connection to a power supply of generating the System Sensor synchronization pulses, a FACP NAC configured to System Sensor synchronization protocol, or a separate module. sounder base is intended for use with intelligent systems. In addition to connected to the SLC, the sounder base requires a connection to either VDC constant power or a

I AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 B200S-LF-IV Frequency Intelligent Sounder Base to 93% relative humidity (non-condensing) (17.46 cm) (5.08 cm) lb. (272 gm) model is compatible with System Sensor Models MDL, MDL3R, MDLW, MDL3W and SYNC-1 Diameter: Height (less sensor): Temperature Range: Refer to applicable sensor Operating Temperature Range using the Base/Sensor Cross Reference Chart at systemsensor.com Humidity Range: Supply Electrical Ratings Supply Voltage: Current: Current: Electrical Ratings Operating Voltage: Standby Current: Output Volume: Volume: than 85 dBA minimum measured in a UL reverberant room at 10 feet, 24 Volts (in continuous tone) than 75 dBA minimum measured in a UL reverberant room at 10 feet, 24 Volts (in continuous tone) volume setting: 15 mA maximum @ 33.0 VDC mA maximum @ 24.0 VDC mA maximum @ 16.0 VDC to 32 VDC maximum (base only, refer to applicable sensor specification) to 33 VDC (VFWR) maximum VDC volume setting: mA maximum @ 33.0 VDC mA maximum @ 24.0 VDC mA maximum @16.0 VDC INSTALLING System Sensor Applications Guide for System Smoke Detectors which provides detailed information on sensor spacing, placement, wiring, and special applications. This manual is available from System NFPA 72 and NEMA guidelines should be observed. The National Fire Code, NFPA 72, requires effective January 1, 2014, that audible appli- installed in sleeping areas produce a low frequency alarm signal that be a square wave or provide equivalent awakening ability with a funda- frequency of 520 Hz +/ 10%. Select Series sounder bases are not compatible with remote test ca- Select Series detectors. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at once a year. DESCRIPTION B200S-LF-WH and B200S-LF-IV sounder bases are used with addressable heads. For a list of compatible sensors, refer to the System Sensor at www.systemsensor.com. Refer to the appropriate manual for more on sensors. B200S-LF-WH/B200S-LF-IV low frequency sounder base generates a low tone around 520 Hz. Studies have shown that low frequency au- devices that operate around 520 Hz are more effective in waking indi- in sleeping areas. sounder base is capable of producing a variety of tone patterns, includ- the distinctive three-pulse temporal pattern (ANSI Temporal 3) fire alarm now required by NFPA 72 for commercial and residential applications. B200S-LF-WH/B200S-LF-IV offers maximum flexibility in configuration operation to meet or exceed the requirements of UL268 and UL464 for Temporal 3 and March time patterns. The temporal 4 pattern all requirements of UL268 and UL2075, as well as, private mode setting UL 464. B200S-LF-WH/B200S-LF-IV can be commanded by the Fire Alarm Con- Panel (FACP) to adopt the address of the attached sensor head, but as unique device type on the loop. By using the address, the FACP can com- an individual sounder base to activate, or a group of sounders in a suite other multi-room configuration. The command set from the panel can be to the specific event, allowing selection of volume, tone, and group. device offers two volume levels: 75 dBA and 85 dBA. The available tones Continuous, ANSI Temporal 3, ANSI Temporal 4, and March Time. In ad- some panels will offer the ability to command a custom tone pattern. to the appropriate FACP manual for more information. addition, the B200S-LF-WH/B200S-LF-IV is equipped with the circuitry to the System Sensor synchronization protocol, enabling the sounder to be used as a component of the general evacuation signal producing NFPA 72 compliant Temporal 3 pattern in synchronization with other Sensor notification devices. This requires connection to a power capable of generating the System Sensor synchronization pulses, a NAC output configured to System Sensor synchronization protocol, or a synchronization module. sounder base is intended for use w

No text preview available.

and Engineering Specification Sensor Low Frequency Sounder Base B200S-LF low frequency sounder base appliance shall be System Sensor model B200S-LF. The low frequency base shall be listed to UL 268 and UL 464. The low frequency sounder shall have an option to between a temporal three-pattern, temporal four-pattern, non-temporal (continuous) or march time The low frequency sounder base shall offer two volume levels. The alarm current shall not 140 mA at 16 VDC The low frequency sounder base shall operate between 10% and 93% relative The appliance shall mount to a standard 4 4 1 back box, 4- inch octagon back box,3 – inch octagon back box, double-gang back box or single-gang back box. A pre-wire mounting plate be used for mounting products. The wiring shall terminate at the pre-wire mounting plate. The low sounder base shall have the ability to synchronize with notification devices without the use of accessories. A manual locking feature shall be available to prevent removal of the attached sensor

I AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS B200S-IV Sounder Base Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 to 93% relative humidity (non-condensing) (17.46 cm) (5.08 cm) lb. (227 gm) model is compatible with Sytem Sensor Models MDL, MDL3R, MDLW, MDL3W and SYNC-1 Diameter: Height (less sensor): Temperature Range: Refer to applicable sensor Operating Temperature Range using the Base/Sensor Cross Reference Chart at systemsensor.com Humidity Range: Supply Electrical Ratings Supply Voltage: Current: Current: Electrical Ratings Operating Voltage: Standby Current: Output Volume: Volume: to 33 VDC (VFWR) maximum mA maximum (at high volume setting); 15 mA maximum (at low volume setting) than 85 dBA minimum measured in a UL reverberant room at 10 feet, 24 Volts (in continuous tone) than 75 dBA minimum measured in a UL reverberant room at 10 feet, 24 Volts (in continuous tone) to 32 VDC maximum INSTALLING System Sensor Applications Guide for System Smoke Detectors which provides detailed information on sensor spacing, placement, wiring, and special applications. This manual is available online at NFPA 72 and NEMA guidelines should be observed. Select Series sounder bases are not compatible with remote test ca- Select Series detectors. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at once a year. DESCRIPTION B200S-WH and B200S-IV sounder bases are used with addressable detec- heads. For a list of compatible sensors, refer to the System Sensor website www.systemsensor.com. Refer to the appropriate manual for more informa- on sensors. B200S-WH and B200S-IV sounder bases were designed specifically to the needs of dwelling unit applications. They offer maximum flexibility configuration and operation to meet or exceed the requirements of UL268 UL464. sounder base is capable of producing a variety of tone patterns, includ- the distinctive three-pulse temporal pattern (ANSI Temporal 3) fire alarm now required by NFPA 72 for commercial and residential applications. B200S-WH/B200S-IV can be commanded by the Fire Alarm Control Panel adopt the address of the attached sensor head, but as a unique device type the loop. By using the address, the fire alarm control panel can command individual sounder base to activate, or a group of sounders in a suite or multi-room configuration. The command set from the panel can be tai- to the specific event, allowing selection of volume, tone, and group. The offers two volume levels: 75 dBA and 85 dBA. The available tones are ANSI Temporal 3, ANSI Temporal 4, and March Time. In addi- some fire alarm panels will offer the ability to command a custom tone Refer to the appropriate fire alarm control panel manual for more addition, the B200S-WH/B200S-IV is equipped with the circuitry to recog- the System Sensor synchronization protocol, enabling the sounder base be used as a component of the general evacuation signal producing an 72 compliant Temporal 3 pattern in synchronization with other System notification devices. This requires connection to a power supply ca- of generating the System Sensor synchronization pulses, a FACP NAC configured to System Sensor synchronization protocol, or a separate module. sounder base is intended for use with intelligent systems. In addition to connected to the SLC, the sounder base requires a connection to either VDC constant power or a NAC circuit, depending on the FACP and intended The connections for 24V constant/NAC power and the communication are isolated to prevent electrical interaction between them. connected to a NAC, power is supervised via the NAC circuit supervi- while in standby mode (EOL resistor required for Class B operation). activated, the B200S-WH/B200S-IV provides supervision of NAC power. Figure 56.) using a FACP equipped with a base standby power monitor- mode and constant 24 V power, power supervision EOL devices (super- relays and resistors) should not be used. (See Figure 4.) In this case, B20

I AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS B200S-IV Sounder Base Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 to 93% relative humidity (non-condensing) (17.46 cm) (5.08 cm) lb. (227 gm) model is compatible with Sytem Sensor Models MDL, MDL3R, MDLW, MDL3W and SYNC-1 Diameter: Height (less sensor): Temperature Range: Refer to applicable sensor Operating Temperature Range using the Base/Sensor Cross Reference Chart at systemsensor.com Humidity Range: Supply Electrical Ratings Supply Voltage: Current: Current: Electrical Ratings Operating Voltage: Standby Current: Output Volume: Volume: to 33 VDC (VFWR) maximum mA maximum (at high volume setting); 15 mA maximum (at low volume setting) than 85 dBA minimum measured in a UL reverberant room at 10 feet, 24 Volts (in continuous tone) than 75 dBA minimum measured in a UL reverberant room at 10 feet, 24 Volts (in continuous tone) to 32 VDC maximum INSTALLING System Sensor Applications Guide for System Smoke Detectors which provides detailed information on sensor spacing, placement, wiring, and special applications. This manual is available online at NFPA 72 and NEMA guidelines should be observed. Select Series sounder bases are not compatible with remote test ca- Select Series detectors. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at once a year. DESCRIPTION B200S-WH and B200S-IV sounder bases are used with addressable detec- heads. For a list of compatible sensors, refer to the System Sensor website www.systemsensor.com. Refer to the appropriate manual for more informa- on sensors. B200S-WH and B200S-IV sounder bases were designed specifically to the needs of dwelling unit applications. They offer maximum flexibility configuration and operation to meet or exceed the requirements of UL268 UL464. sounder base is capable of producing a variety of tone patterns, includ- the distinctive three-pulse temporal pattern (ANSI Temporal 3) fire alarm now required by NFPA 72 for commercial and residential applications. B200S-WH/B200S-IV can be commanded by the Fire Alarm Control Panel adopt the address of the attached sensor head, but as a unique device type the loop. By using the address, the fire alarm control panel can command individual sounder base to activate, or a group of sounders in a suite or multi-room configuration. The command set from the panel can be tai- to the specific event, allowing selection of volume, tone, and group. The offers two volume levels: 75 dBA and 85 dBA. The available tones are ANSI Temporal 3, ANSI Temporal 4, and March Time. In addi- some fire alarm panels will offer the ability to command a custom tone Refer to the appropriate fire alarm control panel manual for more addition, the B200S-WH/B200S-IV is equipped with the circuitry to recog- the System Sensor synchronization protocol, enabling the sounder base be used as a component of the general evacuation signal producing an 72 compliant Temporal 3 pattern in synchronization with other System notification devices. This requires connection to a power supply ca- of generating the System Sensor synchronization pulses, a FACP NAC configured to System Sensor synchronization protocol, or a separate module. sounder base is intended for use with intelligent systems. In addition to connected to the SLC, the sounder base requires a connection to either VDC constant power or a NAC circuit, depending on the FACP and intended The connections for 24V constant/NAC power and the communication are isolated to prevent electrical interaction between them. connected to a NAC, power is supervised via the NAC circuit supervi- while in standby mode (EOL resistor required for Class B operation). activated, the B200S-WH/B200S-IV provides supervision of NAC power. Figure 56.) using a FACP equipped with a base standby power monitor- mode and constant 24 V power, power supervision EOL devices (super- relays and resistors) should not be used. (See Figure 4.) In this case, B20

B200SR/B200SR-LF Bases Sensor B200SR series sounder bases set a standard for performance, installation ease, aesthetics. Series Features Tone selection via an onboard jumper UL 268 and UL 464 compliant Pre-wire mounting plate fits various junction box sizes Fully compatible with existing B501BH-Series sounder base Mechanical locking feature prevents removal of attached head 520 Hz +/ 10% square wave tone (B200S-LF) Listings 7135-1653:0213 7300-1653:0238 B200SR sounder base series is designed for new and existing unit applications. It offers maximum flexibility in installation, and operation to meet or exceed UL 268 and UL 464 B200SR series is fully compatible with existing B501BH-Series base installations. The device enables users to select one two B501-supported tones (ANSI Temporal 3 or Continuous) by a jumper. its attractive aesthetics, the B200SR series is ideal for where appearance is critical. For example, the sounder employs a separate mounting plate that installs on various box sizes to eliminate unsightly surface-mount boxes. In the mounting plate enables pre-wiring of all connections speed and simplify installation. The housing then mates with the plate and is locked in position with two retaining screws, are covered by the installed sensor head for added tamper B200SR-LF low frequency sounder base is designed to meet NFPA 72 sleeping space requirement to produce a fundamental of 520 Hz +/ 10% with a square wave or its equivalent. show that a lower frequency, centered around 520 Hz, is the ideal to awaken sleeping occupants, even those with mild to hearing loss. Specifications Diameter Height Weight Temperature Range Humidity Range Specifications: B200SR Supply Voltage Supply Standby Current Current Operating Voltage Standby Current Output Specifications: B200SR-LF Supply Voltage Supply Standby Current Current Operating Voltage Standby Current Output (17.46 cm) (5.08 cm) less sensor 0.50 lb. (227 gm); B200SR-LF: 0.60 lb. (272 gm) to applicable sensor Operating Temperature Range using the Base/Sensor Cross Reference at systemsensor.com to 93% relative humidity (non-condensing) to 33 VDC (VFWR) mA maximum mA maximum to 32 VDC to applicable sensor specification than 85 dBA minimum – measured in a UL reverberant room at 10 ft. 24 Volts continuous tone) to 33 VDC (VFWR) mA maximum mA maximum @ 33.0 VDC mA maximum @ 24.0 VDC mA maximum @16.0 VDC to 32 VDC to applicable sensor specification than 85 dBA minimum measured in a UL reverberant room at 10 ft. 24 Volts continuous tone) Ohio Avenue St. Charles, IL 60174 800-SENSOR2 Fax: 630-377-6495 specifications subject to change without notice. Visit systemsensor.com current product information, including the latest version of this data sheet. System Sensor. 02/15

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 (17.46 cm) (5.08 cm) lb. (227 gm) B200SR-IV Sounder Base Diameter: Height (less sensor): Temperature Range: Refer to applicable sensor Operating Temperature Range using the Base/Sensor Cross Reference Chart at systemsensor.com Humidity Range: Supply Electrical Ratings Supply Voltage: Current: Current: Electrical Ratings Operating Voltage: Standby Current: Output to 32 VDC maximum than 85 dBA minimum measured in a UL reverberant room at 10 feet, 24 Volts (in continuous tone) to 33 VDC (VFWR) maximum mA maximum to 93% relative humidity (non-condensing) INSTALLING System Sensor Applications Guide for System Smoke Detectors which provides detailed information on sensor spacing, placement, wiring, and special applications. This manual is available online at NFPA 72 and NEMA guidelines should be observed. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at once a year. DESCRIPTION B200SR-WH and B200SR-IV sounder bases are used with addressable heads. For a list of compatible sensors, refer to the System Sensor at www.systemsensor.com. Refer to the appropriate manual for more on sensors. B200SR-WH and B200SR-IV sounder bases were designed specifically to the needs of dwelling unit applications. It offers maximum flexibility in and operation to meet or exceed the requirements of UL268 and sounder base is capable of producing either the distinctive three-pulse pattern (ANSI Temporal 3) fire alarm signal now required by 72 for commercial and residential applications or a continuous tone simply removing the included jumper from the device. Additionally, the is designed to be compatible with existing installa- of B501-Series sounder bases. sounder base is intended for use with intelligent systems. The sounder requires an external 24 VDC power supply. The connections for the power supply and the communication loop are isolated to prevent interaction between them. Refer to the panel manual for maximum number of units per loop. For NFPA72 Installations, the Temporal 3 tone should be used for pub- mode evacuation. When not used as a supplementary evacuation system, the external 24 supply shall be treated as a component of the main power supply system shall fall under the requirements of the main power supply system per 72. GUIDELINES wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code the local codes having jurisdiction and must not be of such length or wire which would cause the base to operate outside of its published specifica- The conductors used to connect smoke sensors to control panels and devices should be color coded to reduce the likelihood of wiring Improper connections can prevent a system from responding properly the event of a fire. sizes up to 12 AWG (2.5 mm2) may be used with the base. The sounder will be shipped with the screw terminals set for 14 AWG wiring. If 12 wire is to be used, back out the screws to allow the wire to fit beneath clamping plates. For best system performance, the power (+ and -) wires the communication circuit wires should be twisted pair or shielded cable in a separate grounded conduit to protect the communication loop electrical interference. wire connections by stripping about 3/8″of insulation from the end of wire. Then, slide the bare end of the wire under the appropriate clamping (See Figure 1), and tighten the clamping plate screw. Do NOT loop the under the clamping plate. (See Figure 2.) The wiring diagram for a typi- 2-wire intelligent system is shown in Figure 5. system monitoring – for terminals 4 and 5, do not use looped wire under termi- Break wire run as shown in Figure 2 to provide monitoring of connections. 1. 2. TERMINALS Function Not Used Positive (+)

I Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 (17.46 cm) (5.08 cm) lb. (272 gm) to applicable sensor Operating Temperature Range using the Base/Sensor Cross Reference Chart at systemsensor.com to 93% relative humidity (non-condensing) AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Frequency Intelligent Sounder Base Diameter: Height (less sensor): Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Supply Electrical Ratings Supply Voltage: Current: Current: Electrical Ratings Operating Voltage: Standby Current: Output to 33 VDC (VFWR) maximum VDC mA maximum @ 33.0 VDC mA maximum @ 24.0 VDC mA maximum @16.0 VDC to 32 VDC to applicable sensor specification than 85 dBA minimum measured in a UL reverberant room at 10 feet, 24 Volts (in continuous tone) INSTALLING System Sensor Applications Guide for System Smoke Detectors which provides detailed information on sensor spacing, placement, wiring, and special applications. This manual is available online at NFPA 72 and NEMA guidelines should be observed. National Fire Alarm Code, NFPA 72, requires effective January 1, 2014, audible appliances installed in sleeping areas produce a low frequency signal that shall be a square wave or provide equivalent awakening abil- with a fundamental frequency of 520 Hz +/ 10%. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at once a year. DESCRIPTION B200SR-LF low frequency sounder base is used with System Sensor 200-Se- sensor heads or equivalent. For a list of compatible sensors, refer to the Sys- Sensor website at www.systemsensor.com. Refer to the appropriate manual more information on sensors. B200SR-LF low frequency sounder base generates a low frequency tone 520 Hz. Studies have shown that low frequency audible devices that around 520 Hz are more effective in waking individuals in sleeping It offers maximum flexibility in configuration and operation to meet or the requirements of UL268 and UL464. sounder base is capable of producing either the distinctive three-pulse pattern (ANSI Temporal 3) fire alarm signal now required by NFPA for commercial and residential applications or a continuous tone by simply the included jumper from the device. Additionally, the B200SR-LF designed to be compatible with existing installations of B501-Series sounder sounder base is intended for use with intelligent systems. The sounder requires an external 24 VDC power supply. The connections for the power supply and the communication loop are isolated to prevent interaction between them. Refer to the panel manual for maximum number of units per loop. For NFPA72 Installations, the Temporal 3 tone should be used for public evacuation. When not used as a supplementary evacuation system, the external 24 supply shall be treated as a component of the main power supply system shall fall under the requirements of the main power supply system per 72. GUIDELINES wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code the local codes having jurisdiction and must not be of such length or wire which would cause the base to operate outside of its published specifica- The conductors used to connect smoke sensors to control panels and devices should be color coded to reduce the likelihood of wiring Improper connections can prevent a system from responding properly the event of a fire. sizes up to 12 AWG (2.5 mm2) may be used with the base. The sounder will be shipped with the screw terminals set for 14 AWG wiring. If 12 wire is to be used, back out the screws to allow the wire to fit beneath clamping plates. For best system performance, the power (+ and -) wires the communication circuit wires should be twisted pair or shielded cable in a separate grounded conduit to protect the communication loop electrical interference. wire connections by stripping about 3/8 of insulation from the end of wire. Then, slide the bare end of the wire under the appropriate clamping (See Figure 1), and tighten the clamping plate screw. Do NO

I AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 (17.46 cm) (5.08 cm) lb. (272 gm) B200SR-LF-IV Frequency Intelligent Sounder Base Diameter: Height (less sensor): Temperature Range: Refer to applicable sensor Operating Temperature Range using the Base/Sensor Cross Reference Chart at systemsensor.com Humidity Range: Supply Electrical Ratings Supply Voltage: Current: Current: Electrical Ratings Operating Voltage: Standby Current: Output to 32 VDC to applicable sensor specification than 85 dBA minimum measured in a UL reverberant room at 10 feet, 24 Volts (in continuous tone) to 33 VDC (VFWR) mA maximum VDC mA maximum @ 33.0 VDC mA maximum @ 24.0 VDC mA maximum @16.0 VDC to 93% relative humidity (non-condensing) INSTALLING System Sensor Applications Guide for System Smoke Detectors which provides detailed information on sensor spacing, placement, wiring, and special applications. This manual is available online at NFPA 72 and NEMA guidelines should be observed. National Fire Alarm Code, NFPA 72, requires effective January 1, 2014, audible appliances installed in sleeping areas produce a low frequency signal that shall be a square wave or provide equivalent awakening abil- with a fundamental frequency of 520 Hz +/ 10%. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at once a year. DESCRIPTION B200SR-LF-WH and B200SR-LF-IV sounder bases are used with address- detector heads. For a list of compatible sensors, refer to the System Sensor at www.systemsensor.com. Refer to the appropriate manual for more on sensors. B200SR-LF-WH/B200SR-LF-IV low frequency sounder base generates a frequency tone around 520 Hz. Studies have shown that low frequency devices that operate around 520 Hz are more effective in waking in- in sleeping areas. It offers maximum flexibility in configuration and to meet or exceed the requirements of UL268 and UL464. sounder base is capable of producing either the distinctive three-pulse pattern (ANSI Temporal 3) fire alarm signal now required by 72 for commercial and residential applications or a continuous tone simply removing the included jumper from the device. Additionally, the is designed to be compatible with existing in- of B501-Series sounder bases. sounder base is intended for use with intelligent systems. The sounder requires an external 24 VDC power supply. The connections for the power supply and the communication loop are isolated to prevent interaction between them. Refer to the panel manual for maximum number of units per loop. For NFPA72 Installations, the Temporal 3 tone should be used for public evacuation. When not used as a supplementary evacuation system, the external 24 supply shall be treated as a component of the main power supply system shall fall under the requirements of the main power supply system per 72. GUIDELINES wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code the local codes having jurisdiction and must not be of such length or wire which would cause the base to operate outside of its published specifica- The conductors used to connect smoke sensors to control panels and devices should be color coded to reduce the likelihood of wiring Improper connections can prevent a system from responding properly the event of a fire. sizes up to 12 AWG (2.5 mm2) may be used with the base. The sounder will be shipped with the screw terminals set for 14 AWG wiring. If AWG wire is to be used, back out the screws to allow the wire to fit beneath clamping plates. For best system performance, the power (+ and -) wires the communication circuit wires should be twisted pair or shielded cable in a separate grounded conduit to protect the communication loop electrical interference. wire connections by stripping about 3/8″ of insulation from the end of wire. Then, slide the bare end of the wire under the appropriate clamping (S

No text preview available.

and Engineering Specification Sensor Low Frequency Sounder Base B200SR-LF low frequency sounder base appliance shall be System Sensor model B200SR-LF. The low sounder base shall be listed to UL 268 and UL 464. The low frequency sounder shall have an to switch between a temporal three-pattern and non-temporal (continuous) pattern. The alarm shall not exceed 125 mA at 16 VDC. The low frequency sounder base shall operate between and 93% relative humidity. The appliance shall mount to a standard 4 4 1 back box, 4- octagon back box,3 – inch octagon back box, double-gang back box or single-gang back box. A mounting plate shall be used for mounting products. The wiring shall terminate at the pre-wire plate. A manual locking feature shall be available to prevent removal of the attached sensor

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 (17.46 cm) (5.08 cm) lb. (227 gm) B200SR-IV Sounder Base Diameter: Height (less sensor): Temperature Range: Refer to applicable sensor Operating Temperature Range using the Base/Sensor Cross Reference Chart at systemsensor.com Humidity Range: Supply Electrical Ratings Supply Voltage: Current: Current: Electrical Ratings Operating Voltage: Standby Current: Output to 32 VDC maximum than 85 dBA minimum measured in a UL reverberant room at 10 feet, 24 Volts (in continuous tone) to 33 VDC (VFWR) maximum mA maximum to 93% relative humidity (non-condensing) INSTALLING System Sensor Applications Guide for System Smoke Detectors which provides detailed information on sensor spacing, placement, wiring, and special applications. This manual is available online at NFPA 72 and NEMA guidelines should be observed. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at once a year. DESCRIPTION B200SR-WH and B200SR-IV sounder bases are used with addressable heads. For a list of compatible sensors, refer to the System Sensor at www.systemsensor.com. Refer to the appropriate manual for more on sensors. B200SR-WH and B200SR-IV sounder bases were designed specifically to the needs of dwelling unit applications. It offers maximum flexibility in and operation to meet or exceed the requirements of UL268 and sounder base is capable of producing either the distinctive three-pulse pattern (ANSI Temporal 3) fire alarm signal now required by 72 for commercial and residential applications or a continuous tone simply removing the included jumper from the device. Additionally, the is designed to be compatible with existing installa- of B501-Series sounder bases. sounder base is intended for use with intelligent systems. The sounder requires an external 24 VDC power supply. The connections for the power supply and the communication loop are isolated to prevent interaction between them. Refer to the panel manual for maximum number of units per loop. For NFPA72 Installations, the Temporal 3 tone should be used for pub- mode evacuation. When not used as a supplementary evacuation system, the external 24 supply shall be treated as a component of the main power supply system shall fall under the requirements of the main power supply system per 72. GUIDELINES wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code the local codes having jurisdiction and must not be of such length or wire which would cause the base to operate outside of its published specifica- The conductors used to connect smoke sensors to control panels and devices should be color coded to reduce the likelihood of wiring Improper connections can prevent a system from responding properly the event of a fire. sizes up to 12 AWG (2.5 mm2) may be used with the base. The sounder will be shipped with the screw terminals set for 14 AWG wiring. If 12 wire is to be used, back out the screws to allow the wire to fit beneath clamping plates. For best system performance, the power (+ and -) wires the communication circuit wires should be twisted pair or shielded cable in a separate grounded conduit to protect the communication loop electrical interference. wire connections by stripping about 3/8″of insulation from the end of wire. Then, slide the bare end of the wire under the appropriate clamping (See Figure 1), and tighten the clamping plate screw. Do NOT loop the under the clamping plate. (See Figure 2.) The wiring diagram for a typi- 2-wire intelligent system is shown in Figure 5. system monitoring – for terminals 4 and 5, do not use looped wire under termi- Break wire run as shown in Figure 2 to provide monitoring of connections. 1. 2. TERMINALS Function Not Used Positive (+)

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Detector Base use with the following models: US: Canada: 2251 2251A SENSOR Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 inches (155 mm) inch (102 mm) square box with or without plaster ring Depth: 1.5 inches (38 mm). inch Octagon Box, Min. Depth – 1.5 inches (38 mm). inch Octagon Box, Min. Depth – 1.5 inches (38 mm). Gang Box, Min. Depth – 1.5 inches (38 mm). 1. Terminal layout: PROOF A78-1318-00 Installing thoroughly read the system wiring and installation and manual I56-407, Guide for Proper Use of Sys- Smoke Detectors, which provides detailed information detector spacing, placement, zoning, and special appli- Copies of these manuals are available from System or through a System Sensor distributor. (For installa- in Canada, refer to CAN/ULC-S524, Standard for the of Fire Alarm Systems and CEC Part 1, Sec. 32.) Description Plug-in Detector Base is used with System Sensor mod- 1251 and 1251A ionization and 2251 and 2251A photo- detectors. B210LP base is intended for use in a 2-wire intelli- system, with screw terminals provided for power and and remote annunciator connections. Com- takes place over the power (+ and lines. Terminals ( Remote Annunciator ( (+) Annunciator (+) detector base mounts directly to 3-1/2 inch and 4 inch boxes, 4 inch square boxes (with or without plas- rings) and single gang boxes. To mount, remove the ring by turning it in either direction to unhook snaps, then separate the ring from the base. Install the on the box using the screws supplied with the junc- box and the appropriate mounting slots in the base. Manuals Online! – the decorative ring on the base and rotate it in either until it snaps into place (see Figure 2). 2. Mounting detector to box: Wiring Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with all appli- local codes and any special requirements of the au- having jurisdiction, using the proper wire size. The used to connect smoke detectors to control pan- and accessory devices should be color-coded to reduce likelihood of wiring errors. Improper connections can a system from responding properly in the event of a signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected de- it is recommended that the wire be no smaller AWG 18. However, the screws and clamping plate in base can accommodate wire sizes up to AWG 12. The of twisted pair wiring or shielded cable for the power and -) loop is recommended to minimize the effects of interference. shielded cable is used, the shield connection to and from detector must be continuous by using wire nuts, crimp- or soldering, as appropriate for a reliable connection. electrical connections by stripping about 3/8″ (10 of insulation from the end of the wire (use strip gauge in base), sliding the bare end of the wire under the plate, and tightening the clamping plate screw. not loop the wire under the clamping plate. zone wiring of the detector base should be checked the detector heads are installed in them. The wiring be checked for continuity and polarity in the base, dielectric tests should be performed. base includes a label for recording the zone, address, type of detector being installed. This information is im- to set the address of the detector head that will be plugged into the base and to verify the type re- for that location. ON (NOT (NOT Manuals Online! – 3. Typical Wiring Diagram for 2-wire loop: ANNUNCIATOR Do not loop wire under terminal 1 or 2. wire run to provide supervision of connections. A OPTIONAL WIRING

I 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 inches (155 mm) inches (19 mm) to applicable sensor Operating Temperature Range using the Base/Sensor Cross Reference Chart at systemsensor.com 2. MOUNTING DETECTOR TO BOX: AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Detector Base Diameter: Height: Temperature: Ratings: Voltage: Current: to 32 VDC INSTALLING read the System Smoke Detectors Application Guide, which provides information on detector spacing, placement, zoning, wiring, and spe- applications. Copies of this application guide are available from System NFPA 72 guidelines should be observed. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at once a year. DESCRIPTION B210LP is a plug-in detector base intended for use in an intelligent system, screw terminals provided for power (+ and and remote annunciator Communication takes place over the power (+ and lines. TERMINALS ( Remote Annunciator ( (+) Annunciator (+) 1. TERMINAL LAYOUT: 2 3 1 ON SUPPLIED) SUPPLIED) AND WIRING GUIDELINES (SEE FIGURE 3) wiring must be installed in compliance with all applicable local codes any special requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Proper wire should be used. The conductors used to connect smoke detectors to panels and accessory devices should be color-coded to reduce the like- of wiring errors. Improper connections can prevent a system from re- properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected detectors), it is recom- that the wire be no smaller than 18 AWG (0.823 square mm). Wire up to 12 AWG (3.31 square mm) may be used with the base. electrical connections by stripping about 3/8 inch (10 mm) of insulation the end of the wire (use strip gauge molded in base). Then slide the wire the clamping plate and tighten the clamping plate screw. Do not loop wire under the clamping plate. (See Figure 4) the zone wiring of all bases in the system before installing the detec- This includes checking the wiring for continuity, correct polarity, ground testing and performing a dielectric test. base includes an area for recording the zone, address, and type of detec- being installed. This information is useful for setting the detector head and for verification of the detector type required for that location. all detector bases have been wired and mounted, and the loop wiring been checked, the detector heads may be installed in the bases. detector base mounts directly to 4-inch square (with and without plaster 4-inch octagon, 3 1/2-inch octagon, and single gang junction boxes. To remove the decorative ring by turning it in either direction to unhook snaps, then separate the ring from the base. Install the base on the box the screws supplied with the junction box and the appropriate mounting in the base. the decorative ring on the base and rotate it in either direction until it into place (see Figure 2). 3. TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR 2-WIRE LOOP: DO NOT LOOP WIRE TERMINAL 1 OR 2. WIRE RUN TO PROVIDE OF CONNECTIONS. A OPTIONAL WIRING 4.: 5A. ENABLING THE TAMPER-RESISTANT CAPABILITY: LEVER TAB AT DOTTED LINE BY TOWARD CENTER OF BASE 5B. REMOVING THE DETECTOR HEAD FROM THE BASE: SMALL-BLADED SCREWDRIVER TO PUSH LEVER IN DIRECTION OF ARROW 6. CONNECTION TO REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR TERMINAL: WIRE WITH SPADE LUG FEATURE Do not use the tamper-resist feature if the removal tool will be used. LEVER detector base includes a tamper-resist feature that

No text preview available.

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and B224BI Plug-in Isolator Bases use with the following smoke detectors: US: 2551, 2551T, 5551, 5551R 2251, 3251 SENSOR Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Diameter: Height B224BI: B524BI: Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings Voltage: Standard: Alarm: to 28 VDC Maximum Maximum inches (157 mm) inches (31 mm) inches (36 mm) square box with or without plaster ring, Min. depth – 1.5 inches (13 mm) octagon box, Min. depth – 1.5 inches (13 mm) octagon box, Min. depth – 1.5 inches (13 mm) C to +60(cid:176) C (14(cid:176) F to 140(cid:176) F) Do not install in locations where normal ambient temperature extends beyond 0(cid:176) to 49(cid:176) C (32(cid:176) to 120(cid:176) F) to 93% Relative Humidity (Non-condensing) Installing thoroughly read the system wiring and installation and manual I56-407, Guide for Proper Use of Sys- Smoke Detectors, which provides detailed information detector spacing, placement, zoning, and special appli- Copies of these manuals are available at no charge System Sensor. This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. The detectors used with these bases must be and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. detectors used with these bases should be cleaned at once a year. Information bases prevent an entire communications loop from disabled when a short circuit occurs. They accom- this by isolating that part of the loop containing the from the remainder of the circuit. These bases also restore the entire loop when the cause of the circuit is corrected. In general, up to 25 addressable may be isolated between isolator bases. For the of determining the number of devices between bases, one 3251 is equivalent to 12 addressable de- For example, (13) 2251 and (1) 3251 may be between two isolator bases. detector base mounts directly to 31/2- and 4-inch octa- and 4-inch square boxes, with or without a plaster To mount, remove the decorative ring by rotating it in direction to unhook the snaps. Then, separate the from the base. Install the base on the box, using the supplied with the junction box and the appropriate in the base. Replace the decorative ring on the base rotate it in either direction until the ring snaps in place Figure 1). Manuals Online! – Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with all appli- local codes and any special requirements of the local having jurisdiction, using the proper wire sizes. conductors used to connect smoke detectors to control and accessory devices should be color-coded to re- the likelihood of wiring errors. Improper connections prevent a system from responding properly in the event a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected de- it is recommended that the wire be no smaller 18 gauge (1.0 square mm). However, wire sizes up to gauge (3.3 square mm) can be used with the base. The of twisted pair wiring or shielded cable for the power and loop is recommended to minimize the effects of interference. Detector head power is supplied by terminals 1(+) 2(-). Therefore, the head will be part of this group. shielded cable is used, the shield connection to and from detector must be continuous by using wire nuts, crimp- or soldering, as appropriate, for a reliable connection. system control panels have specifications for allow- loop resistance. Consult the control panel specifica- for the total loop resistance allowed before wiring the loops. the zone wiring of all bases in the system before in- detectors. This includes checking the wiring for correct polarity, ground fault testing, and per- a dielectric test. 2: PAIR RECOMMENDED 1. Mounting base to electrical box: ON (NOT (NOT INTELLIGENT

I Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 Fax: 630.377.6495 in (17.4 cm) in (4.1 cm) Refer to applicable sensor Operating Temperature Range using the Base/Sensor Cross Reference Chart at systemsensor.com to 93% Relative Humidity (Non-condensing) AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS B224BI-IV Isolator Detector Base Diameter: Height: Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings Voltage: Current: Current: to 32 VDC Maximum mA Maximum INSTALLING read the System Smoke Detector Applications Guide, which provides information on detector spacing, placement, zoning, wiring, and spe- applications. This manual is available online at www.systemsensor.com. 72 guidelines should be observed. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detectors used with these bases must be tested and main- following NFPA 72 requirements. The detectors used with these bases be cleaned at least once a year. INFORMATION B224BI-WH and B224BI-IV isolator bases intended for use in an intelli- system. Isolator bases prevent an entire communications loop from being when a short circuit occurs. They accomplish this by isolating that of the loop containing the short from the remainder of the circuit. These also automatically restore the entire loop when the cause of the short is corrected. In general, up to 25 addressable devices may be isolated isolator bases. the mounting plate directly to an electrical box. The plate will directly to 4″ square (with and without plaster ring), 4″ octagon, octagon, single gang and double gang junction boxes. Connect field wiring to terminals, as shown in Figure 3 and 4. Attach the mounting plate to the junction box as shown in Figure 2. To mount the base, hook the tab on the base to the groove on the mounting plate. 1. DESIGNATION 2. MOUNTING BASE TO BOX 3. – COMM IN (+) – COMM IN ( Then, swing the base into position to engage the pins on the product with terminals on the mounting plate. Secure the base by tightening the mounting screws. Install a compatible smoke detector as described in the installation manual the detector. not over tighten mounting plate screws; this may cause mounting plate flex. GUIDELINES wiring must be installed in compliance with all applicable local codes and special requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction, using the wire sizes. The conductors used to connect smoke detectors to control and accessory devices should be color-coded to reduce the likelihood wiring errors. Improper connections can prevent a system from responding in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected detectors), it is recom- that the wire be no smaller than 18 AWG (0.823 mm2). However, wire up to 12 AWG (3.31 mm2) can be used with the base. system control panels have specifications for allowable loop resistance. the control panel specifications for the total loop resistance allowed wiring the detector loops. the zone wiring of all bases in the system before installing detectors. includes checking the wiring for continuity, correct polarity, ground fault and performing a dielectric test. – COMM OUT (+) – COMM OUT ( A OPTIONAL WIRING SUPPLIED) SUPPLIED) Function Positive (+) Comm. Line In Negative ( Comm. Line In Out Positive (+) Comm. Line Out 4. WIRING DIAGRAM 1 2 LINE (+) ( (+) ( PANEL OF ADDRESSABLE DEVICES ARE BY FAULT ISOLATOR BASES. ANY OF COMPATIBLE LISTED DEVICES BE MIXED WITHIN A GROUP ( (+) ( (+)

~SYSTEM SENSOR Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and B224RB(A) Plug-in Detector Bases use with the following models: For use with any 500 Series detector For use with any 200 Series detector inches (157 mm) Diameter: Height Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings Voltage: Averaged Standby Ratings: <500 @ 24 VDC Characteristics to 28 VDC coil latching Form C Type: Relay Time: Time: A @ 30 VDC A @ 110 VDC (with .35 PF or greater) A @ 120 VAC (with .35 PF or greater) A @ 30 VDC (with .6 PF or greater) seconds minimum, 20 seconds maximum second minimum, 8 seconds maximum inches (31 mm) inches (36 mm) square box with or without plaster ring, Min Depth - 1.5 inches (13 mm) octagon box, Min. depth - 1.5 inches (13 mm) octagon box, Min. depth - 1.5 inches (13 mm) to 49 C (32 to 120 F) to 93% Relative Humidity (Non-condensing) Installing thoroughly read the system wiring and installation and manual I56-407, Guide for Proper Use of Sys- Smoke Detectors, which provides detailed information detector spacing, placement, zoning, and special appli- Copies of these manuals are available at no charge System Sensor. (For installation in Canada, refer to Standard for the Installation for Fire Alarm and CEC Part 1, Sec. 32.) This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. The detector used with these bases must be and maintained regularly following NFPA 72 require- The detectors should be cleaned at least once a year. Information C latching relay contacts are included for the control an auxiliary function. The relay operates 12 seconds after activation of the sensor head remote an- output. detector base mounts directly to 31/2- and 4-inch oc- and 4-inch square boxes, with or without a plaster mount, remove the decorative ring by rotating it in ei- direction to unhook the snaps. Then, separate the ring the base. Install the base on the box, using the screws with the junction box and the appropriate slots in base. Replace the decorative ring on the base and ro- it in either direction until the ring snaps in place (see 1). Manuals Online! - Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with all appli- local codes and any special requirements of the local having jurisdiction, using the proper wire sizes. conductors used to connect smoke detectors to control and accessory devices should be color-coded to re- the likelihood of wiring errors. Improper connections prevent a system from responding properly in the event a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected de- it is recommended that the wire be no smaller 18 gauge (1.0 square mm). However, wire sizes up to gauge (3.3 square mm) can be used with the base. The of twisted pair wiring or shielded cable for the power and -) loop is recommended to minimize the effects of interference. shielded cable is used, the shield connection to and from detector must be continuous by using wire nuts, crimp- or soldering, as appropriate, for a reliable connection. system control panels have specifications for allow- loop resistance. Consult the control panel specifica- for the total loop resistance allowed before wiring the loops. Instructions base uses a latching relay that can change states if it is to mechanical shocks or jarring. As a result, even relay contacts are in the open state when the base is from the factory, the contacts may have closed shipment. an auxiliary control circuit to closed relay con- can cause an unexpected, and possibly dangerous, ac- of that circuit. Therefore, do NOT connect an control circuit to the relay contacts (terminals 1, and 3) before ensuring that the relay contacts are in their state. Ensure that the contacts are open by applying to the bases WITHOUT the sensor heads installed. wiring connections by stripping about 3/8" (10 mm) insulation from the

I AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS B224RB-IV Relay Detector Base Diameter: Height (less sensor): Temperature Range: Refer to applicable sensor Operating Temperature Range using the Base/Sensor Cross Reference Chart at systemsensor.com Humidity Range: Ratings Voltage: Current: Characteristics Type: Relay Ratings to 93% Relative Humidity (Non-condensing) Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 in (17.4 cm) in (4.1 cm) coil latching C to 32 VDC RATING VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION A A A A A A A A VAC VDC VDC VDC VAC VDC VAC VAC = 20ms) = 0.35 = 0.35 = 0.75 = 0.35 Time (Position 1): Time (Position 2): Time: msec minimum, 100 msec maximum seconds minimum, 10 seconds maximum msec INSTALLING read the System Smoke Detector Applications Guide, which provides information on detector spacing, placement, zoning, wiring, and spe- applications. This manual is available online at www.systemsensor.com. 72 guidelines should be observed. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector used with these bases must be tested and main- regularly following NFPA 72 requirements. The detectors should be at least once a year. INFORMATION relay base is intended for use in an intelligent system. Form C latch- relay contacts are included for the control of an auxiliary function. The can operate in two different modes (short and long delay). The activa- time when the short delay is used is 60 msec to 100 msec, while the time for the long delay is 6 sec to 10 sec. A shunt with pin head- located on the base PC board, can be used to choose your desired delay. is set at the short delay when manufactured. If you to use the long delay, please move the shunt to the adjacent pair of pin See Figures 2 and 6. TERMINALS Function Normal Close Common Normal Open Comm. Line In ( and Out ( Comm. Line In (+) and Out (+) the mounting plate directly to an electrical box. The plate will mount to 4″ square (with and without plaster ring), 4″ octagon, 31/2″ octa- single gang and double gang junction boxes. Connect field wiring to terminals, as shown in Figure 4. Attach the mounting plate to the junction box as shown in Figure 2. To mount the base, hook the tab on the base to the groove on the plate. Then, swing the base into position to engage the pins on the product the terminals on the mounting plate. the base by tightening the mounting screws. Install a compatible smoke detector as described in the installation for the detector. not over tighten mounting plate screws; this may cause mounting plate flex. 1. TERMINAL DESIGNATION 2. MOUNTING THE BASE TO AN ELECTRICAL BOX OF RELAY SHUNT – TO SWITCH SHORT DELAY LONG DELAY SUPPLIED) SUPPLIED) GUIDELINES wiring must be installed in compliance with all applicable local codes and special requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction, using the wire sizes. The conductors used to connect smoke detectors to control and accessory devices should be color-coded to reduce the likelihood wiring errors. Improper connections can prevent a system from responding in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected detectors), it is recom- that the wire be no smaller than 18 gauge (0.9 mm2). However, wire up to 12 gauge (2.5 mm2) can be used with the base. system control panels have specifications for allowable loop resistance. the control panel specifications for the total loop resistance allowed wiring the detector loops. INSTRUCTIONS base uses a latching relay that can cha

I 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 inches (155 mm) inches (19 mm) to applicable sensor Operating Temperature Range using the Base/Sensor Cross Reference Chart at systemsensor.com. 2. MOUNTING DETECTOR TO BOX AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and B300-6-IV Plug-in Detector Bases Diameter: Height: Temperature: Ratings: Voltage: Current: UL268 to 32 VDC INSTALLING read the System Smoke Detectors Application Guide, which provides information on detector spacing, placement, zoning, wiring, and spe- applications. Copies of this application guide are available from System NFPA 72 guidelines should be observed. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at once a year. DESCRIPTION B300-6 and B300-6-IV are plug-in detector bases intended for use in an system, with screw terminals provided for power (+ and and annunciator connections. Communication takes place over the power (+ and TERMINALS FUNCTION 1. TERMINAL LAYOUT ( Remote Annunciator ( (+) Annunciator (+) 2 3 1 detector base mounts directly to 4-inch square (with and without plaster 4-inch octagon, 31/2-inch octagon, and single gang junction boxes. To remove the decorative ring by turning it in either direction to unhook snaps, then separate the ring from the base. Install the base on the box the screws supplied with the junction box and the appropriate mounting in the base. C0127-07 the decorative trim ring on the base and rotate it in either direction until snaps into place. (See Figure 2.) ON SUPPLIED) SUPPLIED) C2036-01 AND WIRING GUIDELINES (SEE FIGURE 3) wiring must be installed in compliance with all applicable local codes any special requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Proper wire should be used. The conductors used to connect smoke detectors to panels and accessory devices should be color-coded to reduce the like- of wiring errors. Improper connections can prevent a system from re- properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected detectors), it is recom- that the wire be no smaller than 18 AWG (0.823 mm Wire sizes up 12 AWG (3.31 mm may be used with the base. electrical connections by stripping about 3/8 inch (10 mm) of insulation the end of the wire (use strip gauge molded in base). Then slide the wire the clamping plate and tighten the clamping plate screw. Do not loop wire under the clamping plate. (See Figure 4.) the zone wiring of all bases in the system before installing the detec- This includes checking the wiring for continuity, correct polarity, ground testing and performing a dielectric test. base includes an area for recording the zone, address, and type of detec- being installed. This information is useful for setting the detector head and for verification of the detector type required for that location. all detector bases have been wired and mounted, and the loop wiring been checked, the detector heads may be installed in the bases. FEATURE Do not use the tamper-resist feature if a removal tool will be used. 5A. ACTIVATE TAMPER-RESIST FEATURE LEVER detector base includes a tamper-resist feature that prevents removal of the without using a small screwdriver or similar tool. activate this feature, use needle-nose pliers to break the tab on the detector as shown in Figure 5A. Then, install the detector. remove the detector from the base once the tamper-resist feature has been remove the decorative ring by rotating it in either direction and it away from the base. Then, insert a small screwdriver into the notch, indicated in Figure 5B, and press the plastic lever toward the mounting before rotating the detector counterclockwise for removal. LEVER tamper-resist

No text preview available.

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-In Detector Base use with the following detectors: Models: Models: Models: 1451, 2151, 2451, 2451TH, 5451 1451E, 2151E, 2451E, 5451E 1451AUS, 2151AUS, 2451AUS, 4451AUS 51A51, 51B51, 51C51, 51D51 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 cm (4.0 inches) cm (0.8 inches) g (0.34 lb.) mm box mm box to +60 (14 to 140 European Installation to 49 (32 to 120 US/Australian Installation to 93% Relative Humidity Diameter: Height: Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings includes base and detector Voltage: Ripple Voltage: Capacitance: Ratings:* Ratings: Voltage: Time: Time: 1151E: 30 Maximum. Alarm current MUST be limited to 100 mA maximum (130 mA for models 1151 and 2151) by the control panel. And Smoke Detector VDC Volts peak to peak Maximum VDC Minimum VDC Maximum Maximum VDC Minimum at 10 mA** VDC Maximum at 100 mA** VDC Minimum Seconds Maximum Seconds Maximum And Heat Detector VDC Volts peak to peak Maximum VDC Minimum VDC Maximum Maximum VDC Minimum at 10 mA** VDC Maximum at 100 mA** VDC Minimum Seconds Maximum Seconds Maximum used, the RA400Z Remote Annunciator operates within the specified detector alarm currents. Installing thoroughly read the System Smoke Detectors Guide, which provides detailed information detector spacing, placement, zoning, wiring, and spe- applications. Copies of this manual are available from Sensor. This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. The detector used with this base must be and maintained regularly following NFPA 72 require- The detector used with this base should be cleaned least once a year. Description B401 plug-in detector base is used with System Sensor and heat detector heads. The capability of plugging detectors into a variety of special bases makes them versatile than equivalent direct-wired models. Refer the System Sensor catalog for other available plug-in bases. B401 base is intended for use in 2-wire systems, with terminals provided for power and remote annuncia- connections. 1. Mounting base to box: 1 shows mechanical mounting details. These detec- bases mount to typical junction boxes. Attach the base the box using the screws supplied with the junction box. Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with applicable and the authority having jurisdiction. Proper wire should be used. The conductors used to connect detectors to control panels and accessory devices be color-coded to reduce the likelihood of wiring Improper connections can prevent a system from properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected it is recommended that the wire be no smaller 18 gauge. Wire sizes up to 12 gauge may be used with base. For best system performance, the power (+) and loop wires should be twisted pair and installed in sepa- grounded conduit to protect the loop from extraneous interference. detectors and alarm system control panels have for allowable loop resistance. Consult the panel manufacturer specifications for the total resistance allowed for the control panel being used wiring the detector loops. Instructions not loop wire under terminals. Break wire run to ensure of connections. connections are made by stripping about 3 of insu- from the end of the wire (use strip gauge molded in sliding the bare end of the wire under the clamping and tightening the clamping plate screw. initiating devices receive their power from the circuit of a control panel. Electrical specifications the

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Detector Base use with the following smoke detectors: 2451, and 2451TH Diameter: Height: Ratings: Voltage: Time: Time: Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings includes base and detector Voltage: Ripple Voltage: Capacitance: Ratings: Ohio Avenue Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 inches (15.7 cm) inches (2.8 cm) lb. (130 g) square box with or without plaster ring. Min. Depth inches octagon box. Min. Depth inches inch octagon box. Min. Depth inches to +49 (32 to 120 to 93% Relative Humidity, noncondensing VDC Volts peak to peak Maximum VDC Minimum; 35 VDC Maximum Maximum VDC Minimum at 10 mA; 6.6 VDC Maximum at 100 mA current must be limited to 100 mA by the control panel. If used, the RA400 lamp operates within specified detector alarm currents.) VDC Minimum Seconds Maximum Seconds Maximum Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407, for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which pro- detailed information on detector spacing, placement, wiring, and special applications. Copies of this man- are available at no charge from System Sensor. (For instal- in Canada, refer to CAN4-S524, Standard for the of Fire Alarm Systems, and CEC Part 1, Sec. 32.) Description B401B plug-in detector base is used with System model 2451 and 2451TH photoelectronic detector and model 1451A ionization detector heads. The of plugging these detectors into a variety of spe- bases makes them more versatile than equivalent models. Refer to the System Sensor catalog for available plug-in detector bases. This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. The detector used with this base must be and maintained regularly following NFPA 72 require- The detector used with this base should be cleaned least once a year. base is intended for use in 2-wire systems, with screw provided for power, ground, and remote annun- connections. detector base mounts directly to 31 and 4-inch boxes, and 4-inch square boxes (with or without rings). To mount, remove the decorative ring by it in either direction to unhook the snaps, then sep- the ring from the base. the base to the box using the screws supplied with junction box and the appropriate mounting slots in the (see Figure 1). Place decorative ring onto base, then in either direction until the ring snaps in place. Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with the Electrical Code and the local codes having juris- Proper wire gauges should be used. The conduc- used to connect smoke detectors to control panels and devices should be color-coded to reduce the like- of wiring errors. Improper connections can prevent system from responding properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected it is recommended that the wire be no smaller 18 gauge (1.0 square mm). Wire sizes up to 12 gauge (2.5 square mm) may be used with the base. For best performance, the power (+) and ( loop wires be twisted pair and installed in separate grounded to protect the loop from extraneous electrical inter- detectors and alarm system control panels have for allowable loop resistance. Consult the panel manufacturer specifications for the total 2. Typical wiring diagram for 2-wire detector systems: 1. Mounting base to box: ON (NOT (NOT resistance allowed for the particular model control being used before wiring the detector loops. installations where the normal ambient tempera- do not exceed 100 F. A OPTIONAL WIRING

I 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and B401BHA Bases Diameter: Height (less base and sensor): Temperature Range: Humidity Range: inches (152 mm) inches (19mm) lb. (140 g) to 140 ( to +60 to 95%, noncondensing Ratings Current: Current: Ripple Voltage: Capacitance: Input Current Requirement: Output: to 32 VDC mA maximum mA maximum of supply voltage maximum than 90 dBa measured in anechoic room at 10 feet (3 meters), volts. 85 dBa minimum measured in UL reverberant room. 1. TERMINAL LAyOUT: INSTALLINg read the System Smoke Detector Application Guide, which provides information on detector spacing, placement, zoning, wiring, and applications. Copies of this manual are available from System Sen- NFPA 72 and NEMA guidelines should be observed. (For installation Canada, refer to CAN/ULC-S524, Standard for the Installation of Fire Systems and CEC Part 1, Sec. 32.) This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector used with these bases must be tested and main- regularly following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be at least once a year. DESCRIpTION B401BH and B401BHA sounder bases are intended for use with Sys- Sensor 400 Series plug-in sensor heads in conventional 2-wire plug-in Refer to systems manuals for the maximum allowable number of per loop. The B401BH requires an external 24VDC (nominal) supply reverse polarity capability. The connections of the external supply (termi- 1 and 2) and the initiating loop (terminals 3, 4, and 5) are isolated in the to prevent electrical interaction between them. the detector head visible LEDs are latched on for approximately 10 the associated horn sounds. A loop of horns can be made to sound reversing the polarity of the external supply. When the associated system is NOT used as a supplementary evacua- system, the external 24VDC supply must be treated as a component of the power supply system with the result that it falls under the requirements NFPA 72. (+) V In (+) V Out Supply Positive (+) Supply Negative ( AND B401BHA TERMINALS Function Negative ( V 3, 4, and 5 are used for the communication/initiating circuit. WIRINg gUIDELINES wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code all applicable local codes and any special requirements of the authority jurisdiction, using the proper wire size. The conductors used to con- smoke detectors to control panels and accessory devices should be color- to reduce the likelihood of wiring errors. Improper connections can a system from responding properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected detectors), it is recom- that the wire be no smaller than AWG 18. However, the screws and plate in the base can accommodate wire sizes up to AWG 12. The of twisted pair wiring or shielded cable for the power (+ and loop is to minimize the effects of electrical interference on the initiat- loop. electrical connections by stripping about 3/8 insulation from the end the wire. Then, slide the bare end of the wire under the clamping plate and the clamping plate screw. Break the wire at each terminal to ensure the connections are supervised, as shown in Figure 2. 2. NOT loop the wire under the clamping plate. the zone wiring of the detector base before the detector heads are in- Perform continuity, base polarity, and dielectric tests on the wiring. detectors and alarm system control panels have specifications for al- supervision current. Consult the control panel manufacturer speci- for the total loop current supervision allowed for the control panel used before wiring the detector loops. 3. TypICAL WIRINg LAyOUT: A OPTIONAL WIRING

I 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Bases Diameter: Height (less base and sensor): Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings Current: Current: Ripple Voltage: Capacitance: Input Current Requirement: Output: Delay Time: inches (152 mm) inches (19mm) lb. (145 g) to 140 ( to +60 to 95%, non-condensing to 32 VDC mA maximum mA maximum of supply voltage maximum than 90 dBa measured in anechoic room at 10 feet (3 meters), volts. 85 dBa minimum measured in UL reverberant room. to 5.7 sec 1. TERMINAL LAyOUT: INSTALLINg thoroughly read the, System Smoke Detector Application Guide, which detailed information on detector spacing, placement, zoning, wiring, special applications. Copies of this manual are available from System Sen- NFPA 72 and NEMA guidelines should be observed. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector used with these bases must be tested and main- regularly following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector used with bases should be cleaned at least once a year. DESCRIpTION B401BH-2 sounder bases is intended for use with System Sensor 400 plug-in sensor heads in conventional 2-wire plug-in systems. Refer to manuals for the maximum allowable number of units per loop. The requires an external 24VDC (nominal) supply with reverse polarity The connections of the external supply (terminals 1 and 2) and the loop (terminals 3, 4, and 5) are isolated in the B401BH-2 to prevent interaction between them. Supply Positive (+) Supply Negative ( loop of horns can be made to sound by reversing the polarity of the external When the associated system is NOT used as a supplementary evacua- system, the external 24VDC supply must be treated as a component of the power supply system with the result that it falls under the requirements NFPA 72. TERMINALS Function 3, 4, and 5 are used for the communication/initiating circuit. WIRINg gUIDELINES wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code all applicable local codes and any special requirements of the authority jurisdiction, using the proper wire size. The conductors used to con- smoke detectors to control panels and accessory devices should be color- to reduce the likelihood of wiring errors. Improper connections can a system from responding properly in the event of a fire. Negative ( V (+) V In (+) V Out signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected detectors), it is recom- that the wire be no smaller than AWG 18. However, the screws and plate in the base can accommodate wire sizes up to AWG 12. The of twisted pair wiring or shielded cable for the power (+ and loop is to minimize the effects of electrical interference on the initiat- loop. electrical connections by stripping about 3/8 insulation from the end the wire. Then, slide the bare end of the wire under the clamping plate and the clamping plate screw. Break the wire at each terminal to ensure the connections are supervised, as shown in Figure 2. 2. NOT loop the wire under the clamping plate. Check the zone wiring of the detector base before the detector heads are Perform continuity, base polarity, and dielectric tests on the wiring. detectors and alarm system control panels have specifications for al- supervision current. Consult the control panel manufacturer speci- for the total loop current supervision allowed for the control panel used before wiring the detector loops. 3. TypICAL WIRINg LAyOUT: A OPTIONAL WIRING INIT. INIT. 5 1 INSTRUCTIONS s

inSTaLLaTiOn and mainTenanCe inSTrUCTiOnS Plug-in detector Base use with the following detectors: 1451, 2451, and 2451TH 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 inches (157 mm) typical inches (29 mm) typical lb. (130 g) typical inch square box with or without plaster ring. Min. Depth: 1.5 inches inch octagon box. Min. Depth: 1.5 inches inch octagon box. Min. Depth: 1.5 inches to 60 (14 to 140 Do not install where normal ambient temperature extends beyond 0 to 49 (32 to 120 to 93% Relative Humidity Diameter: Height: Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings includes base and detector VDC Voltage: Volts peak to peak Ripple Voltage: Maximum Capacitance: VDC Minimum Ratings: VDC Maximum Maximum mA Minimum at 10.5 VDC Ratings: mA Maximum at 32 VDC optional RA400Z/RA100Z Remote Annunciator operates within the specified detector alarm currents. Voltage: VDC Minimum Sec Maximum Time: Time: Sec Maximum inSTaLLing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407, Guide for Proper of System Smoke Detectors, which provides detailed information on de- spacing, placement, zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies of manual are available at no charge from System Sensor. (For installations Canada, refer to CAN4-S524, Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm and CEC Part 1, Sec. 32.) This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector used with this base be cleaned at least once a year. deSCriPTiOn plug-in detector base B401BR is used with System Sensor 400 Series ionization, and heat detector heads. The ability to accept variety of detector heads makes this base more versatile than equivalent models. Refer to the System Sensor catalog for other available detector bases. B401BR base is intended for use in 2-wire systems, with screw terminals for power, ground, and remote annunciator connections. The B401BR also contains a resistor to provide current limiting in the alarm state. detector base mounts directly to 31 inch and 4 inch octagon boxes, and inch square boxes (with or without plaster rings). To mount, remove decora- ring by turning it in either direction to unhook the snaps, then separate ring from the base. the base to the box using the screws supplied with the junction box and appropriate mounting slots in the base. Place decorative ring onto base, turn in either direction until the ring snaps in place (see Figure 1). gUideLineS (figUre 2) wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code the local codes having jurisdiction. Proper wire gauges should be used. conductors used to connect smoke detectors to control panels and acces- devices should be color-coded to prevent wiring mistakes. Improper con- can prevent a system from responding properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected detectors), it is recom- that the wire be no smaller than 18 gauge (1.0 square mm). Wire up to 12 gauge wire (2.5 square mm) may be used with the base. For system performance, the power (+ and loop wires should be twisted and installed in separate grounded conduit to protect the loop from elec- interference. detectors and alarm system control panels have specifications for al- loop resistance. Consult the control panel manufacturer specifica- for the total loop resistance allowed for the particular model control being used before wiring the detector loops. system supervision For terminals 2, 3, and 5 do not use looped wire un- terminals. Break wire run to provide system supervision of connections. connections are made by simply stripping insulation from the end of the sliding the bare end of the wire under the clamping plate, and tightening clamping plate screw. Use the strip gauge molded into the base for ease of to terminals. Sensor smoke detectors and mounting bases are marked

A Division of Pittway System Sensor Europe Caboto 19, 34143, Trieste, Italy AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Detector Base use with the following smoke detectors: 1451E and 2451E Temperature: Humidity: Ratings includes base and detector Ripple Voltage: Capacitance: Ratings: cm (4.0 inches) cm (0.8 inches) g (0.34 lb.) to +60(cid:176) C (14(cid:176) to 140(cid:176) F) to 93% Relative Humidity VDC Volts peak to peak m F Maximum VDC Minimum VDC Maximum m A Maximum mA Minimum at 10.5 VDC Maximum at 32 VDC used, the RA400Z Remote Annunciator operates within the specified alarm currents.) VDC Minimum Ratings: Voltage: Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor Manual I56-407, For Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which pro- detailed information on detector spacing, placement, wiring, and special applications. Copies of this are available at no charge from System Sensor. This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. The detector used with this base must be and maintained regularly following NFPA 72 require- The detector used with this base should be cleaned least once a year. Description B401R plug-in detector base is used with System Sen- model 2451E photoelectronic detector head and model ionization detector head. The capability of plugging detectors into a variety of special bases makes them versatile than equivalent direct-wired models. Refer the System Sensor catalog for other plug-in detector B401R base is intended for use in 2-wire systems, with terminals provided for power, ground, and remote connections. The B401R base also contains a to provide current limiting in the alarm state. Terminals ANNUNCIATOR (+) ( V IN, REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR ( ( V OUT USED (+) V IN AND V OUT remote annunciator is not used, polarity to these may be reversed. detector bases mount to typical junction boxes. In- the base to the box using the screws supplied with the box. Figure 2 shows mechanical mounting details. Installation Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with the Na- Electrical Code and the local codes having jurisdic- Proper wire gauges should be used. The conductors to connect smoke detectors to control panels and ac- devices should be color-coded to prevent wiring Improper connections can prevent a system from properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring, (the wiring between interconnected de- or from detectors to auxiliary devices), it is recom- that single-conductor wire be no smaller than and that two- or three-conductor wire be no than 1.0mm2. For best system performance, alarm conductors should be installed in separate grounded or shielded cable to protect the alarm loop from ex- electrical interference. detectors and alarm system control panels have for allowable loop resistance. Consult the panel manufacturer specifications for the total resistance allowed for the particular model control being used before wiring the detector loops. Instructions connections are made by stripping about 1 cm (3/8″) insulation from the end of the wire (use strip gauge in base), sliding the bare end of the wire under the plate, and tightening the clamping plate screw. zone wiring of the detector bases should be checked the detector heads are installed. To make this this base contains a special spring-type shorting (shown in Figure 2). After a detector base is wired and mounted to an electrical box, make that the shorting spring is in contact with terminal 3. 1. Terminal layout: 2. Mounting base to box: 3. Typical wiring diagram for 2-wire detector system:

instALLAtion And mAintenAnce instructions plug-in detector Base use with the following smoke detectors: 1451, 2451, and 2451TH Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 Fax: 630.377.6495 inches (15.7 cm) inches (2.8 cm) lb. (130 g) inch square box with or without plaster ring. Min. Depth: 1.5 inches inch octagon box. Min. Depth: 1.5 inches inch octagon box. Min. Depth: 1.5 inches to +49 (32 to 120 to 93 % Relative Humidity, Non-condensing Diameter: Height: Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings includes base and detector Voltage: VDC Volts peak to peak Ripple Voltage: Maximum Capacitance: VDC Minimum Ratings: VDC Maximum Maximum mA Minimum Ratings: mA Maximum VDC Minimum Voltage: Seconds Maximum Time: used, the RA400Z/RA100Z remote lamp operates within the specified alarm currents.) Time: Seconds Maximum Contact Ratings or Inductive (60% Power Factor): A: C: @ 30 VAC/DC @ 30 VAC/DC @ 110 VDC @ 125 VAC instALLing read the System Sensor manual I56-407, Guide for Proper Use of Sys- Smoke Detectors, which provides detailed information on detector spacing, zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies of this manual are at no charge from System Sensor. (For installations in Canada, refer CAN4-S524, Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems, and CEC 1, Sec. 32.) guideLines wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, applicable local codes, and any special requirements of the authority hav- jurisdiction, using the proper wire size. The conductors used to connect detectors to control panels and accessory devices should be color-coded reduce the likelihood of wiring errors. Improper connections can prevent a from responding properly in the event of a fire. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector used with this base be cleaned at least once a year. description plug-in detector base B402B is used with System Sensor model 2451 and photoelectronic detector heads, and model 1451 ionization detector The capability of plugging these detectors into a variety of special bases them more versatile than equivalent direct-wired models. Refer to the Sensor catalog for other available plug-in detector bases. B402B base is intended for use in 4-wire systems, with screw terminals for power, remote annunciator, and relay contact connections. These also contain a resistor to provide current limiting in the alarm state. detector base mounts directly to 31 and 4-inch octagon boxes, and square boxes (with or without plaster). To mount the base, remove the ring by rotating it in either direction to unhook the snaps before the ring from the base. Use the screws supplied with the junction to attach the base to the box through the appropriate slots in the base (see 1). Position the decorative ring around the base and rotate it in either until the ring snaps into place. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected detectors), it is recom- that the wire be no smaller than 18 gauge (1.0 square mm). The and clamping plate in the base can accommodate wire sizes up to 12 (2.5 square mm). For best system performance, the power (+ and wire should be twisted pair and installed in separate grounded conduit to the effects of electrical interference. detectors and alarm system control panels have specifications for al- loop resistance. Read the manual for the control to determine the loop resistance allowed before wiring the detector loops. installations where normal ambient temperature does not exceed instructions (Figures 2 And 3) connections are made by stripping approximately 3/8 (1 cm) insulation the end of each wire, sliding the bare end of the wire under the clamp and tightening the clamping plate screw. Use the strip gauges molded the inside and underside of the base for ease of wiring to terminals 1 5 an

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS plug-in Detector Base use with 1451, 2451, AND 2451TH detectors Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Diameter: Height: Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings (includes base and detector) Voltage: Contact Ratings Resistive Load: Time (after 60 second reset): in (15.7 cm) in (2.9cm) lb (260 g) square box with or without plaster ring, minimum depth 1.5 in; 4-inch octagon box, minimum depth 1.5 in; octagon box, minimum depth 1.5 in to 49 (32 to 120 to 93% Relative Humidity VAC, 60 Hz A 2.0A @ 30VAC/DC; Form C 2.0A @ 30VAC/DC, 1.0A @ 125VAC used, the RA400/RA100Z Remote Annunciator and RTC operates within the specified detector system voltage) Seconds maximum INSTALLINg thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407, Guide for Proper of System Smoke Detectors. This manual provides detailed information on spacing, placement, zoning, wiring, and special applications, and is at no charge from System Sensor. (For installation in Canada, refer to Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems and CEC 1, Sec. 32.) This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at once a year. DESCRIpTION B404B detector base is designed for use with System Sensor model 2451 2451TH photoelectronic and 1451 ionization detector heads. The capabil- of plugging these detectors into a variety of special bases makes them more than equivalent direct-wired models. Refer to the System Sensor cata- for other available plug-in bases. B404B base is intended for use in 4-wire systems with terminals provided power, remote annunciator, and relay connections. This base also contains resistor to provide current limiting in the alarm state. TERMINALS Annunciator (+) Coil (+) Used Annunciator ( ( Relay A Contacts Relay A Relay C Contacts detector base mounts directly to 31 and 4-inch octagon boxes and square boxes, with or without plaster rings. To mount the base, remove decorative ring by rotating it in either direction to unhook the snaps before the ring from the base. Use the screws supplied with the junction box attach the base to the box through the appropriate mounting slots in the base. the decorative ring around the base and rotate it in either direction the ring snaps into place (see Figure 2). gUIDELINES wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, applicable local codes, and any special requirements of the authority hav- jurisdiction, using the proper wire size. The conductors used to connect detectors to control panels and accessory devices should be color-coded reduce the likelihood of wiring errors. Improper connections can prevent a from responding properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected detectors), it is recom- that the wire be no smaller than 16 gauge (1.5 square mm), and that or three-conductor wire be no smaller than 18 gauge (1.0 square mm). best performance, alarm loop conductors should be installed in separate conduit or shielded cable to protect the alarm loop from extraneous interference. detectors and alarm systems control panels have specifications for al- loop resistance. Consult the control panel manufacturer specifica- for the total loop resistance allowed for the particular model control being used before wiring the detector loops. installations where normal ambient temperatures do not exceed 100 1. BASE TERMINALS: GAUGE 14 TAB 2. MOUNTINg BASE TO BOx: SUPPLIED) ON

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Detector Base use with the following smoke detectors: US: Canada: Europe: 2451, 2451TH, 4451HT, 5451 2451A, 2451THA, 4451HTA, 5451A 2451E, 4451E, 5451E Ohio Avenue Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Diameter: Height: inches (15.7 cm) inches (2.9 cm) lb. (130 g) square box with or without plaster ring. Min. Depth inches octagon box. Min. Depth inches octagon box. Min. Depth inches mm box; 60 mm box; 70 mm box to 60 (14 to 140 Do not install in locations where normal ambient temperature 50 (120 to 93% Relative Humidity VDC Volts peak to peak Maximum VDC Minimum VDC Maximum Maximum V Minimum at 18 mA V Maximum at 100 mA current MUST be limited to 100 mA maximum by the control panel.) Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings includes base and detector Voltage: Ripple Voltage: Capacitance: Ratings: Ratings: Contact Ratings: or Inductive (60% power factor) Load C*: Voltage: Time: Time: Canadian installations relay contact ratings are 2.0A @ 30 VAC/DC. @ 30 VAC/DC @ 110 VDC @ 125 VAC VDC Minimum Seconds Maximum Seconds Maximum Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407, for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which pro- detailed information on detector spacing, placement, wiring, and special applications. Copies of this are available at no charge from System Sensor. (For in Canada, please refer to CAN4-S524, for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems and CEC 1, Sec. 32.) This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. The detector used with this base must be and maintained regularly following NFPA 72 require- The detector used with this base should be cleaned least once a year. Description B406B plug-in detector base is used with a variety of Sensor conventional detector heads. They are capa- of accepting a variety of detector heads, which makes more versatile than equivalent direct-wired models. to the System Sensor catalog for other available plug- detector bases. B406B base is intended for use in 2-wire systems, with terminals provided for power and relay contact con- These bases MUST be current limited by the sys- control panel in the alarm state. detector base mounts directly to 31 and 4-inch boxes, and 4-inch square boxes (with or without rings). To mount, remove decorative ring by turning in either direction to unhook the snaps, then separate the from the base. Install the base to the box using the supplied with the junction box and the appropriate slots in the base. Place decorative ring onto base, turn in either direction until the ring snaps in place Figure 1). Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with the Electrical Code and the local codes having juris- Proper wire gauges should be used. The conduc- used to connect smoke detectors to control panels and devices should be color-coded to prevent wiring Improper connections can prevent a system from properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected it is recommended that the wire be no smaller 18 gauge. Wire sizes up to 12 gauge may be used with base. For best system performance, the power (+) and loop wires should be twisted pair and installed in sep- grounded conduit to protect the loop from extraneous interference. detectors and alarm system control panels have for allowable loop resistance. Consult the panel manufacturer specifications for the total resistance of the particular model control panel being before wiring the detector loops. Instructions system supervision For terminals 2, 3, and 5 do not looped wire under terminals. Break wire run to provide supervision of connections. connections are made by simply stripping insulation the end of the wire,

~SYsTEM SENSOR Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Detector Base inches (10.2cm) 60mm, and 70mm centers Ratings includes base and detector Range: Current (nominal): Surge at Maximum Rated Voltage: Current (nominal): at 24 VDC VDC at 24 VDC Installing thoroughly read the System Sensor manual I56-407, for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which detailed information on detector spacing, place- zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies of manual are available at no charge from System Sensor. Description plug-in detector base is used with System Sensor 200 500 Series detectors. B501 base is intended for use in an intelligent system screw terminals provided for power (+) and ( and annunciator connections. The communication takes over the power (+) and ( lines. Terminals ( Remote Annunciator ( (+) Annunciator (+) 1. Terminal layout: PROOF Manuals Online! – 2. Typical wiring diagram for 2-wire loop: ANNUNCIATOR base contains a label to write the zone, address, and of detector to be installed at that location. This infor- is used to set the address of the detector head that later be plugged into the base and to verify the type re- for that location. Installation Guidelines (See Figure 2) wiring must be installed in compliance with the Na- Electrical Code and the local authority having juris- Proper wire gauges should be used. The used to connect the smoke detectors to control and accessory devices should be color-coded to pre- wiring mistakes. Improper connections can prevent a form responding properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected de- and modules), it is recommended that the wiring be smaller than 18 gauge (1.0 square mm). Wire sizes up 12 gauge wire (2.5 square mm) may be used with the For best system performance, the power (+) and ( wires should be twisted pair or shielded cable in- in separate grounded conduit to protect the loop extraneous electrical interference. If a cable shield is the shield connection to and from the base must continuous by using wire nuts, crimping, or soldering as for a reliable connection. Connections are made by simply stripping about 3/8 insulation from the end of the wire (use strip gauge in base), sliding the bare end of the wire under the plate and tightening the clamping plate screw. Do loop the wire under the clamping plate. zone wiring of the detector base should be checked the detector heads are installed in them. The wiring be checked for continuity, polarity in the base, and tests. Manuals Online! – Figure 3A. Activating tamperproof feature: 3B. Removing detector head from base: LEVER TAB AT LINE BY TOWARD OF BASE. SMALL BLADED TO PLASTIC LEVER DIRECTION OF 4. Connection to remote annunciator terminal: WIRE WITH LUG Feature detector base also includes an optional tamperproof that when activated prevents removal of the detec- without the use of a tool. activate this feature, simply break off the tab on the de- base shown in Figure 3A, and install the detector. To the detector from the base once the tamperproof has been activated, place a small-bladed screw- into the small hole on the side of the base and push plastic lever away from the detector head (see Figure This will allow the detector to be rotated counterclock- for removal. tamperproof feature may be defeated by breaking and

I Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 (10.2 cm) (18.8 mm) to applicable sensor Operating Temperature Range using the Base/Sensor Cross Reference Chart at systemsensor.com AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS to 32 VDC B501-IV, and B501-BL Plug-in Detector Bases Diameter: Height: Temperature: Ratings includes base and detector Voltage: Current: UL268, ULC S529 INSTALLING read the System Smoke Detectors Application Guide, which provides information on detector spacing, placement, zoning, wiring, and spe- applications. Copies of this application guide are available from System Observe guidelines for NFPA 72 or CAN/ULC S524 (depending on This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. Use only with compatible ULC-listed detector heads for proper function. The detector used with this base must be tested and main- regularly following requirements of NFPA 72 or CAN/ULC S536 (de- on location). The detector should be cleaned at least once a year. Utiliser uniquement avec des d homologu ULC le bon fonctionnement du syst Le d utilis avec cette base test et entretenu r en conformit avec les exigences de norme CAN/ULC S536. Le d doit nettoy au moins une fois an. DESCRIPTION B501-WHITE, B501-IV, and B501-BL are plug in detector bases intended use in an intelligent system with screw terminals provided for power and and remote annunciator connections. Communication takes place the power lines (+ and TERMINALS Function 1. TERMINAL LAYOUT ( Remote Annunciator ( (+) Annunciator (+) 2 3 PROOF 1 C0131-01 detector base mounts directly to 4″ square with plaster ring, 31/2″ octa- 50 mm, 60 mm, and 70 mm centers. AND WIRING GUIDELINES (SEE FIGURE 2) wiring must be installed in compliance with all applicable local codes any special requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction. Proper gauges should be used. The conductors used to connect smoke detectors control panels and accessory devices should be color-coded to reduce the of wiring errors. Improper connections can prevent a system from properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected detectors and modules), is recommended that the wiring be no smaller than 18 AWG (0.823 mm sizes up to 12 AWG (3.31 mm may be used with the base. system control panels have specifications for allowable loop resistance. the control panel specifications for the total loop resistance allowed wiring the detector loops. wiring connections by stripping about 3/8″ (10 mm) of insulation from wire end (use strip gauge molded in base). Then slide the wire under the plate and tighten the clamping plate screw. Do not loop the wire the clamping plate. (See Figure 3.) the zone wiring of all bases in the system before installing the detec- This includes checking the wiring for continuity, correct polarity, ground testing and performing a dielectric test. base includes an area for recording the zone, address, and type of detec- to be installed at that location. This information is useful for setting the head address and for verification of the detector type required for location. all detector bases have been wired and mounted, and the loop wiring been checked, the detector heads may be installed in the bases. 2. TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR 2-WIRE LOOP A OPTIONAL WIRING Do not loop wire under terminal 1 or 2. Break wire run to supervision of connections. EN GARDE : Ne pas boucler le fil sous la borne 1 ou 2. le fil pour assurer la supervision des connexions.

I Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 (10.2 cm) (18.8 mm) to applicable sensor Operating Temperature Range using the Base/Sensor Cross Reference Chart at systemsensor.com AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS to 32 VDC B501-IV, and B501-BL Plug-in Detector Bases Diameter: Height: Temperature: Ratings includes base and detector Voltage: Current: UL268, ULC S529 INSTALLING read the System Smoke Detectors Application Guide, which provides information on detector spacing, placement, zoning, wiring, and spe- applications. Copies of this application guide are available from System Observe guidelines for NFPA 72 or CAN/ULC S524 (depending on This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. Use only with compatible ULC-listed detector heads for proper function. The detector used with this base must be tested and main- regularly following requirements of NFPA 72 or CAN/ULC S536 (de- on location). The detector should be cleaned at least once a year. Utiliser uniquement avec des d homologu ULC le bon fonctionnement du syst Le d utilis avec cette base test et entretenu r en conformit avec les exigences de norme CAN/ULC S536. Le d doit nettoy au moins une fois an. DESCRIPTION B501-WHITE, B501-IV, and B501-BL are plug in detector bases intended use in an intelligent system with screw terminals provided for power and and remote annunciator connections. Communication takes place the power lines (+ and TERMINALS Function 1. TERMINAL LAYOUT ( Remote Annunciator ( (+) Annunciator (+) 2 3 PROOF 1 C0131-01 detector base mounts directly to 4″ square with plaster ring, 31/2″ octa- 50 mm, 60 mm, and 70 mm centers. AND WIRING GUIDELINES (SEE FIGURE 2) wiring must be installed in compliance with all applicable local codes any special requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction. Proper gauges should be used. The conductors used to connect smoke detectors control panels and accessory devices should be color-coded to reduce the of wiring errors. Improper connections can prevent a system from properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected detectors and modules), is recommended that the wiring be no smaller than 18 AWG (0.823 mm sizes up to 12 AWG (3.31 mm may be used with the base. system control panels have specifications for allowable loop resistance. the control panel specifications for the total loop resistance allowed wiring the detector loops. wiring connections by stripping about 3/8″ (10 mm) of insulation from wire end (use strip gauge molded in base). Then slide the wire under the plate and tighten the clamping plate screw. Do not loop the wire the clamping plate. (See Figure 3.) the zone wiring of all bases in the system before installing the detec- This includes checking the wiring for continuity, correct polarity, ground testing and performing a dielectric test. base includes an area for recording the zone, address, and type of detec- to be installed at that location. This information is useful for setting the head address and for verification of the detector type required for location. all detector bases have been wired and mounted, and the loop wiring been checked, the detector heads may be installed in the bases. 2. TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR 2-WIRE LOOP A OPTIONAL WIRING Do not loop wire under terminal 1 or 2. Break wire run to supervision of connections. EN GARDE : Ne pas boucler le fil sous la borne 1 ou 2. le fil pour assurer la supervision des connexions.

~SYsTEM SENSOR Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Sounder Base inches (15.2 cm) inches (5.9 cm) lb. (187 gm) to 120 F (0 to 49 C) to 95% Relative Humidity Diameter: Height (less sensor): Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings Supply Voltage: to 32 VDC Current: mA maximum Current: mA maximum Ripple Voltage: of supply voltage Capacitance: Loop Supply Draw from Remote Output Sensor to turn on Horn: Output: maximum than 90 dBA measured in anechoic room at 10 feet, 24 volts. 85 dBA minimum in UL reverberant room. Installing read System Sensor Manual I56-407-XX. Guide for Use of System Smoke Detectors, which provides de- information on sensor spacing. placement, zoning, and special applications. Copies of this manual are at no charge from System Sensor. NFPA 72 and guidelines should be observed. sounder base is intended for use with intelligent sys- Refer to the panel manual for the maximum allow- number of units per loop. The sounder base requires external 24VDC supply with reverse polarity capability. connections for the external supply (terminals 1 and 2) the communication loop (terminals 3, 4, and 5) are iso- to prevent electrical interaction between them. This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. The detector used with this base must be and maintained regularly following NFPA 72 require- The detector should be cleaned at least once a year. Description B501BH sounder base is used with System Sensor 200 500 Series sensor heads. Refer to the appropriate for more information on sensors. the sensor visible LEDs are latched on for approxi- 10 seconds, the associated horn sounds. A loop of can be made to sound by reversing the polarity of the supply. When not used as a supplementary evacuation sys- the external 24 VDC supply shall be treated as component of the main power supply system and fall under the requirements of the main supply system per NFPA 72. Manuals Online! – Supply Positive (+) Supply Negative ( ( Comm. Line In (+) Comm. Line In and Out ( Comm. Line Out Terminals 3, 4, and 5 are used for the communication the B501BH directly to an electrical box, using the kit, supplied (see Figure 2). sounder base is 1.1-inches deep. Electrical boxes must 4-inches square by at least 1-1/2 inches deep – 2-1/8 is recommended. A maximum space of 1/8 inch from the outside of the electrical box to the inside edge of the or ceiling tile is allowable. Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with the Na- Electrical Code and the local codes having jurisdic- and must not be of such length or wire size which cause the base to operate outside of its published The conductors used to connect smoke sen- to control panels and accessory devices should be coded to reduce the likelihood of wiring errors. Im- connections can prevent a system from responding in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected sen- or modules), it is recommended that the wire be no than 18 gauge (1.0 square mm). Wire sizes up to 12 (2.5 square mm) may be used with the base. For best performance, the power (+ and wires and the circuit wires should be twisted pair or cable installed in separate grounded conduit to the communication loop from electrical interfer- wire connections by stripping about 3/8″ of insulation the end of the wire. Then, slide the bare end of the under the clamping plate, and tighten the clamping screw. Do NOT loop the wire under the clamping (See Figure 3). zone wiring of the sensor base should be checked be- the sensor heads are installed. Check the wiring for and polarity in the base.

I Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 and mainTenanCe inSTrUCTiOnS Base Diameter: Height (less sensor): Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings Supply Voltage: Current: Current: Ripple Voltage: Capacitance: Loop Supply Draw from Remote Output Sensor to turn on Horn: Output: inches (15.2 cm) inches (5.9 cm) lb. (181 gm) to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% Relative Humidity to 32 VDC mA maximum mA maximum of supply voltage maximum than 90 dBA measured in anechoic room at 10 feet, 24 volts. 85 dBA measured in UL reverberant room. installing read the System Smoke Detector Application Guide, provides detailed information on sensor spacing. place- zoning, wiring. and special applications. Copies of this are available from System Sensor. NFPA 72 and NEMA should be observed. This manual should be left with the owner/user of equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested maintained regularly following NFPA 72 requirements. detector should be cleaned at least once a year. description B501BH sounder base is used with System Sensor 200 and Series sensor heads. Refer to the appropriate manual for information on sensors. sounder base is intended for use with intelligent systems. to the panel manual for the maximum allowable num- of units per loop. The sounder base requires an external supply with reverse polarity capability or a relay mod- configured to reverse the power as in Figure 5. The con- for the external supply (terminals 1 and 2) and the loop (terminals 3 and 4) are isolated to pre- electrical interaction between them. the sensor visible LEDs are latched on for approxi- 10 seconds, the associated horn sounds. A loop of can be made to sound by reversing the polarity of the supply when configured as in Figure 4 and 5. When as in Figure 5, a loop of horns can also be made to by turning on the Intelligent Relay Module. When not used as a supplementary evacuation system external 24 VDC supply shall be treated as a component of main power supply system and shall fall under the require- of the main power supply system per NFPA 72. Terminals Function External Supply Positive (+) External Supply Negative ( Negative ( Comm. Line In and Out Positive (+) Comm. Line In and Out Sounder Base Interconnect 3 and 4 are used for the communication circuit. the B501BH directly to an electrical box, using the kit, supplied (see Figure 2). sounder base is 1.1-inches deep. Electrical boxes must be square by at least 11 inches deep – 21 inches is rec- A maximum space of 1 inch from the outside edge of electrical box to the inside edge of the drywall or ceiling is allowable. Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Code and the local codes having jurisdiction and not be of such length or wire size which would cause base to operate outside of its published specifications. The used to connect smoke sensors to control panels accessory devices should be color coded to reduce the of wiring errors. Improper connections can prevent system from responding properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected sensors modules), it is recommended that the wire be no smaller 18 gauge (1.0 square mm). Wire sizes up to 12 gauge (2.5 mm) may be used with the base. For best system per- the power (+ and wires and the communication wires should be twisted pair or shielded cable installed separate grounded conduit to protect the communication from electrical interference. wire connections by stripping about 3 of insulation the end of the wire. Then, slide the bare end of the wire the clamping plate, and tighten the clamping plate Do NOT loop the wire under the clamping plate (See 3). zone wiring of the sensor base should be ch

I Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 inches (15.2 cm) inches (5.9 cm) lb. (145 gm) to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% Relative Humidity and mainTenanCe inSTrUCTiOnS to 32 VDC mA maximum mA maximum of supply voltage Base Diameter: Height (less sensor): Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings Supply Voltage: Current: Current: Ripple Voltage: Capacitance: Loop Supply Draw from Remote Output Sensor to turn on Horn: Output: Delay Time: installing read the System Smoke Detector Application Guide, provides detailed information on sensor spacing. place- zoning, wiring. and special applications. Copies of this are available from System Sensor. NFPA 72 and NEMA should be observed. This manual should be left with the owner/user of equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested maintained regularly following NFPA 72 requirements. detector should be cleaned at least once a year. description B501BH-2 sounder base is used with System Sensor 200 sensor heads. Refer to the appropriate manual for more on sensors. sounder base is intended for use with intelligent systems. to the panel manual for the maximum allowable num- of units per loop. The sounder base requires an external supply with reverse polarity capability or a relay mod- configured to reverse the power as in Figure 5. The con- for the external supply (terminals 1 and 2) and the loop (terminals 3 and 4) are isolated to pre- electrical interaction between them. loop of horns can be made to sound by reversing the polar- of the external supply when configured as in Figure 4 and When configured as in Figure 5, a loop of horns can also be to sound by turning on the Intelligent Relay Module. When not used as a supplementary evacuation system external 24 VDC supply shall be treated as a component of main power supply system and shall fall under the require- of the main power supply system per NFPA 72. maximum than 90 dBA measured in anechoic room at 10 feet, 24 volts. 85 dBA measured in UL reverberant room. to 5.7 sec Terminals Function External Supply Positive (+) External Supply Negative ( Negative ( Comm. Line In and Out Positive (+) Comm. Line In and Out Sounder Base Interconnect 3 and 4 are used for the communication circuit. the B501BH-2 directly to an electrical box, using the kit, supplied (see Figure 2). sounder base is 1.1-inches deep. Electrical boxes must be square by at least 11 inches deep – 21 inches is rec- A maximum space of 1 inch from the outside edge of electrical box to the inside edge of the drywall or ceiling is allowable. Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Code and the local codes having jurisdiction and not be of such length or wire size which would cause base to operate outside of its published specifications. The used to connect smoke sensors to control panels accessory devices should be color coded to reduce the of wiring errors. Improper connections can prevent system from responding properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected sensors modules), it is recommended that the wire be no smaller 18 gauge (1.0 square mm). Wire sizes up to 12 gauge (2.5 mm) may be used with the base. For best system per- the power (+ and wires and the communication wires should be twisted pair or shielded cable installed separate grounded conduit to protect the communication from electrical interference. wire connections by stripping about 3 of insulation the end of the wire. Then, slide the bare end of the wire the clamping plate, and tighten the clamping plate Do NOT loop the wire under the clamping plate (See 3). zone wiring of the sensor base should be checked before sensor heads are installed. Check the wiring for continuity polarity in the

200 Series Base Options Sensor mounting bases and kits provide a of ways to install detectors in any application. Listings 200 Series Bases Specifications Gauge Range Range Electrical Ratings Voltage Ratings Time (B224RB only) Time (B224RB only) Characteristics only) Electrical Ratings Supply Voltage Current Time Ripple Voltage Output Current Capacitance Series Junction Box Selection Guide in in in in Information, 200 Series Bases Series Accessories

I Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 and mainTenanCe inSTrUCTiOnS Tone Sounder Base Diameter: Height (less sensor): Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings Supply Voltage: Current: Current: Ripple Voltage: Capacitance: Loop Supply Draw from Remote Output Sensor to turn on Horn: Output: inches (15.2 cm) inches (5.9 cm) lb. (181 gm) to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% Relative Humidity to 32 VDC mA maximum mA maximum of supply voltage maximum Greater than 90 dBA measured in anechoic room at 10 feet, 24 volts. 85 dBA minimum in UL reverberant room. installing read the System Smoke Detector Application Guide, provides detailed information on sensor spacing. place- zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies of this are available from System Sensor. NFPA 72 and NEMA should be observed. This manual should be left with the owner/user of equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested maintained regularly following NFPA 72 requirements. detector should be cleaned at least once a year. description B501BHT sounder base is used with System Sensor 200 500 Series sensor heads. Refer to the appropriate manual more information on sensors. B501BHT incorporates the distinctive three-pulse tempo- pattern fire alarm evacuation signal now required by NFPA for commercial and residential applications. sounder base is intended for use with intelligent systems. to the panel manual for the maximum allowable num- of units per loop. The sounder base requires an external supply with reverse polarity capability or a relay mod- configured to reverse the power as in Figure 5. The con- for the external supply (terminals 1 and 2) and the loop (terminals 3 and 4) are isolated to pre- electrical interaction between them. the sensor visible LEDs are latched on for approxi- 10 seconds, the associated horn sounds. A loop of can be made to sound by reversing the polarity of the supply when configured as in Figure 4 and 5. When as in Figure 5, a loop of horns can also be made to by turning on the Intelligent Relay Module. Supply Positive (+) Supply Negative ( ( Comm. Line In and Out (+) Comm. Line In and Out Base Interconnect When not used as a supplementary evacuation system external 24 VDC supply shall be treated as a component of main power supply system and shall fall under the require- of the main power supply system per NFPA 72. Terminals Function 3 and 4 are used for the communication circuit. the B501BHT directly to an electrical box, using the kit, supplied (see Figure 2). sounder base is 1.1-inches deep. Electrical boxes must 4-inches square by at least 11 inches deep – 21 inches is A maximum space of 1 inch from the outside edge of electrical box to the inside edge of the drywall or ceiling is allowable. Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Code and the local codes having jurisdiction and not be of such length or wire size which would cause base to operate outside of its published specifications. The used to connect smoke sensors to control panels accessory devices should be color coded to reduce the of wiring errors. Improper connections can prevent system from responding properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected sensors modules), it is recommended that the wire be no smaller 18 gauge (1.0 square mm). Wire sizes up to 12 gauge (2.5 mm) may be used with the base. For best system per- the power (+ and wires and the communication wires should be twisted pair or shielded cable installed separate grounded conduit to protect the communication from electrical interference. wire connections by stripping about 3 of insulation the end of the wire. Then, s

I Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 inches (15.2 cm) inches (5.9 cm) lb. (145 gm) to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% Relative Humidity and mainTenanCe inSTrUCTiOnS to 32 VDC mA maximum mA maximum of supply voltage Tone Sounder Base Diameter: Height (less sensor): Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings Supply Voltage: Current: Current: Ripple Voltage: Capacitance: Loop Supply Draw from Remote Output Sensor to turn on Horn: Output: Delay Time: installing read the System Smoke Detector Application Guide, provides detailed information on sensor spacing. place- zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies of this are available from System Sensor. NFPA 72 and NEMA should be observed. This manual should be left with the owner/user of equipment. The detector used with this base must be tested maintained regularly following NFPA 72 requirements. detector should be cleaned at least once a year. description B501BHT-2 sounder base is used with System Sensor 200 sensor heads. Refer to the appropriate manual for more on sensors. B501BHT-2 incorporates the distinctive three-pulse tempo- pattern fire alarm evacuation signal now required by NFPA for commercial and residential applications. sounder base is intended for use with intelligent systems. to the panel manual for the maximum allowable num- of units per loop. The sounder base requires an external supply with reverse polarity capability or a relay mod- configured to reverse the power as in Figure 5. The con- for the external supply (terminals 1 and 2) and the loop (terminals 3 and 4) are isolated to pre- electrical interaction between them. loop of horns can be made to sound by reversing the polar- of the external supply when configured as in Figure 4 and When configured as in Figure 5, a loop of horns can also be to sound by turning on the Intelligent Relay Module. maximum than 90 dBA measured in anechoic room at 10 feet, 24 volts. 85 dBA measured in UL reverberant room. to 5.7 sec When not used as a supplementary evacuation system, external 24 VDC supply shall be treated as a component of main power supply system and shall fall under the require- of the main power supply system per NFPA 72. Terminals Function External Supply Positive (+) External Supply Negative ( Negative ( Comm. Line In and Out Positive (+) Comm. Line In and Out Sounder Base Interconnect 3 and 4 are used for the communication circuit. the B501BHT-2 directly to an electrical box, using the kit, supplied (see Figure 2). sounder base is 1.1-inches deep. Electrical boxes must be square by at least 11 inches deep – 21 inches is rec- A maximum space of 1 inch from the outside edge of electrical box to the inside edge of the drywall or ceiling is allowable. Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Code and the local codes having jurisdiction and not be of such length or wire size which would cause base to operate outside of its published specifications. The used to connect smoke sensors to control panels accessory devices should be color coded to reduce the of wiring errors. Improper connections can prevent system from responding properly in the event of a fire. 1. Terminal layout: 2. mounting: signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected sensors modules), it is recommended that the wire be no smaller 18 gauge (1.0 square mm). Wire sizes up to 12 gauge (2.5 mm) may be used with the base. For best system per- the power (+ and wires and the communication wires should be twisted pair or shielded cable installed separate grounded conduit to protect the communication from electrical interference. wire connections by stripping about 3 of insulation the end of the wire. Then, slide the bare end of the wire the clamping plate, and tigh

No text preview available.

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and B224BI Plug-in Isolator Bases use with the following smoke detectors: US: 2551, 2551T, 5551, 5551R 2251, 3251 Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 Diameter: Height B224BI: B524BI: Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings Voltage: Standard: Alarm: to 28 VDC Maximum Maximum inches (157 mm) inches (31 mm) inches (36 mm) square box with or without plaster ring, Min. depth – 1.5 inches (13 mm) octagon box, Min. depth – 1.5 inches (13 mm) octagon box, Min. depth – 1.5 inches (13 mm) C to +60 C (14 F to 140 F) Do not install in locations where normal ambient temperature extends beyond 0 to 49 C (32 to 120 F) to 93% Relative Humidity (Non-condensing) Installing thoroughly read the system wiring and installation and manual I56-407, Guide for Proper Use of Sys- Smoke Detectors, which provides detailed information detector spacing, placement, zoning, and special appli- Copies of these manuals are available at no charge System Sensor. This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. The detectors used with these bases must be and maintained following NFPA 72 requirements. detectors used with these bases should be cleaned at once a year. Information bases prevent an entire communications loop from disabled when a short circuit occurs. They accom- this by isolating that part of the loop containing the from the remainder of the circuit. These bases also restore the entire loop when the cause of the circuit is corrected. In general, up to 25 addressable may be isolated between isolator bases. For the of determining the number of devices between bases, one 3251 is equivalent to 12 addressable de- For example, (13) 2251 and (1) 3251 may be between two isolator bases. detector base mounts directly to 31/2- and 4-inch octa- and 4-inch square boxes, with or without a plaster To mount, remove the decorative ring by rotating it in direction to unhook the snaps. Then, separate the from the base. Install the base on the box, using the supplied with the junction box and the appropriate in the base. Replace the decorative ring on the base rotate it in either direction until the ring snaps in place Figure 1). Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with all appli- local codes and any special requirements of the local having jurisdiction, using the proper wire sizes. conductors used to connect smoke detectors to control and accessory devices should be color-coded to re- the likelihood of wiring errors. Improper connections prevent a system from responding properly in the event a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected de- it is recommended that the wire be no smaller 18 gauge (1.0 square mm). However, wire sizes up to gauge (3.3 square mm) can be used with the base. The of twisted pair wiring or shielded cable for the power and loop is recommended to minimize the effects of interference. Detector head power is supplied by terminals 1(+) 2(-). Therefore, the head will be part of this group. shielded cable is used, the shield connection to and from detector must be continuous by using wire nuts, crimp- or soldering, as appropriate, for a reliable connection. system control panels have specifications for allow- loop resistance. Consult the control panel specifica- for the total loop resistance allowed before wiring the loops. the zone wiring of all bases in the system before in- detectors. This includes checking the wiring for correct polarity, ground fault testing, and per- a dielectric test. 2: PAIR RECOMMENDED 1. Mounting base to electrical box: ON (NOT (NOT INTELLIGENT – COMM (+)

A Division of Pittway 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630-377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and B224RB(A) Plug-in Detector Bases use with the following models: For use with any 500 Series detector For use with any 200 Series detector inches (157 mm) Diameter: Height Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ratings Voltage: Averaged Standby Ratings: <500 @ 24 VDC Characteristics to 28 VDC coil latching Form C Type: Relay Time: Time: A @ 30 VDC A @ 110 VDC (with .35 PF or greater) A @ 120 VAC (with .35 PF or greater) A @ 30 VDC (with .6 PF or greater) seconds minimum, 20 seconds maximum second minimum, 8 seconds maximum inches (31 mm) inches (36 mm) square box with or without plaster ring, Min Depth - 1.5 inches (13 mm) octagon box, Min. depth - 1.5 inches (13 mm) octagon box, Min. depth - 1.5 inches (13 mm) to 49 C (32 to 120 F) to 93% Relative Humidity (Non-condensing) Installing thoroughly read the system wiring and installation and manual I56-407, Guide for Proper Use of Sys- Smoke Detectors, which provides detailed information detector spacing, placement, zoning, and special appli- Copies of these manuals are available at no charge System Sensor. (For installation in Canada, refer to Standard for the Installation for Fire Alarm and CEC Part 1, Sec. 32.) This manual should be left with the owner/user this equipment. The detector used with these bases must be and maintained regularly following NFPA 72 require- The detectors should be cleaned at least once a year. Information C latching relay contacts are included for the control an auxiliary function. The relay operates 12 seconds after activation of the sensor head remote an- output. detector base mounts directly to 31/2- and 4-inch oc- and 4-inch square boxes, with or without a plaster mount, remove the decorative ring by rotating it in ei- direction to unhook the snaps. Then, separate the ring the base. Install the base on the box, using the screws with the junction box and the appropriate slots in base. Replace the decorative ring on the base and ro- it in either direction until the ring snaps in place (see 1). Guidelines wiring must be installed in compliance with all appli- local codes and any special requirements of the local having jurisdiction, using the proper wire sizes. conductors used to connect smoke detectors to control and accessory devices should be color-coded to re- the likelihood of wiring errors. Improper connections prevent a system from responding properly in the event a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected de- it is recommended that the wire be no smaller 18 gauge (1.0 square mm). However, wire sizes up to gauge (3.3 square mm) can be used with the base. The of twisted pair wiring or shielded cable for the power and -) loop is recommended to minimize the effects of interference. shielded cable is used, the shield connection to and from detector must be continuous by using wire nuts, crimp- or soldering, as appropriate, for a reliable connection. system control panels have specifications for allow- loop resistance. Consult the control panel specifica- for the total loop resistance allowed before wiring the loops. Instructions base uses a latching relay that can change states if it is to mechanical shocks or jarring. As a result, even relay contacts are in the open state when the base is from the factory, the contacts may have closed shipment. an auxiliary control circuit to closed relay con- can cause an unexpected, and possibly dangerous, ac- of that circuit. Therefore, do NOT connect an control circuit to the relay contacts (terminals 1, and 3) before ensuring that the relay contacts are in their state. Ensure that the contacts are open by applying to the bases WITHOUT the sensor heads installed. wiring connections by stripping about 3/8" (10 mm) insulation from the end of the wire. Then, slide the wire the clamping plate and t

UL Listed Detector/Base Compatibility Chart 8/1/2018 chart correlates to UL Online Certifications Directory found at http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/index.html and is in addition to the 10/30/14 System Sensor Base/Compatibility Chart. Listed Detector/Base Compatibility Chart 8/1/2018

Detector/Base Compatibility Chart B200S-LF B200SR-LF 14506587-001 B210LPJ B210LPF B710LP ADB-FLF chart correlates to UL Online Certifications Directory found at http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/index.html 10/30/14 Compatibility Chart B200S-LF B200SR-LF 14506587-001 B210LPJ B210LPF B710LP ADB-FLF chart correlates to UL Online Certifications Directory found at http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/index.html 10/30/14 Compatibility Chart B200S-LF B200SR-LF 14506587-001 B210LPJ B210LPF B710LP ADB-FLF B710HD B110LP chart correlates to UL Online Certifications Directory found at http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/index.html 10/30/14

Basic Pipe Network Cleaning and Maintenance Procedure maintenance of the FAAST Fire Alarm Aspiration Sensing Technology pipe network is recommended in with high amounts of airborne particulate, or cold environments where condensation may freeze on the hole and affect pipe network performance. Annual maintenance of the pipe network is recommended for all flow faults on devices which have been installed and operating normally for a period of time may signal the need for network cleaning. Network Maintenance installation of the pipe network, it is recommended that a valved tee fitting be installed 6 inches to 1 foot from the pipe so that the pipe entering the detector is not subject to any flow of air during the pipe network maintenance. Forcing air in or out of, the FAAST unit by any means other than the inherent fan may cause damage to the device and nullify the device to beginning pipe network maintenance: Place the device in isolate or disable mode, or power down. Remove the pipe network from the device, or switch the valve on a valved tee fitting to ensure that no air can be force to or out of the device perform pipe network maintenance: Affix a vacuum cleaner, or air compressor, to the end of the pipe network or the entry in to the valved tee fitting. While the vacuum is running, use a dry brush or pipe cleaner to swab out each sampling hole in the pipe network. vacuum running for 2 min following last hole cleaning. pipe network maintenance: Reconnect pipe network to the FAAST device or switch the valved tee tap Remove the device from isolate or disable mode, or reapply power to the FAAST Observe the air flow pendulum on the user interface. The two green indicators should be near center underneath device power indicator. If a low condition existed before maintenance, this condition should be clear after (NOTE: if the device is set to latch in fault, the device will need to be reset to clear the fault) If the low flow condition persists, perform another manual check of the pipe network against the pipe layout report by PipeIQ. Also, if the exhaust pipe is not situated in the protected space the low/high flow condition could be result of differences in room pressures that have changed do to open doors, windows or upgrades to ventilation units. Maintenance maintenance is required only when a fault is indicated by the FAAST unit. Perform the following procedure to the filter assembly: Remove power from the system. Open the door on the right side of the device that covers the LED system indicators. Remove the plastic name card over the LEDs. Remove the two screws holding the filter assembly into the device. Remove the filter assembly and replace it with a new assembly. Torque the two Philips head screws to 6in-lb (0.7 N-M) or turn past snug NOT OVERTIGHTEN. Replace the plastic name card over the LEDs. Close the door and restore power to the system. System Sensor. Product specifications subject to change without notice. 1/14

BEAM1224(S) Reflected Beam Smoke BEAM1224 (S) is uniquely suited for protecting open with high ceilings areas where other methods of detection are difficult to install and maintain. 16- to 328-foot protection range Single-ended, reflective design User-friendly alignment procedure Six user selectable sensitivity levels Optional integral NFPA 72 sensitivity test feature Removable plug-in terminal blocks Digital display for easy alignment Built-in automatic gain control compensates for signal from dust build-up Remote test station option Paintable cover Easiest alignment in the industry Heater kits for transmitter/receiver and reflector option Listings Sensor Model BEAM1224 is a four-wire conventional beam smoke detector, which is uniquely suited for open areas with high ceilings, where other methods of detection are difficult to install and maintain. It is to be used UL Listed compatible control panels only. An advantage of this reflective design is that it is much easier to install than dual-ended projected beam detectors. Alignment is quickly via an optical sight and a two-digit signal strength incorporated into the product. Another advantage of the is that it is listed for operation in temperatures ranging to 131 This means it can be used in open areas to early warning in environments where temperature extremes exceed the capability of other types of smoke detectors. consists of a transmitter/receiver unit and a reflector. smoke enters the area between the unit and the reflector, smoke causes a reduction in the signal. When the smoke level the predetermined threshold, an alarm is activated. has four standard sensitivity selections, along with two settings (adjustable sensitivity). When one of the two settings is selected, the detector will automatically adjust sensitivity using advanced software algorithms to choose the sensitivity for the specific environment. is also equipped with an integral sensitivity test feature, consists of a test filter attached to a servo motor inside the optics. When the remote test station RTS451 /RTS151 is the motor is activated and moves the filter into the pathway the light beam, to test the detector sensitivity. This integral test feature allows the user to quickly and easily meet the maintenance and test requirements of NFPA 72. Specifications Specifications Range Angle Levels Condition (Trouble) Aid Indicator Indicator Indicator Features ft. to 328 ft. (5m to 100m) 10 Degrees horizontal & vertical optics move independent of the unit) 1 25% 2 30% 3 40% 4 50% Level 1 30 Level 2 40 or more obscuration blockage alignment mode initial alignment limit reached gunsight signal strength indication display red LED and remote alarm yellow LED and remote trouble flashing green LED Sensitivity Test Filter (BEAM1224S only) filter (Incremental scale on reflector) alarm test switch alarm reset switch test and reset switch (Compatible with RTS451 and RTS451KEY /RTS151KEY test station) beams and not more than one-half spacing between a projected beam and a Other spacing may be used depending ceiling height, airflow characteristics, and requirements. See NFPA 72. Detector Spacing On smooth ceilings, 30 feet between Specifications (BEAMHKR) Consumption Parts to 32V Max at 32V (per reflector) @ 24V; 15W @ 32V (per reflector) Term

A P P L I C A T I O N S G U I D E Beam Detector Reflected Smoke Detector 1: Principles of Operation …………………………………………………………….2 Applications ………………………………………………………………………………..4 …………………………………………………………………………………………….2 3: Design Considerations ……………………………………………………………5 2: Beam Smoke Detectors vs. Spot-Type Smoke Detectors …………..2 ………………………………………………………………………………………………..5 ………………………………………………………………………………………………..2 and Spacing ……………………………………………………………………………..5 Height ………………………………………………………………………………………….2 Considerations for Reflected Beam Smoke Detectors ………………..5 Air Velocity ………………………………………………………………………………………3 Mounting Considerations for Reflected Beam Smoke Detectors .6 …………………………………………………………………………………………….3 A: Glossary of Terms ………………………………………………………………..7 Release Rate ………………………………………………………….4 B: NFPA 92 Reference ……………………………………………………………..7 smoke detectors can be important components of a well designed automatic fire alarm system. Because of their capabilities, beam detectors overcome some of the limitations of spot-type smoke detectors. This guide was developed to help the fire alarm designer gain an understanding the beam smoke detector capabilities and when they may be the preferred technology for a particular application. guide provides information on the proper utilization of beam smoke detectors in life-safety and property protection applications. In addition, it sum- the operating principles of single-ended reflected beam smoke detectors, their design requirements, and their practical applications as a of an automatic fire alarm system. beam smoke detectors are not suited for all applications, they may be the detector of choice in many applications where spot-type detec- are not practical. equipment from different manufacturers has varying specifications and listings, the information in this guide is general in nature and should be substituted for the manufacturer recommendations or code requirements. 1 of Operation beam smoke detectors consist of a transceiver (a transmitter/ unit that projects, monitors, and receives a beam reflected across protected area. detector works on the principle of light obscuration. The photosensitive sees light produced by the transceiver unit in a normal condition. transceiver unit is calibrated to a preset sensitivity level based on a of total obscuration. This sensitivity level is determined by the based on the length of the beam, the distance between the unit and reflector. For UL listed detectors the sensitivity setting comply with UL Standard 268, Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Systems. line of sight Unit 1 smoke detectors operate on the principle of obscuration. As a smoke develops, the detector senses the cumulative obscuration the per- of light blockage created by a combination of smoke density and linear distance of the smoke field across the projected light beam. The is typically set by the manufacturer to match the conditions of installation. the appropriate sensitivity minimizes the possibility of nuisance that would result from a blockage of the beam by a solid object inadvertently in its path. Since the sudden and total obscuration of light beam is not a typical smoke signature, the detector will see this a trouble condition, not an alarm. addition, very small, slow changes in the quality of the light source are typical of a smoke signature. These changes may occur because of conditions such as dust and dirt ac

I Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630/377-6495 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS BEAM1224S Reflected Type Beam Smoke Detector Time: Conditions: Features: 1 = 25% 2 = 30% 3 = 40% 4 = 50% 5 = 30% to 50% (Acclimate) 6 = 40% to 50% (Acclimate) to 230 Feet (5 to 70m); 230 to 328 Feet (70 to 100m) using optional accessory BEAMLRK to 50% Total Obscuration in 6 levels to 60 Feet (9.1 to 18.3m) – 20 seconds typical; TROUBLE – 30 seconds typical Blockage (96% or More Obscuration) Initial Alignment limit reached (service needed) Alignment mode Sensitivity Test Filter (BEAM1224S only) Filter (Incremental scale on reflector) Alarm Test Switch Alarm Reset Switch Test and Reset Switch Capability – Remote Output, Local LED (red) – Remote Output, Local LED (yellow), Blink Pattern Indicates Trouble Diagnostics OPERATION – Local LED (flashing green once every 5 sec.) AIDS – Optical Gunsight (coarse adjustment), 00 to 99 Digital Display (fine adjustment) – Alarm; Trouble – Digital Display Readout in Percent Obscuration to 131 ( to 55 NOTE: For applications below 32 (0 see Special Applications on page 2 to 93% RH Non-condensing Weight: Size: Angle: Trim Ring: unit: 3.9 lbs. (1.77 kg) (381mm 267mm 165mm) only without optional accessories Terminal Blocks (12 to 22AWG) Horizontal and Vertical be painted using enamel or acrylic type paints Ripple Voltage: (24 VDC): (Test Mode, BEAM1224S only): Contacts: Time: Time (after 2 min. reset): Verification Time: Output (Alarm & Trouble): Max. Max. Max. Max. to 32 VDC (BEAM1224); 15 to 32 VDC (BEAM1224S) volts (Peak-to-peak); NOTE: ripple must not fall below minimum operating voltage specification Standby – Alarm – Trouble – Alignment – Test- at 30 VDC Seconds Max. sec. Max. sec. Max. – 15 to 32 VDC; NOTE: Output voltage same as device input voltage – 15mA maximum; 6mA minimum; NOTE: Output current is limited by 2.2Kohm resistor Max. INSTALLING thoroughly read this manual and applicable sections of System Sensor Reflected Beam Detector Application Guide (BMAG240). This is available online at www.systemsensor.com. DESCRIPTION Sensor Model BEAM1224/BEAM1224S is a long range projected beam detector designed to provide open area protection. It is to be used UL-listed, separately supplied power (4-wire) control panels only. The consists of a transmitter/receiver unit and a reflector. Smoke entering area between the transmitter/receiver and reflector causes a reduction in When the obscuration reaches alarm thresholds (chosen at the trans- unit), the detector generates an alarm signal. Complete block- of the beam causes a trouble signal. Slow changes in obscuration due to build up of dirt or dust on the lens of the detector are compensated for by BEAMMMK allows System Sensor reflected beam detectors and reflec- to be mounted to either a vertical wall or the ceiling. The kit allows for alignment range in cases where the detector and reflector cannot mounted within 10 of each other. The kit includes the hardware neces- to mount either a single transmitter/receiver unit or a single reflector. mount the transmitter/receiver the surface mount kit, BEAMSMK, must be used). If the transmitter/receiver and the reflector require additional range two kits are required. The kit is not compatible with the long- reflector kit (BEAMLRK). BEAMSMK allows System Sensor reflected beam detectors to be mounted surface wiring is used. This kit must be used when mounting the trans- unit with the multi-mount kit (BEAMMMK). 6500-MMK provides a he

Bulletin 5/28/13 defined as 2 = 2012, 11 = Nov, 1 = 1st week of the month defined as 3 = 2013, 05 = May, 3 = 3rd week of the month of issue: BEAM1224S operation after a low power condition of urgency: High Urgent Attention Required number: BEAM1224S, BEAM1224SA date range: date codes 2111 to 3053. Date code location shown below. Sensor has identified an issue with certain beam detector models BEAM1224S and date codes 2111 – 3053. This issue will only occur when the device is used in with certain power supply devices and the power supply falls or drops below the detector operating voltage range. Under these conditions, the programmed parameters of the may become corrupt and could prevent the beam detector from generating a trouble and condition when power is restored. issue described above will not occur with: Other System Sensor beam detector models; BEAM1224S and BEAM1224SA beam detectors manufactured with a date code outside the range; and BEAM1224S and BEAM1224SA beam detectors manufactured within the 2011-3053 date code if they are connected to one of the power supply devices listed in the Power List at the bottom of this bulletin. an abundance of caution, System Sensor requires the following actions to be taken at any site at a BEAM1224S or BEAM1224SA date code range 2111 to 3053 is installed: Determine whether the power supply connected to the beam detector at the site is on the Acceptable Power Supply List. If the power supply is on the list, no further action required. If the power supply at the site is not on the list and having obtained the make and model, System Sensor customer service immediately at 1-800-736-7672 to determine the course of action. System Sensor may be able to confirm that the power supply effectively prevents the issue from occurring even if it is not on the attached list. replacement of the power supply and/or beam detector may also be required. any product replacement is required, System Sensor will reimburse reasonable expenses and/or replacement products as appropriate on a case-by-case basis. To receive any reimbursement, must contact System Sensor customer service at 1-800-736-7672 before taking any action. recall is being conducted in cooperation with the U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission. Service: 1-800-SENSOR2 (736-7672) Ohio Avenue St. Charles, IL 60174 Phone: 800-736-7672 Fax: 630-377-6583 www.systemsensor.com Bulletin you have any questions about this issue or notice, please contact System Sensor Customer Service. sincerely apologize for any inconvenience this issue has caused. Code Locations Label Label digit code Service: 1-800-SENSOR2 (736-7672) Ohio Avenue St. Charles, IL 60174 Phone: 800-736-7672 Fax: 630-377-6583 www.systemsensor.com Bulletin Acceptable Power Supply List list is complete as of June 6, 2013. Visit our Website to view a current updated list: Power Products XLS power supply on XLS120 and XLS-140-2 power supply on NFS-320 and NFS2-640 Controls power supply on IFC-320 and IFC2-640 Ohio Avenue St. Charles, IL 60174 Phone: 800-736-7672 Fax: 630-377-6583 www.systemsensor.com Service: 1-800-SENSOR2 (736-7672)

Product Beam Smoke Detector Specifications detector shall be a System Sensor beam type smoke detector model number BEAM1224, to Underwriters Laboratories UL 268 for Fire Protection Signaling Systems. The detector be a 4 wire conventional reflected beam smoke detector. The detector shall include a and receiver both within the detector unit. The detector shall have an integral test feature, consisting of a test filter attached to a servo motor inside the detector The detector shall include a reflector. The detector shall allow for beam alignment the detector and the reflector to be done at the detector. The detector shall have four selectable sensitivity settings, along with two Acclimate settings for adjustable The detector shall be capable of automatically adjusting its sensitivity by means of software algorithms. The detector shall be rated for use in temperatures between -22 and 131 F. Protection range shall be 16 ft. to 230 ft. nominal; 16 ft. to 328 ft. with use of long kit, model BEAMLRK. Specifications Operating Voltage shall be; Nominal: 12/24V non-polarized, Minimum: 15.0V, Maximum: The BEAM1224S should not be used with 12V power sources. The Maximum Ripple shall be 6.0 volts peak to peak of applied voltage, and must not fall below minimum voltage specification. The Standby Current shall be 70 mA maximum average. The Test voltage shall be 500 mA maximum. The Maximum Alarm Current shall 35 mA average. The Alarm Contact Ratings shall be 0.5 A @ 30V AC/DC. Specifications BEAM1224 detector dimensions shall be 10.0 inches (254 mm) height; 7.5 inches (191 mm) 3.3 inches (84 mm) depth. The reflector dimensions shall be 7.9 inches (200 mm) wide; 9.1 (230 mm) height. The approximate detector weight shall be 3.9 pounds (1.77 kilograms) both the detector and reflector. The Operating Temperature Range shall be -22 F-131 F (- C C). The Operating Humidity Range shall be 10 to 93% RH non-condensing. The Input shall be 12 AWG. Modes Normal (standby) mode, the local LED shall blink Green every 5 seconds. In Trouble mode, the LED shall blink Yellow. In Alarm mode, the local LED shall be solid Red. During alignment, digital display shall indicate 00-99 for fine adjustment. 2009